T3902-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Introduction to Creo Parametric 2.0

T3902-390-02

Authored and published using

Copyright © 2012 Parametric Technology Corporation. All Rights Reserved.Copyright for PTC software products is with Parametric Technology Corporation, itssubsidiary companies (collectively “PTC”), and their respective licensors. This softwareis provided under written license agreement, contains valuable trade secrets andproprietary information, and is protected by the copyright laws of the United States andother countries. It may not be copied or distributed in any form or medium, disclosed tothird parties, or used in any manner not provided for in the software licenses agreementexcept with written prior approval from PTC.UNAUTHORIZED USE OF SOFTWARE OR ITS DOCUMENTATION CAN RESULT INCIVIL DAMAGES AND CRIMINAL PROSECUTION.User and training guides and related documentation from PTC is subject to the copyrightlaws of the United States and other countries and is provided under a license agreementthat restricts copying, disclosure, and use of such documentation. PTC hereby grants tothe licensed software user the right to make copies in printed form of this documentationif provided on software media, but only for internal/personal use and in accordancewith the license agreement under which the applicable software is licensed. Any copymade shall include the PTC copyright notice and any other proprietary notice providedby PTC. Training materials may not be copied without the express written consent ofPTC. This documentation may not be disclosed, transferred, modified, or reduced toany form, including electronic media, or transmitted or made publicly available by anymeans without the prior written consent of PTC and no authorization is granted to makecopies for such purposes.Information described herein is furnished for general information only, is subject tochange without notice, and should not be construed as a warranty or commitment byPTC. PTC assumes no responsibility or liability for any errors or inaccuracies that mayappear in this document.For Important Copyright, Trademark, Patent and Licensing Information seebackside of this guide.

About PTC University

Welcome to PTC University!With an unmatched depth and breadth of product development knowledge,PTC University helps you realize the most value from PTC products. OnlyPTC University offers:

• An innovative learning methodology – PTC’s Precision LearningMethodology is a proven proprietary approach used by PTC to develop anddeliver learning solutions.

• Flexible Delivery Options – PTC University ensures you receive the samequality training programs regardless of the learning style. Our extensiveexperience, innovative learning techniques, and targeted learning modulesfacilitate the rapid retention of concepts, and higher user productivity.

• Premier Content and Expertise – A thorough instructor certification processand direct access to the PTC product development and PTC consultingorganizations means that only PTC courses can give you highly-qualifiedinstructors, the most up-to-date product information and best practicesderived from thousands of deployments.

• Global Focus – PTC University delivers training where and when youneed it by providing over 100 training centers located across 35 countriesoffering content in nine languages.

• Delivering Value – A role-based learning design ensures the right peoplehave the right tools to do their jobs productively while supporting theorganization’s overall performance goals.

The course you are about to take will expose you to a number of learningofferings that PTC University has available. These include:

• Instructor-led Training (ILT) – The ideal blend of classroom lectures,personal demonstrations, hands-on workshops, assessments, andpost-classroom tools.

• Pro/FICIENCY – This Web-based, skills assessment anddevelopment-planning tool will help improve your skills and productivity.

• eLearning Libraries – 24/7 access to Web-based training that willcompliment your instructor-led course.

• Precision LMS – A powerful learning management system that will manageyour eLearning Library and Pro/FICIENCY assessments.

PTC University additionally offers Precision Learning Programs. These arecorporate learning programs designed to your organization’s specific goals,current skills, desired competencies, and training preferences.

Whatever your learning needs are, PTC University can help you get the mostout of your PTC products.

PTC Telephone and Fax Numbers

North America• Education Services Registration– Tel: (888) 782-3773– Fax: (781) 370-5307

• Technical Support (Monday - Friday)– Tel: (800) 477-6435– Fax: (781) 707-0328

• License Management and Contracts– Tel: 877-ASK-4-PTC (877-275-4782)– Fax: (781) 707-0331

Europe• Technical Support, License Management, Training & Consulting– Tel: +800-PTC-4-HELP (00-800-78-24-43-57)

Asia• Please refer to http://www.ptc.com/services/training/contact.htm for contactinformation.

In addition, you can access the PTC Web site at www.ptc.com. Our Website contains the latest training schedules, registration information, directionsto training facilities, and course descriptions. You can also reach technicalsupport, and register for online service options such as knowledge basesearches, reference libraries, and documentation. You can also find generalinformation about PTC, PTC Products, Consulting Services, CustomerSupport, and PTC Partners.

Precision Learning

Precision Learning in the ClassroomPTC University uses the Precision Learning methodology to developeffective, comprehensive class material that will improve the productivityof both individuals and organizations. PTC then teaches using the proveninstructional design principal of ‘Tell Me, Show Me, Let Me Do’:

• Topics are introduced through a short presentation, highlighting the keyconcepts.

• These key concepts are then reinforced by seeing them applied in thesoftware application.

• You then apply the concepts through structured exercises.After the course, a Pro/FICIENCY assessment is provided to enable you toassess your understanding of the materials. The assessment results will alsoidentify the class topics that require further review.

At the end of the class, you will either take a Pro/FICIENCY assessment viayour PTC University eLearning account, or your instructor will provide trainingon how to do this after the class.

Precision Learning After the ClassEach student that enrolls in a PTC class has a PTC University eLearningaccount. This account will be automatically created if you do not alreadyhave one.

As part of the class, you receive additional content in your account:

• A Pro/FICIENCY assessment from the course content that generates aRecommended Learning Report based on your results.

• A Web-based training version of the course, based on the sameinstructional approach of lecture, demonstration, and exercise. TheRecommended Learning Report will link directly to sections of this trainingthat you may want to review.

Please note that Web-based training may not be available in all languages.The Web-based training is available in your account for one year after thelive class.

Precision Learning Recommendations

PTC uses a role-based training approach. The roles and the associatedtraining are graphically displayed in a curriculum map. Curriculum maps areavailable for numerous PTC products and versions in the training section ofour Web site at http://www.ptc.com/services/edserv/learning/paths/index.htm.

Please note that a localized map may not be available in every language andthat the map above is partial and for illustration purposes only.

Before the end of the class, your instructor will review the mapcorresponding to the course you are taking. This review, along with instructorrecommendations, should give you some ideas for additional training thatcorresponds to your role and job functions.

Training Agenda

Day 1Module 01 ― Introduction to the Creo Parametric Basic Modeling ProcessModule 02 ― Understanding Creo Parametric ConceptsModule 03 ― Using the Creo Parametric InterfaceModule 04 ― Selecting Geometry, Features, and ModelsModule 05 ― Editing Geometry, Features, and ModelsModule 06 ― Creating Sketcher Geometry

Day 2Module 07 ― Using Sketcher ToolsModule 08 ― Creating Sketches for FeaturesModule 09 ― Creating Datum Features: Planes and AxesModule 10 ― Creating Extrudes, Revolves, and RibsModule 11 ― Utilizing Internal Sketches and Embedded DatumsModule 12 ― Creating Sweeps and Blends

Day 3Module 13 ― Creating Holes, Shells, and DraftModule 14 ― Creating Rounds and ChamfersModule 15 ― Project IModule 16 ― Group, Copy, and Mirror ToolsModule 17 ― Creating PatternsModule 18 ― Measuring and Inspecting Models

Day 4Module 19 ― Assembling with ConstraintsModule 20 ― Assembling with ConnectionsModule 21 ― Exploding AssembliesModule 22 ― Drawing Layout and ViewsModule 23 ― Creating Drawing AnnotationsModule 24 ― Using Layers

Day 5Module 25 ― Investigating Parent/Child RelationshipsModule 26 ― Capturing and Managing Design IntentModule 27 ― Resolving Failures and Seeking HelpModule 28 ― Project II

Table of Contents

Introduction to Creo Parametric 2.0Introduction to the Creo Parametric Basic Modeling Process . . . . . . 1-1

Creo Parametric Basic Modeling Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2Understanding Creo Parametric Concepts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

Understanding Solid Modeling Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2Understanding Feature-Based Concepts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3Understanding Parametric Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4Understanding Associative Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6Understanding Model-Centric Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Recognizing File Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

Using the Creo Parametric Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1Understanding the Main Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Understanding the Folder Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5Understanding the Web Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7Setting the Working Directory and Opening and Saving Files . . . . . . 3-9Understanding the Ribbon Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13Customizing the Ribbon Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19Working with Multiple Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24Managing Files in Creo Parametric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26Understanding Datum Display Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30Understanding Display Style Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33Analyzing Basic 3-D Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36Understanding the View Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41Creating and Managing View Orientations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42Creating Style States Using the View Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46Managing and Editing Appearances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50Setting Up New Part Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57

Selecting Geometry, Features, and Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Understanding Creo Parametric Basic Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Using Drag Handles and Dimension Draggers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4Using Keyboard Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6Understanding the Model Tree. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8Understanding Model Tree Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10Understanding Basic Model Tree Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12Selecting Items using Direct Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14Selecting Items using Query Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19Using the Search Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23Using the Smart Selection Filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28

Understanding Selection Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32Selecting Multiple Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35

Editing Geometry, Features, and Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1Renaming Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Utilizing Undo and Redo Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4Understanding Regeneration and Auto Regeneration . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5Editing Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6Editing Features using Edit Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10Activating and Editing Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14Deleting and Suppressing Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18Editing Feature and Component Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22

Creating Sketcher Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Reviewing Sketcher Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Understanding Design Intent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3Modifying the Sketcher Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Utilizing Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7Sketching with On-the-Fly Constraints. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13Sketching Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15Sketching Centerlines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19Sketching Rectangles and Parallelograms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22Sketching Circles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27Sketching Arcs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30Sketching Circular Fillets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34Sketching Chamfers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37

Using Sketcher Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1Understanding Construction Geometry Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2Sketching Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4Using Geometry Tools within Sketcher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5Manipulating Sketches within Sketcher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10Dimensioning Entities within Sketcher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14Modifying Dimensions within Sketcher. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21Sketcher Conflicts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26Creating New Sketch Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29Placing Sections into Sketcher. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32

Creating Sketches for Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1Creating Sketches ('Sketch' Feature). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2Specifying and Manipulating the Sketch Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4Utilizing Sketch References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10Using Entity from Edge within Sketcher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14Thickening Edges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17

Creating Datum Features: Planes and Axes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1

Creating Datum Features Theory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Creating Datum Axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Creating Datum Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7

Creating Extrudes, Revolves, and Ribs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1Creating Solid Extrude Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2Adding Taper to Extrude Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4Common Dashboard Options: Extrude Depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8Common Dashboard Options: Feature Direction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12Common Dashboard Options: Thicken Sketch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16Creating Solid Revolve Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19Common Dashboard Options: Revolve Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23Automatically Adding and Removing Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27Creating Profile Rib Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31

Utilizing Internal Sketches and Embedded Datums. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1Creating Internal Sketches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2Creating Embedded Datum Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7

Creating Sweeps and Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1Creating Sweeps with Open Trajectories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2Creating Sweeps with Closed Trajectories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8Analyzing Sweep Feature Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-13Creating Blends by Selecting Parallel Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15Creating Blends by Sketching Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-20Analyzing Blend Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-26

Creating Holes, Shells, and Draft. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1Common Dashboard Options: Hole Depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2Creating Coaxial Holes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6Creating Linear Holes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8Creating Radial and Diameter Holes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11Exploring Hole Profile Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15Creating Shell Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19Creating Draft Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-21Creating Basic Split Drafts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-25Analyzing Draft Hinges and Pull Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-28

Creating Rounds and Chamfers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1Creating Rounds Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2Creating Rounds by Selecting Edges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3Creating Rounds by Selecting a Surface and Edge. . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6Creating Rounds by Selecting Two Surfaces. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-9Creating Full Rounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-12Creating Round Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-15Creating Chamfers by Selecting Edges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-18

Analyzing Basic Chamfer Dimensioning Schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-21Creating Chamfer Sets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-24

Project I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1The Air Circulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2Piston Assembly Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-3Crankshaft, Engine Block, Impeller, and Impeller Housing . . . . . . . 15-4The Frame and Bolt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-5

Group, Copy, and Mirror Tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-1Creating Local Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-2Copying and Pasting Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-6Moving and Rotating Copied Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-10Mirroring Selected Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-15Mirroring All Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-18Creating Mirrored Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-21

Creating Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-1Direction Patterning in the First Direction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-2Direction Patterning in the Second Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-6Axis Patterning in the First Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-11Axis Patterning in the Second Direction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-15Direction Patterning with Multiple Direction Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-19Creating Reference Patterns of Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-22Creating Reference Patterns of Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-26Deleting Patterns or Pattern Members. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-29

Measuring and Inspecting Models. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-1Viewing and Editing Model Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-2Investigating Model Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-4Analyzing Mass Properties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-8Using the Measure Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-12Using the Measure Summary Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-20Creating Planar Part Cross-Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-23Measuring Global Interference. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-28

Assembling with Constraints. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-1Understanding Assembly Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-2Creating New Assembly Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-4Understanding Constraint Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-9Understanding Assembly Constraint Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-11Assembling Components using the Default Constraint . . . . . . . . . 19-13Orienting Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-16Creating Coincident Constraints using Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-21Creating Coincident Constraints using Datum Features . . . . . . . . 19-26Creating Distance Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-31

Creating Parallel, Normal, and Angle Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-37Assembling using Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-41Utilizing the Accessory Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-48

Assembling with Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-1Understanding Connection Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-2Dragging Connected Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-3Assembling Components using the Slider Connection . . . . . . . . . . 20-6Assembling Components using the Pin Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-9Assembling Components using the Cylinder Connection . . . . . . . 20-12Analyzing Collision Detection Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-14

Exploding Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-1Creating and Managing Explode States. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-2Creating Explode Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-8Animating Explode States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-12

Drawing Layout and Views. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-1Analyzing Drawing Concepts and Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-2Analyzing Basic 2-D Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-3Creating New Drawings and Applying Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-5Creating and Orienting General Views. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-9Utilizing the Drawing Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-12Managing Drawing Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-15Adding Drawing Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-19Creating Projection Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-23Creating Cross-Section Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-27Creating Detailed Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-31Creating Auxiliary Views. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-35Creating New Drawings using Drawing Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-36Modifying Drawing Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-40Creating Assembly and Exploded Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-44

Creating Drawing Annotations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-1Analyzing Annotation Concepts and Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-2Creating Tables from File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-4Creating BOM Balloons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-8Showing, Erasing, and Deleting Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-13Cleaning Up Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-18Manipulating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-21Creating Driven Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-25Inserting Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-29Analyzing Drawing Associativity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-33Publishing Drawings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-37

Using Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-1

Understanding Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-2Creating and Managing Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-4Utilizing Layers in Part Models. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-6Creating Layer States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-9Utilizing Layers in Assembly Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-12

Investigating Parent/Child Relationships . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-1Understanding Parent/Child Relationships . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-2Viewing Part Parent/Child Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-5Viewing Assembly Parent/Child Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-9Viewing Model, Feature, and Component Information . . . . . . . . . . 25-13

Capturing and Managing Design Intent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-1Handling Children of Deleted and Suppressed Items . . . . . . . . . . . 26-2Reordering Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-7Inserting Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-10Redefining Features and Sketches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-14Capturing Design Intent in Sketches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-18Capturing Design Intent in Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-20Capturing Design Intent in Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-22Capturing Design Intent in Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-24

Resolving Failures and Seeking Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-1Understanding and Identifying Failures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-2Analyzing Geometry Failures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-5Analyzing Open Section Failures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-9Analyzing Missing Part Reference Failures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-12Analyzing Missing Component Failures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-16Analyzing Missing Component Reference Failures . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-20Analyzing Invalid Assembly Constraint Failures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-24Understanding Resolve Mode Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-29Recovering Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-31Using Creo Parametric Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-32

Project II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-1The Air Circulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-2Piston Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-3Engine Block and Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-4Blower Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-5Engine Blower Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-6Completing the Design. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-7

Student Preface — Using the HeaderIn this topic, you learn about the course handbook layout andthe header used to begin each lab in Creo Parametric.

Course Handbook Layout:

• Modules– Topics

♦ Concept♦ Theory♦ Procedure♦ Exercise (if applicable)

Procedure / Exercise Header:

Course Handbook LayoutThe information in this course handbook is organized to help students locateinformation after the course is complete. Each course is organized intomodules, each covering a general subject. Each module contains topics,with each topic focused on a specific portion of the module subject. Eachindividual topic in the module is divided into the following sections:• Concept — This section contains the initial introduction to the topic andis presented during the class lecture as an overhead slide, typically withfigures and bullets.

• Theory — This section provides detailed information about contentintroduced in the Concept, and is discussed in the class lecture but notshown on the overhead slide. The Theory section contains additionalparagraphs of text, bullets, tables, and/or figures.

• Procedure— This section provides step-by-step instructions about how tocomplete the topic within Creo Parametric. Procedures are short, focused,and cover a specific topic. Procedures are found in the Student Handbookonly. Not every topic has a Procedure, as there are knowledge topics thatcontain only Concept and Theory.

• Exercise — Exercises are similar to procedures, except that they aretypically longer, more involved, and use more complicated models.Exercises also may cover multiple topics, so not every topic will have anassociated exercise. Exercises are found in the separate Exercise Guideand/or the online exercise HTML files.

The first module for certain courses is known as a “processmodule.” Process modules introduce you to the generic high-levelprocesses that will be taught over the span of the entire course.

Procedure / Exercise HeaderTo make the exercises and procedures (referred to collectively as “labs”) asconcise as possible, each begins with a “header.” The header lists the nameof the lab, the working directory, and the file you are to open.

The following items are indicated in the figure above, where applicable:

1. Procedure/Exercise Name— This is the name of the lab.2. Scenario — This briefly describes what will be done in the lab. The

Scenario is only found in Exercises.3. Close Windows/Erase Not Displayed— A reminder that you should

close any open files and erase them from memory:

• Click Close until the icon is no longer displayed.

• Click Erase Not Displayed and then click OK.4. Folder Name— This is the working directory for the lab. Lab files are

stored in topic folders within specific functional area folders. The path tothe lab files is:• PTCU\CreoParametric2\functional_area_folder\topic_folderIn the example, Round is the functional area folder and Variableis the topic folder, so you would set the Working Directory toPTCU\CreoParametric2\Round\Variable.• To set the working directory, right-click the folder in the folder tree orbrowser, and select Set Working Directory.

5. Model to Open — This is the file to be opened from the workingdirectory. In the above example, VARIABLE_RAD.PRT is the model toopen. The model could be a part, drawing, assembly, and so on. Ifyou are expected to begin the lab without an open model, and insteadcreate a new model, you will see Create New.• To open the indicated model, right-click the file in the browser andselect Open.

6. Task Name— Labs are broken into distinct tasks. There may be oneor more tasks within a lab.

7. Lab Steps — These are the individual steps required to completea task.

Two other items to note for labs:

• Saving — Saving your work after completing a lab is optional, unlessotherwise stated.

• Exercises— Exercises follow the same header format as Procedures.

Setting Up Creo Parametric for Use with Training LabsBefore you begin a lab from any training course, it is important that youconfigure Creo Parametric to ensure the system is set up to run the labexercises properly. Therefore, if you are running the training labs on acomputer outside of a training center, follow these three basic steps:

• Extract the class files zip file to a root level drive such as C: or D:.– The extracted zip will create the default folder path automatically, such

as C:\PTCU\CreoParametric2\.• Locate your existing Creo Parametric shortcut.– Copy and paste the shortcut to your desktop.– Right-click the newly pasted shortcut and select Properties.– Select the Shortcut tab and set the Start In location to be the same as

the default folder. For example, C:\PTCU\CreoParametric2\.• Start Creo Parametric using the newly configured shortcut.– The default working directory will be set to the CreoParametric2 folder.

You can then navigate easily to the functional area and topic folders.

PROCEDURE - Student Preface — Using the HeaderIn this exercise, you learn how to use the header to set up the CreoParametric working environment for each lab in the course.

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

SampleFunctionalArea\Topic1_Folder EXTRUDE_1.PRT

Step 1: Configure Creo Parametric to ensure the system is set up to runthe lab exercises properly.

Perform this task only if you are running the labs on a computeroutside of a training center, otherwise proceed to Task 2.

1. Extract the zipped class files to a root level drive such as C: or D:.• The extracted ZIP will create the default folder path automatically,such as C:\PTCU\CreoParametric2.

2. Locate your existing Creo Parametric shortcut.• Copy and paste the shortcut to your desktop.• Right-click the newly pasted shortcut and select Properties.• Select the Shortcut tab and set the Start In location to bePTCU\CreoParametric2.

3. Start Creo Parametric using the newly configured shortcut.• The default working directory is set to the CreoParametric2 folder.You can then navigate easily to the functional area and topic folders.

Step 2: Close all open windows and erase all objects from memory toavoid any possible conflicts.

1. If you currently have files open, click Close from the Quick Accesstoolbar, until the icon no longer displays.

2. Click Erase Not Displayed from the Data group in the ribbon.• Click OK if the Erase Not Displayed dialog box appears.

Step 3: Browse to and expand the functional area folder for this procedureand set the folder indicated in the header as the Creo Parametricworking directory.

1. Notice the SampleFunc-tionalArea\Topic1_Folder asindicated in the header above.

2. If necessary, select the Folder

Browser tab from thenavigator.

3. Click Working Directoryto view the current workingdirectory folder in the browser.• Double-clickSampleFunctionalArea.

4. Right-click the Topic1_Folder folder and select Set WorkingDirectory.

5. ClickWorking Directory from the Common Folders section to displaythe contents of the new working directory in the browser.

Alternatively you can use the cascading folder path in thebrowser to navigate to the topic folder, and then right-click andselect Set Working Directory from the browser.

Step 4: Open the file for this procedure.

1. Notice the lab model EXTRUDE_1.PRT is specified in the headerabove.• Double-click extrude_1.prt in the browser to open it.

2. You are now ready to begin the first task in the lab:• Read the first task.• Perform the first step, which in most cases will be to set the initialdatum display for the procedure or exercise.

• Perform the remaining steps in the procedure or exercise.

Step 5: Set the initial datum display options.

1. The instruction for setting the datum display indicates which DatumDisplay types to enable and disable. For example, “Enable only thefollowing Datum Display types: .”

2. To set the datum display, first click the Datum Display drop-downmenu from the In Graphics toolbar.

3. Next, enable and disable thecheck boxes as necessary. Forexample you could disable theSelect All check box, and thenenable only the desired datumtypes.

4. The model should now appearas shown.

This completes the procedure.

Module1Introduction to the Creo Parametric BasicModeling Process

Module OverviewIn this module, you learn about the basic modeling process that is typicallyused to scope, model, assemble, and document a Creo Parametric solidmodel. This simplified process is fundamentally used at most companies,although your specific company process may differ. The process is supportedthroughout the course modules and again followed in a course project.

This module also introduces you to various fundamental Creo Parametricconcepts, including feature-based modeling and associativity between partmodels, assemblies, and drawings. You will learn more details about theseand other concepts in subsequent modules.

ObjectivesAfter completing this module, you will be able to:• Prepare for a part model design by scoping the design parameters of anadjoining part.

• Create a new part model by following the required design parameters.• Create an assembly by assembling the new part model with existing partmodels.

• Create a 2-D drawing of the new part model that includes views,dimensions, and a title block.

© 2012 PTC Module 1 | Page 1

Creo Parametric Basic Modeling ProcessThe Basic Modeling process can be summarized in fourhigh-level steps.

Figure 1 – Preparing for Part ModelDesign Figure 2 – Creating a New

Part Model

Figure 3 – Creating a New Assemblyby Assembling the Part Models

Figure 4 – Creating a Drawingof the New Part Model

Preparing for Part Model DesignBefore you create a new part model design, it is often necessary toacquire information about the components that surround it in an assembly.Consequently, you may want to open and inspect these parts beforebeginning the new design. At your company, this preparation stage mayoccur at the same time as the new part model design, or it may not occur atall. In either case, establishing knowledge of adjoining parts can be helpful inthe new part model design.

Creating a New Part ModelA new part model accurately captures a design from a concept through solidfeature-based modeling. A part model enables you to graphically view theproduct before it is manufactured. A part model can be used to:• Capture mass property information.• Vary design parameters to determine the best options.• Graphically visualize a model before it is manufactured.

Module 1 | Page 2 © 2012 PTC

Creating a New Assembly by Assembling the Part ModelsAn assembly is created from one or more parts. The parts are located andassembled with respect to one another, just as they are on a real product.An assembly can be used to:

• Check for fit between parts.• Check for interference between parts.• Capture bill of material information.• Calculate the total weight of an assembly.

Creating a Drawing of the Part or AssemblyOnce a part or assembly has been modeled, it is often necessary to documentthat part or assembly by creating a 2-D drawing of it. The 2-D drawing usuallycontains views of the part or assembly, dimensions, and a title block. Thedrawing may also contain notes, tables, and further design information. Notevery company requires model drawings.


PROCEDURE - Creo Parametric Basic Modeling Process

ObjectivesAfter successfully completing this exercise, you will be able to:• Scope the design parameters of an existing part.• Create a new part model using required design parameters.• Create a new assembly by assembling part models.• Create a new drawing of the new part model.Before you can begin modeling the key handle, you need to scope the designon the adjoining key base model. You know from experience that the hole inthe key base is not large enough in diameter for a strong key handle, and thekey base does not provide enough clearance to use the tool.

Once you have properly scoped the design, you can create the key handlepart and assemble it with the key base. Finally, you can document the keyhandle design by creating a 2-D drawing.

Step 1: Preparing for part model design – Open and edit the dimensions ofan existing part model to watch the geometry update automatically.

1. To open the KEY_BASE.PRTpart model, do the following:

• ClickOpen from the ribbonat the top of the interface.

• In the File Open dialog box,clickWorking Directory .

• Double-click the Processfolder to view its contents.

• Right-click the Basic-Modeling folder and selectSet Working Directory.

• Double-click theBasic-Modeling folder toview its contents.

• Select KEY_BASE.PRT.• Click Open.


2. In the In Graphics toolbar atthe top of the graphics window,clear the check boxes for AxisDisplay , Point Display

, Csys Display , andPlane Display to disabletheir display.

3. To edit the hole diameter from3.5 to 5, do the following:• Click the hole in the modelto select it. Notice that ithighlights in green.

• Right-click and hold, and thenselect Edit.

• Double-click the 3.5 value toedit it.

• Edit the value from 3.5 to 5and press ENTER.

• Click twice in the graphicswindow to update the modelgeometry to the new diametervalue.

4. Click Named Views from the In Graphics toolbar at the top of thegraphics window and select FRONT.


5. To edit the shaft height from 25to 35, do the following:• Click the shaft in the modelto select it. Notice that ithighlights in green.

• In the graphics windowcontaining the model,right-click and hold, andthen select Edit.

• Double-click the 25 value toedit it.

• Edit the value from 25 to 35and press ENTER.

• Click twice in the graphicswindow to update the modelgeometry to the longer shaftvalue.

6. Click Named Views fromthe In Graphics toolbar at thetop of the graphics window andselect Standard Orientation.

7. From the In Graphics toolbar atthe top of the graphics window,select the check boxes for PlaneDisplay and Axis Display

to enable their display.


8. To save the KEY_BASE.PRT part model and close the window, dothe following:

• Click Save from the Quick Access toolbar near the top of theinterface.

• In the Save Object dialog box, click OK.

• Click Close from the Quick Access toolbar to close the windowcontaining KEY_BASE.PRT.

Step 2: Creating a new part model – Create a new part model namedKEY_HANDLE.PRT and model its geometry.

1. To create a new part model, dothe following:

• Click New from the QuickAccess toolbar near the top ofthe interface.

• In the New dialog box, selectPart as the Type and Solid asthe Sub-type.

• Type key_handle in the Namefield.

• Clear the Use defaulttemplate check box andclick OK.

2. In the New File Options dialogbox, select mmns_part_solidas the template and click OK.

3. To start a new Sketch feature, dothe following:

• Click Sketch from theDatum group in the ribbon atthe top of the interface.

• In the model tree located onthe left side of the interface,click datum plane FRONT toselect it.

• Click Sketch in the Sketchdialog box.


4. To sketch a circle and edit itsdiameter to 5, do the following:• Select Center and Point

from the Circle typesdrop-down menu in theSketching group in the ribbon.

• In the graphics window, cursorover the intersection of thevertical and horizontal lines.The cursor snaps to the center.Click to place the circle at theintersection, drag your mouseoutward to start sketchingthe circle, and click again tocomplete the circle.

• Click One-by-One fromthe Operations group in theribbon. A diameter dimensionappears for the circle.

• Double-click the diameterdimension, edit its value to 5,and press ENTER.

5. Click OK from the dashboardat the top of the interface.


6. To create an Extrude featureusing the sketch you just created,do the following:• Ensure that the Sketch featureis still selected. If it is nothighlighted in green, you mustclick it to select it.

• Click Extrude from theShapes group in the ribbon atthe top of the interface.

• In the dashboard at the top ofthe interface, edit the depthfrom Blind to Symmetric

.• In the dashboard, edit thedepth value to 12 and pressENTER. The orange geometrydepth increases. Orangegeometry is preview geometryand is representative of howthe feature should appearwhen it is completed.

• Click Complete Featurefrom the dashboard.

7. To start a second new Sketchfeature, do the following:

• Click Sketch from theDatum group in the ribbon atthe top of the interface.

• In the graphics window, clickthe front surface of the cylindergeometry to select it as thesketching plane for the newSketch feature.

• Click Sketch in the Sketchdialog box.


8. To sketch a circle and edit itsdiameter to 7, do the following:• Select Center and Point

from the Circle typesdrop-down menu in theSketching group in the ribbon.

• In the graphics window, cursorover the intersection of thevertical and horizontal lines.The cursor snaps to the center.Click to place the circle at theintersection, drag your mouseoutward to start sketchingthe circle, and click again tocomplete the circle.

• Click One-by-One fromthe Operations group in theribbon. A diameter dimensionappears for the circle.

• Click Refit from the InGraphics toolbar at the top ofthe graphics window.

• Double-click the diameterdimension, edit its value to 7,and press ENTER.

9. Click OK from the dashboard.


10. To create a second Extrudefeature using the second sketchyou just created, do the following:• Ensure that the Sketch featureis still selected. If it is nothighlighted in green, you mustclick it to select it.

• Click Extrude from theShapes group in the ribbon atthe top of the interface.

• In the dashboard at the topof the interface, click ChangeDepth Direction to flip theorange preview geometry intothe existing geometry.

• In the graphics window, clickand drag the small white,square drag handle to edit thedepth to 5.


11. In the In Graphics toolbar at the top of the graphics window, clear

the check boxes for Plane Display and Axis Display todisable their display.


12. To round two edges of thegeometry, do the following:

• Select Round from theRound types drop-down menuin the ribbon at the top of theinterface.

• In the graphics window, pressCTRL and click the two edgesto be rounded to select them.

• In the dashboard, edit theround radius to 0.5 and pressENTER.


13. Click in the background of thegraphics window to de-select thecompleted round feature.

14. To mirror the part, do thefollowing:• In the model tree located onthe left side of the interface,press CTRL and click theExtrude 2 and Round 1features to select them.

• Click Mirror from theEditing group in the ribbon atthe top of the interface.

• In the model tree, click theFRONT datum plane to selectit as the datum from which youmirror the geometry.



15. To modify geometry dimensionsto their proper length andregenerate the model, do thefollowing:• In the model tree located onthe left side of the interface,right-click the Extrude 1feature and hold, and thenselect Edit.

• In the graphics window,double-click the 12 dimension,edit it to 60, and press ENTER.

• Click twice in the graphicswindow to update thegeometry. Notice that themodel geometry grows long.

• Click Refit from the InGraphics toolbar.

16. To save the KEY_HANDLE.PRT part model, do the following:

• Click Save from the Quick Access toolbar near the top of theinterface.

• In the Save Object dialog box, click OK.

Step 3: Creating a new assembly by assembling the part models –Create a new assembly CHUCK_KEY.ASM and assemble theKEY_HANDLE.PRT and KEY_BASE.PRT.

1. In the In Graphics toolbar at the top of the graphics window, select thecheck box for Plane Display to enable their display.


2. To create the CHUCK_KEY.ASMassembly model, do thefollowing:

• Click New from the QuickAccess toolbar near the top ofthe interface.

• In the New dialog box, selectAssembly as the Type andverify that Design is theSub-type.

• Edit the Name to chuck_key.• Clear the Use defaulttemplate check box andclick OK.

• Select mmns_asm_designas the template and click OK.

You must resize the new assembly window that appears.

3. To assemble theKEY_BASE.PRT, do thefollowing:

• Select Assemble from theAssemble types drop-downmenu in the Component groupat the top of the interface.

• In the Open dialog box, selectcomponent KEY_BASE.PRTand click Open.

• In the dashboard, edit theconstraint in the drop-down listfrom Automatic to Default

.• Click Complete Component

from the dashboard.

4. In the In Graphics toolbar at the top of the graphics window, clear thecheck box for Plane Display to disable their display.


5. To start assemblingKEY_HANDLE.PRT by creatingthe Coincident constraint, do thefollowing:

• Select Assemble from theAssemble types drop-downmenu in the Component groupat the top of the interface.

• In the Open dialog box,click the componentKEY_HANDLE.PRT to selectit and click Open.

• In the graphics window, clickthe inside hole surface onKEY_BASE.PRT to select it asthe assembly reference.

• Click the shaft surface onKEY_HANDLE.PRT to selectit as the component reference.The KEY_HANDLE.PRTrepositions itself through thehole in KEY_BASE.PRT, andthe Coincident constraint iscreated.

6. To continue assemblingKEY_HANDLE.PRT by creatingthe Distance constraint, do thefollowing:• In the graphics window,click the flat surface onKEY_HANDLE.PRT to selectit as the component reference.

• Cursor over the upperleft of the top surfaceof KEY_BASE.PRT topre-highlight it. Right-clickto query the back, flat surfaceof KEY_BASE.PRT and clickto select it as the assemblyreference. The Distanceconstraint is created.


7. To edit the Distance constraintvalue and complete the assemblyof KEY_HANDLE.PRT, do thefollowing:• In the graphics window, clickand drag the small white,square drag handle to edit theoffset value of the Distanceconstraint to 6.

• Click Complete Componentfrom the dashboard.

8. To edit the shaft length ofKEY_HANDLE.PRT within theassembly, do the following:• In the model tree, right-clickKEY_HANDLE.PRT andselect Activate.

• In the graphics window,select the rounded shaftof the KEY_HANDLE.PRT,right-click and hold, and thenselect Edit.

• In the graphics window,double-click the 60 dimensionto edit it.

• Edit the 60 dimension value to45 and press ENTER.

• Click Regenerate from theOperations group in the ribbonto update the geometry to thenew length.

• In the model tree, right-clickCHUCK_KEY.ASM and selectActivate.


9. To verify the geometrylength change in theKEY_HANDLE.PRT, do thefollowing:

• Click Windows from theQuick Access toolbar andselect KEY_HANDLE.PRTto switch windows from theCHUCK_KEY.ASM assemblyto the KEY_HANDLE.PRT partmodel.

• In the model tree, right-clickExtrude 1 and select Edit.Notice that the shaft length isnow 45, even though it wasedited in the assembly.

• Click in the background of thegraphics window to clear thedimensions.

Step 4: Creating a drawing of the new part model – Create a new drawingKEY_HANDLE.DRW for the part model KEY_HANDLE.PRT.

1. To create the newKEY_HANDLE.DRW drawing,do the following:

• Click New from the QuickAccess toolbar.

• In the New dialog box, selectDrawing as the Type.

• Edit the Name to key_handle.• Clear the Use defaulttemplate check box.

• Click OK.• In the New Drawing dialogbox, verify that the DefaultModel is KEY_HANDLE.PRT.

• Select the Use templateoption and click Browseto browse for the drawingtemplate.

• In the Open dialog box, selectthe student_template.drwtemplate and click Open.

• Click OK in the New Drawingdialog box.


2. The input window prompts youfor the drawn_by parameter.Type your first initial, followedby your surname, and pressENTER. Your name is enteredinto the title block as the drawingdisplays in the graphics window.

3. To edit the drawing scale, do thefollowing:• In the bottom-left corner of thegraphics window, double-clickthe Scale value to edit it.

• The input window promptsyou to enter the new valuefor Scale. Type 5 as thenew Scale value and pressENTER. The drawing viewsautomatically rescale to thenew value of 5.

4. To move the Ø7 diameterdimension to the other drawingview, do the following:• Click the Ø7 diameterdimension in the right drawingview to select it. It highlightsin green.

• Right-click in the graphicswindow and select Move Itemto View.

• Select the left drawing view.The dimension is moved tothis new drawing view.


5. To move the Ø5 diameterdimension to another locationin the drawing view, do thefollowing:• In the graphics window, clickthe Ø5 dimension in the rightdrawing view to select it. Ithighlights in green.

• Cursor over the highlighteddimension. The cursorappears as four arrows. This isan indication that you can nowclick and drag this dimensionto move it to another locationon the drawing. Click anddrag to move the Ø5 diameterdimension to the center of thedrawing view.

6. Click Windows from the Quick Access toolbar and selectKEY_HANDLE.PRT to switch to the window containingKEY_HANDLE.PRT.

7. To edit the KEY_HANDLE.PRTshaft length and save it, do thefollowing:• Right-click Extrude 1 in themodel tree and select Edit.

• In the graphics window,double-click the 45 dimensionto edit it.

• Edit the 45 dimension value to60 and press ENTER.

• Click twice in the graphicswindow to update thegeometry.

8. To save the KEY_HANDLE.PRT and close the window, do thefollowing:

• Click Save from the Quick Access toolbar.• Click OK in the Save Object dialog box.

• In the Quick Access toolbar, click Close to close theKEY_HANDLE.PRT window.


9. To activate the CHUCK_KEY.ASM assembly, save it, and closethe window, do the following:

• Click Windows from theQuick Access toolbar andselect CHUCK_KEY.ASM toswitch to the assembly andactivate it.

• Click Regenerate from theOperations group.

• Click Save from the QuickAccess toolbar.

• Click OK in the Save Objectdialog box.

• In the Quick Access toolbar,click Close to close theCHUCK_KEY.ASM window.

Note that the geometry anddimension in the drawinghave both updated.

10. To save the KEY_HANDLE.DRW drawing, close the window, anderase all files from session memory, do the following:

• Click Save from the Quick Access toolbar.• Click OK in the Save Object dialog box.

• In the Quick Access toolbar, click Close to close theKEY_HANDLE.DRW window.

• Click File > Manage Session > Erase Not Displayed.• Click OK in the Erase Not Displayed dialog box.



Module2Understanding Creo Parametric Concepts

Module OverviewIn this module, you learn about the basic concepts and benefits of solidmodeling using Creo Parametric. You then learn how complex models can beeasily created using a combination of simple features. Parametric capabilitiesthat are native to Creo Parametric enable you to easily add design intent andmake design changes. Associativity means that a change made to your solidmodel design is automatically propagated to all referenced objects, suchas drawings, assemblies, and so on. You also learn how a model-centricmodeler enables the creation of downstream deliverables with referencesto, and driven by, the design model.

Finally, you learn how to recognize some of the basic file extensions used toidentify different types of Creo Parametric objects.

ObjectivesAfter completing this module, you will be able to:• Understand solid modeling concepts.• Understand feature-based concepts.• Understand parametric concepts.• Understand associative concepts.• Understand model-centric concepts.• Recognize basic Creo Parametric file extensions.


Understanding Solid Modeling ConceptsCreo Parametric enables you to create solid modelrepresentations of your part and assembly models.

Solid models:

• Are realistic visual representation of designs.• Contain properties such as mass, volume, and center of gravity.• Can also be used to check for interferences in an assembly.

Figure 1 – Interference Check Figure 2 – Mass Properties

Understanding Solid Modeling ConceptsCreo Parametric enables you to create realistic solid model representationsof your part and assembly models. These virtual design models can beused to easily visualize and evaluate your design before costly prototypesare manufactured.

The models contain material properties such as mass, volume, center ofgravity, and surface area. As features are added or removed from the model,these properties update. For example, if you add a hole to a model, thenthe mass of the model decreases.

In addition, solid models enable tolerance analysis and clearance/interferencechecking when placed into assemblies.


Understanding Feature-Based ConceptsCreo Parametric is a feature-based product development tool.

With feature-based modeling:

• You build one simple feature at a time.• Each new feature can reference previous features.

Figure 1 – Connecting Rod Features

Understanding Feature-Based ConceptsCreo Parametric is a feature-based product development tool. The modelsare constructed using a series of easy to understand features rather thanconfusing mathematical shapes and entities.

The geometric definition of a model is defined by the type of features usedand the order in which each feature is placed. Each feature builds upon theprevious feature and can reference any of the preceding features, thereforeenabling design intent to be built into the model.

Individually, each feature is typically simple; however, as they are addedtogether, they form complex parts and assemblies.

In this example, we have a connecting rod in seven stages of its creation:• First, an extrusion is created, which forms the overall shape and size ofthe model.

• An additional extrusion is created at the top of the model.• A third extrusion is created at the bottom of the model.• A hole is created at the bottom of the model.• Another hole is created at the top of the model.• A round is created on the four inside edges.• A small radial hole is created at the top of the model.


Understanding Parametric ConceptsThe parametric nature and feature-to-feature relationships inCreo Parametric enable you to easily capture design intent andmake design changes.

Parametric:

• Model geometry is controlled by parameters and dimensions.• When you modify dimension values, relevant geometry is automaticallyupdated.

Parent/child relationships:

• Features referenced during creation become parents.• If parent features change, child features predictably change accordingly.

Figure 1 – Parametric Feature Relationships

Understanding Parametric ConceptsCreo Parametric models are value-driven, using dimensions and parametersto define the size and location of features within the model. If you edit thevalue of a feature dimension, that feature updates accordingly. The changethen automatically propagates through to related features in the model andeventually updates the entire part.

Parent/Child RelationshipsRelationships between features in Creo Parametric provide a powerful tool forcapturing design intent. During the modeling process, design intent is addedas one feature is created with reference to another.

When creating a new feature, any feature referenced during its creationbecomes a parent of the new feature. The new feature referencing the parentis referred to as a child of the parent. If the parent feature is updated, anychildren of the parent update accordingly. These relationships are referred toas parent/child relationships.

This example shows a piston model intersected with a hole feature. In themiddle figure, the piston height is modified from 18.5 to 25. Notice that thehole moves upward as the piston height increases. The design intent ofthe piston is to have the hole located at a specified distance from the topof the piston. The hole maintains that distance regardless of how tall the


piston becomes. This intent was added by dimensioning the hole to the topsurface of the piston.

Alternatively, if the intent of the design is to have the hole located ata specified distance from the bottom of the piston, the hole would bedimensioned from the bottom surface of the piston, yielding a different resultwhen the height of the piston is modified.

The right most image in the figure shows modifications made to the locationand diameter of the hole.

Best PracticesWhen creating features in your model, try to reference features and geometrythat are robust, unlikely to be deleted, and provide the desired design intent.While this is not always possible, striving to do so helps you build robust,easy-to-modify models.


Understanding Associative ConceptsCreo Parametric is a bi-directionally associative productdevelopment tool.

Figure 1 – Associativity

Understanding Associative ConceptsBi-directional associativity means that all changes made to an object in anymode of Creo Parametric are automatically reflected in every related mode.

For example, a change made in a drawing is reflected in the part beingdocumented in the drawing. That same change is also reflected in everyassembly using that part model.

It is important to understand that the associativity between different modes ispossible because the part shown in a drawing is not copied into the drawing,but rather associatively linked to the drawing. Likewise, an assembly is nota large file containing copies of every part in the assembly, but rather a filecontaining associative links to every model used in the assembly.

Best PracticesBecause drawing and assembly files have associative links to the modelscontained in them, these objects cannot be opened without the presenceof the models they contain.

Essentially, you cannot send your colleague only a drawing file to open. Heor she must have the drawing file along with any model referenced in thedrawing. For an assembly, he or she must have the assembly file and allmodels used in the assembly.


Understanding Model-Centric ConceptsIn Creo Parametric, the model is the center of all downstreamdeliverables.

Model-centric:

• Assemblies reference the models being assembled.• The drawing references the model being documented.• The FEM model references the model being meshed.• The mold tool references the model being molded.

Figure 1 – Model-Centric

Understanding Model-Centric ConceptsIn a model-centric product development tool, the design model is the commonsource for all deliverables utilizing that specific design model. This meansthat all downstream deliverables point directly to a common design model.The model is referenced as components in assemblies, views in a drawing,the cavity of a mold, geometry meshed in an FEM model, and so on.

The benefit of using a model-centric development tool is that a changemade to the design model automatically updates all related downstreamdeliverables.


Recognizing File ExtensionsThere is a unique file extension used to identify each CreoParametric object type.

The following are common CreoParametric file extensions:

• .prt – Part file• .asm – Assembly file• .drw – Drawing file

Figure 1 – Part File

Figure 2 – Drawing File Figure 3 – Assembly File

Recognizing File ExtensionsThere are three common Creo Parametric object types: parts, assemblies,and drawings. The following file extensions are used to identify them:• .prt – This extension represents a part object.• .asm – This extension represents an assembly object. An assembly filecontains pointers and instructions that identify and position a collection ofparts and sub-assemblies.

• .drw – This extension represents a 2-D drawing. The drawing file containspointers, instructions, and detail items for documenting part and assemblymodels in a drawing.


Module3Using the Creo Parametric Interface

Module OverviewCreo Parametric's user interface is an intuitive, user-friendly experience. Thesystem is designed to make the most of its available space by displayingcertain information at the right time, and then using that space to displaydifferent information at a different time.

This module introduces you to the main user interface and defines eacharea and how you can use it. You will gain an understanding of basic skills,including file manipulation and management, as well as setting the workingdirectory and saving and opening files. You learn basic Creo Parametricdisplay options for datum display that will aid you throughout this course. Youalso learn about 3-D view orientations and style states, and understand howto manage and apply appearances.

ObjectivesAfter completing this module, you will be able to:• Understand Creo Parametric's main interface, folder browser, Web browser,and ribbon system.

• Set the working directory and manage files in Creo Parametric, includinghow to open and save files.

• Understand basic Creo Parametric display options, including model displaystyle and datum display.

• Create and manage basic 3-D orientations.• Create style states using the view manager.• Manage and apply Creo Parametric appearances.• Set up new part models.


Understanding the Main InterfaceThe main interface includes the following areas:

• Graphics window• Quick Access toolbar• Ribbon• Dashboard• Status bar

• Message Log• Dialog boxes• In Graphics toolbar• Menu manager

Figure 1 – The Main Interface

Understanding the Main InterfaceThere are many different areas of the Creo Parametric user interface thatyou utilize when creating models. The areas that display depend upon thefunction you are currently performing. Areas of the main interface include:

• Graphics window – The workingarea of Creo Parametric in whichyou create and modify CreoParametric models such as parts,assemblies, and drawings.


• In Graphics toolbar – Located at the top of the graphics window, theIn Graphics toolbar contains commonly used tools and filters for thegraphics window display. You can customize the tools and filtersdisplayed in the In Graphics toolbar.

• Quick Access toolbar – By default, the Quick Access toolbar is located atthe top of the interface. It contains a commonly used set of commandsthat are independent of the tab currently displayed in the ribbon. Thesecommands are available regardless of the specific mode or ribbon tab inwhich you are working. You can customize the Quick Access toolbar toadd additional commands.

• Ribbon – A context-sensitive menu across the top of the interface thatcontains the majority of the commands you use in Creo Parametric. Theribbon arranges commands into logical tasks through tabs and groups.

• Dashboard – Locked at the top of the user interface, the dashboardappears when you create or edit the definition of a feature. Thedashboard provides you with controls, inputs, status, and guidance forperforming a task, such as creating or editing a feature. Changes areimmediately visible on the screen. Various dashboard tabs are availablewith additional feature options. Dashboard icons on the left includefeature controls while the Pause, Preview, Create Feature, and CancelFeature options are located on the right.

• Dialog boxes – Content-sensitivewindows which display and promptyou for additional information.


• Status bar – Located at the bottom of the interface, the status barcontains icons for toggling the model tree and Web browser panes onand off. It also contains the message log, regeneration manager, 3Dbox selector, and selection filter.

• Message Log – The messagelog provides you with prompts,feedback, and messages fromCreo Parametric.

• Menu manager – A cascadingmenu that appears on the far rightof the interface when you usecertain functions and modes inCreo Parametric. You typicallywork from top to bottom in thismenu; however, clicking Done isperformed bottom to top. Boldmenu options are automaticallyselected when you middle-click.


Understanding the Folder BrowserThe Folder Browser is a pane in the Navigator that enables youto browse the folders on your computer and network.

• The Folder Browser is divided into:– Common Folders– Folder Tree

• The Folder Browser enables youto:– Browse folders.– View In Session objects.– View contents of your Desktop,

My Documents, and NetworkNeighborhood.

– Navigate directly to the WorkingDirectory.

– Resize the width by draggingthe window divider.

– Click the icon in the status barto toggle the Navigator on or off.

Figure 1 – The Folder BrowserPane

Understanding the Folder BrowserThe Navigator is a pane in the Creo Parametric user interface that contains aseries of tabs across the top. One of those tabs is the Folder Browser. Bydefault, Creo Parametric launches with the Folder Browser open. The FolderBrowser enables you to browse the folders on your computer and network.You can resize the Folder Browser width by dragging the window divider orclose the Navigator entirely by clicking the icon in the status bar.

The Folder Browser is divided into the Common Folders and the Folder Tree.

The Folder TreeThe Folder Tree enables you to browse your computer's folder structure. Bydefault, the Folder Tree is collapsed at the bottom of the Folder Browserwindow. You can also use the Folder Tree to set a new working directory, addfolders to the Common Folders, and add, delete, or rename folders on your


computer. The contents of a folder selected in the Folder Tree are displayedin the Web browser.

The Common FoldersThe Common Folders area of the Navigator contains folders that, whenselected, direct you to the folder location in the Folder Tree or Web browser.To add a folder to this area of the interface, right-click the folder in the FolderTree or Web browser and select Add to common folders. The six standardCommon Folders include:

• In Session – Enables you to view all files currently In Session.• Desktop – Enables you to view the contents of your Desktop.• My Documents – Enables you to view the contents of your My Documentsfolder.

• Working Directory – Enables you to view the contents of the currentWorking Directory.

• Network Neighborhood – Enables you to view the contents of your NetworkNeighborhood.

• Favorites – Enables you to view the folders or Web sites you havedesignated as favorites. Alternatively, you could also select the Favoritestab from the top of the Navigator.


Understanding the Web BrowserThe Web browser is an embedded Creo Parametric window thatenables you to perform context-sensitive tasks.

• You can perform thefollowing tasks:– Browse the file

system.– Preview Creo

Parametric models.– Open Creo

Parametric models.– Browse and navigate

Web pages.– Set the Working

Directory.– Cut/Copy/Paste/

Delete folders andobjects.

Figure 1 – The Web Browser

Understanding the Web BrowserThe Web browser is an integrated content viewer within Creo Parametric. Itworks in conjunction with the Folder Browser so you can find files on yourcomputer as well as browse Web pages. The Web browser is embedded inthe Creo Parametric interface, and slides over the graphics window. TheWeb browser is divided into three sections: file list, preview window, andbrowser controls.

• File list – Displays the contentsof a folder selected in the FolderBrowser. You can set either List,Thumbnails, or Details display,filter the list based on file type,or display instances and/or allversions of a file. Double-clicka folder to view its contentsor double-click a file to open itin Creo Parametric. Select afile to preview it in the previewwindow or drag and drop it intothe graphics window to open it.You can also cut, copy, paste, anddelete folders and objects in thefile list.


• Preview window – When a modelis selected from the file list, youcan dynamically preview it byexpanding the preview window.You can Spin, Pan, and Zoom inthe preview window to observemodel geometry. You can alsoedit the model display. By default,the preview window is collapsedat the bottom of the Web browser.

• Browser controls – The Web browser supports tabbed browsing andcontains the following standard control buttons: Back, Forward, Stop,Refresh, Home, and Print. Select a sub-folder to view its contents in theWeb browser, or type a Web address in the Address field. The Addressfield uses breadcrumbs for folder navigation. You can begin typing thename of the desired file or folder in the Search field to dynamically filterthe folder's contents in the Web browser. You can switch between tabsby clicking on the desired one, and you can add and close tabs.

You can drag the right vertical edge of the Web browser to adjust its widthin the same way you can adjust the size of most other windows. You canalso toggle the Web browser on or off by clicking Web Browser in thestatus bar.

The Web browser also displays other context-sensitive information,including model and feature information.


Setting the Working Directory and Opening andSaving FilesThe Working Directory is the designated location for openingand saving files.• Creo Parametric is started in thedefault working directory.

• Different working directories can beset.

• New working directory locationsare not saved upon exiting CreoParametric.

Figure 2 – Setting the Working Directoryin the Folder Tree

Figure 1 – Working DirectoryCommon Folder

Setting the Working DirectoryThe working directory is the designated location for opening and savingfiles. Typically, the default working directory is the directory from which CreoParametric is started. However, there are three methods to define a newworking directory:• From the Folder Tree or Web browser – Right-click the folder that is to bethe new working directory and select Set Working Directory.

• From the File menu – Click File > Manage Session > Select WorkingDirectory. Browse to and select the directory that is to be the new workingdirectory. Click OK.

• From the File Open dialog box – Right-click the folder that is to be the newworking directory and select Set Working Directory.

You can navigate directly to the working directory at any time byselecting theWorking Directory common folder from the Navigator.

The new working directory setting is not saved upon exiting CreoParametric.

Opening FilesYou can use any of the following methods to open a file:


• Browse to the desired folder using the Navigator (either with CommonFolders or through the Folder Tree) to display its contents in the Webbrowser. Then, you can either double-click the file in the file list, orright-click the file in the file list and select Open.

• You can also drag the file from the file list into the graphics window.

• Click File > Open or click Open from the Quick Access toolbar andthe File Open dialog box appears. Browse to the file, select it, and eitherdouble-click it or click Open.

The File Open dialog box is the equivalent of the Navigator andBrowser combination in the main interface.

Saving FilesYou can use any of the following methods to save a file:

• Click File > Save.• Click Save from the Quick Access toolbar. By default, a file is saved tothe current working directory. However, if a file is retrieved from a directoryother than the working directory and then saved, the file saves to thedirectory from which it was retrieved.

Saving a Copy of FilesYou can also save a copy of an existing file by clicking File > Save As > Savea Copy. Saving a copy enables you to create an exact copy of a file, butwith a different name. When saving a copy of an assembly, you must alsodecide how to manage its dependent components. You can save a copy ofthe dependent components by renaming them with a suffix or specifying newnames for all of them, or you can decide not to save them at all.


PROCEDURE - Setting the Working Directory andOpening and Saving Files

Task 1: Set the working directory, open a file, and then save it.

1. In the Folder Browser , clickWorking Directory .• Click Folder Tree to expand it.• If necessary, expand theCreoParametric2 folder andclick File to view its contentsin the Web browser.

• Right-click the Sample_Topicfolder and select Set WorkingDirectory.

For each procedure inthis course, the workingdirectory to be set isspecified in the top header.

2. In the Web browser, double-clickSample_Topic to view itscontents.• Select NUT.PRT.• Click Preview at the bottom ofthe Web browser to expand it.

• Click the Preview windowedge and drag to expand it.

• In the Preview window,right-click and select Refit.

• Double-click NUT.PRT to openit.

3. Click Save from the Quick Access toolbar.• Click OK.

4. Click Close from the Quick Access toolbar.


Task 2: Set a new working directory, open a new model, and then save it.

1. In the Folder Tree, expand theSample_Topic folder.

2. Right-click Sample_Subfolderand select Set WorkingDirectory.

3. Double-click Sample_Subfolderto view its contents in the Webbrowser.

4. Double-click SCREW.PRT toopen it.

5. Click the Folder Browser .

6. In the Folder Tree, right-click theSample_Topic folder and selectSet Working Directory.

7. Click Save .• Notice that even though theworking directory is set toSample_Topic, the file issaved to Sample_Subfolder.

• Click OK.

8. Click Close from the QuickAccess toolbar.

9. Close the Folder Tree in the Folder Browser .



Understanding the Ribbon InterfaceMost modes of Creo Parametric have been reorganized into aribbon-style user interface.

• Ribbon structure:– File menu.– Tasks organized into a series

of tabs.– Tabs contain groups of

commands.– Current features stack up in

new tabs.• Command Search• ALT key shortcuts

Figure 1 – Standby Ribbon and HomeTab

Figure 2 – Portion of Active Part Ribbon, Model Tab, and Datum Group

Understanding the Ribbon InterfaceMost modes of Creo Parametric have been reorganized into a ribbon-styleuser interface. The ribbon appears above the graphics window. The ribbonstructure consists of the following:

• The File menu, which contains commonly used system commands.• Tasks, which are organized into a series of tabs.• Tabs, which contain groups of icon commands.• Current features being created, which stack up in subsequent ribbon tabs.For example, Extrude > Sketch > Rotate Resize.

Command SearchYou can activate the command search by clicking Command Search nextto the Creo Parametric Help icon. This activates the Command Searchfield, which enables you to type commands. As you begin typing a command,a list appears and dynamically filters results as you type.

When you cursor over any of the list’s results, the system locates andhighlights the command in the ribbon. If you select any of the list’s results,the command starts.


At the bottom of the list, you can click Setup to access the Command SearchSettings dialog box. The following options are available:

• Search in Help Text• Match Case• Match Criteria – The following options are available:– Begins with– Contains– Ends with

ALT Key ShortcutsIf you press and release ALT, shortcut letters display in the UI next to ribbonsand icons. You can then type those letters to activate the ribbon tab ordesired command.


PROCEDURE - Understanding the Ribbon Interface


Enhancements\Ribbon-Interface CREATE NEW

Task 1: Investigate the ribbon in Part mode.

1. Start Creo Parametric, if necessary.2. Notice the standby ribbon that displays by default.3. Select the File menu, and notice the commands.4. In the ribbon, select the Home tab if necessary, and notice the

available commands.

5. Click New and click OK in the New dialog box.6. Notice the Model tab.

7. Enable only the following Datum Display types: .

8. Locate and click the Datum groupto view additional commands.

9. From the Datum group, expandthe Point types drop-down menu.


10. In the ribbon, select the Analysistab.

11. Locate the Measure group.12. Expand the Measure types

drop-down menu.

13. Select the Tools tab.14. Locate the Model Intent group.

15. Select the View tab.16. Locate the Model Display group.

17. Select the Model tab.18. Click in the graphics window background.


19. Press and release ALT.20. Notice that the Analysis tab has

a shortcut of ‘A.’21. Press A on your keyboard.22. Notice that the Measure types

drop-down menu has a shortcutof ‘ME’.

23. Press ME on your keyboard.

24. Notice that Angle has ashortcut of ‘A.’

25. Press A on your keyboard again.26. Notice that the Measure dialog

box displays.27. Press CTRL and select datum

planes RIGHT and TOP.28. Close the Measure dialog box.

29. Click Command Search toenable it.

30. In the field, type gr, and noticethe commands that display.

31. Cursor over Graph, and noticeits location in the Datum group.

32. Click Graph from the CommandSearch.

33. Notice that the command hasstarted.

34. Click Cancel .

35. In the Command Searchfield, type fam and notice thecommands that display.

36. Cursor over each entry, andnotice that Family Table isavailable in two differentlocations.


37. In the Command Search field, typemap and notice that this commandis not in the ribbon by default, but can be activated.

38. Click Setup to view the different options.39. Click Cancel.40. Click Command Search to disable it.



Customizing the Ribbon InterfaceYou can customize the ribbon, Quick Access toolbar, and InGraphics toolbar in numerous ways to personalize it for yourwork style.

• Add or remove icons from theQuick Access toolbar or InGraphics toolbar.– There is an individual toolbar

for each mode.• Ribbon customizations:– Create new tabs or reorder

them.– Create new groups or customize

groups.– Specify large or small icons, or

with/without label.• Export settings or restore defaults.

Figure 1 – Datum Group andCustomized Datum Group

Figure 2 – Collapse Priorities

Customizing the Ribbon InterfaceYou can customize the ribbon, Quick Access toolbar, and In Graphics toolbarin numerous ways to personalize it for your work style. You can drag almostany icon onto the Quick Access toolbar so that it is available. You can alsocustomize commands in the In Graphics toolbar.The different ribbons that display when switching between modes such asPart, Assembly, and Sketcher are independently customizable. Furthermore,the Quick Access and In Graphics toolbars that display with each ribbonare independent as well, enabling you to maintain separate toolbarcustomizations for each mode.You can perform the following high level ribbon customizations:• Collapse or display the ribbon using Minimize the Ribbon . You canalso use the CTRL+F1 shortcut to minimize or restore the ribbon. You caneven double-click the tabs to minimize or restore it.

• Create new ribbon tabs.Within the ribbon, you can perform the following customizations to the tabs:• Reorder the tabs.• Select up to three groups to be included in a tab.


• Create custom tabs.Within the tabs, you can perform the following customizations on the groups:

• Customize group contents.• Create custom groups.• Collapse groups. The first icon in the group is shown as a large icon witha drop-down menu.

• Customize the collapse priority. As the Creo window is made narrower,groups begin to collapse, and they collapse based on the priority set. Forexample, priority 7 is collapsed first, and priority 1 is collapsed last.

Within the groups, you can perform the following customizations on the icons:

• Specify small icons or large icons.• Specify whether the icon image is displayed.• Specify whether the command label is displayed.

Saving Customizations and Restoring DefaultsYour new ribbon, Quick Access toolbar, and In Graphics toolbar settingscan be exported to a *.ui file. These *.ui files are read by Creo Parametricin the following order:

1. <loadpoint>\text\admin_creo_parametric_customization.ui• Note the admin_ prefix.

2. <user_profile>\AppData\..\creo_parametric_customization.ui• This is the system default location.

3. <working_dir>\creo_parametric_customization.ui• This file is read only if the config.pro option load_ui_customization_run_dir is set to yes.

You can always restore the default Creo Parametric settings.


PROCEDURE - Customizing the Ribbon Interface


Enhancements\Ribbon-Interface CREATE NEW

Task 1: Customize the ribbon in Part mode.

1. To ensure the ribbon and toolbars are set to their default state,right-click the ribbon and select Customize the Ribbon.

2. Click Restore Defaults and select Restore all Ribbon tabs andQuick Access Toolbar customizations.

3. Click Yes > OK.

4. Click New and click OK in the New dialog box.

5. Enable only the following Datum Display types: .6. Right-click the Part mode In Graphics toolbar and clear the Datum

Display Filters check box.• Select the Plane Display, Axis Display, Point Display, and CsysDisplay check boxes.

7. Click Close from the Quick Access toolbar.8. Click File > Manage Session, and cursor over Erase Not Displayed.

• Right-click and select Add to Quick Access Toolbar.

9. Click Open , select In Session , and double-clickPRT0001.PRT.

10. In the top right of the interface, click Minimize the Ribbon tominimize the ribbon.

11. Click Minimize the Ribbon again to restore the ribbon.12. Right-click over the ribbon and notice the Minimize the Ribbon

option.• Notice the CTRL+F1 shortcut for this option.

13. In the ribbon, right-click over theDatum group name.• Notice the options.


14. Click Extrude from theShapes group.

15. Right-click Datum in thefar-right side of the dashboard.• Clear the Minimize the Groupcheck box.

16. Click Cancel Feature .

17. Right-click the ribbon and selectCustomize the Ribbon.

18. In the ribbon, right-click Planeand select Small Button.

19. Right-click Sketch andselect Small Button.

20. Right-click Sketch again andselect Hide Command Label.

21. Click the Datum group drop-downmenu, and drag the Graphup.

22. Notice that the Datum group hasa collapse priority of 3.

23. In the ribbon, click the View tab and drag it to just after the Model tab.24. In the Creo Parametric Options dialog box, select Commands Not in

the Ribbon from the Choose commands drop-down list.25. These icons could be added to the ribbon if desired.

26. Notice the options in the dialogbox.

27. Notice the New Tab, NewGroup, and New Cascadeoptions as well as the others.

28. Click Import/Export andselect Export all Ribbonand Quick Access Toolbarcustomizations.

29. Notice that this would export a*.ui file.

30. Click Cancel.31. Click OK in the Creo Parametric

Options dialog box.



33. Click Erase Not Displayed from the Quick Access toolbar andclick OK.

34. Right-click the ribbon and select Customize the Ribbon.35. Click Restore Defaults and select Restore all Ribbon tabs and

Quick Access Toolbar customizations.36. Click Yes > OK.



Working with Multiple WindowsThe Window group contains commands for activating, opening,closing, and re-sizing Creo Parametric windows. You can alsoswitch between open windows.

• A window must be active to use allapplicable Creo Parametric features.

• The word Active appears on the title barof the active window next to the modelname.

• The active model has a dot next to itsname in the Windows drop-down list.

• You can switch between active windowsusing the Window group or QuickAccess toolbar.

Figure 1 – The Window Group

Figure 2 – Switching Between OpenWindows

Figure 3 – An Active Window

Working with Multiple WindowsCreo Parametric enables you to have multiple windows open at the sametime, each containing a different model. This is a common occurrenceduring the design process. However, at any given moment, all applicablefunctionality is available only on one active window.You can use the Window group in the View ribbon tab to access commandsfor working with multiple windows.

Switching the Active Model WindowWhen you switch the active window, you automatically switch the activemodel to the one in that window. You can switch windows and thus activate amodel using either of the following methods:

• ClickWindows in the Quick Access toolbar to select the desired model.• Click Windows in the Window group of the View ribbon tab to selectthe desired model.

If you switch windows using the Windows taskbar, the newlyselected window is not made active. In the Window group in the

View ribbon tab you can click Activate to activate the newlyselected window.


Determining the Active WindowYou can determine which window is active in two different ways:

• The word Active appears on the title bar of the active window next to themodel name.

• The active model has its dot filled in next to its name when you clickWindows .

Other Window Group FunctionsIn addition to activating windows and switching between open windows, thefollowing additional functions are available in the Window group:

• Create a new window – When a part or assembly is open, click the Windowgroup drop-down menu and select New to create a new window withthe current object present in the new window. This new window becomesthe active window.

• Close a window – Clicking Close from the Window group closes theactive window. If there was an object in that window, the object remainsin memory. If only one window was open, the object is removed from thewindow and the window remains open.

In addition, you can always click Close in the Quick Accesstoolbar to close the window.

• Resize a window – You can resize the Creo Parametric window by clickingthe Window group drop-down menu and selecting Maximize , Restore

and Default Size. You can also click the maximize or minimize buttonsin the window's title bar.


Managing Files in Creo ParametricCreo Parametric is a memory-based system, meaning that filesare stored within RAM while you work on them.

• An object in system memory is InSession.

• Erasing memory (RAM)– Erase Current– Erase Not Displayed

• Version numbers are increased byone each time you save the model.

• Deleting models– Delete All Versions– Delete Old Versions

• Renaming models– Rename on disk and in session.– Rename in session.

Figure 1 – In Session in the FolderBrowser and File Open Dialog Box

Figure 2 – The Rename Dialog Box Figure 3 – Model Versions

Understanding In Session Memory and Erasing Models from ItCreo Parametric is a memory-based system, which means that files youcreate and edit are stored within system memory (RAM) while you areworking on them. It is important to remember that until you save your files,you risk losing them if there is a power outage or system crash. When amodel is in system memory, it is referred to as being In Session.Models are stored In Session (in system memory, or RAM) until you eithererase them or exit Creo Parametric. When you close the window thatcontains a model, the model is still In Session. This is especially importantif you are working on files that have the same name but are in variousstages of completion, such as in this course. Both the Folder Browser andFile Open dialog boxes provide icons which enable you to display only InSession models.There are two different methods to erase models from session:• Current – Only the model in the current window is erased from systemmemory (and the window closed). You can click File > Manage Session >Erase Current to erase the current window's contents from system memory.

• Not Displayed – Only erases from system memory those models that arenot found in any Creo Parametric windows. You can click File > Manage


Session > Erase Not Displayed or you can add the Erase Not Displayedicon to the Quick Access toolbar.

Erasing models does not delete them from the hard drive or network storagearea; it only removes them from that session.

Understanding Version NumbersEvery time you save an object, you write it to disk. Rather than overwritingthe current file on disk, the system creates a new version of the file on diskand assigns it with a version number that increments each time the file issaved. This is also known as a dot number, and can be seen in Figure 3.

Deleting ModelsDeleting files permanently removes them from the working directory on yourhard drive or network storage area. Be careful when deleting files; youcannot undo the deletion of files.

There are two different methods to delete models:

• Old Versions – The system deletes all but the latest version of the given file.• All Versions – The system deletes all versions of the given file.

Renaming ModelsIf you need to edit the name of any model, you can rename it directly fromwithin Creo Parametric.

There are two different methods to rename models:

• On Disk and In Session – The system renames the file both in systemmemory and on the hard drive.

• In Session – The system renames the file only in system memory.

Problems can result if you rename a file on disk and then retrievea model (not already in session) that depends on the previous filename; for example, a part cannot be found for an assembly.


PROCEDURE - Managing Files in Creo Parametric


File\Managing DRILL_BIT_BLACK.PRT

Task 1: Open and close files to understand the In Session concept.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Click Close from the Quick Access toolbar.3. Click File > Manage Session > Erase Not Displayed and click OK

from the Erase Not Displayed dialog box.

4. Click Working Directory from the Folder Browser to view theworking directory contents in the Web browser.

5. In the Web browser, double-click DRILL_BIT_BLACK.PRT to openit again.

6. Click Folder Browser fromthe top of the model tree.

7. Click Working Directory .8. In the Web browser, double-click

DRILL_BIT_GRAY.PRT to openit.

9. Click Close from theQuick Access toolbar toclose the window containingDRILL_BIT_GRAY.PRT. Thisleaves DRILL_BIT_BLACK.PRTstill open.

10. ClickWeb Browser to togglethe Web browser window off.


12. In the Folder Browser, click InSession to view in sessioncontents in the Web browser.• Right-click DRILL_BIT_GRAY.PRT and select Open.


13. Click Close from the QuickAccess toolbar.

14. Click File > Manage Session >Erase Not Displayed.

15. Click OK in the Erase NotDisplayed dialog box to eraseDRILL_BIT_GRAY.PRT fromsystem memory.


17. Click In Session from theFolder Browser. Notice thatDRILL_BIT_GRAY.PRT is nolonger in session memory.

18. ClickWeb Browser to togglethe Web browser window off.

Task 2: Rename DRILL_BIT_BLACK.PRT and erase it from session.

1. Click File > Manage File >Rename.

2. In the Rename dialog box,edit the New Name toDRILL_BIT_NEW.

3. Verify that the Rename ondisk and in session option isselected.

4. Click OK to complete the renameaction.

5. Click Close .6. Click File > Manage Session >

Erase Not Displayed.7. Click OK in the Erase Not

Displayed dialog box.



Understanding Datum Display OptionsYou can independently control the display of datum entities anddatum tags in the graphics window.

Figure 1 – Datum Display Options

• Datum entities include:– Datum planes– Datum axes– Datum points– Coordinate systems

• Datum tags include:– Plane Tag Display– Axis Tag Display– Point Tag Display– Csys Tag Display

Figure 2 – Datum Tag Display

Setting Datum DisplayDatum entities are 2-D reference geometry that you use for building featuregeometry, orienting models, dimensioning, measuring, and assembling.There are four main datum types:• Datum planes• Datum axes• Datum points• Coordinate systemsThe display of each of these datum types is controlled independently byclicking the following icons from either the Show group in the View ribbon tabor the In Graphics toolbar:

• Plane Display – Enable/disable datum plane display.

• Axis Display – Enable/disable datum axis display.

• Point Display – Enable/disable datum point display.


• Csys Display – Enable/disable datum coordinate system display.

The initial datum display for a given exercise is included in step 1for that exercise. For example, consider the following:Enable only the following Datum Display types: .This indicates that you should display datum planes only, andthat you should not display datum axes, datum points, or datumcoordinate systems.

Setting Datum Tag DisplayEach datum entity has a name associated with it, for example, datum planeFRONT. The datums display in the model tree with this name, and youcan display the tags in the graphics window as well. By default, only thecoordinate system tags display.

The display of each of these datum tag types is controlled independently byclicking the following icons from the Show group in the View ribbon tab:

• Plane Tag Display – Enable/disable display of datum plane tags.

• Axis Tag Display – Enable/disable display of datum axis tags.

• Point Tag Display – Enable/disable display of datum point tags.

• Csys Tag Display – Enable/disable display of datum coordinatesystem tags.


PROCEDURE - Understanding Datum Display Options


View\Display_Datum DATUM-DISPLAY.PRT

Task 1: Edit the datum display.


2. Enable Plane Display .3. In the ribbon, select the View

tab.4. Enable Plane Tag Display

from the Show group.

5. Disable Plane Display .

6. Enable Axis Display .

7. Enable Axis Tag Display .

8. Disable Axis Display .

9. Enable Point Display .

10. Enable Point Tag Display .

11. Disable Point Display .

12. Enable Csys Display .

13. Disable Csys Display .

14. Disable Plane Tag Display ,Axis Tag Display , and PointTag Display .



Understanding Display Style OptionsYou can modify the display style of models in the graphicswindow.

• Display style options:– Shading With Edges– Shading With

Reflections– Shading– No Hidden– Hidden Line– Wireframe

Figure 1 – Display Style Options

Understanding Display Style OptionsThere are six different 3-D model display options in the graphics window:

• Shading With Edges – The model is shaded according to vieworientation and its edges are highlighted.

• Shading With Reflections – The model is shaded according to vieworientation. Shadows and a reflection are placed on an imaginary floordirectly below the model.

• Shading — The model is shaded according to the view orientation.Hidden lines are not visible in shaded view display.

• No Hidden – Hidden lines in the model are not displayed.

• Hidden Line – By default, hidden lines in the model are displayed in aslightly lighter color than visible lines.

• Wireframe – Hidden lines are displayed as regular lines (all lines arethe same color).

In Figure 1, the same model is displayed in six different ways. Clockwise fromthe top left, the display is Shading With Reflections, Shading With Edges,Shading, Wireframe, Hidden Line, and No Hidden.

Repainting the ScreenYou can repaint a view to remove all temporarily displayed information.

Repainting redraws the screen, and is performed by clicking Repaintfrom the In Graphics toolbar.


PROCEDURE - Understanding Display Style Options


View\Display_Style DISPLAY-STYLE.PRT

Task 1: Edit the model display style.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.2. In the ribbon, select the View

tab.3. Select Shading With

Reflections from theDisplay Style types drop-downmenu in the Model Displaygroup.

4. Select Shading With Edgesfrom the Display Style types

drop-down menu in the ModelDisplay group.

5. Select Shading from theDisplay Style types drop-downmenu in the Model Displaygroup.


6. In the In Graphics toolbar, selectNo Hidden from the DisplayStyle types drop-down menu.

7. In the In Graphics toolbar, selectHidden Line from the DisplayStyle types drop-down menu.

8. In the In Graphics toolbar, selectWireframe from the DisplayStyle types drop-down menu.

9. In the In Graphics toolbar, selectShading from the DisplayStyle types drop-down menu.



Analyzing Basic 3-D OrientationManipulate the 3-D orientation of your design models in the CreoParametric graphics window.

Figure 1 – 3-D Orientations using theKeyboard and Mouse

• Keyboard/mouseorientation:– Spin– Pan– Zoom– Turn– Wheel Zoom

• Additional orientationoptions:– Previous– Refit– Named View List– Spin Center

Figure 2 – The Spin Center

Orientation using Keyboard and Mouse CombinationsTo view a model in a specific orientation, you can spin, pan, and zoom themodel using a combination of keyboard and mouse functions. For eachorientation, you press and hold a key and click the appropriate mouse button,as shown in the following table:

Orientation Keyboard and Mouse Selection

Spin

Pan



Zoom

Turn

Cursor over the area of interest before zooming in. The zoom function usesthe cursor position as its area of focus. You can also zoom by using the scrollwheel. To control the level of zoom, press a designated key while using thescroll wheel, as shown in the following table:

Zoom Level Keyboard and Mouse Selection

Zoom

Fine Zoom

Coarse Zoom

Additional Orientation OptionsIn addition to using keyboard and mouse combinations, the followingadditional model orientation options are available:

• Previous – Reverts the model to the previously displayed orientation.

• Refit – Refits the entire model in the graphics window.

• Named Views — Displays a list of saved view orientations availablefor a given model. Select the name of the desired saved view, and themodel reorients to the selected view. The default Creo Parametric templateincludes the following views:– Standard Orientation – The initial 3-D orientation which cannot be

altered.– Default Orientation – Similar to the Standard Orientation, but its

orientation can be redefined to a different orientation.– BACK, BOTTOM, FRONT, LEFT, RIGHT, and TOP.

• Spin Center – Enables and disables the spin center. When enabled,the model spins about the location of the spin center. When disabled, themodel spins about the cursor location. Disabling the spin center can beuseful when orienting a long model, such as a shaft.


PROCEDURE - Analyzing Basic 3-D Orientation


View\3D_Orientation ORIENT.ASM

Task 1: Use saved views.


2. Click Named Views from theIn Graphics toolbar and selectTOP.

3. Click Named Views andselect LEFT.

4. Click Named Views andselect Default Orientation.

Task 2: Use the spin center.

1. Middle-click and drag to spin the assembly.2. Spin the assembly again in a different direction.3. Spin the assembly in a third direction.

The assembly is spinning about the spin center.

4. Click Named Views and select Standard Orientation.

5. Click Spin Center from the In Graphics toolbar to disable it.

6. Cursor over the lower portionof the assembly, near theCHUCK_2.PRT, and spin theassembly.

7. In the ribbon, select the Viewtab.

8. Click Previous from theOrientation group.

9. Cursor over the upper portionof the assembly and spin theassembly. Notice that the centerof rotation is the cursor location.

10. Click Spin Center from theIn Graphics toolbar to enable it.


Task 3: Pan the assembly.

1. Press and hold SHIFT, and thenmiddle-click and drag to pan theassembly.

2. Click Named Views andselect Standard Orientation.

Task 4: Turn the assembly.

1. Press and hold CTRL, andthen middle-click and drag tothe left to turn the assemblycounterclockwise.

2. Press and hold CTRL, and thenmiddle-click and drag to the rightto turn the assembly clockwise.


Task 5: Zoom in and out of the assembly.

1. Press and hold CTRL, and then middle-click and drag upward tozoom out.

2. Press and hold CTRL, and then middle-click and drag downwardto zoom in.

3. If your mouse is equipped with a wheel:• Roll the mouse wheel away from you to zoom out.• Roll the mouse wheel towards you to zoom in.• Press and hold CTRL, and then roll the mouse wheel away fromyou to coarsely zoom out.

• Press and hold SHIFT, and then roll the mouse wheel towards youto finely zoom in.



5. Cursor over the hole next to theteeth. Press and hold CTRL,then middle-click and dragdownward to zoom in to the hole.

6. Click Refit from the In Graphics toolbar to refit the model.



Understanding the View ManagerThe view manager is a powerful, content-sensitive dialog boxthat enables you to edit how a model displays in the graphicswindow.

• Use the view manager tocreate and manage:– Simplified representations– View orientations– Style states– Cross-sections– Explode states– Layer states

Figure 1 – The View Manager

Understanding the View ManagerThe view manager is a content-sensitive dialog box that enables you to edithow a model displays in the graphics window. The view manager containsnumerous tabs that enable you to create and manage the following:

• Simplified representations• View orientations• Style states• Cross-sections• Explode states• Layer statesSome important facts about the view manager include:

• The active item is indicated by a red arrow next to its name. In Figure 1,the active view orientation is the Front.

• A plus sign after the name of the active item indicates that it has changed.You can either save the modified item to capture what has changed, ordouble-click it or another item to dismiss the changes. In Figure 1, vieworientation Front has been modified from how it was saved.


Creating and Managing View OrientationsYou can create and edit view orientations using the ViewManager and Orientation dialog boxes.

• Orientation dialog box:– Orient by reference.– Two references and two

directions required.– You can reorient existing view

orientations.

Figure 1 – Typical TOP ViewOrientation

Figure 2 – Typical LEFT ViewOrientation

Figure 3 – Typical FRONTView Orientation

Saved View OrientationA model displays in a certain view orientation when it is first created andany time it is retrieved. In addition to using mouse and keyboard methodsto orient a model, you can create predefined view orientations and savethem as part of the model. This enables you to set the model orientation in arepeatable, consistent manner for company standards, drawing creation, andquick navigation. Not only does a saved view capture the model's orientation,it also captures the model's level of zoom in the graphics window.

Creating a New View OrientationYou can create a new view orientation using the view manager or theOrientation dialog box. When you create a new view orientation, a defaultname is created for your view. If desired, you can edit the view name. Thenew view orientation is automatically created at the current model orientation.


You can edit the view orientation by redefining it. The Orientation dialog boxenables you to specifically define your model orientation, compared to usingkeyboard and mouse functions, which are more approximate.

The view orientations that display in the Orient tab of the viewmanager are the same as those that are displayed in the NamedViews and Orientation dialog box.

Orient by ReferenceOne method of changing the model orientation in the Orientation dialog box isto Orient by reference. The Orient by reference option enables you to selectreferences by which to orient the model. Two directions and two referencesare required to orient a model.

You can click Undo from the Orientation dialog box to undo any changes youmade. The model returns to its most current view state.

Creating View Orientations in the Orientation Dialog BoxYou can click Reorient from the bottom of the Named Viewsdrop-down list in the In Graphics toolbar or from the Orientation group in theView tab to open the Orientation dialog box directly. This method displaysthe saved views directly inside of the dialog box. Therefore, you can Orientby reference and save a new view orientation directly within the dialog box,which is an alternative to using the view manager.


PROCEDURE - Creating and Managing View Orientations


View\Orientation MANAGE_ORIENT.ASM

Task 1: Create view orientations with the view manager.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.2. Orient the model as shown.

3. Click View Manager fromthe In Graphics toolbar.• Select the Orient tab and clickNew.

• Edit the name to 3D-1 andpress ENTER.

4. In the view manager, double-click Default Orientation, and thendouble-click 3D-1.

5. Zoom in on the assembly asshown.

6. In the view manager, click New.• Edit the Orientation name toConn_Rod and press ENTER.

• Click Close.

Task 2: Create view orientations with the Reorient dialog box.

1. Click Named Views and select Default Orientation.

2. Click Named Views andselect Reorient .

3. Select the surface in the upperfigure as Reference 1.

4. Select the surface in the lowerfigure as Reference 2.

5. Edit the Reference 2 directionfrom Top to Left.

6. Spin the assembly as necessaryand select the surface in thelower figure again as Reference2.


7. In the Orientation dialog box,expand the Saved Views area ifnecessary.• In the Name field, type thename of the saved view asCYL_HOLE.

• Click Save > OK.

Task 3: Redefine view orientations with the view manager.

1. Click View Manager .• Double-click 3D-1.

2. Orient the model as shown.3. In the view manager, right-click

3D-1(+) and select Save.4. Click OK in the Save Display

Elements dialog box.

5. In the viewmanager, double-clickCyl_Hole.• Right-click Cyl_Hole andselect Redefine.

6. Orient the assembly as shown7. Select the surface shown in

the upper figure as the newReference 1.• In the graphics window, selectthe surface shown in the lowerfigure as the new Reference 2.

• Click OK in the Orientationdialog box.

8. Click Close from the viewmanager.



Creating Style States Using the View ManagerCreate a style state in an assembly to capture components invarious displays and visibilities.

• Style states are only created in assemblies.• You can set individual model display (shaded, transparent, wireframe,hidden line, no hidden) independent of the rest of the assembly or othercomponents.

Figure 1 – Style State Example

Style States TheoryA style state is a captured state of component visibility in an assembly.You can vary component visibility independently of other components. Forexample, you can set one component to be displayed as shaded, set anotherto be displayed as wireframe, and set still another to be displayed as nohidden. In Figure 1, the component display of the cylinder head has beenedited, while the remainder of the assembly remains shaded.

If you redefine a style state you can also edit its component displayto “blank,” or turn off, the display of any component in the assembly.

Creating a Style StateTo create a new style state, click New in the Style tab of the view manager. Ifdesired, edit the default style name and press ENTER. The Edit dialog boxopens, enabling you to blank (or, in other words, turn off) components fromthe graphics window. You can select components either from the graphicswindow or from the model tree. You can also select the Show tab and thenset the method of model display. As you select components, their modeldisplay changes to the method currently selected in the Edit dialog box.


As you define component visibilities and displays, the model tree displayswhich settings have been specified for the components. When you finishcreating the style state, the graphics window displays the name of the stylestate in the bottom left corner.

You can also create style states by first editing component displays, and thencapturing the displays in a style state.

There are two default style states in every assembly: Default Style andMaster Style. The Master Style cannot be modified, but the Default Stylecan be modified.


PROCEDURE - Creating Style States Using the ViewManager


View\Style_States STYLE_STATES.ASM

Task 1: Create a style state using the view manager.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.2. In the graphics window, select

the CYLINDER_4.PRT.3. In the ribbon, select the View

tab.4. Click the Model Display group

drop-down menu and selectComponent Display Style > NoHidden.

5. Click View Manager fromthe In Graphics toolbar.

6. In the view manager, select theStyle tab.• Right-click Master Style(+)and select Save.

7. In the Save Display Elementsdialog box, edit the Style name toCyl_No_Hidden and click OK.

8. In the viewmanager, double-clickMaster Style.• Double-click Cyl_No_Hidden.


Task 2: Create another style state based on the CYL_NO_HIDDEN stylestate.

1. In the graphics window, pressand hold CTRL and select theENG_BLOCK_FRONT_4.PRTand ENG_BLOCK_REAR_4.PRT.

2. Click the Model Display groupdrop-down menu and selectComponent Display Style >Transparent.

3. In the view manager, right-clickCyl_No_Hidden(+) and selectSave.

4. In the Save Display Elementsdialog box, edit the Style nameto Castings_Transparent andclick OK.

5. In the viewmanager, double-clickMaster Style.

6. Click Close.



Managing and Editing AppearancesYou can create and manage appearances and apply them toyour models.

• A company-standardappearance file is common.

• Use the AppearancesManager to manage, create,and edit appearances.

• Use the AppearanceGallery to select and applyappearances.

• Apply appearances to parts,surfaces, or components.

• Clear selected or allappearances.

Figure 2 – AppearancesApplied

Figure 1 – The Appearances Manager

Managing and Editing AppearancesA new model is assigned a grayish, solid appearance by default. Theappearance palette can be used to set a new appearance for an entire model,surface, or component in an assembly. The appearance gallery contains a listof user-defined appearances that a company typically creates and distributesas its standards. Your company-specific appearance gallery is usually loadedautomatically when you launch Creo Parametric.Appearances within Creo Parametric typically revolve around three maintasks:• Creating and editing appearances.• Applying and clearing appearances.• Managing appearances.

The Appearance GalleryYou access the appearance gallery from the Appearance Gallery typesdrop-down menu. The appearance gallery is divided into three distinctpalettes:


• My Appearances – Displays a list of available user-defined appearances.• Model – Displays the appearances that are applied to a component, part,or surface display.

• Library – Displays a predefined library of appearances from which to use.These libraries accurately simulate real world materials including metalsand plastics. You can switch the library that is displayed by expandingthe drop-down list next to it.

The Appearances ManagerThe appearances manager enables you to manage your appearances. You

access the appearances manager by selecting Appearances Managerfrom the Appearance Gallery types drop-down menu. The AppearancesManager dialog box contains both the contents of the appearance gallery onthe left and the appearance editor on the right.

Creating and Editing AppearancesAn appearance consists of both Color and Highlight Color. You can modifythe properties of both within the appearance editor to create your desiredappearance. You can even apply textures and decals to your appearance.

To edit an appearance within the appearances manager, you must first copyit into the My Appearances palette. You can copy the appearance from theLibrary palette or Model palette by right-clicking and selecting Copy to MyAppearances. You can also select an appearance in the My Appearancespalette and click New Appearance , which copies the appearance to anew name.

You can also edit an appearance by right-clicking it in the appearance galleryand selecting Edit. This launches the Appearance Editor.

Use preexisting appearances as a starting point to quickly and easilycreate new appearances.

Applying AppearancesOnce an appearance has been created, you can apply it to entire part models,part surfaces, or components in an assembly. You can use the selection filter,if necessary, to filter the item that you wish to apply the appearance. If anappearance is assigned to a part at the assembly level, the appearance issaved in the context of the assembly and does not change the appearanceof the part at the part level. You can select the appearance first and thenapply it to the reference, or you can select the reference first and then applythe appearance.

To apply an appearance, you first select it from the Appearance Gallery typesdrop-down menu in the Model Display group. This selected appearance isnow the active appearance, and is the appearance that is applied to theselected references. You can also search for the appearance using theSearch field at the top of the appearance gallery and appearances manager.Clicking the upper half of the Appearance Gallery types drop-down menuenables you to apply the last active appearance.


Model Appearances versus My AppearancesAppearances that are applied to a component, part, or surface display in theModel palette of the appearance gallery and appearances manager. Youcan modify a Model appearance either within the appearances manager orwithin the model appearance editor. This enables you to replace, or edit, theModel appearance to dynamically change all applied occurrences withoutaffecting the appearance located in the My Appearances palette. Onceyou are satisfied with the modified appearance, you can copy it into the MyAppearances palette within the appearances manager.

Clearing AppearancesTo clear appearances applied to a part or surface, you can either click ClearAppearance or Clear All Appearances from the appearance gallery.When clearing an appearance, you are prompted to select the references fromwhich you want the appearance removed. However, the Model appearanceis still retained. You can also click Clear Assembly Appearances fromthe appearance gallery to clear only assembly appearances.

For a part, clearing all appearances removes all Model appearances andreverts the part to its default assigned appearance. For an assembly, clearingall appearances removes all Model appearances and returns the componentsto the appearances they were assigned at the part level.


PROCEDURE - Managing and Editing Appearances


View\Appearance APPEARANCE.ASM

Task 1: Copy a library appearance into the My Appearances palette.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.2. Select Appearances Manager

from the Appearance Gallerytypes drop-down menu in theModel Display group.

3. In the Appearances Managerdialog box, select the drop-downin the Library palette and selectstd-metals.dmt, if necessary.• Click File > Open.• Select APPEARANCE.DMTand click Open.

• Click Override all, ifnecessary.

4. Right-click the ptc-std-aluminum-polishedappearance and select Copy toMy Appearances.

5. Locate and select this newappearance from the MyAppearances section.

6. Click Close.

Task 2: Apply an appearance to assembly components.

1. Press and hold CTRL and selectGEARBOX_REAR_5.PRT andGEARBOX_FRONT_5.PRT.

2. Select the ptc-std-aluminum-polished appearance fromthe Appearance Gallery typesdrop-down menu.


Task 3: Copy and edit an appearance.

1. Select Appearances Manager from the Appearance Gallerytypes drop-down menu.

2. Select the ptc-std-aluminum-polished appearance spherefrom the Model section.

3. Right-click and select Copy toMy Appearances.

4. In the My Appearances sectionof the dialog box, select the new<ptc-std-aluminum-polished>appearance, edit the nameto aluminum-polished-transparent and press ENTER.

5. Drag the Transparency slider to70 and click Close.

6. Select the aluminum-polished-transparent appearance fromthe Appearance Gallery typesdrop-down menu.

7. Press and hold CTRL and selectGEARBOX_REAR_5.PRT andGEARBOX_FRONT_5.PRT andthen click OK.


Task 4: Create a new appearance.

1. In the ribbon, select the Toolstab.

2. Click Appearances Manager

from the Utilities group.3. In the My Appearances section

of the dialog box, select theupper-left appearance sphere,ref_color1 .• Click New Appearance

to copy the ref_color1appearance.

• Edit the new appearanceName to MyColor1 and pressENTER.

4. In the Basic tab, click the Colorrectangle to edit the color.• Expand the RGB/HSV Slidersection.

• Edit the RGB colors to 127,137, and 145, and click OK >Close.

Task 5: Apply an appearance to a part.

1. In the graphics window, selectCHUCK_5.PRT .

2. Right-click and select Open.3. Select the View tab and select

the MyColor1 appearance fromthe Appearance Gallery typesdrop-down menu.

4. Select CHUCK_5.PRT from themodel tree and click OK.


5. Click Close to view the newpart appearance in the assembly.

Task 6: Apply an appearance to a group of surfaces.

1. In the model tree, expandDRILL_CHUCK_5.ASM andselect CHUCK_COLLAR_5.PRT.

2. Right-click and select Open.3. Select the View tab and select

the black appearance fromthe Appearance Gallery typesdrop-down menu.

4. Press and hold CTRL, and selectthe five surfaces shown.

5. Click OK.

6. Click Close to view the newpart surface appearance in theassembly.



Setting Up New Part ModelsYour company can create customized templates that can beused to create new part models.

Figure 1 – New Part Created usingTemplate

• Create new parts using theNew dialog box.

• Use customized parttemplates.

• Part templates include:– Datums– Layers– Units– Parameters– View Orientations

Figure 2 – Examples ofParameters

Figure 3 – Layers Created fromPart Template

Creating New PartsYou can create new part models within Creo Parametric by clicking File >New, or clicking New . You type the name of the part and select whetheryou want to use a default template. Unless you select the Empty template, thenew part displays in the graphics window with some default datum features.

Using TemplatesNew models should be created using a template. Your company has mostlikely created customized templates for you to use. Using a template to createa new model is beneficial because it means that, regardless of who createdit, the model contains the same consistent set of information, including:


• Datums – Most templates contain a set of default datum planes and defaultcoordinate system, all named appropriately.

• Layers – When every model contains the same layers, management ofboth the layers and items on the layer is easier.

• Units – Most companies have a company standard for units in their models.Creating every model with the same set of units ensures that mistakesare not made.

• Parameters – Every model can have the same standard metadatainformation.

• View Orientations – Ensuring that every model contains the same standardview orientations aids the modeling process.

Viewing and Creating ParametersParameters are metadata information that can be included in a modeltemplate or created by a user in his own part or assembly. Parameters areimportant because they enable you to add additional information into part andassembly models. Parameters have several uses:

• Parameters can drive dimension values through relations, or be drivenby relations.

• Parameters can be used as a column in a family table. For example, theparameter Cost might have a different value for each instance.

• Parameter values can be reported in drawings, or viewed with datamanagement tools such as Pro/INTRALINK or Windchill solutions.

• User parameters can be added at the model level (part, assembly, orcomponent) or to a feature or pattern.

You can view a model’s parameters and create new ones by clickingParameters from the Model Intent group in the ribbon.

You can create parameters that accept the following types of values:

• Real Number – Any numerical value. For example 25.5, 1.666667, 10.5E3,and PI.

• Integer – Any whole number. For example 1, 5, and 257.• String – Any consecutive sequence of alphanumeric characters (lettersor numbers).

• Yes/No – Accepts either the YES or NO value.


PROCEDURE - Setting Up New Part Models


File\New_Part CREATE NEW

Task 1: Create a new part by selecting a template.

1. Without an open model, noticeonly the Home tab displays inthe ribbon.

2. Click New from the QuickAccess toolbar.• Select Part as the Type andSolid as the Sub-type.

• Edit the Name to new_part.• Clear the Use defaulttemplate check box.

• Click OK.3. In the New File Options

dialog box, select themmns_part_solid template.• Click OK.

4. Enable only the following DatumDisplay types: .

5. Explore the default datumfeatures created in the graphicswindow and model tree.

6. Notice that the ribbon haspopulated with tabs specific tothe type of open file.

7. In the model tree, click Showand select Layer Tree.

Notice the default layers.


8. Click File > Prepare > ModelProperties to access the ModelProperties dialog box.• Notice the units that are set.• Click Close.

9. Click the Model Intent group drop-down menu and select Parameters.

10. In the Parameters dialog box, click in the Description parameterValue field.• Edit the value to NEW PART and press ENTER.• Click New Parameter and edit the Name to PURCHASED.• Edit the Type to Yes No and notice the default value of NO.• Click New Parameter and edit the Name to PART_NUMBER.• Edit the Type to Integer.• Click in the Value field and edit the number to 596289.• Click OK.

11. Click Named Views . Noticethe default view orientations.

12. Click Named Views againto close it.

Task 2: Create a new part by selecting a different template.

1. Click New from the QuickAccess toolbar.• Edit the Name toselect_template.

• Clear the Use defaulttemplate check box.

• Click OK.2. In the New File Options dialog

box, select the inlbs_part_solidtemplate and click OK.

3. Again, notice the datum features.


4. Click File > Prepare > ModelProperties to access the ModelProperties dialog box.

5. Notice the units that are set.6. Click Close.




Module4Selecting Geometry, Features, and Models

Module OverviewBefore you can edit design models or create new features on models, youmust be able to select within Creo Parametric. Selection enables you tochoose features, geometry in a part model, or components in an assembly.

In this module, you learn the different methods available for selecting itemsin Creo Parametric and become familiar with the feedback that the systemprovides you both before and after you select an item.

ObjectivesAfter completing this module, you will be able to:• Understand the basic Creo Parametric mouse controls, keyboard shortcuts,and color feedback.

• Use drag handles and dimension draggers.• Understand the purpose of the model tree, its basic columns, and availabledisplay filters.

• Select items using Direct Selection, Query Selection, and the Search Tool.• Select multiple components• Filter the selection of items using Selection Filters.


Understanding Creo Parametric Basic ControlsThe graphics window provides you with color-based feedback tomouse and keyboard inputs.

• System color assignments in thegraphics window:– Transparent light green –

Preselection highlighting– Wireframe green – Selected

features– Dark green – Selected surfaces– Orange – Preview geometry or

component– Purple – Partially constrained

component• Keyboard and mouse actionsperform different functions.

Figure 1 – Preselection Highlighting

Figure 2 – Selected Feature

Figure 3 – Selected Surface Figure 4 – Preview Geometry

Understanding Color-Based FeedbackCreo Parametric provides you with color-based feedback during variousoperations that you perform on models in the graphics window. The followinglist explains the system color assignments:• Transparent light green: Preselection highlighting – When you cursor overa model or an area of a model, various geometry becomes shaded in thetransparent light green color. This is called Preselection Highlighting, whichis an indicator of what would be selected if you were to click that location.

• Wireframe green: Selected features – Once you cursor over and select afeature, it highlights in wireframe green.

• Dark green: Selected surfaces – Selected surfaces display in dark green.• Orange: Preview geometry or component – New feature geometry in amodel previews in orange, enabling you to preview the completed model.Similarly, a newly assembled component that is fully constrained alsopreviews in orange.


• Purple: Preview Component Assembly – While you are assembling a newcomponent in an assembly, the new component displays in purple. Oncethe component is fully constrained, it displays in orange.

Preview colors are very beneficial because they provide feedbackas you create valid geometry.

Mouse and Keyboard Controls for Making SelectionsDifferent combinations of keyboard and mouse controls enable you to usedifferent methods to make different selections. The following table displaysthe keyboard and mouse selections that comprise various selection types:

Selection Type Keyboard and MouseSelection

Preselection Highlighting (Transparentgreen color) Over Geometry

Query to Next Item (Feature orComponent Beneath) Until Highlighted

Select Highlighted Geometry (Opaquegreen color) or Select Features(Wireframe green color)

Add or Remove Items from Selection

Select Range of Geometry (Chain/SetSelection)

Clear Selection On Background


Using Drag Handles and Dimension DraggersDrag handles and dimension draggers are graphical objectsused to manipulate geometry, components, or dimensionsduring creation, editing, or redefinition in real time.

• Drag handles are used to:– Resize geometry.– Reorient geometry.– Move geometry.– Reference geometry.– Adjust component offset.– Access context-sensitive

options by right-clicking.• Dimension draggers are used to:– Dynamically adjust dimension

values.Figure 1 – Dragging Extrude Depth

Figure 2 – Adjusting Distance Offset Figure 3 – Dragging the Cut Height

Using Drag HandlesDrag handles are small, white squares that display in the graphics window.These graphical objects are used to manipulate geometry during creation,editing, or redefinition in real time. Using your mouse, drag the handles toresize or reorient geometry, move feature geometry in a model, or referencegeometry. In an assembly, drag the handle to adjust component offset. Yourchanges display dynamically in the graphics window. Right-click a draghandle to access context-sensitive menu options.

You can specify various keyboard and mouse combinations to modify how thedrag handle is used. The following table displays dragging options comprisedof various keyboard and mouse combinations performed on a drag handle.


Dragging Option Keyboard and MouseSelection

Adjust Drag Handle — Resize, reorient,move, and reference geometry; adjustcomponent offset.

Snap Drag Handle — Referencegeometry, such as a datum plane, edge,point, vertex, or surface.

Access context-sensitive menu options.

Using Dimension DraggersWhen editing or redefining features or sketching entities, the arrow heads ofcertain dimensions become filled white dimension draggers, as shown inFigure 3. Dimension draggers are graphical arrow heads used to manipulatedimensions while sketching, editing or redefining geometry. Using yourmouse, drag a dimension dragger to dynamically adjust its correspondingdimension value. The resulting dependent geometry also updates in real time.


Using Keyboard ShortcutsKeyboard shortcuts are used to quickly perform commonly usedfunctions.

Figure 1 – The CTRL Key

• You can use keyboard shortcuts toperform:– Common file operations.– Common edit operations.– Common view operations.

Figure 2 – Keyboard and Mouse

Using Keyboard ShortcutsYou can use various keyboard shortcuts to quickly perform commonly usedfunctions. Keyboard shortcuts facilitate a more efficient experience in theuser interface by eliminating the need to move the mouse to make icon ormenu selections.

Except for the Delete operation, all keyboard shortcuts use the CTRLkey on your keyboard in conjunction with another letter key. There arekeyboard shortcuts for various areas of Creo Parametric usage, including fileoperations, edit operations, and view operations.

The following table contains keyboard shortcuts for various file operations.

Keyboard Shortcut File Operation

CTRL+N New – Create a new object.

CTRL+O Open – Open an existing object.

CTRL+S Save – Save the active object.

The following table contains keyboard shortcuts for various edit operations.


Keyboard Shortcut Edit Operation

CTRL+G Regenerate – Regenerate model.

CTRL+FFind, or Search – Search for, filter,and select items in the model by

rule.

DEL Delete – Delete selected features.

CTRL+C Copy – Copy selected features.

CTRL+V Paste – Paste selected features.

CTRL+Z Undo – Undo last operation.

CTRL+Y Redo – Redo last operation.

The following table contains keyboard shortcuts for various view operations.

Keyboard Shortcut View Operation

CTRL+R Repaint – Redraw the current view.

CTRL+D Standard Orientation – Displayobject in standard orientation.


Understanding the Model TreeThe model tree lists the features in a model, in the order in whichthey were created. The model tree also displays the order of theparts and sub-assemblies in an assembly.

• The model tree enables you to:– Visualize model features– Visualize feature order– Select items– Edit items

• Show options include:– Layer/Model tree– Expand/Collapse All– Preselection highlighting– Highlight Geometry

Figure 1 – The Model Tree

Figure 2 – Layer TreeFigure 3 – Show Menu Options

Model Tree BasicsThe model tree is part of the Navigator window and, by default, displaysalong the left side of the main interface. When you open a part model,assembly, or drawing, the Navigator automatically changes its display tothe model tree. The model tree contains a hierarchical list of features orcomponents in the order in which they were created, as well as the displaystatus (hidden/unhidden or suppressed) of those features and components.The model tree can also be customized to display other information.

You can use the model tree in the following ways:

• Visualize model features/assembly components – The model tree displaysall features that comprise a model. For assemblies, the model tree alsodisplays the components that comprise that assembly, and can display theassembly constraints for each assembled component.

• Visualize feature order/component assembly order – A model's featuresare displayed in the order in which they were created, from top to bottom.


Similarly, an assembly's components are displayed in the order in whichthey were assembled, from top to bottom.

• Selection – Selecting a feature or component in the model tree results inthe selection of that feature or component in the graphics window.

• Editing – The model tree can be used to edit features or components,including their display and name.

The model tree is part of the Navigator. It can be toggled on or off by clicking

Model Tree in the status bar. You can also resize the model tree bydragging the right edge of the pane to make it larger or smaller.

Model Tree Show OptionsThe Show menu is located at the top of the model tree and is accessed by

clicking Show , as shown in Figure 3. The Show menu contains thefollowing options:

• Layer/Model Tree – Shown in Figure 2, this option toggles the model treeto the layer tree so that all layers associated with a model, assembly, ordrawing are displayed. If the layer tree is displayed and the Show menuis selected, the Layer Tree menu selection is replaced by the Model Treemenu selection.

• Locate in Model Tree – Locates the object selected in the graphicswindow in the model tree. This option is especially useful when locatingan embedded object such as a pattern instance or component in asub-assembly.

• Expand All – Fully expands every branch within the model tree andmechanism tree.

• Collapse All – Fully collapses every branch within the model tree andmechanism tree.

• Preselection Highlighting – Toggles preselection highlighting on or off.When you cursor over an item in the model tree when preselectionhighlighting is turned on, the item is preselected in the graphics window.By default, this option is turned off.

• Highlight Geometry – Toggles Highlight Geometry on or off. When youselect an item from the model tree when Highlight Geometry is turned on,the item is also selected (in green) in the graphics window.


Understanding Model Tree FiltersYou can use model tree filters to control both item and featuretype display.

Figure 2 – Model Tree DisplayFeatures Filter Before and After

Figure 1 – Model Tree Items DialogBox

Figure 3 – Model Tree withSuppressed Objects Turned On

Figure 4 – Model Tree UsedSketches Before and After

Understanding Model Tree FiltersThe model tree contains a hierarchical list of features or components in theorder created. You can filter what is displayed in the model tree both in termsof item display and feature types. The filtering of item display and featuretypes is controlled by the Model Tree Items dialog box, shown in Figure 1.

Open the Model Tree Items dialog box by clicking Settings from the topof the model tree, and then selecting Tree Filters.The filters applied to the model tree are unique to each window except in thecase of assemblies, where applied filters only propagate to sub-assembliesof assemblies.

Controlling Model Tree Item DisplayThe display of the following specific types of items is controlled on the leftside of the Model Tree Items dialog box:• Features – Figure 2 shows the model tree with the display of featuresturned on and off. Notice that when features are turned off, they are turnedoff in both the assembly and part levels of the model tree. When featuresare turned off in the assembly, you can only see the components that are


assembled, but nothing more granular. By default, features are turned onfor parts and turned off for assemblies.

• Placement folder – Toggles the display of component placement constraintswithin assembly components.

• Annotations – Toggles the display of annotations.• Sections – Toggles the display of cross-sections.• Suppressed Objects – Toggles the display of suppressed features andcomponents. Suppressed objects in the model tree are preceded with ablack square. In Figure 3, the EDGE_ROUNDS and LUBE_HOLE featuresare suppressed. If the display of suppressed objects was turned off, thesetwo features would not be visible in the model tree.

• Incomplete Objects – Toggles the display of incomplete features.• Excluded Objects – Toggles the display of excluded components.• Blanked Objects – Toggles the display of blanked mold/cast components.• Envelope Components – Toggles the display of envelope components.• Copied References – Toggles the display of copied references.

Controlling Model Tree Feature Types DisplayThe display of feature types is a more granular method of determining whichlevel of feature display you wish to use. In the Feature Types section of theModel Tree Items dialog box, you can specifically control which featuresto display in the model tree:

• Datum Planes• Datum Axes• Curves• Datum Points• Coordinate Systems• Rounds• Auto Round Members• Cosmetics• Sketches• Used Sketches — Used sketch features are those external sketches thatare used in another feature, such as an Extrude or Revolve feature. Whena sketch is used, it is automatically changed to a hidden status, as shownin Figure 4.

Saving Model Tree DisplayThe model tree display can be saved to a file and loaded at any time. Click

Settings from the top of the model tree and select Save Settings File tosave the current model tree display. The default save location is the workingdirectory, and the default settings file name is tree.cfg. You can configureCreo Parametric to always consider tree.cfg as the default model tree display.


Understanding Basic Model Tree ColumnsYou can add additional columns of information to the model treedisplay.

Figure 1 – Adding Columns to theModel Tree

• Basic information columns thatyou can add include:– Feat #– Feat ID

Figure 2 – Viewing Added Columnsin the Model Tree

Understanding Basic Model Tree ColumnsYou can add informational columns to the model tree, including:

• Feat # – Displays the feature number of each feature in the model tree.The first feature created in a model is feature number one, and eachconsecutive feature is assigned an ascending integer increment.

• Feat ID – Displays the feature ID of each feature in the model tree. Thefeature ID is a unique number that is assigned by Creo Parametric to eachfeature that is created.

The information displayed in these columns can be obtained using othermethods, but this particular method ensures that the information is alwaysdirectly displayed without needing to perform any queries. You can addother informational columns in addition to Feat # and Feat ID, includingregeneration status, feature type, copied references, and more. In addition,you can add other column types of information, including model parameters,


feature parameters, simplified representations, layer information, and massproperty information. You access the Model Tree Columns dialog box by

clicking Settings from the top of the model tree and selecting TreeColumns. You can edit the order of column display and the width of adisplayed column in the Model Tree Columns dialog box.

The columns displayed in the model tree are unique to each window, exceptin the case of assemblies where displayed model tree columns propagate tosub-assemblies of assemblies.

Saving Model Tree Column DisplayThe model tree display can be saved to a file and loaded at any time. Once

you have added the desired columns to the model tree, click Settingsfrom the top of the model tree and select Save Settings File. The defaultsave location is the working directory, and the default settings file name istree.cfg. You can configure Creo Parametric to always consider tree.cfg asthe default model tree display.


Selecting Items using Direct SelectionDirect selection occurs when you cursor over a feature orcomponent and click to select it.

• You can direct select:– Components– Features– Surfaces (by pressing ALT)

• You can perform direct selectionin:– The graphics window.– The model tree.

• Select multiple items by pressingCTRL.

• Select a range of items bypressing SHIFT.

Figure 1 – Select Components inModel Tree or Graphics Window

Figure 2 – Select Features inModel Tree or Graphics Window

Figure 3 – Press ALT and SelectSurfaces Directly

Selecting Items using Direct SelectionAfter selecting features, geometry, or components in a model, assembly, ordrawing, you are able to make modifications to the selected items. Directselection is one of the three basic methods of selection.Direct selection occurs when you cursor over a feature or component andclick to select it. Some key factors regarding direct selection include:• You can perform direct selection on components in an assembly, andfeatures or surfaces in a model.

• You can perform direct selection in both the graphics window on a model orassembly, and in the model tree. When you initially cursor over a model inthe Creo Parametric graphics window, the component or feature preselectsin the transparent light green color. When you select the component orfeature, it highlights in green wireframe.The selected item is dependent on whether you have a part or assemblyopen. If you have a part open, a selected feature highlights in greenwireframe. If you have an assembly open, the selected componenthighlights in green wireframe.


In a part or assembly, you can select a surface directly by pressing ALT.With ALT selected, surfaces preselect in transparent light green. When thesurface is selected it highlights in dark green.

• You can select multiple items by pressing CTRL.• You can select a range of items from the model tree by pressing SHIFT. Ifyou select an item and then press SHIFT and select a second item, theentire range of items between them is also selected.

• You can de-select components or features two different ways:– Press CTRL and click the selected item again.– Click in the graphics window background.


PROCEDURE - Selecting Items using Direct Selection


Selection\Direct DIRECT_SELECTION.ASM

Task 1: Select components using direct selection.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.2. Select CYLINDER_6.PRT from

the graphics window.3. Click in the background of the

graphics window to de-select thecomponent.

4. Select CYLINDER_6.PRT fromthe model tree.

5. De-select the component.

6. Press CTRL and select ENG_BLOCK_FRONT_6.PRT andENG_BLOCK_REAR_6.PRTfrom the graphics window.

7. Press CTRL and selectENG_BLOCK_FRONT_6.PRTfrom the graphics window tode-select it.

8. Press CTRL and selectENG_BLOCK_REAR_6.PRTfrom the model tree to de-selectit.

9. Press CTRL and select the twoBOLT_5-18_6.PRT and the threeBOLT_5-28_6.PRT from themodel tree.

10. Click in the background of thegraphics window to de-select allcomponents.


Task 2: Select features using direct selection.

1. Select CYLINDER_6.PRT fromthe graphics window, right-click,and select Open.

2. Select the hole from thegraphics window. Notice thatthe feature highlights in thegraphics window and model tree,and that the feature name isSPARK_PLUG_HOLE.

3. De-select the feature.

4. Press CTRL and selectSPARK_PLUG_HOLE andBASE_ROUND from thegraphics window.

5. Press CTRL and selectSPARK_PLUG_HOLE fromthe graphics window to de-selectit.

6. Press CTRL and selectBASE_ROUND from the modeltree to de-select it.

7. Press CTRL and select the fourmount hole features from themodel tree.

8. Click in the background of thegraphics window to de-select allfeatures.

Task 3: Select surfaces using direct selection.

1. Press ALT and select the surfaceshown.

2. Click in the background of thegraphics window to de-select allsurfaces.

3. Click Close from the QuickAccess toolbar to return to theassembly.


4. Press ALT and select the surfaceshown.

5. Click in the background of thegraphics window to de-select allsurfaces.



Selecting Items using Query SelectionQuery selection enables selection of features, geometry, orcomponents that are hidden beneath another item.

• Query selection:– Select by querying the model.– Select using the Pick From List

menu.

Figure 1 – Pick From List

Figure 2 – Original Model, Cursor Over to Highlight, Queryto Highlight, Select

Selecting Items using Query SelectionQuery selection is one of the three basic methods of selection. Queryselection enables you to select features, geometry, or components that arehidden beneath another feature or model. For example, in Figure 2, you maywant to select the piston so you can change the overall height of the part.However, the cylinder part obstructs your attempts to click and select thepiston. In this situation, you can easily query and select the piston. Thereare two methods of query selection:

• Select by querying the model – When you cursor over a model directlyin the Creo Parametric graphics window, the transparent green colordesignates a preselected item. By right-clicking the preselected model orfeature, you can query directly through the initial model or feature to thenext model or feature. You can continue to right-click to query the nextmodel or feature. When you have queried to the desired model or feature,you then click to make your selection.

• Select using the Pick From List – The Pick From List method is similarto querying the model, except that all of the query possibilities are listed


in the dialog box for the cursor location. To activate the Pick From Listmenu, cursor over the location you want to query, and then right-click andselect Pick From List. Items highlighted in the Pick From List menu alsopreselected in the graphics window.

Remember:Cursor over to highlight, right-click to query, and click to select.


PROCEDURE - Selecting Items using Query Selection


Selection\Query QUERY_SELECT.ASM

Task 1: Use query selection in an assembly.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.2. Cursor over the assembly.

3. Right-click to query until thePISTON_9.PRT highlights, andthen click to select it.

4. Move the cursor down slightlyuntil the CYLINDER_9.PRTmodel preselects.

5. Press CTRL, then right-click andselect Pick From List.

It is necessary for youto right-click and hold todisplay pop-up menus.

6. Still pressing CTRL, selectCONNECTING_ROD_9.PRTfrom the Pick From List dialogbox.• Click OK.


7. Press CTRL and cursor overPISTON_9.PRT. Right-click toquery until the PISTON_9.PRThighlights, and then select it.This de-selects the component.

Task 2: Use query selection in a part model.

1. In the graphics window, selectCYLINDER_9.PRT. Right-clickand select Open.

2. Cursor over the bottom, centerarea of the CYLINDER_9.PRT.

3. Right-click and select Pick FromList.

4. In the Pick From List dialogbox, click the down arrow untilthe CYLINDER_CUT feature ispreselected.

5. Click OK from the Pick From Listdialog box.

6. De-select the feature.

7. Cursor over the area wherethe CYLINDER_CUT feature islocated, right-click to query untilthe CYLINDER_CUT featurehighlights, and then select it.

8. Orient the model to observe theCYLINDER_CUT feature.



Using the Search ToolUsing the Search Tool is a powerful method for selecting manytypes of objects.

• Search by various methods andthen select items– Look for– Look by– Look in– Name– Found/Selected Objects

Figure 1 – The Search Tool

Figure 2 – The Found andSelected Lists

Figure 3 – Axes Selected usingSearch Tool

Using the Search ToolThe Search Tool is one of the three basic methods of selection. It includesseveral options for searching models by a variety of criteria, including:

• Look for – Specifies the type of items you want to search for. For example,you can search for only datum planes, components, or axes.

• Look by – Specifies the types of items you want to search by. This is afurther refinement to the Look for option, and is context-sensitive based onthe Look for option specified.

• Look in – Specifies which model or models the search is conductedagainst. If an assembly or sub-assembly is specified as the Look in object,you can choose whether sub-models are included. You can set the Lookin object either by selecting it from the drop-down list in the Search Tool


dialog box, or you can click Select Model and select the model fromthe graphics window.

• Name – Enables you to refine the search by typing in part or all of the nameof the item you want to search for. You can also type wildcards, both at thebeginning and end of the name search string. In Figure 1, wildcards areused to search for all features containing pin in their name.

The items that fulfill the criteria specified display in the Found list on the leftside of the Search Tool. If you select items in the Found list, they preselectin the graphics window. You can select multiple items by pressing CTRL orSHIFT, or you can select all items by pressing CTRL+A. Move items to theSelected list on the right to select them in the graphics window and thereforeperform operations.

The Search Tool becomes invaluable as the complexity of your modelincreases.


PROCEDURE - Using the Search Tool


Selection\Search SEARCH_TOOL.ASM

Task 1: Use the Search Tool in an assembly model.

1. Enable only the following Datum Display types: .2. In the ribbon, select the Tools tab.

3. Click Find from the Investigate group.

4. In the Search Tool dialog box,select Component from theLook for drop-down list.• Type *gear_shaft_11 as theCriteria Value.

• Click Find Now.• In the Found list, select thefirst component, press CTRL,and select the second andthird components.

• Select REDUCTION_GEAR_SHAFT_11 and click Add Item.

• Click Close.• De-select the component.

5. Click Find to start theSearch Tool.

6. In the Search Tool dialog box,select Feature from the Look fordrop-down list.• Select Datum Plane from theLook by drop-down list.

• Type front as the CriteriaValue.

• Click Find Now.


7. In the Search Tool dialog box,select DRILL_CHUCK_11.ASMfrom the Look in drop-down list.

8. Click Find Now.9. Edit Look in to CHUCK_11.PRT.10. Click Find Now.11. In the Found list, click Add Item

and click Close.

Task 2: Use the Search Tool in a part model.

1. Open GEARBOX_FRONT_11.PRT.

2. Press CTRL+F to start theSearch Tool.

3. In the Search Tool dialog box,edit Look for to Feature ifnecessary.• Edit Look by to Feature.• Type reduction* as theCriteria Value.

• Click Find Now.• Select REDUCTION_GEAR_HOLE and click Add Item .

• Click Close.4. De-select the feature.

5. Select the Tools tab and clickFind to start the SearchTool.

6. In the Search Tool dialog box,edit Look for to Datum Plane.• Type rib* as the Criteria Value.• Click Find Now.• Select RIB_PLANE_3 andclick Add Item .

• Click Close.7. De-select the datum plane.

8. Click Repaint .


9. Click Find from the Statusbar.

10. In the Search Tool dialog box,edit Look for to Axis.• Type *pin* as the CriteriaValue.

• Click Find Now.• Select ALIGNMENT_PIN_TOP and click Add Item .

• Click Close.



Using the Smart Selection FilterThe smart filter enables you to select the most common types ofitems that are valid for the current geometrical context.

• Smart filter:– The selection of features, geometry, or components is a nested

process.– Select specific items of interest after the initial selection.

• Smart filter selection levels:– Feature/Component level.– Geometry level.

♦ Surfaces.♦ Edges/Vertices.♦ You may need to zoom in for surface selection.

Figure 1 – Example of Smart Filter Selection Levels

Using the Smart Selection FilterCreo Parametric automatically selects the Smart selection filter, if it isavailable. When using the Smart selection filter, the selection of features,geometry, or components is a nested process. This means you can selectspecific items of interest after the initial selection. There are two levels ofselection when using the Smart Filter:

• Feature/Component Level• Geometry LevelWhen selecting on a part in the graphics window, your initial selectionhighlights a feature in green wireframe. The Smart selection filter thenautomatically narrows the selection scope, enabling you to select specificitems on that feature that you wish to either modify or use to create anotherfeature. For example, you can select an edge where you wish to add achamfer. The three specific items that you may wish to select highlightdifferently, as shown in Figure 1. Selected surfaces highlight as dark greenitems; selected edges highlight in bold green; and selected vertices highlightwith a green plus. The entire selection process occurs automatically. Theprocess is usually easier if you zoom in on the specific area of the model first.


Assemblies have a similar selection scheme. Components are selectedinitially, followed by geometry, such as surfaces, edges, and vertices.

The Smart selection filter is not available if you disable preselectionhighlighting.


PROCEDURE - Using the Smart Selection Filter


Selection\Smart_Filter SMART_FILTER.ASM

Task 1: Use the smart selection filter in an assembly.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.2. In the graphics window,

select componentENG_BLOCK_FRONT_8.PRT.

3. Zoom in to the tab on theupper-left area of the part.

4. Select the planar tab surface.

5. Select the cylindrical tab surface.

6. Select the edge of the hole in thetab.


7. Select the vertex on the edge ofthe hole.

8. De-select the vertex.

Task 2: Use the smart selection filter in a part model.

1. Press CTRL+D to orient theassembly to the standardorientation.

2. In the graphics window, selectthe BOLT_5-18_8.PRT model,right-click, and select Open.

3. Select the hex cut feature.4. Select the edge of the hex cut

feature.5. De-select the hex cut edge.

6. Select the top protrusion feature.7. Select the front cylindrical

surface of the top protrusionfeature.



Understanding Selection FiltersThe selection filter provides various filters to help you selectitems.

• Filters include:– Parts– Features– Geometry– Datums– Quilts– Annotation

Figure 1 – The Selection Filter

Figure 2 – Viewing the Selection Filter

Understanding Selection FiltersEach filter in the selection filter narrows the item types that you can select,enabling you to easily select the desired item. All filters are context-sensitive,so that only those filters that are valid for the geometrical context are available.For example, the Parts filter would not be available while working in a part;rather it would be available while working in an assembly. Creo Parametricautomatically selects the best filter according to the context; however, youcan always change the filter by simply selecting it from the selection filter.

The following filters are available in Part mode and Assembly mode:

• Parts – Available in Assembly mode only, this filter enables you to onlyselect components in the assembly.

• Features – Enables you to only select features in a part or componentin the assembly.

• Geometry – Enables you to only select geometry, such as edges, surfaces,and vertices.

• Datums – Enables you to only select datum features, including datumplanes, datum axes, datum points, and coordinate systems.

• Quilts – Enables you to only select surface quilts.• Annotation – Enables you to only select annotation features.


PROCEDURE - Understanding Selection Filters


Selection\Filters SELECTION_FILTERS.ASM

Task 1: Use the selection filter in an assembly.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.2. Edit the selection filter to Parts.3. Select BOLT_5-18_7.PRT from

the graphics window.

4. Select CRANKSHAFT_7.PRTfrom the graphics window.

5. Notice that BOLT_5-18_7.PRT isautomatically de-selected.

6. Press CTRL and selectFLYWHEEL_7.PRT fromthe graphics window.

7. Press CTRL and selectCRANKSHAFT_7.PRT fromthe graphics window. Notice thatit de-selects.

8. De-select FLYWHEEL_7.PRT.

9. Edit the selection filter toFeatures.

10. Press CTRL and select the tworound features.

11. De-select the rounds.


12. Press CTRL and select the twohole features.

13. De-select the holes.

14. Edit the selection filter toGeometry.

15. Zoom in on ENG_BLOCK_FRONT_7.PRT and select thefront surface.

16. Zoom in on theBOLT_5-18_7.PRT component.

17. Select the inner planar surfaceon the hex of BOLT_5-18_7.PRT,as shown on the left.

18. Select the top edge on the hexof BOLT_5-18_7.PRT, as shownon the right.

19. Select the top vertex on the hexof BOLT_5-18_7.PRT.

20. De-select the vertex.

21. Enable Plane Display and

Axis Display .22. In the ribbon, select the View

tab.23. Enable Plane Tag Display

and Axis Tag Display .

24. Edit the selection filter toDatums.

25. Press CTRL and select datumaxis A_4 and datum plane TOP.

26. De-select the datum plane.

27. Disable Plane Tag Displayand Axis Tag Display .



Selecting Multiple ComponentsYou can use either 2-D or 3-D Box Selection to selectcomponents.

Figure 1 – 2-D Selection

• 2-D Box Selection:– Draw a rectangle.– Components selected.

• 3-D Box Selection:– Draw a rectangle.– A 3-D box is created from the

drawn 2-D rectangle.– Manipulate the 3-D box.– Components selected.

• The direction you followwhile drawing the rectangledetermines selection.– Inside– Crossing

Figure 2 – 3-D Selection

Selecting Multiple ComponentsYou can use either 2-D or 3-D Box Selection to select components. Performthe following steps to use 2-D Box Selection:• From an assembly, edit the selection filter to Parts.• Draw a rectangle over the model. The direction you follow while drawingthe rectangle determines whether the system uses Inside Box or Crossingselection types.

Perform the following steps to use 3-D Box Selection:

• From an assembly, click 3D Box Select , and select a plane or surface.• Draw a rectangle in the selected plane. The direction you follow whiledrawing the rectangle determines whether the system uses Inside Box orCrossing Box selection types.

• Once the rectangle is created, a 3-D box appears, as shown in Figure 2.Drag arrows display on each surface. You can drag the arrows and watchthe components dynamically select.

2-D and 3-D Selection Box OptionsThe following types of selection are available when using the selection box:• Inside Box Selection – Only components that are fully inside the box areselected. To achieve this type of selection, draw a selection rectangle fromthe upper-left towards the lower-right.


• Crossing Box Selection – All components that are either inside or crossingthe box are selected. To achieve this type of selection, draw a selectionrectangle from the lower-right towards the upper-left.

Considerations When Using Box SelectionConsider the following when using box selection:

• You can work from 2-D or 3-D model orientations when creating the boxregion. For the 3-D box selection, it may be useful to manipulate the boxregion from multiple orientations.

• The system considers the component bounding box for selection purposes.


PROCEDURE - Selecting Multiple Components


Selection\Multiple_Components ENGINE.ASM

Task 1: Select components using 2-D Box Selection.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.2. Edit the selection filter to Parts.3. Orient to the LEFT view

orientation.4. Draw a rectangle from the

upper-left of the model towardsthe lower-right of the model, asshown.

5. Notice the selected components.6. Click in the background to

de-select all components.

7. Draw a rectangle from thelower-right of the model towardsthe upper-left of the model, asshown.

8. Notice the selected components.9. Click in the background to

de-select all components.10. Edit the selection filter back to

Smart.


Task 2: Select components using 3-D Box Selection.

1. Orient to the StandardOrientation.

2. Click 3D Box Select fromthe status bar.

3. Select the front surface.4. Draw a rectangle from the

upper-left of the model towardsthe lower-right of the model, asshown.

5. Manipulate the 3-D boxas necessary to select thecomponents shown.

6. Click in the background tode-select all components.

7. Click 3D Box Select .8. Select the front surface.9. Draw a rectangle from the

lower-right of the model towardsthe upper-left of the model, asshown.

10. Manipulate the 3-D boxas necessary to select thecomponents shown.

11. Click in the background tode-select all components.



Module5Editing Geometry, Features, and Models

Module OverviewOnce a selection is made, you can perform a variety of operations, includingediting. Editing enables you to modify not only dimensions of existing designmodels or features, but you can also edit shape, size, location, and visibility.You can also edit models by renaming them.

ObjectivesAfter completing this module, you will be able to:• Rename objects.• Utilize undo and redo operations.• Understand regeneration and auto regeneration.• Edit features.• Edit the definition of features.• Activate and edit models.• Delete and suppress items.• Edit feature and component visibility.


Renaming ObjectsYou can rename objects with more descriptive names so thatthey are easily recognized in the model tree.

• Objects that can be renamedinclude:– Features– Components

Figure 1 – Features Before andAfter Rename

Figure 2 – The Rename Dialog Box Figure 3 – Connecting Rod

Renaming FeaturesWhen you create a feature in a part model, it is automatically assigned ageneric name based on its type. For example, the feature may be calledSketch 1 or Extrude 2, or Revolve 3. While these names describe the type offeature, they do not describe what the feature is in the context of the design.Consequently, it can be helpful to rename the feature to something moredescriptive. Figure 1 shows the model tree before and after feature renaminghas occurred. You can see that the model tree is more intuitive once thefeatures have been renamed with more descriptive names. As a result, it ismuch easier to find a feature when it needs to be edited.

You can rename model features by using any of the following methods:

• Select the feature in the model tree or graphics window, then right-click andselect Rename from either the graphics window or model tree.

• Select the feature to be renamed in the model tree. Once selected, select itagain from the model tree.

Names can contain up to 31 characters and may not include spaces.


Renaming ComponentsTo avoid assembly failures, you must rename components within the contextof the assembly instead of using Windows Explorer to rename componentson the hard drive.

You can rename components by using either of the following methods:

• Rename on disk and in session – The system renames the componentboth in system memory and on the hard drive.

• Rename in session – The system renames the component only in systemmemory.

Click File > Manage File > Rename from the File menu to renamecomponents. Within the Rename dialog box, as shown in Figure 2, youcan click Commands and Settings , and then select the component tobe renamed from either the model tree or graphics window. You can alsorename the assembly in the Rename dialog box. Notice that the assembly isthe default item to be renamed when this dialog box appears.


Utilizing Undo and Redo OperationsYou can easily undo and redo model changes.

Undo and Redo Capabilities:

• Pop-Up Text• Undo List• Redo List

Figure 1 – Pop-Up Text

Figure 2 – Undo List Figure 3 – Redo List

Utilizing Undo and Redo OperationsYou can undo and redo most of the operations performed on a model. Theoperations are sequentially stacked in memory as they are performed. Youhave access to the undo/redo stack when you click the Undo or Redo icons.

Operations valid for undo or redo include creating, deleting, editing,redefining, suppressing, resuming, patterning, and reordering.

The Undo and Redo operations have the following capabilities:• Pop-Up Text – A preview of the operation that is to be undone or redone.• Undo List – You can select one or many sequential actions to undo.• Redo List – You can select one or many sequential actions to redo.


Understanding Regeneration and AutoRegenerationRegenerating a model recalculates the model geometry,incorporating any changes made since the last time the modelwas saved or regenerated.

• Auto Regenerate automaticallyregenerates the model while you editit.– Orange preview geometry displays.– Auto Regenerate is enabled by

default.• You can toggle Auto Regenerate off.– Preview geometry is turned off.– Dimensions can be directly edited

only.– Draggers are toggled off.

Figure 1 – Auto RegenerateToggled Off

Figure 2 – Making Multiple Editsto the Model

Figure 3 – Auto RegenerateToggled Back On

Understanding Regeneration and Auto RegenerationWhen you edit features in Creo Parametric, you are editing dimensionvalues which control the geometry. After you edit a feature’s dimensions, theRegenerate function recalculates the model geometry, incorporating anychanges made since the last time the model was saved or regenerated. It isnecessary to regenerate a model after you have edited it.Auto Regenerate eliminates the need to regenerate the model after makingchanges. Rather, the model is automatically regenerated dynamically whilemodels are edited.By default, Auto Regenerate is enabled. However, if you wish to makemultiple changes to a feature or features before regenerating the model,you can toggle Auto Regenerate off temporarily. When Auto Regenerateis toggled off, you can only edit dimensions directly, and all draggers aretoggled off. You also cannot drag section entities.When you are ready for the model to regenerate, toggle Auto Regenerateback on.


Editing FeaturesEdit enables you to alter dimensions of a selected feature orcomponent.• Edit:– Edit a dimension directly.– Select the Most Recently Used

option.– Use draggers.– Drag section entities.

• Features are regenerated in realtime.

• Child features regenerate in realtime. Figure 1 – Editing a Model

Figure 2 – Dynamically Editing DepthFigure 3 – Dynamically Editing

a Section

Editing FeaturesEdit is a menu selection available from the model tree or pop-up menu.After selecting Edit, the dimensions of the selected features or componentsdisplay in the graphics window. You can also double-click a feature to openEdit mode.Using Edit, you can quickly change the dimensions of a selected featureusing one of the following methods:

• Edit the dimension directly – To edit a dimension directly, simplydouble-click it and edit its value.

• Edit using the Most Recently Used option – When you edit a model’sdimensions, you can also utilize the Most Recently Used option. When youdouble-click a dimension, a drop-down list displays the most recent valuesof the model. You can select a suitable value from this list.

The Most Recently Used option only displays recent values fromthe current session. It does not display values used in previousCreo Parametric sessions.


• Use draggers – Drag the handles that display for rounds and chamfers,pattern dimensions, or a feature’s depth or angle. You can also usethe dimension draggers that display over the arrow heads of certaindimensions to dynamically edit that specific dimension.

• Drag section entities – You can drag a section’s entities to dynamicallyupdate the geometry.

By default, features are regenerated in real time when they are edited.Additionally, child features also regenerate in real time. Real-timeregeneration may be slow if dragging a parent feature in a large model.

If you edit a feature in such a way that it cannot successfully regenerate, acaution icon displays next to your cursor and the geometry displays red. Youcan simply undo the edit or edit the feature back to a successful status. Otheraffected downstream features that do not successfully regenerate displayin blue.

Edit Right-Click OptionsWhile in Edit mode, the following options are available in the pop-up menuthat appears when you right-click:

• Display Draggers – Enables you to toggle the display of drag handles onand off.

• Display Dimensions – Enables you to toggle the display of dimensions onand off. When dimensions are toggled off, you can still drag the feature’ssection entities.

• Display Sketch Dimensions – Enables you to toggle the display of thesection dimensions on and off. When section dimensions are toggled off,you can still drag the section’s entities

• Auto Regenerate – Enables you to toggle the auto regenerate function onand off. When auto regenerate is toggled off, all draggers are toggled off,and you can only update dimensions directly or drag section entities. Thegeometry is not dynamically updated, and you must manually regeneratethe model.


PROCEDURE - Editing Features


Edit\Features EDIT-FEATURES.PRT

Task 1: Edit features in a model using various techniques.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.2. In the graphics window,

double-click Extrude 3.3. Double-click the 8 depth

dimension, edit it to 12, andpress ENTER.

4. Click once in the background.

5. Double-click the 12 dimension,edit it to 10, and press ENTER.

6. Click once in the background.7. Double-click the 10 dimension

and select 12 from the drop-downlist.

8. Click once in the background.

9. Click the 8 dimension draggerand drag it to approximately 7.

10. Click in the background to exitEdit mode.

11. Click Named Views from theIn Graphics toolbar and select3D.

12. In the model tree, select Extrude1, right-click, and select Edit.

13. Click the circular sectionand drag it to a diameter ofapproximately 12.5.

14. Click twice in the background toexit Edit mode.


15. In the model tree, select Extrude4, right-click, and select Edit.

16. Right-click and select DisplaySketch Dimensions to toggletheir display off.

17. Drag the depth handle toapproximately 21.

18. Right-click and select DisplaySketch Dimensions to toggletheir display on.

19. Click twice in the background toexit Edit mode.

20. Edit Extrude 5.21. Drag the depth handle to

approximately 10.22. Right-click and select Auto

Regenerate to toggle it off.23. Notice that the orange preview

geometry disappears.

24. Double-click this approximatedimension and edit it to 6.

25. Notice that the geometry did notdynamically update.

26. Select Extrude 4 from the modeltree.

27. Double-click the 3 dimensionand edit it to 3.5.

28. Select Auto Regeneratefrom the Regenerate

types drop-down menu in theOperations group.

29. Notice that the geometry updatedfor both edits.

30. Click in the background to exitEdit mode.



Editing Features using Edit DefinitionEdit Definition enables you to modify feature type, size, shape,location, references, or options.

Figure 1 – Modifying a Feature’sDepth

• Edit Definition using:– The dashboard

♦ Preview Feature♦ Pause Feature♦ Resume Feature

– Drag handles– Context-sensitive options

available by right-clicking

Figure 2 – Modifying a Feature’sReferences Figure 3 – Modifying a Feature’s

Shape

Editing Features using Edit DefinitionUsing Edit Definition, you can significantly change the model by redefiningthe following aspects of a feature:• Type – Change a protrusion into a cut, for example.• Size – Make a feature larger or smaller.• Shape – Change a round cut into a square cut, for example.• Location – Move a cut from one reference to a different reference.• References – Change the location of the feature or change the dimensionalreferences.

• Options – Change the additional details of the feature, such as its depth.When you finish editing the definition of a feature, the system automaticallyregenerates the model for you to incorporate the changes you have just made.In Edit Definition, you can modify the model by:1. Editing with the dashboard – This is the graphical area in which you can

change a feature's type, size, shape, and location.2. Editing with drag handles – You can directly change features on a model

by manipulating the drag handle. Your changes display dynamically inthe graphics window.


3. Using the various context-sensitive options – Accessed by right-clickingthe dynamic preview or drag handles.

The set of icons along the right side of the dashboard perform the followingoperations:

• Preview Feature – Provides a preview of how the completed featureor component will look in the graphics window.

• Pause Feature – Pauses the current feature's edit definition operation,enabling you to perform other functions such as inserting datum features.

• Resume Feature – Resumes a paused feature's edit definition operation.


PROCEDURE - Editing Features using Edit Definition


Edit\Definition EDIT-DEFINITION.PRT

Task 1: Edit the definition of features in a part model.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.2. In the model tree, right-click

BASE and select Edit Definition.3. Drag the drag handle to 12.4. Click Complete Feature from

the dashboard.

5. In the model tree, right-clickUPPER and select EditDefinition.

6. In the dashboard, select theOptions tab.• Edit the Side 1 depth to ToSelected .

• Select the lower front surface.• Edit the Side 2 depth to ToSelected .

• Query select the lower rearsurface.

7. Click Complete Feature .


8. In the model tree, right-clickBASE and select Edit Definition.

9. In the graphics window, selectthe square sketch.




Activating and Editing ModelsYou can activate components and sub-assemblies within atop-level assembly and edit their features and components,respectively.

• From an assembly, you canactivate:– Components– Sub-assemblies

• Perform the following operationson the active component orsubassembly:– Edit– Edit Definition– Create features

Figure 1 – Viewing the ActivatedComponent

Figure 2 – Editing the Definition of aChamfer in the Activated Crankshaft

Figure 3 – Editing the Number ofFins in the Activated Flywheel

Activating and Editing ModelsFrom an open assembly, you can activate individual components orsub-assemblies within the assembly. You can then perform Edit and EditDefinition operations on features of the activated component or componentsof an activated subassembly. You can also create features on the activatedpart or sub-assembly in the context of the top-level assembly.

If you know you need to edit many features within the context of theassembly, consider toggling on the display of features within themodel tree to help with selection.

Activating a component or sub-assembly in an assembly is differentthan activating a window by clicking Windows . However, youcan click this icon to reactivate the top-level assembly.

An active component or sub-assembly is denoted in the Creo Parametricinterface in three ways:• A green symbol displays in the model tree next to the active component.


• Text in the graphics window states which component is active.• All other non-active components become unavailable and display in gray inthe graphics window.


PROCEDURE - Activating and Editing Models


Edit\Activate ACTIVATE_EDIT.ASM

Task 1: Activate assembly components and edit their features.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.2. In the model tree, expand the

CRANK_10.ASM sub-assembly.• Right-click FLYWHEEL_10.PRT and select Activate.

3. Select one of the fins, right-click,and select Edit.

4. Double-click the 16FIN_ROUNDS value, edit itto 10, and press ENTER.

5. Click Regenerate from theOperations group.


6. Click Windows from theQuick Access toolbar andselect ACTIVATE_EDIT.ASM toactivate the top-level assembly.

7. In the model tree, right-clickCRANKSHAFT_10.PRT andselect Activate.

8. Zoom in to the end of theCRANKSHAFT_10.PRT.

9. Select the chamfer, right-click,and select Edit Definition.

10. Drag the drag handle to a valueof 1.


12. In the model tree, right-click ACTIVATE_EDIT.ASM and selectActivate.



Deleting and Suppressing ItemsSuppressing an item removes it from the graphics display andregeneration cycle, but the item can be resumed. Deleting anitem is permanent.• Delete:– Is permanent.– Follows parent/child

relationships.

• Suppress:– Items can be restored via

Resume.– Follows parent/child

relationships.

• Resume:– Selected items.– All items.

Figure 2 – Viewing Children ofItem to Be Suppressed

Figure 1 – Suppressed Items in theModel Tree

Figure 3 – Both Parents andChildren Suppressed

Deleting and Suppressing ItemsIf you delete an item from a model and save it, that item is permanentlyremoved from the graphical display and regeneration cycle of the model.Suppressing an item also removes it from the graphical display andregeneration cycle. However, you can restore a suppressed item by resumingit. Resuming a suppressed item returns it to the graphical display andregeneration cycle.• Suppressed items are denoted in the model tree by a black square. Bydefault, however, suppressed items are not displayed in the model tree.Figure 1 shows two suppressed items.

• Suppressing items causes regeneration speed to increase. However,suppressing items is not meant to be a technique for managing complexmodels or large assemblies.

• You can resume all suppressed items by clicking the Operations groupdrop-down menu and selecting Resume > Resume All.


• You can select an object and delete from that object to the end of the modelby selecting Delete to End of Model from the Delete types drop-downmenu in the Operations group. You can select an object and suppressfrom that object to the end of the model by clicking the Operations groupdrop-down menu and selecting Suppress > Suppress to End of Model.

• You can select an object and delete all objects other than the selected oneand its parents by selecting Delete Unrelated Items from the Deletetypes drop-down menu in the Operations group. You can select an objectand suppress from that object to the end of the model by clicking theOperations group drop-down menu and selecting Suppress > SuppressUnrelated Items.

Handling Parent/Child RelationshipsIf you suppress an item that is a parent to another item, the child itemhighlights in red and the system warns you that the child item would suppress,too. In Figure 2, the gear is a parent to the drill chuck sub-assembly inhow it was assembled. Therefore, when the gear is suppressed, the chuckassembly is also suppressed, as shown in Figure 3. The same parent/childrelationships hold true if you try to delete an item that is a parent to anotheritem. Again, the child item highlights in red and the system warns you that thechild item would need to be deleted, too.

Best PracticesIt is recommended that you use Suppress and Resume to temporarily removefeatures or components in the graphics window to test design variations. Itis a best practice to remove (delete) all suppressed features or componentsbefore saving your final design.

If you want to remove non-solid features or components in the graphicswindow for the long-term, it is a best practice to use layers or simplifiedrepresentations.


PROCEDURE - Deleting and Suppressing Items


Edit\Delete-Suppress DELETE_SUPPRESS.ASM

Task 1: Delete, suppress, and resume items from an assembly.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.2. In the model tree, select

DRILL_CHUCK_12.ASM.3. Select Delete from the Delete

types drop-down menu in theOperations group.

4. Click OK in the Delete dialogbox.

5. Click Undo .

6. At the top of the model tree, click

Settings and select TreeFilters.

7. In the Model Tree Items dialogbox, select the SuppressedObjects check box.• Click OK.

8. Select DRILL_CHUCK_12.ASMagain.

9. Click the Operations groupdrop-down menu and selectSuppress .

10. Click OK in the Suppress dialogbox.

11. Click Undo .


12. Query select theFINAL_GEAR_SHAFT_12.PRT.

13. Right-click and select Delete.14. Read the contents of the Delete

dialog box and click Cancel.15. With the component still selected,

right-click and select Suppress.16. Click OK in the Suppress dialog

box.

17. Press CTRL and select both suppressed components from the modeltree.

18. Right-click and select Resume.

Task 2: Delete and suppress items in a part.

1. Open CHUCK_12.PRT.2. Select FRONT_ROUND and

press DELETE.3. Click OK.4. Click Undo .5. Select FRONT_ROUND again.6. Right-click and select Suppress.7. Click OK.

8. Select the radial hole.9. Right-click and select Delete.10. Read the contents of the Delete

dialog box and click OK.11. Click Undo .12. Select the radial hole again.13. Right-click and select Suppress.14. Click OK.15. Click Undo .



Editing Feature and Component VisibilityThe Hide and Unhide operations respectively remove anddisplay components or non-solid feature geometry from thegraphic display.

Figure 1 – Hidden Features in theModel Tree

• Hide/Unhide:– Components in an assembly– Datum features– Solid features

• Does not affect parent/childrelationships.

• Changes are not saved by default.– Save Status

Figure 2 – Hiding Datum Features

Figure 3 – Hiding Components

Editing Feature and Component VisibilityThe Hide and Unhide operations respectively remove and display componentsor non-solid feature geometry from the graphic display. You can hide items toenable easier selection and visualization while completing tasks. You maythen unhide items to return them to the display after your tasks are complete.

• Hidden objects are grayed out in the model tree. The datum features andholes in Figure 1 are hidden.

• Hiding objects does not affect parent/child relationships with othercomponents or features.

• Hiding solid geometry features in a part does not remove the geometryfrom the display; rather, it hides only the non-solid components of thefeature (such as the axis of a hole) from the display.

• Hidden items are placed in the Hidden Items layer in the Layer tree.


• You can unhide all hidden objects at once by selecting Unhide All fromthe Unhide types drop-down menu in the Visibility group. Unhide All doesnot unhide items that were automatically hidden by Creo Parametric, suchas layer items and datums created on-the-fly or used sketches.

Saving Feature and Component VisibilityIf you want hidden items to open in their still-hidden state the next time thefile is opened (once it has been erased from session), you must select theSave Status option in the Status types drop-down menu in the Visibilitygroup to save changes to the Hide/Unhide status before saving the model.Changes to the Hide/Unhide status are not saved with the model by default.

Best PracticesIt is recommended that you use Hide/Unhide to temporarily remove non-solidfeatures or components in the graphics window. If you want to removenon-solid features or components in the graphics window for the long-term, itis a best practice to use layers or simplified representations.


PROCEDURE - Editing Feature and Component Visibility


View\Visibility FEAT_COMP_VISIBILITY.ASM

Task 1: Edit component visibility in an assembly.


tab.3. Press CTRL and select

GEARBOX_FRONT_13.PRTand GEARBOX_REAR_13.PRT.

4. Click Hide from the Visibilitygroup.

5. Press CTRL and select allfour BOLT_5-18_13.PRTcomponents.

6. Right-click and select Hide.

7. Click Named Views from theIn Graphics toolbar and selectLEFT.


9. Expand the message log to 2 lines, if necessary.10. Notice the warning message stating that the layer display was not

saved.

11. Select Save Status from the Status types drop-down menu inthe Visibility group.



Task 2: Edit feature visibility in a part.

1. Open CHUCK_13.PRT.

2. Enable Plane Display and

Axis Display .3. Press CTRL and select datum

planes RIGHT, TOP, and FRONTfrom the graphics window.


5. Expand the first Pattern (Hole)feature in the model tree.• Select each Hole feature tohighlight it.

• Select the first Hole id 156,right-click, and select Hide.

The axis is hidden, but thereis no effect on the hole itself.

6. Press CTRL and select the othertwo Hole features.


8. In the ribbon, select the View tab.

9. Select Save Status from the Status types drop-down menu.





Module6Creating Sketcher Geometry

Module OverviewMost 3-D geometry created in Creo Parametric begins with a 2-D sketchedsection. Consequently, sketching is one of the most fundamental, consistentlyperformed operations.

In this module, you review sketcher theory and learn how to create a robust,predictable sketch. You also learn the tools available for creating sketchgeometry.

ObjectivesAfter completing this module, you will be able to:• Review sketcher theory and understand design intent.• Modify the sketcher display.• Learn and use constraints.• Learn how to sketch lines, centerlines, rectangles, circles, arcs, fillets, andchamfers.


Reviewing Sketcher TheoryA sketch is a 2-D entity that graphically captures an idea withlines, constraints, and dimensions.

Figure 1 – 2-D Sketch

• 2-D sketches are:– Sketched on a 2-D plane.– Placed on a 3-D model.– Used to create solid features.

Figure 2 – Sketches are Used toCreate Solid Features Figure 3 – Sketch Placed on

a 3-D Model

Reviewing Sketcher TheoryIn Creo Parametric, you use the 2-D Sketcher mode to capture yourengineering idea. You sketch your idea in a 2-D plane using various typesof lines which are then trimmed, constrained, dimensioned, and modifiedaccordingly. An example of a sketch is shown in Figure 1.

This 2-D sketch is then placed into a 3-D model, as shown in Figure 3. Oncethe sketch is placed, it can be used to create solid features, as shown inFigure 2. Notice that the same sketch can be used to create two completelydifferent types of geometry.


Understanding Design IntentDesign Intent in Sketcher is used to create, constrain, anddimension a sketch in a manner that causes it to updatepredictably if modified.• Design intent is captured insketches by:– How it is constrained.– How it is dimensioned.

• Capture design intent by usingSketcher to:– Maintain fully defined sketches

at all times.– Maintain weak/strong items.

Figure 2 – Design Intent Capturedwith Constraints

Figure 1 – Freehand Sketch andDesired Sketch

Figure 3 – Design Intent Capturedwith Dimensions

Understanding Design IntentWhen creating models with Creo Parametric, it is critical that you capture thedesign intent of the model. Design intent ensures predictable results when amodel is modified. Creating sketch features enables you to capture designintent. Design intent is captured and can be varied in sketches by:• How it is constrained – Changing how a sketch is constrained affects thepredictable behavior of the sketch, thereby varying design intent.

• How it is dimensioned – Changing how a sketch is dimensioned affects thepredictable behavior of the sketch, again varying design intent.

Using Sketcher to Capture Design IntentThe top image in Figure 1 shows a freehand sketch. Design intent hasnot been applied to it. When you edit the sketch, you cannot predict howit behaves. The bottom image in Figure 1 shows the desired sketch to be


achieved. Sketcher helps you apply design intent to your sketch so it appearsas the bottom image, not the top image.

Start by sketching the rough shape of your desired sketch. Sketcher beginsto dynamically apply constraints to help you lock in your sketch. For example,if you sketch a line approximately vertical, Sketcher dynamically applies avertical constraint to that line, helping you lock in design intent. When youstop sketching, a series of light blue dimensions appears in addition to yourconstraints.

• Sketcher must maintain a fully defined sketch at all times. The dimensionsand constraints maintain the size, shape, and location of all sketcheditems, which helps you capture design intent. If needed, you can modifythe default dimension scheme by editing or adding dimensions to properlycapture your intended design intent.

• Sketcher contains both Weak and Strong items.– Weak items are light blue, whereas Strong items are dark blue.– Dimensions and constraints can be Weak or Strong.– Sketcher adds or removes Weak items as necessary to maintain the

fully constrained sketch.– You cannot delete Weak items.– Strong items are Weak items that were made strong either directly or

by modifying them.


Modifying the Sketcher DisplayYou can modify the Sketcher Display to enable easiervisualization when completing tasks.

• Display options available inSketcher:– Dimensions– Constraints– Grid– Section vertices

• Inspection display optionsavailable in Sketcher:– Highlight Open Ends– Shade Closed Loops

• Sketch View reorientsparallel to the screen.

Figure 1 – Showing SketcherInspection Display

Figure 2 – Sketcher Display Options

Sketcher Display OptionsWhen you enter Sketcher mode, there are four different Sketcher Displaytypes that can be controlled to aid visualization while completing tasks:

• Display Dimensions – Toggles the display of dimensions on or off.

• Display Constraints – Toggles the display of constraints on or off.

• Display Grid – Toggles the display of the grid on or off.

• Display Vertices – Toggles the display of section vertices on or off.These Sketcher Display types can be found in both the In Graphics toolbarand the Setup group in the Sketch ribbon tab.

The Sketcher Display for a given exercise is included within theprocedure and exercise steps where applicable. When you see thesketcher display icons in exercises, you should set your sketcherdisplay to match. Consider the following example:Enable only the following Sketcher Display types:This step indicates that you should enable the display ofdimensions, constraints, and vertices.


Sketcher Inspection Display ToolsSketcher contains four inspection display tools to help analyze and solvecommon sketching problems. Two of these tools are enabled by default andare available in the Inspect group of the Sketch ribbon tab:

• Highlight Open Ends – The endpoints of entities not common tomore than one entity are highlighted. For example, any open ends of thesketch are highlighted. The highlight appears as a large red square on theopen endpoint.

• Shade Closed Loops – The area inside entities that form a closedloop is shaded. The default shading color is pale yellow.

Orienting the Sketch Parallel to the ScreenWhen you enter Sketcher, the model’s current orientation is retained by

default. However, you can click Sketch View from the In Graphics toolbarto reorient the sketch parallel to the screen at any time. This orientation canbe beneficial when creating more complicated sketches.


Utilizing ConstraintsConstraints are rules enforced by Creo Parametric on yoursketched entities.

• Constraint typesinclude:– Vertical– Horizontal– Perpendicular– Tangent– Mid-point– Coincident– Symmetric– Equal– Parallel

Figure 1 – Sketch Before and After ConstraintsApplied

Figure 2 – ConstrainGroup

Figure 3 – Sketch Before and AfterConstraints Applied

Utilizing ConstraintsConstraining the sketch is an important means to capture design intent. Asyou add constraints, you add logic to your sketches. You also minimize thenumber of dimensions required to document your design intent. This is whyit is important to constrain your sketched entities before dimensioning yoursketch.The following table lists the available constraints, which can be activatedfrom the Constrain group in the Sketch tab of the ribbon, or by selectingmultiple entities and right-clicking:

Constraint Description

Vertical Makes lines vertical or aligns points vertically.

Horizontal Makes lines horizontal or aligns points horizontally.

Perpendicular Makes lines perpendicular to one another.


Constraint Description

Tangent Makes lines tangent to arcs and circles.

Midpoint Places a point on the middle of a line or arc.

Coincident Aligns two entities or vertices to the same point. Alsocreates Collinear and Point on Entity constraints.

Symmetric Makes two points or vertices symmetric about acenterline.

Equal Makes lines equal length, gives arcs/circles equalradii, makes dimensions equal, or creates equalcurvature.

Parallel Makes lines parallel to one another.

At any time, you can select a constraint from the sketch, click the Constraindrop-down menu, and select Explain. The Message Log provides anexplanation of the constraint.


PROCEDURE - Utilizing Constraints


Sketcher\Constraints CONSTRAINTS.PRT

Task 1: Apply the Equal, Horizontal, and Coincident constraints to theSketch 1 feature.


Sketch 1 and select EditDefinition.

3. Enable only the followingSketcher Display types: .

4. Click Equal from the Constraingroup in the ribbon.• Select the small circle, thenthe larger circle.

When using the Equalconstraint, you can selecttwo or more entities ordimensions to set themequal.

5. Click Horizontal from theConstrain group and select thecenter of each circle.

6. Select One-by-One from theSelect types drop-down menu inthe Operations group.

7. Drag the circle centers to test theHorizontal constraint.

8. Drag the circle radii to test theEqual Radii constraint.

9. Click Undo from the QuickAccess toolbar twice.


10. Click Coincident from theConstrain group and select onecircle center and the horizontalreference.

11. Click OK from the Sketch tabin the ribbon.

Task 2: Apply the Midpoint and Coincident constraints to the Sketch 2feature.

1. Edit the definition of Sketch 2.

2. Click Midpoint from theConstrain group.

3. Select the circle center, thenselect the vertical line on whichit resides.

4. Click Coincident .• Select the circle radius,then select the upper-rightrectangle vertex.

5. Click OK .

Task 3: Apply the Perpendicular, Equal, Vertical, and Coincidentconstraints to the Sketch 3 feature.

1. Edit the definition of Sketch 3.2. Click Perpendicular from the

Constrain group and select theupper and right lines.

3. Click Parallel from theConstrain group and select theupper and lower lines.

4. Middle-click twice to enableselection.

5. Press CTRL and select the upperand lower lines, then right-clickand select Equal.

6. Select the left line, then right-clickand select Vertical.


7. Select the right line, press CTRL,select the vertical reference,then right-click and selectCoincident.• Select the lower line, pressCTRL, select the horizontalreference, then right-click andselect Coincident.

8. Click OK .

For most constraint types,you can select entities first,and then right-click to applythe desired constraint.

Task 4: Apply the Coincident, Tangent, and Symmetric constraints to theSketch 4 feature.

1. Edit the definition of Sketch 4.2. Notice the red highlighted open

ends.

3. Press CTRL and select theendpoints on either side of thegap.• Right-click and selectCoincident.

4. Click Tangent from theConstrain group and select theright arc and the upper line.

5. Click Symmetric from theConstrain group and select theupper vertex of the right arc, theupper vertex of the left arc, andthe vertical centerline.• Click One-by-One .


6. Drag the centerline to the right.7. Click OK .



Sketching with On-the-Fly ConstraintsWhen sketching entities, you can manipulate constraintson-the-fly as they appear.

• On-the-fly constraints enable youto capture design intent.

• Constraint manipulations include:– Lock/Disable/Enable.– Disable constraints from

appearing on-the-fly.– Toggle the active constraint.

Figure 1 – Locking a Constraint

Figure 2 – Disabling a ConstraintFigure 3 – Toggling the Active

Constraint

Sketching with On-the-Fly ConstraintsAs you sketch geometry entities, constraints appear dynamically on-the-fly toquickly capture design intent. The constraints actually cause the geometry tosnap as you sketch it, based on the constraint that appears. For example,as you sketch a line close to horizontal, a Horizontal constraint dynamicallydisplays and snaps the line horizontal, enabling you to quickly capture yourhorizontal line design intent. Taking advantage of these constraints ensuresthat you do not have to manually constrain entities after they are sketched.When a constraint appears, you can perform the following manipulationsto further aid you while sketching:• Lock constraint – Enables you to lock the constraint so the geometryremains snapped. Locked constraints are denoted by circles, as shownin Figure 1.

• Disable constraint – Enables you to disable the constraint so it does notinfluence the geometry. Of course, you can always re-enable the disabledconstraint. Disabled constraints are denoted by slashes, as shown inFigure 2.


• Disable constraints from appearing on-the-fly – Enables you to sketch anentity without any on-the-fly constraints appearing.

• Toggle active constraint – When a constraint appears on-the-fly whilesketching, it displays in green and is considered active. When more thanone constraint appears at the same time, only one can be the activeconstraint. The active constraint has the previously defined manipulationsapplied to it. The toggle manipulation is only available if more than oneon-the-fly constraint appears at the same time. In Figure 3, the EqualLength constraint is active in the left image and the Horizontal constraintis active in the right image.

The following table lists the manipulations available and the correspondingmouse and keyboard operations:

Constraint Manipulation Mouse/Keyboard Operation

Lock/Disable/Enable theConstraint

Right-click to toggle between constrainttypes.

Disable constraints fromappearing on-the-fly

Press and hold SHIFT while sketching theentity.

Toggle the Active Constraint Press TAB.

Manipulating the constraints on-the-fly does not cancel the Sketcher entity toolthat you are using. For example, if you are sketching a line and manipulate aconstraint that dynamically appears, the Line tool remains active.


Sketching LinesSketched entities are the basis for a solid face or surface of a3-D model.

• There are two types oflines:– Line Chain– Tangent Line

Figure 1 – Line Chain

Figure 2 – Tangent Line

Sketching LinesThere are two main types of lines available in Sketcher:

• Line Chain – Select Line Chain from the Line types drop-down menuor right-click and select Line Chain to create a line between two selectedpoints. Each time you click the mouse, you start a line point or endpoint.You can continue clicking the mouse to create lines that are chainedtogether. The endpoint of one line is the starting point of the next line. Youcan either middle-click or select another function from the Sketch tab inthe ribbon to terminate line creation.

• Tangent Line – Select Line Tangent from the Line types drop-downmenu to create a line that is tangent to two circles, two arcs, or a circle andarc. You can only select arcs or circles when creating a Tangent Line.


PROCEDURE - Sketching Lines


Sketcher\Line SKETCH_LINES.PRT

Task 1: Sketch line entities in Sketcher.


LINE and select Edit Definition.3. Enable only the following

Sketcher Display types: .4. Select Line Chain from the

Line types drop-down menu inthe Sketching group.

5. Click the existing line endpoint.Move the cursor down, andclick again at the vertical andhorizontal reference intersection.Notice the Vertical constraint.

6. Move the cursor to the right, andnotice the Horizontal constraint.

7. Continue to move the cursor tothe right until you see the EqualLength constraint.

8. Continue to move the cursor tothe right until you see the VerticalAlignment constraint.

9. Click again to complete thehorizontal line.

10. Move your cursor up and to theright to create a diagonal line.Continue to move the cursorupward until you see the Parallelconstraint.


11. Continue to move the cursor toincrease the line length until theEqual Length constraint appears.

12. Press TAB to toggle the activeconstraint to the Parallelconstraint.

13. Press TAB again to toggle theactive constraint back to theEqual Length constraint.

14. Right-click two times to disablethe Equal Length constraint.

15. Keeping the line parallel,continue to move the cursor toincrease the line length.

16. Press TAB to activate the Parallelconstraint.

17. Right-click to lock the Parallelconstraint.

18. Move the cursor to further extendthe line length and click to finishthe line creation.

19. Move the cursor upward. Noticethe Vertical constraint.

20. Click to finish the vertical linecreation.

21. Move the cursor to the left andnotice the Horizontal constraint.Drag the line horizontally to theleft until the Vertical Alignmentconstraint appears.

22. Click to finish the horizontal linecreation.


23. Move the cursor down and dragthe line vertically until it snaps tothe arc endpoint. Click to finishthe vertical line creation.

24. Middle-click twice to stopsketching and exit the linecreation tool.

25. Click OK from the Sketch tabin the ribbon.

Task 2: Sketch tangent lines in Sketcher.

1. Edit the definition of 2-TANGENT_LINE.

2. Select Line Tangent from the Line types drop-down menu in theribbon.

3. Click the bottom of the smallercircle to begin sketching a line.

4. Move the cursor around thecircle, and notice that the linestays tangent to the circle.

5. Click the top of the larger circleto complete the line. Notice theTangent constraints.

6. Select One-by-One from the Select types drop-down menu.7. Select the tangent line and press DELETE.

8. Click Line Tangent .9. Sketch another tangent line.

10. Sketch a third tangent line.11. Click OK .



Sketching CenterlinesA centerline is a type of construction geometry that can be usedto enforce symmetry and control sketch geometry.

• There are two types of constructionCenterlines:– Centerline– Tangent Centerline

Figure 1 – Symmetry Createdusing a Centerline

Figure 2 – Dimensioning a Circlewithout a Centerline

Figure 3 – Dimensioning a Circleusing a Centerline

Sketching CenterlinesA centerline is a type of construction geometry that can be used to definea line of symmetry with a sketch. They are also used to control sketchgeometry. In Figure 2, the circle is dimensioned to the vertical and horizontalreferences. In Figure 3, the circle is dimensioned radially by using acenterline. Centerlines must be fully constrained by using dimensions orconstraints like any other sketched entity. They have infinite length and donot create feature geometry.There are two types of construction Centerlines:

• Centerline – Select Centerline from the Centerline types drop-downmenu or right-click and select Centerline to create a Centerline throughtwo points.

• Tangent Centerline – Select Centerline Tangent from the Centerlinetypes drop-down menu to create a centerline that is tangent to two circles,two arcs, or a circle and arc. You can only select arcs or circles whencreating a Tangent Centerline.


PROCEDURE - Sketching Centerlines


Sketcher\Centerline SKETCH_CENTERLINES.PRT

Task 1: Sketch centerlines in Sketcher.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.2. In the model tree, select

CENTERLINE, right-click, andselect Edit Definition.

3. Enable only the followingSketcher Display types:

.4. Notice that the horizontal line is

asymmetric about the verticalreference. Also notice thedimensioning scheme for theangled line.

5. Click and drag a window aroundthe two lines.

6. Press DELETE.

7. Select Centerline from the Centerline types drop-down menu inthe Sketching group.

8. Click the intersection of the vertical and horizontal references to startsketching a centerline.

9. Move the cursor upwards and click the vertical reference to create avertical centerline on top of the vertical reference.

10. Click the intersection of thevertical and horizontal referencesto start sketching a secondcenterline.

11. Drag the centerline until itmeasures approximately 70°from vertical, and click to place it.


12. Select Line Chain from theLine types drop-down menu.

13. Click in the top left quadrantof the graphics window to startsketching a line.

14. Move the cursor horizontally tothe right side of the verticalcenterline until it snapssymmetric about the verticalcenterline and click to place it.

15. Middle-click to stop line creation.

16. Select One-by-One from the Select types drop-down menu, andclick and drag one of the line endpoints to resize it to a length ofapproximately 13. Notice that the line stays symmetrical about thevertical centerline as it is resized.

17. Click Line Chain andselect the right endpoint of thehorizontal line.

18. Move the cursor down to theangled centerline, move thecursor up and down on thecenterline until the Perpendicularconstraint appears, and click tocomplete the line.

19. Middle-click to stop line creation.

20. Click One-by-One andde-select the line.

21. Click the angled centerlineand drag it to approximately60°. Notice that the angledline always stays perpendicularabout the angled centerline.

22. Click OK from the ribbon.



Sketching Rectangles and ParallelogramsYou can quickly sketch four-sided shapes.

Figure 2 – Slanted Rectangle

• The four lines are independent.• You can delete, trim, and aligneach line individually.

• You can create symmetricrectangles using CenterRectangles.

Figure 1 – Corner Rectangle

Figure 3 – Center Rectangle Figure 4 – Parallelogram

Sketching Rectangles and ParallelogramsTo create a corner rectangle, select Corner Rectangle from the Rectangletypes drop-down menu, or right-click and select Corner Rectangle. When yousketch a rectangle, you click to define locations for two opposite corners.

To create a slanted rectangle, select Slanted Rectangle from theRectangle types drop-down menu. When you sketch a slanted rectangle,you click two locations to define a line that becomes the first side, and thenspecify a third location to define the width.

To create a center rectangle, select Center Rectangle from the Rectangletypes drop-down menu. When you sketch a center rectangle, you click todefine locations for the rectangle center and one corner. The rectangle iscreated symmetrically in both directions using two diagonal construction linesthat connect opposite corners through the rectangle center.To create a parallelogram, select Parallelogram from the Rectangle typesdrop-down menu. When you sketch a parallelogram, you click two locationsto define a line that becomes the first side, and then specify a third locationto define the width and side angle.Remember the following when sketching rectangles and parallelograms:


• The four lines are independent once created.• You can delete, trim, and align each line individually.• You should create symmetric rectangles using the Center Rectangle type.


PROCEDURE - Sketching Rectangles and Parallelograms


Sketcher\Rectangle_ParallelogramRECTANGLE_PARALLELOGRAM.PRT

Task 1: Create a corner rectangle and a center rectangle in Sketcher.


RECTANGLE and select EditDefinition.


4. Select the upper line of therectangle and press DELETE.

5. Press CTRL and select the threeremaining lines.

6. Right-click and select Delete.

7. Select Center Rectanglefrom the Rectangle types

drop-downmenu in the Sketchinggroup.

8. Click the intersection of thevertical and horizontal referencesto start the rectangle. Movethe cursor to the lower-rightquadrant, and notice that therectangle retains symmetryabout its vertical and horizontalwithout requiring centerlines.

9. Click to complete the rectangle.• Middle-click to completesketching and view theconstraints.


10. Click Sketch View from theIn Graphics toolbar.

11. Right-click and select CornerRectangle.• Click the midpoint of the rightside of the rectangle.

12. Move the cursor to the right untilthe second rectangle snaps toequal length. Move the cursordown until the second rectanglesnaps to the bottom of the firstrectangle, and click to completethe rectangle.

Task 2: Sketch a parallelogram and a slanted rectangle.

1. Select Parallelogram fromthe Rectangle types drop-downmenu in the Sketching group.

2. Click the upper-right vertex ofthe second rectangle and thenclick the upper-right vertex of thefirst rectangle.

3. Move the cursor up verticallyuntil the height snaps to equallength, then click to complete theparallelogram.

4. Select Slanted Rectanglefrom the Rectangle types

drop-downmenu in the Sketchinggroup.

5. Click the upper-left vertex of theparallelogram to begin sketching.

6. Move the cursor to the verticalreference and upwards until theline snaps parallel, and thenclick.

7. Move the cursor up and to theright until it snaps to equal length,then click to complete the slantrectangle.


8. Middle-click to stop sketching.9. Click OK in the ribbon.



Sketching CirclesYou can quickly sketch various types of circles.

• There are four types of Circles:– Center and Point– Concentric– 3 Point– 3 Tangent

Figure 1 – Concentric Circle

Figure 2 – Circle Tangent to 3 EntitiesFigure 3 – Circle Created by

Picking 3 Points

Sketching CirclesThere are four types of circles available in Sketcher:

• Center and Point – Select Center and Point from the Circle typesdrop-down menu and select the location for the center and a location thatdetermines the diameter. You can also right-click and select Circle.

• Concentric – Select Concentric from the Circle types drop-down menuto create a circle that is concentric about an existing circle or arc.

• 3 Point – Select 3 Point from the Circle types drop-down menu andselect three locations that the circle must pass through.

• 3 Tangent – Select 3 Tangent from the Circle types drop-down menuand select three arcs, circles, or lines which must be tangent to the circle.


PROCEDURE - Sketching Circles


Sketcher\Circle SKETCH_CIRCLES.PRT

Task 1: Sketch circles and concentric circles in Sketcher.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.2. In the model tree, right-click CTR-PNT_CONCENTRIC_CIRCLE and

select Edit Definition.

3. Enable only the following Sketcher Display types: .

4. Select Center and Pointfrom the Circle types drop-downmenu in the Sketching group.

5. Select the vertical and horizontalreference intersection.

6. Move the cursor out until thecircle diameter snaps to equaldiameter with the arc. Click tocomplete the circle.

7. Sketch another circle so it snapsto the arc endpoint.


9. Select Concentric from theCircle types drop-down menuand select the largest circle.• Move the cursor up until thecircle diameter snaps to theright arc endpoint.

• Click to complete the circle.• Middle-click to cancel furthercircle creation.


10. Select the arc and create anotherconcentric circle.

11. Middle-click to cancel furthercircle creation.


Task 2: Sketch 3 point circles in Sketcher.

1. Edit the definition of3-PNT_CIRCLE.

2. Select 3 Point from the Circletypes drop-down menu in theSketching group.

3. Select the line endpoint and arectangle corner.

4. Select the opposite rectanglecorner.

5. Click OK .

Task 3: Sketch a tangent circle in Sketcher.

1. Edit the definition of3-TANGENT_CIRCLE.

2. Select 3 Tangent from theCircle types drop-down menu inthe Sketching group.

3. Select the upper circle.4. Select the left arc.5. Select the right circle.6. Click OK .



Sketching ArcsYou can create numerous types of arcs within Sketcher.

• There are five types of Arcs:– 3-Point– Tangent End– Concentric– Center and Ends– 3 Tangent

Figure 1 – 3-Point VersusTangent Arc Creation

Figure 2 – Arc Tangent to 3 EntitiesFigure 3 – Center and

Endpoints Arc

Sketching ArcsThere are five types of arcs available in Sketcher:

• 3-Point – Select 3-Point / Tangent End from the Arc types drop-downmenu and select the locations for the two arc endpoints and the arcdiameter. When you select an existing line endpoint, a green quadrantsymbol appears around that endpoint. Move the cursor through thequadrants perpendicular to the line to create a 3-Point arc. You can alsoright-click in Sketcher and select 3-Point / Tangent End.

• Tangent End – Select 3-Point / Tangent End from the Arc typesdrop-down menu, select an existing line endpoint, and move the cursorthrough the green quadrants parallel to the line to create a Tangent Endarc. You can also right-click and select 3-Point / Tangent End.

• Concentric – Select Concentric from the Arc types drop-down menu tocreate an arc that is concentric about an existing arc or circle.

• Center and Ends – Select Center and Ends from the Arc typesdrop-down menu to create an arc with center and ends that you can select.

• 3 Tangent – Select 3 Tangent from the Arc types drop-down menu andselect three arcs, circles, or lines which must be tangent to the arc.


PROCEDURE - Sketching Arcs


Sketcher\Arc SKETCHING_ARCS.PRT

Task 1: Sketch 3-Point and Tangent End Arcs in Sketcher.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.2. In the model tree, right-click 3-PNT_TANGENT-END_ARC and select

Edit Definition.


4. Select 3-Point / Tangent Endfrom the Arc types drop-down

menu in the Sketching group.• Select the upper line endpoint,move the cursor horizontal tothe left, and select the verticaland horizontal referenceintersection.

• Move the cursor above thehorizontal reference and clickto create the arc.

5. Click Undo .

6. In the graphics window,right-click and select 3-Point /Tangent End.• Select the upper line endpoint,move the cursor up, and selectthe vertical and horizontalreference intersection tocreate the tangent arc.

7. Select the endpoint of theprevious arc and create a newtangent arc of equal radius.


9. Select the endpoint of theprevious arc and create a newtangent arc.



Task 2: Sketch Concentric Arcs in Sketcher.

1. Edit the definition of CONCENTRIC_ARC.

2. Select Concentric from theArc types drop-down menu in theSketching group.• Select the upper arc and selectthe horizontal reference to theleft of the center.

• Move the cursor clockwise andselect the horizontal referenceagain to create the arc.

• Middle-click to stop concentricarc creation.

3. Select the lower arc and selectthe left arc endpoint.

4. Select the right arc endpoint tocreate the concentric arc.

5. Middle-click to stop concentricarc creation.

6. Click OK .

Task 3: Sketch Center and Ends Arcs in Sketcher.

1. Edit the definition of CENTER-ENDS_ARC.

2. Disable Display Constraints .

3. Select Center and Endsfrom the Arc types drop-downmenu in the Sketching group.• Select the vertical andhorizontal referenceintersection.

• Select the left and upperendpoints of the lines to createthe arc.


4. Select the vertical and horizontalreference intersection again.

5. Select the right and bottomendpoints of the lines to createthe arc.

6. Middle-click to stop arc creation.7. Click OK .

Task 4: Sketch 3-Tangent Arcs in Sketcher.

1. Edit the definition of 3-TANGENT_ARC.

2. Enable Display Constraints .

3. Select 3 Tangent from theArc types drop-down menu.

4. Select the left circle, right circle,and line.

5. Click Undo .

6. Click 3 Tangent .7. Select the line, left circle, and

right circle.8. Click OK .



Sketching Circular FilletsYou can round sharp corners of a Sketch using Circular Fillets.

Figure 1 - Convex Fillet

• Circular Fillets:– Can be applied to concave or

convex corners.– Construction lines are created

back to the intersection.– Corners do not have to be

90°.– Radius size is based on pick

location.

Figure 2 - Concave Fillet Figure 3 - Radius Size Basedon Pick Location

Sketching Circular FilletsThe Circular option creates a rounded intersection between any twonon-parallel entities. When you create a Circular Fillet between two lines,the lines are automatically trimmed to the fillet. If you create a CircularFillet between any other entities, you must delete the remaining segmentsmanually. When you create a Circular Fillet, construction lines are createdleading from the fillet endpoints to the intersection of the original entities.

• Circular Fillets can be applied to either concave or convex corners. Thecorners do not have to be at 90°.

• The radius size is based on pick location, as shown in Figure 3.

In addition to clicking the icon, you can right-click in Sketcher andselect Fillet to create Circular Fillets.


PROCEDURE - Sketching Circular Fillets


Sketcher\Fillet_Circular SKETCH_FILLETS.PRT

Task 1: Sketch Circular Fillets in Sketcher.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.2. In the model tree, right-click CIRCULAR_FILLET and select Edit

Definition.


4. Select Circular from theFillet types drop-down menu inthe Sketching group.

5. Select the two points to createthe fillet.

6. The construction lines areautomatically created.

7. Select two points to create thenext fillet.




10. Select One-by-One from theSelect types drop-down menu.

11. Enable Display Constraintsfrom the In Graphics toolbar.

12. Press CTRL and select the fourfillets.

13. Right-click and select Equal.14. Click OK .



Sketching ChamfersYou can create chamfer geometry in a sketch.

Figure 1 – Original Sketch

Chamfers in Sketcher:

• Can be applied to concave orconvex corners.

• Corners do not have to be 90°.• Entities do not have to intersect.• Size and angle is based on picklocations.

• Default Chamfer createsconstruction lines.

• Chamfer Trim removes geometry.

Figure 2 – Chamfer Created

Figure 3 – Chamfer Trim Created

Sketching ChamfersThe Chamfer option creates a straight line between selected locationson any two non-parallel entities. When you create a chamfer, constructionlines are created leading from the chamfer endpoints to the intersection of theoriginal entities.

You can click Chamfer Trim to create a Chamfer and automatically trimaway the original geometry.

Remember the following points when sketching chamfers:

• Chamfers can be applied to either concave or convex corners.• The corners do not have to be at 90°.• Entities do not have to intersect.• The size and angle of the chamfer line is based on pick locations.


PROCEDURE - Sketching Chamfers


Sketcher\Chamfer CHAMFERS.PRT

Task 1: Sketch chamfers.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.2. In the model tree, right-click CHAMFERS and select Edit Definition.


4. Select Chamfer from theChamfer types drop-down menuin the Sketching group.

5. Select two points to create thechamfer. The construction linesare automatically created.

6. Select two points to create thenext chamfer.

Task 2: Sketch chamfers using the Chamfer Trim option.

1. Select Chamfer Trim fromthe Chamfer types drop-downmenu in the Sketching group.

2. Select two points to createthe chamfer. The geometry istrimmed away.


3. Select two points to create thenext chamfer.

4. Click OK .




Module7Using Sketcher Tools

Module OverviewOnce you sketch geometry, it typically needs to be modified or furthermanipulated.

In this module, you learn the tools available for modifying and manipulatingyour sketch, as well as how to handle any conflicts that may arise whilesketching.

ObjectivesAfter completing this module, you will be able to:• Understand construction geometry theory.• Learn how to sketch points.• Use geometry tools to edit geometry in a sketch.• Create new sketch files, as well as place and manipulate sketches.• Create and modify dimensions, as well as handle any sketcher conflictsthat arise.


Understanding Construction Geometry TheoryYou can use Construction Geometry to help control designintent, simplify dimension schemes, and simplify sketches.

Figure 1 – Construction GeometryControls a Sketch

Figure 3 – Construction GeometrySimplifies Sketches

• Construction Geometry:– Can be dimensioned and

constrained.– Solid geometry snaps to it.– Does not add entities to the

final sketch.– Can make an otherwise difficult

scheme easy.– Can reduce the number of

dimensions/constraints used.

Figure 2 – Construction GeometrySimplifies Dimension Schemes

Figure 4 – Center Rectangle usesConstruction Geometry

Understanding Construction Geometry TheoryConstruction entities enable you to create references on-the-fly. Constructiongeometry is important because it enables you to easily constrain your sketch.It is signified by a dotted magenta entity within Sketcher.• Construction geometry can be dimensioned and constrained in the samemanner as regular, solid geometry.

• Solid sketched geometry snaps to construction geometry, which meansthat construction geometry can be used to control a sketch. In Figure 1,the arc centers are snapped to the construction line endpoints. Therefore,changing the construction geometry length or angle dimensions causes thearcs to move accordingly.

• Construction geometry does not display in the final Sketch feature.Therefore, it does not add entities to the final sketch.

• Construction geometry can make an otherwise difficult dimensioningscheme easy. In Figure 2, one dimension is used to control the entiresketch. All line endpoints are snapped to the construction circle. Without


the construction circle, several more dimensions and constraints would berequired to properly constrain the sketch.

• Construction geometry can simplify sketches. In Figure 3, the sketch hasbeen simplified by constraining line vertices that must snap to an imaginaryarc to a construction geometry arc.

• Construction geometry may be created automatically as part of thegeometry created from a sketch tool. In Figure 4, a Center Rectangleuses construction geometry to automatically maintain symmetry. The twoconstruction geometry lines are created as part of the rectangle. Sketchedcircular fillets and sketched chamfers also generate construction geometry.

Creating Construction GeometryTo create new construction geometry in Sketcher, you can toggle ConstructionGeometry mode on by clicking Construction Mode in the Sketchinggroup in the ribbon. When this mode is toggled on, you can use any sketchtool available to sketch new geometry, but the resulting geometry is createdas construction geometry rather than solid geometry. You can then toggle offConstruction Geometry mode and resume sketching solid geometry usingthe same sketch tools.

Converting Solid Geometry to Construction GeometryAlmost any solid sketched geometry entity can be converted into constructiongeometry. Simply select the geometry entity you wish to convert, right-click,and select Construction. To change construction geometry back to solidgeometry, select it, right-click and select Geometry.


Sketching PointsSketcher points are a type of construction geometry which donot contribute to the resulting sketch geometry.

• Sketcher Point uses the following:– Dimension to theoretical sharps.– Dimension slanted on arcs.– Provide an anchor or pivot point

in a sketch.

Figure 1 – Dimensioning toTheoretical Sharp

Figure 2 – Dimensioning Slantedon Arcs Figure 3 – Providing a Pivot Point

Sketching PointsSketcher Points are created by using the Point icon from the Sketchinggroup in the ribbon. Sketcher points do not contribute to the resulting sketchgeometry in a feature. Sketcher points are actually a type of constructiongeometry.

Sketcher points have the following uses:

• Dimension to theoretical sharps – In Figure 1, a Sketcher Point has beenplaced at the theoretical corner sharp. As a result, this theoretical sharpcan be used for controlling design intent through a dimension.

• Dimension slanted on arcs – In Figure 2, a Sketcher Point has been placedon each arc. As such, a slanted dimension can be created to measure thedistance between arc tangencies.

• Provide an anchor or pivot point – In Figure 3, a Sketcher Point hasbeen placed at the intersection of the arc and the vertical and horizontalreferences. As such, the angular dimension can be modified, and the entiresketch pivots about the Sketcher Point.


Using Geometry Tools within SketcherYou can use Geometry Tools to modify existing sketched entities.

Figure 1 – Using Delete Segment

Figure 2 – Using Trim Corner

Figure 3 – Using Divide Figure 4 – Using Mirror

Using Geometry Tools within SketcherYou can use various Geometry Tools within Sketcher to modify existinggeometry. You can dynamically trim entities, trim entities to other entities,divide entities, and mirror entities. You can undo any operation you haveperformed using Geometry Tools.

Using Delete SegmentYou can dynamically trim the parts of sketched entities you no longer need.When dynamically trimming, any entity that you touch while dragging isdeleted. In Figure 1, the extra arcs are deleted.

Using Trim CornerYou can trim or extend sketched entities to other entities in Sketcher. To trimentities, select the entity side you want to keep. In Figure 2, the two entitiesare selected to be trimmed, and the gap between the entities is closed.

Using DivideYou can divide a sketched entity into two or more new entities. The systemdivides the entity at the point(s) you select. In Figure 3, the circle is divided tobecome two separate arcs.

Some sketched features require portions of a sketch to maintain anequal number of entities.


Using MirrorYou can mirror selected sketched entities about a centerline. Mirrored entitygeometry combines with the original entity to become one entity, given thefollowing two criteria:

• The entity is normal to the centerline from which it is being mirrored.• One endpoint lies on the centerline.In Figure 4, the top horizontal line and bottom are both perpendicular to themirroring centerline and have an endpoint that lies on the centerline. Whenthe geometry is mirrored, the result is one horizontal entity on the top andone arc on the bottom.

You cannot mirror dimensions, text entities, or centerlines.


PROCEDURE - Using Geometry Tools within Sketcher


Sketcher\Geometry_Tools GEOM_TOOLS.PRT

Task 1: Dynamically trim sketched entities.


DYNAMIC_TRIM and select EditDefinition.


4. Click Delete Segment fromthe Editing group in the ribbon,and click and drag to dynamicallytrim the entities.

5. Zoom in on the upper-right partof the sketch.

6. Dynamically trim the three extraarcs.

7. Perform the same trims to thelower sketch portion.


Task 2: Trim sketched entities to other sketched entities.

1. Edit the definition ofTRIM_ENTITIES.

2. Enable Display Constraints

.

3. Click Corner from the Editinggroup in the ribbon, and selectthe two entities to trim.

4. Click Undo .

5. Click Corner and select thetwo entities to trim.


6. Select the two entities to trim.

7. Select the two entities to trim.

8. Select the two entities to trim.9. Click OK .

Task 3: Divide sketched entities.

1. Edit the definition of DIVIDE.

2. Click Divide from the Editinggroup in the ribbon, and selectthe two circle locations to divide.

3. Middle-click to stop dividingentities.

4. Select the left half of the dividedcircle.


5. Click Divide and divide thearcs four more times.

6. Click OK .

Task 4: Mirror sketched entities.

1. Edit the definition of MIRROR.2. Enable Display Dimensions

. Notice the top 7.25dimension.

3. Click and drag a window aroundall sketched entities.

4. Click Mirror from the Editinggroup.

5. Select the vertical centerline.6. Notice the top 14.50 dimension.

7. Select the upper horizontal line and lower arc.8. Notice that both are single entities.9. Click OK .



Manipulating Sketches within Sketcher• Manipulate Sketches using:– Cut/Copy/Paste– Scale and Rotate– Translate

Figure 1 — Scaled and RotatedSketch Figure 2 — Rotating a Sketch

Manipulating Sketches within SketcherYou can cut, copy, and paste sketched entities. To do this, you can use eitherthe context-sensitive right-mouse pop-up menu or icons in the ribbon. Youcan perform cut, copy, and paste operations from within a sketch or fromone sketch to another.

Scaling and Rotating SketchesYou can also scale and rotate selected sketch entities. The first availableoperations when you paste sketched entities into a sketch are scaling androtating the pasted entities. You can scale and rotate existing sketch entities

by selecting them and clicking Rotate Resize from the Editing group inthe ribbon, or by right-clicking and selecting Rotate Resize.You can scale and rotate entities either by editing the fields in the dashboardor using the drag handles that appear on the entities.

• Click and drag the Location handle to move the entities about Sketcher.To help properly place the entities, you can right-click and drag to relocatethe Location handle.

• Click and drag the Scaling handle to dynamically scale the entities ortype a value in the Scaling factor field in the dashboard.

• Click and drag the Rotate handle to dynamically rotate the entitiesabout the Location handle, or type a value in the Rotating angle field inthe dashboard.


You can also move the Location handle to a specified location in the sketchby activating the Reference collector in the dashboard. When you select areference, the Location handle snaps onto the reference.

Translating SketchesAnother available operation you can perform on pasted sketches is translatingentities. To translate a sketch, you can either click and drag the Locationhandle or type a distance value into the fields in the dashboard. The TranslateReference is the location by which the translation distances are measured.The sketch can be translated parallel (horizontal) and perpendicular (vertical)to the Translate Reference. You can retain the default translate referenceor you can specify a different one.


PROCEDURE - Manipulating Sketches within Sketcher


Sketcher\Manipulating MANIP_SKETCHES.PRT

Task 1: Copy, scale, and rotate a sketch.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.2. In the model tree, right-click Sketch 1 and select Edit Definition.

3. Enable only the following Sketcher Display types: .4. Drag a window around all sketched entities.5. Right-click and select Cut.

6. Right-click and select Paste.7. Click in the upper-right quadrant

to place the sketch.8. Right-click the X Location handle

and drag it to the upper arcendpoint.

9. Click the Rotation handle anddrag it to rotate the sketch 90°counterclockwise.

10. Click the X Location handle anddrag it to reposition the sketch.

11. In the dashboard, edit the Scalingfactor to 1 and the Rotating angleto 90, if necessary.• Click Accept Changes .

12. Click Paste from theOperations group in the ribbon.

13. Click in the lower left Sketcherquadrant.

14. Right-click the X Location handleand drag it to the lower arcendpoint.


15. Click the Rotation handle anddrag it to rotate the sketch 90°clockwise.

16. Click the X Location handle anddrag it to reposition the sketch.

17. In the dashboard, edit theScaling factor to 0.5 and pressENTER.• Click Accept Changes .

18. Select Line Tangent fromthe Line types drop-down menuand sketch the tangent line.

19. Click Delete Segment andtrim the hanging arcs.

20. Click OK .



Dimensioning Entities within SketcherThe manner by which you dimension your sketch reflects yourdesign intent.

• Dimension types include:– Line length– Angle– Distance– Radius– Diameter/Revolved Diameter– Arc length– Total included angle

• Middle-click to place dimensions.– Location can determine type.

• Convert weak dimensions tostrong.

Figure 2 — Revolved DiameterDimension

Figure 1 — Length and AngleDimensions

Figure 3 — Distance, Radius,and Diameter Dimensions

Dimensioning Entities within SketcherWhen dimensioning a sketch, it is important to create dimensions that captureyour design intent because these dimensions are displayed when you editthe model and when you create drawings of the model.

Dimensions are all created by clicking the Normal icon. You can alsoright-click and select Dimension. Select entities to be dimensioned andmiddle-click to place the dimension. At this point, you can either pressENTER to accept the current dimension value, or type a different one andpress ENTER. The type of dimension created depends upon what is selectedand where the dimension is placed.The following dimension types can be created:• Line length — Select a line and place the dimension. The line lengthis dimensioned.

• Angle — You can create an angle measurement by selecting two linearreferences. Where you place the dimension determines how the angle is


measured (acute versus obtuse). You can also create an arc angle byselecting an arc endpoint, the arc center, and the other endpoint, and thenplacing the dimension.

• Distance — Select two entities to measure the distance between them andplace the dimension. Again, where you place the dimension determineswhether it is vertical, horizontal, or slanted.

• Radius — Select an arc or circle once, then place the dimension. You cantoggle a radius dimension to a diameter or linear dimension by right-clickingand selecting Convert to Diameter and Convert to Linear, respectively.

• Diameter — Double-click an arc or circle, then place the dimension.You can toggle a diameter dimension to a radius or linear dimension byright-clicking and selecting Convert to Radius and Convert to Linear,respectively.

• Revolved Diameter — Select the entity, a centerline, and the entity againand place the dimension. Alternatively, you can select the centerline,the entity, and the centerline again. You can toggle a revolved diameterdimension to a revolved radius dimension and vice-versa by right-clickingand selecting Convert to Radial and Convert to Diameter, respectively.

• Arc length — You can create an arc length dimension by selecting thearc segment, its two endpoints, and placing the dimension. The arclength dimension displays an arch symbol over the dimension value. Youcan toggle the arc length measurement to an arc angle dimension andvice-versa by right-clicking and selecting Convert to Angle and Convert toLength, respectively.

• Total included angle — Similar to a revolved diameter dimension, you cancreate a total included angle dimension by selecting an angled line, acenterline, and the angled line again before placing the dimension. You cantoggle the total included angle to an angle dimension and vice-versa byright-clicking and selecting Convert to Angle and Convert to Total includedangle, respectively.

Weak DimensionsBecause Sketcher must maintain a fully defined sketch at all times, a sketchinitially is dimensioned using weak dimensions. As you dimension yoursketch (these are strong dimensions) using your desired design intent, theweak dimensions automatically disappear.

You can convert weak dimensions to strong dimensions by selectingthe weak dimension, right-clicking, and selecting Strong. Similarto creating a new dimension, you can either accept the currentdimension value’s conversion to strong, or type a new one. Whenyou edit a weak dimension, it is automatically converted to strong.


PROCEDURE - Dimensioning Entities within Sketcher


Sketcher\Dimensions DIMENSIONS.PRT

Task 1: Create line length dimensions in Sketcher.


LENGTH and select EditDefinition.


.4. Click Normal from the

Dimension group in the ribbon.5. Select the top horizontal line and

middle-click above it to place thedimension.

6. Type 190 and press ENTER.

7. Select the angled line andmiddle-click to place thedimension.

8. Type 340 as the value andpress ENTER. Notice the weakdimensions are disappearing.

9. Middle-click to stop dimensioncreation.

10. Select the weak 247.12dimension, right-click, andselect Strong.

11. Type 250 and press ENTER.12. Click OK .


Task 2: Create angle dimensions in Sketcher.

1. Edit the definition of ANGLE.2. Click Normal .3. Select the angled line and the

horizontal reference, and thenmiddle-click to place the angledimension.


5. Select the top arc endpoint, thearc center, and the bottom arcendpoint, and then middle-clickto place the dimension, asshown.


Task 3: Create distance dimensions in Sketcher.

1. Edit the definition of DISTANCE.2. Click Normal .3. Select the arc centers,

middle-click to the left ofthe vertical reference, and pressENTER.

4. Click Undo .

5. Click Normal .6. Select the arc centers,

middle-click below the horizontalreference, and press ENTER.

7. Click Undo .

8. Click Normal .9. Select the arcs, middle-click to

place the dimension, and pressENTER.

10. Click Undo .


11. Click Normal .12. Select the arcs, middle-click to

place the dimension, and pressENTER.

13. Click Undo .

14. Click Normal .15. Select the arc centers,

middle-click to place thedimension, and press ENTER.

16. Click OK .

Task 4: Create radius dimensions in Sketcher.

1. Edit the definition of RADIUS.2. Click Normal .3. Select the left circle, middle-click

to place the dimension, andpress ENTER.

4. Select the arc, middle-click toplace the dimension, and pressENTER.

5. Click OK .

Task 5: Create arc and circle diameter dimensions in Sketcher.

1. Edit the definition ofARC_CIRCLE_DIA.

2. Click Normal .3. Double-click the arc, middle-click

to place the dimension, andpress ENTER.


4. Double-click the circle,middle-click to place thedimension, and press ENTER.

5. Middle-click to stop dimensioncreation.

6. Select the 250 dimension,right-click, and select Convertto Radius.

7. Click OK .

Task 6: Create revolved diameter dimensions in Sketcher.

1. Edit the definition of REV_DIA.2. Click Normal .3. Click the long vertical line,

centerline, and long vertical lineagain.

4. Middle-click to place thedimension.


6. Click One-by-One and dragthe dimension.

7. Click Normal .8. Click the short vertical line,

centerline, and short vertical lineagain.

9. Middle-click to place thedimension.



Task 7: Create an arc length dimension in Sketcher.

1. Edit the definition ofARC_LENGTH.

2. Click Normal .3. Select the arc, select each

endpoint, and middle-click toplace the dimension, as shown.


5. Click One-by-One and selectthe dimension.

6. Right-click and select Convertto Angle.

7. Right-click and select Convertto Length.

8. Click OK .

Task 8: Create a total included angle dimension in Sketcher.

1. Edit the definition ofINCLUDED_ANGLE.

2. Click Normal .3. Select the angled line, the

horizontal centerline, and angledline again.

4. Middle-click to place thedimension, as shown.




Modifying Dimensions within SketcherYou can modify dimensions individually or modify multipledimensions at once.• Modify dimensions by:– Editing the value.– Dragging the entity to which the

dimension is attached.– Dragging the dimension

dragger.– Using the Modify Dimensions

dialog box.

Figure 3 — Dragging theDimension Dragger

Figure 1 — Editing the Value

Figure 2 — Dragging an Entity

Figure 4 — Modify DimensionsDialog Box

Modifying Dimensions within SketcherYou can modify dimensions in Sketcher by using any of the following methods:• Edit the dimension manually by double-clicking it. The geometry placementupdates to the new dimension. You can also edit the dimension valuewhen you create it without having to double-click it.

• Click the entity that the dimension is attached to and drag it. The dimensionvalue updates automatically.

• Click the dimension dragger and drag it. The dimension value andgeometry value update automatically.

• Use the Modify Dimensions dialog box. When you select the dimension, ithighlights in the graphics window. You can edit values or scroll the wheelnext to the dimension you wish to modify. The dimension value increasesor decreases depending on the direction of scrolling.– You can modify the sensitivity to adjust how finely or coarsely dimension

wheels scroll.– If Regenerate is selected, the sketch geometry updates immediately

after a dimension is edited. If the check box is cleared, you can adjust


any or all dimensions within the Modify Dimensions dialog box, and thegeometry does not update until you click Regenerate Section .

– If Lock Scale is selected, you can modify one dimension and all otherdimension values update automatically to new values at the same ratio.

Locking the scale to edit dimensions is common when creating thefirst feature of a model.


PROCEDURE - Modifying Dimensions within Sketcher


Sketcher\Dimensions_Modifying MODIFY_DIMENSIONS.PRT

Task 1: Modify dimensions in Sketch 1.


Sketch 1 and select EditDefinition.


.4. Click the vertical line and

drag it until the diameter isapproximately 204.

5. Drag the 204 dimension draggerto approximately 90.

6. Double-click the 90 dimension,edit it to 180, and press ENTER.

7. Edit the 180 dimension to 8. The sketch is distorted due to the relativedimension differences.

8. Click Undo .


9. Drag a window around alldimensions.

10. Click Modify from the Editinggroup in the ribbon.

11. In the Modify Dimensions dialogbox, click in the 292 dimensionfield.• Scroll the wheel toapproximately 400.

• Select Lock Scale.• Edit the 400 dimension to 16and press ENTER.

• Click Regenerate Section .

12. Edit the remaining dimensionvalues.

13. Click OK .

Task 2: Modify dimensions in Sketch 2.


2. Click Refit from the InGraphics toolbar.

3. Click Modify .4. Select each dimension to add it

to the dialog box.


5. Scroll the 108 dimension wheel back and forth.6. Drag the Sensitivity slider to the left.7. Again, scroll the 108 dimension wheel back and forth.8. Edit the 96 dimension to 100 and press ENTER.9. Clear the Regenerate check box.

10. Edit the dimensions, as shown.11. Click Regenerate Section .

12. Click Refit from the InGraphics toolbar and zoom in.

13. Click OK .



Sketcher ConflictsSketcher conflicts occur from manually adding too manyconstraints or dimensions.

• Conflicts caused by:– Adding too many dimensions.– Adding too many constraints.

• Conflicts handled by:– Deleting unwanted constraints

or dimensions.– Converting dimensions to

Reference dimensions.

Figure 1 — Resolve SketchDialog Box

Figure 2 — Sketcher ConflictFigure 3 — Conflicting DimensionConverted to Reference Dimension

Sketcher Conflict CausesSketcher strives to maintain a fully constrained sketch automatically.Sketcher Conflicts are caused by an over-constrained sketch condition thatarises from manually adding too many constraints or too many dimensions.

Resolving Sketcher ConflictsWhen a Sketcher Conflict occurs, the Resolve Sketch dialog box appears, asshown in Figure 1. The Resolve Sketch dialog box displays the conflictingconstraints and/or dimensions. The graphics window also highlights theconflicting items in green. When a Sketcher Conflict arises, you can resolve itby using either of the following techniques:

• Delete the conflicting constraints or dimensions to revert the sketch backto fully constrained.

• Convert dimensions to Reference dimensions. A Reference dimension isnot a driving dimension that constrains a sketch. You cannot modify aReference dimension, but it does update with geometry changes.


PROCEDURE - Sketcher Conflicts


Sketcher\Conflicts SKETCHER_CONFLICTS.PRT

Task 1: Resolve conflicts due to added constraints.



4. Constrain the arc perpendicularto the vertical reference.

5. Select the 6.5 dimension in theResolve Sketch dialog box.• Click Delete.

6. Add the necessary constraint tomake the two highlighted linesequal.

7. Select the 7.3 dimension fromthe graphics window.

8. In the Resolve Sketch dialogbox, click Dim > Ref.

9. Click OK .


Task 2: Resolve conflicts due to added dimensions.

1. Edit the definition of Sketch 2.2. Dimension from the vertical

reference to the upper-right arccenter and place the dimensionunder the sketch geometry.

3. Select the 16 dimension in theResolve Sketch dialog box.• Click Delete and pressENTER.

4. Double-click the lower-leftarc and place the diameterdimension.

5. Select the Parallel constraint inthe Resolve Sketch dialog box.• Click Delete and pressENTER.

6. Click One-by-One from theOperations group.

7. Modify the dimensions, asshown.

8. Click OK .



Creating New Sketch FilesYou can import Sketch files into other files at a later time.

• Click File > New to create a new Sketch.• You can save a sketch out of an existing model.• The Sketch file extension is *.sec.

Figure 1 — Viewing a Sketch File

Figure 2 — Creating a NewSketch File

Creating New Sketch FilesA sketch can either be created within a model or it can be saved as its ownfile. If created within a model, it can be saved as a sketch file, which has a fileextension of *.sec. You can also create a new sketch file by selecting Sketchin the New dialog box. Any sketch file can be imported into a model andplaced in a Sketch feature.


PROCEDURE - Creating New Sketch Files


Sketcher\New SAVE_SKETCH.PRT

Task 1: Save a sketch from an existing part.


EXTRUDE_1 and select EditDefinition.

3. In the dashboard, select thePlacement tab.• Click Edit.


.

5. Click File > Save As > Save a Copy.6. In the Save a Copy dialog box, type CRANK_LOBE.SEC as the New

Name.• Click OK.

7. Click OK .8. Click Complete Feature from the dashboard.


Task 2: Create a new 2-D sketch file.

1. Click File > New.2. In the New dialog box, select Sketch.

• Edit the Name to D_shape.• Click OK.

3. Select Center and Pointfrom the Circle types drop-downmenu and sketch the circle.


4. Select Line Chain from theLine types drop-down menuand sketch a vertical line whoseendpoints are on the circle.

5. Click Delete Segment fromthe Editing group and trim theright arc.

6. Click Normal from theDimension group.

7. Select the vertical line and thearc, and then middle-click toplace the dimension.

8. Type 3 and press ENTER.9. Double-click the arc and place

the diameter dimension.10. Type 4 and press ENTER.




Placing Sections into SketcherPlacing sections in your model saves time and encouragesreuse of common shapes.

• Place sections:– From the File System.– Using the Sketcher Palette.

• Modify the dimension scheme or value.

Figure 1 — Placing a Section Figure 2 — The Sketcher Palette

Placing Sections into SketcherYou can insert preexisting sketches into your sketch. This helps to save timerather than recreating an existing sketch. It also promotes data reuse. Thereare two different methods that you can use to place sections:

• Place a section from file — This can be a *.sec file that you have createdby clicking File > New and selecting Sketch, or it can be a sketch that youhave saved from a different model. Either way, you can browse to thelocation of the existing sketch section file and place it.

• Use the Sketcher Palette — The Sketcher palette enables you to quicklyplace commonly used basic shapes, such as I-beams and hexagons, intoyour sketch. The Sketcher Palette contains a tab for the current workingdirectory as well as default tabs for polygons, profiles, shapes, and stars.You can create additional custom tabs simply by creating folders in theSketcher Palette library location. When you add sketch *.sec files to thefolder, they are listed in a tab with the same name in the Sketcher Palette.

When you place a sketch, you can translate, rotate, and scale it. You canalso modify the dimension scheme or value.


PROCEDURE - Placing Sections into Sketcher


Sketcher\Sections PLACE_SECTION.PRT

Task 1: Place a section from a file.



4. Click File System from the Get Data group.5. Select d_shape.sec in the Open dialog box.

• Click Open.

6. Click in the graphics window toplace the section.

7. Relocate the X Location handleto the arc center, if necessary.

8. Relocate the section to thevertical and horizontal referenceintersection.

9. In the dashboard, edit theScaling factor to 1.5.• Click Accept Changes .

10. Click OK .

Task 2: Place a section from the Sketcher Palette.

1. Edit the definition of Sketch 2.2. Click Palette from the

Sketching group in the ribbon.Notice the .sec file in the tab forthe working directory.

3. In the Sketcher Palette dialogbox, select each of the differenttabs and review their contents.• Select the Polygons tab.• Select the 8-Sided Octagonsection to preview it.

• Double-click the 8-SidedOctagon section.


4. Click in the graphics window toplace the section.

5. Relocate the section to thevertical and horizontal referenceintersection.

6. In the dashboard, edit theScaling factor to 1.• Click Accept Changes .

7. Click Close in the SketcherPalette.

8. Edit the 1 length dimension to1.5

9. Click OK .



Module8Creating Sketches for Features

Module OverviewUp to this point, you have learned how to sketch geometry within the Sketcherenvironment. In this module, you apply that knowledge to the creation ofsketch features. Sketch features typically serve as references to otherfeatures and can exist separately as their own feature or as the starting pointwhen you create sketch-based features. You learn how to specify the sketchsetup for a sketch feature, utilize sketch references, use entity from edge,and thicken edges.

ObjectivesAfter completing this module, you will be able to:• Learn how to create sketch features.• Specify the sketch setup.• Utilize sketch references.• Use entity from edge within Sketcher.• Thicken edges within Sketcher.


Creating Sketches ('Sketch' Feature)To create a Sketch Feature, specify the Sketch Setup, selectadditional sketch references, and sketch the geometry.• You can modify the Sketch Setup.• You can use references to snapgeometry or dimensions.

• You can create 3-D geometry byusing the Sketch feature.

• Sketched features have variousrequirements.

Figure 1—Specifying Sketch Setup

Figure 2 — Modifying Sketch SetupFigure 3 — Sketch GeometrySnapped to Added References

Creating Sketches ('Sketch' Feature)You can create a sketch feature by clicking Sketch from the Datum groupin the Model ribbon tab. Creating a sketch feature involves the followingthree steps:• Specify the sketch setup. Once the sketch setup has been defined, youcan always change it to another plane.

• Select additional sketch references that you intend to dimension from orsnap to with sketch geometry. For example, in Figure 3, some of theexisting geometry was specified as sketch references for a new Sketchfeature.

• Sketch the geometry.

Sketch Feature RequirementsThe following rules apply to sketched sections when creating sketch features:• A sketched section should not contain any gaps, or open ends.• A sketch cannot contain any overlapping entities.


• An open section sketch is required for creating a rib feature.• All loops of a multiple loop section must be closed.• When creating a revolve feature, you must only sketch geometry on oneside of the centerline.


Specifying and Manipulating the Sketch SetupThe Sketch Setup determines the sketching plane and themodel's orientation in the graphics window.

• Sketch Setup consists of:– Sketch Plane– Sketch Orientation

• Current model orientationbecomes the default sketchorientation.

• Use Sketch View to orient thesketch plane parallel to the screenin 2-D.

• Select right-click options totemporarily manipulate the sketchorientation.

Figure 1 – Current ModelOrientation Becoming Default

Sketch Orientation

Figure 2 – Viewing 2-D SketchOrientation

Figure 3 – Sketch Plane Modifiedfrom FRONT to RIGHT

Specifying the Sketch SetupWhen you create a sketch feature, the Sketch Setup identifies the planewhere the sketch should be created and specifies the orientation of thesketch:• Sketch Plane – The 2-D sketch is created on, and exists in, this planarreference. The sketching plane can be either a datum plane or a planarsurface of an existing solid or surface feature. If you create consecutivesketches on the same sketch plane, you can click Use Previous in theSketch dialog box to use the previous sketch feature's sketch setup.

• Sketch Orientation – Determines how the sketch is oriented in the graphicswindow and model when viewed in the 2-D sketch orientation. Sketchorientation consists of two items:– Orientation Reference – The orientation reference determines the 2-D

orientation of the sketch. This reference is also either a datum plane ora planar surface and must be normal to the sketch plane.


– Orientation Direction – Determines the direction that the orientationreference faces when viewing the sketch in the 2-D sketch orientation.The orientation reference can be assigned to face top, bottom, right, orleft. These directions are named to reflect how the reference orients withregard to the Creo Parametric graphics window. Note that datum planeshave two sides, brown and gray, and that the brown, or positive side,orients to the selected direction.

If you use an object-action workflow and select the sketch planereference before starting the Sketch tool, Sketcher immediatelyopens with the Sketch Orientation reference and directionautomatically selected. These automatic selections are based onthe model’s orientation in the graphics window when you startedthe sketch tool. Working in this manner enables you to entirelybypass the Sketch dialog box.

Manipulating the Sketch SetupWhen you enter Sketcher, you still remain in the current 3-D orientation bydefault.

You can edit the sketcher startup to set the sketching plane parallelto the screen in the Creo Parametric Options dialog box.

At this point, you have three options available with respect to the sketchsetup and orientation:1. Retain the current default sketch orientation and begin sketching

entities.2. Revert to the default 2-D sketch orientation – The system creates

this default 2-D sketch orientation based on the specified Orientation

Direction and Orientation Reference. You can click Sketch View toreorient the sketch into this 2-D sketch orientation. When this occurs,the sketch plane is oriented parallel to the screen, and the OrientationReference points in the Orientation Direction.

3. Edit the sketch setup – While sketching, you can always reenter sketch

setup by clicking Sketch Setup from the Setup group. You canswitch the sketch plane or update the sketch orientation, keeping inmind that the sketch orientation references are only used in the 2-Dsketch orientation.Different combinations of selected orientation reference and orientationdirection yield the same 2-D sketch orientation in the graphics window.You can also reverse the sketch orientation by clicking Flip in theSketch dialog box.Within the Properties tab of the Sketch dialog box, you can modify thename of the sketch feature as it appears in the model tree.

Temporarily Manipulating Section OrientationWhile in Sketcher, you may wish to temporarily manipulate the sectionorientation without losing the previous orientation or modifying the sketchsetup. To do this, you can right-click in the graphics window and selectSection Orientation > Set horizontal reference or Section Orientation > Set


vertical reference. When you specify an entity for the desired referencedirection, the sketch dynamically reorients so that the selected reference is inthe specified orientation. To return to the original sketch orientation, you canright-click and select Section Orientation > Restore section orientation. Youcan also flip either the section orientation or the sketching plane.


PROCEDURE - Specifying and Manipulating the SketchSetup


Sketcher\Setup SKETCH_SETUP.PRT

Task 1: Specify the Sketch Setup on datum plane FRONT.

The T, R, and F features have been added for training purposesto help visualize and distinguish datum planes.


2. Highlight datum plane FRONTand then select it.

3. Click Sketch from the Datumgroup.• Notice that the current modelorientation is now the defaultsketch orientation.

• Notice that now you couldsketch geometry on datumplane FRONT.

4. Click Cancel from the Sketchdashboard.• Click Yes.

5. Click in the background tode-select all geometry.

Task 2: Specify the Sketch Setup and modify the sketch plane.

1. Click Sketch .• Highlight datum plane FRONTand then select it.

• Click Sketch.• Again, notice that you couldnow sketch geometry ondatum plane FRONT.


2. Click Sketch Setup from theSetup group.

3. Right-click in the graphicswindow and select Placement.

4. Highlight datum plane RIGHTand select it.

5. Click Sketch.6. Notice that you could now

sketch geometry on datum planeRIGHT.


8. Notice that the sketch plane isnow parallel to the screen.

9. Click Sketch Setup .• Notice that datum plane TOPis oriented to the top of thescreen, per the Sketch dialogbox.

• In the Sketch dialog box, selectLeft as the new Orientation.

• Click Sketch.10. Click Cancel from the Sketch

dashboard.• Click Yes.


Task 3: Temporarily manipulate the sketch orientation.

1. Orient the model to the 3D vieworientation.

2. Above the model tree, clickSettings and select TreeFilters.

3. In the Model Tree Items dialogbox, select the SuppressedObjects check box and click OK.

4. Resume the three suppressedfeatures in the model tree.

5. Click Sketch .• Select the front, flat surface asthe Sketch Plane.

• Click Sketch.

6. Right-click in the graphicswindow and select SectionOrientation > Set verticalreference.

7. Select the chamfer surface.8. Notice that the chamfer surface

is now vertical.

9. Right-click and select SectionOrientation > Flip sectionorientation.

10. Right-click and select SectionOrientation > Restore sectionorientation.

11. Click Cancel .• Click Yes.



Utilizing Sketch ReferencesSketch references are used to capture design intent by snappinggeometry or dimensioning to them.

• You can select the following typesof entities:– Existing geometry– Sketches– Datum features

• Press ALT to select entities andadd them dynamically.

• Unused references automaticallyremoved.

Figure 1 — Geometry Snappedto References

Figure 2 — Additional SketchingReferences Added

Figure 3 — The ReferencesDialog Box

Utilizing Sketch ReferencesYou use sketch references to snap sketch geometry to them, which can cutdown the number of dimensions required. Sketch references are also used bythe system for creating the initial weak dimensions and constraints. If furtherdimensions are required, you can dimension to or from sketch references.Sketch references appear as dashed entities in the Sketcher.

When selecting entities from existing features, you create a parent/childrelationship between the sketch and the entity you added as a reference.However, if you add a sketch reference and it goes unused, the systemautomatically removes it as a sketch reference. Conversely, if you dimensionto or from an entity the system automatically adds it as a sketch reference.

You can add sketch references in three different ways:


1. You can click References from the Setup group. This opens theReferences dialog box.

2. Right-click in the graphics window and select References. Again, thisopens the References dialog box.

3. While sketching, you can add references on-the-fly by pressing ALT,highlighting the desired entity to add as a reference, and selecting it.Pressing CTRL+ALT enables you to select multiple edges for multipledynamically added references.

The References dialog box consists of the following items:

• Select References — Select entities in the graphics window. The followingtypes of entities can be selected as sketch references:– Existing geometry — Select the edges or surfaces of features that

have already been created. You can also select silhouette edgeswhen the sketch is in the correct orientation. Silhouette edges arerounded surfaces that display as edges when the model is in the correctorientation.

– Sketches — Select geometry from existing sketches.– Datum Features — Select datum planes, datum axes, points, and

coordinate systems.• Select Xsec References — Select a surface or datum plane to intersectwith the sketching plane.

• Selection Filters — Used for selecting items within the Reference list.Choices from the drop-down list include Use Edge/Offset, All Non-Dim.Refs, Chain Refs, and All References.

• Replace — Select a reference from the list, click Replace, and select anew reference.

• Delete — Delete the selected reference from the list.• Reference Status — Displays the status of the sketch with respect toreferences. Status options include Unsolved Sketch, Partially Placed, andFully Placed.

• Solve — You can solve an unsolved or partially placed sketch afterchanging references.


PROCEDURE - Utilizing Sketch References


Sketcher\References REFERENCES.PRT

Task 1: Select and use references in Sketcher.

1. Enable only the following DatumDisplay types:

2. Click Sketch from the Datumgroup.• Select the surface.• Edit the Orientation directionto Right.

• Click Sketch.


4. Click References from theSetup group.• Query select the vertical edge.


6. Select the additional topsilhouette edge referenceshown.

You can only select thissilhouette edge in the 2-Dsketch orientation.

7. In the Referencesdialog box, select theEdge:F8(EXTRUDE_1)reference and click Delete.


8. Select the far left vertical edge inthe graphics window to add it asa reference.

9. Click Close in the Referencesdialog box.

10. Select Line Chain from theLine types drop-down menu andsketch the right-most vertical linefrom top to bottom, staying in thetool.

11. As you move to the left, pressCTRL+ALT and select the datumplane.

12. Still holding CTRL+ALT, selectthe angled edge.

13. Notice that you have added twonew references dynamically.

14. Using these new references,sketch the remaining four lines.

15. Click OK .



18. Click References . Noticethat the unused reference wasremoved from the left side of thesketch.

19. Click Cancel .• Click Yes.

20. Hide Sketch 3.



Using Entity from Edge within SketcherYou can reuse existing geometry by selecting it with Use Entityfrom Edge within Sketcher.

• Two types:– Project Edge– Offset Edge

• Select edge types:– Single– Chain– Loop

Figure 1—Reused Entities from Edge

Figure 2 — Selecting the DesiredEntity from Edge Chain

Figure 3 — Reused EntitiesOffset from Edge

Using Entity from Edge within SketcherThe Project and Offset options in Sketcher create sketcher geometryby projecting selected geometry edges onto the sketching plane. The twooptions are the same except the offset edge enables you to specify an offsetvalue to the edges. A positive offset value causes the geometry to becomelarger, whereas a negative offset value causes the geometry to becomesmaller. Each entity created displays the ~ constraint symbol.

The resulting dimensions are always positive when shown in adrawing.

When using the entity from edge options, you can select edges three differentways:

• Single — Edges are selected one at a time.• Chain — Create sketched entities from a chain of edges or entities.Select two edges from the same surface or face and select which chain ofgeometry you wish to create. Figure 2 shows one possible chain selectionfrom the selected entities.

• Loop — Create sketched entities from a loop of edges or entities. Whenyou select a surface or face, the edges or entities that form the loop areselected. If more than one loop exists, you must select the desired loop.


PROCEDURE - Using Entity from Edge within Sketcher


Sketcher\Use_Edge USE_OFFSET_EDGE.PRT

Task 1: Use the edges of geometry in Sketcher.


2. Click Sketch .• Select the front surface.• Click Sketch.


.4. Click Project from the

Sketching group.5. Select the top and bottom edges

of the circle.

6. Select Chain from the Typedialog box.

7. Select the bottom arc and toparc.

8. Click Next from the menumanager.• Click Accept.• Click Close.

9. Select Line Tangent fromthe Line types drop-down menuand sketch two tangent lines.

10. Click Delete Segment andtrim the four overhanging arcs.

11. Click OK .

Task 2: Offset the edges of existing geometry in Sketcher.

1. Click Sketch .• Click Use Previous.


2. Click Offset from theSketching group.

3. Select Loop in the Type dialogbox.

4. Select the surface.

5. Click Accept from the menumanager.


7. Click One-by-One and edit thedimension to -10.

8. Click References to viewthe sketcher references.• Click Close.

9. Click OK .10. De-select the sketch.



Thickening EdgesThe Thicken Edge option enables you to offset existing geometrywith a width.

• Edge Types:– Single– Chain– Loop

• End Cap Types:– Open– Flat– Circular

Figure 1 – ThickenSingle: Open

Figure 2 – Thicken Chain: FlatFigure 3 – Thicken Chain:

Circular

Thickening EdgesThe Thicken option in Sketcher creates Sketcher geometry by projectingand then offsetting and thickening selected geometry edges onto thesketching plane. You are prompted for two values: a thickness and a positiveor negative offset. Both values create Sketcher dimensions that you canmodify. In addition, a reference dimension is automatically created betweenthe selected edge and the thickened edge. The reference dimension cannotbe modified directly, but updates with other changes.

Even if negative offset values are entered, the resulting dimensionsare always positive when shown in a drawing.

When thickening edges, you can select edges using three different methods:

• Single — Edges are selected one at a time.• Chain — Create sketched entities from a chain of edges or entities.Select two edges from the same surface or face and select which chain ofgeometry you wish to create. Figure 3 shows one possible chain selectionfrom the selected entities.


• Loop — Create sketched entities from a loop of edges or entities. Whenyou select a surface or face, the edges or entities that form the loop areselected. If more than one loop exists, you must select the appropriate loop.

In addition, you can control the end cap type on the thickened edges usingthe following options:

• Open — No additional geometry is added to thickened edges.• Flat — Line segments are added to ends of the thickened edges.• Circular — Arcs are added to ends of the thickened edges.


PROCEDURE - Thickening Edges


Sketcher\Thicken_Edge THICKEN_EDGE.PRT

Task 1: Thicken the edges of geometry using the Single and Chain options.


2. Click Sketch .• Select the top surface.• Click Sketch.


4. Click Thicken from theSketching group.

5. Select Single and Open.6. Select the arc.

7. Type 2 for the thickness andpress ENTER.

8. Type 10 for the offset and pressENTER.

9. Select Chain and Flat.10. Select the edges shown.11. If necessary, click Next to

highlight the appropriate chain.• Click Accept.




14. Select Chain and Circular.15. Select the edges shown.16. If necessary, click Next to

highlight the appropriate chain.• Click Accept.



19. Click OK .

Task 2: Thicken edges using the Loop option.

1. Click Sketch .• Click Use Previous.

2. Click Thicken from theSketching group.

3. Select Loop and select the topsurface.

4. Click Next to highlight theappropriate chain.• Click Accept.


6. Type -1 for the offset and pressENTER.

7. Click OK .



Module9Creating Datum Features: Planes and Axes

Module OverviewDatum features are commonly required as references when creating otherfeatures. In this module, you learn the theory behind creating datum features,and you create datum axes and datum planes.

ObjectivesAfter completing this module, you will be able to:• Understand the creating datum features theory.• Create datum axes.• Create datum planes.


Creating Datum Features TheoryDatum features are commonly required as references whencreating other features.

• The following types ofdatum features can becreated:– Datum Planes– Datum Axes– Datum Points– Datum Coordinate

Systems

Figure 1 — Examples of Datum Features

Creating Datum Features TheoryDatum features are commonly required as references when creating otherfeatures. Datum features can be used as dimensioning references, featureplacement references, and assembly references. The default color of datumfeatures in the graphics window is brown (datum planes are both brown andgray, depending upon which side is currently being viewed). The followingfour types of datum features can be created:

• Datum Planes• Datum Axes• Datum Points• Datum Coordinate SystemsExamples of each type of datum feature are shown in Figure 1.


Creating Datum AxesDatum axes are particularly useful for making datum planes,placing items coaxially, and creating axis patterns.

Figure 1 — Various Datum Axis Types

• Definition:– No mass, infinite linear

reference– Display length can be

changed• Uses:– Construction geometry– Reference

• Types:– Auto axis– Axis feature– Geometry point– Geometry centerline

Figure 2 — Geometry Axis (Centerline)Created for Revolve Feature

Datum Axis DefinitionDatum axes are individual features that can be redefined, suppressed,hidden, or deleted. A datum axis is a linear reference that has no mass. It isinfinite in length, but its display length can be edited by selecting a reference,specifying a value, or dragging the drag handle.

Datum Axis UsesA datum axis can be used as construction geometry in a feature. It can alsobe used as a reference for:

• Other datum features, such as datum planes.• Other features, such as a hole location.• Assembling components.

Datum Axis TypesThere are four different types of datum axes that can be created within CreoParametric:


1. Auto Axis — Belongs to another feature and is created in the followingtwo circumstances:• A circle is extruded.• A hole is created.

2. Axis Feature — Select almost any combination of geometry that definesa line in 3-D space. You can select single or multiple references whichare set as a combination of Through, Normal, Tangent, and Centerconstraint types. The following types of axis features can be created:• Through an edge.• Normal to a plane.• Through a cylindrical surface.• Through the intersection of two planes or planar surfaces.• Through two points or vertices.• Through the center of an arc.• Tangent to an edge.• Through a point or vertex, normal to a plane.• Through the X, Y, or Z axis of a coordinate system.

3. Geometry Point — When created in Sketcher and when the sketchis completed, the axis appears at the location of the geometry point,normal to the sketch plane. A geometry point within a sketch can onlycreate axes when used for internal sketches of extrude features.

4. Geometry Centerline — Created only in Sketcher. A geometrycenterline is created in the sketching plane, and when the sketch iscompleted, it displays as a datum axis within the graphics window.A geometry centerline can be used as the axis of revolution for arevolve feature. When a geometry centerline is selected in Sketcher,you can right-click and select Construction to convert it to a sketchentity. Similarly, you can select a centerline and right-click and selectGeometry to convert the centerline to a geometry centerline.

Selecting Datum AxesYou can select datum axes using the following methods:

• Select the axis line.• Select the axis name tag.• Select the axis in the model tree.• Search for the axis by name in the search tool.


PROCEDURE - Creating Datum Axes


Datum\Axes DATUM_AXIS.PRT

Task 1: Create datum axes on a part model.


2. Click Axis from the Datumgroup.

3. Select the edge.4. Click OK in the Datum Axis

dialog box.5. De-select the datum axis.


7. In the View tab, enable Axis TagDisplay .

8. Select the Model tab.

9. Click Axis .10. Select the surface.11. Click OK and de-select the

datum axis.

12. Click Axis .13. Press CTRL and select datum

plane FRONT and the surface.


14. In the Datum Axis dialog box,select the Display tab.• Select the Adjust Outlinecheck box.

• Select Reference from thedrop-down list.

• Select the same surface again.15. In the Datum Axis dialog box,

select the Properties tab.• Edit the Name to REF_1.• Click OK and de-select thedatum axis.

16. Click Axis .17. Select the surface.

18. Right-click and select OffsetReferences.

19. Press CTRL and select the twosurfaces.

20. Edit the values to 22 and 3.

21. Click OK in the Datum Axisdialog box.


23. Disable Axis Tag Display .



Creating Datum PlanesDatum planes are 2-D reference geometry that you use to buildfeature geometry.

Figure 1 — Viewing Datum Plane Sides

• Definition:– No mass, infinite planar

reference– Display size can be

changed– Two sides

• Uses:– Default datum planes– Construction geometry– Reference

• Types:– Through– Normal– Parallel– Offset– Angle– Tangent– Blend section

Figure 2 — Datum Plane Types

Datum Plane DefinitionDatum planes are individual features that can be redefined, suppressed,hidden, or deleted. A datum plane is a planar reference that has no mass.It is infinite in size, but its display size can be edited to visually fit a part,feature, surface, edge, axis, or radius. You can also drag its drag handle. Adatum plane has two sides that display brown and gray, as shown in Figure 1.The front, or brown side, is considered to be positive, while the back, or grayside, is considered to be negative.

Datum Plane UsesThe RIGHT, FRONT, and TOP datum planes included in all the defaulttemplates are known as the default datum planes. Every feature is directly orindirectly created off of these datum planes. A datum plane can be used asconstruction geometry for a feature. It can also be used as a reference for:

• Other datum features, such as datum axes.• Other features, such as sketches on an angle.• Assembling components.


Datum Plane TypesWhen creating datum planes, you can select most any combination ofgeometry that defines a plane in 3-D space. You can select single or multiplereferences which are set as a combination of the following seven constrainttypes:

1. Through — Select any of the following:• Axis, edge, or curve• Point or vertex• Plane• Cylinder

2. Normal — Select any of the following:• Axis• Edge• Curve• Plane

3. Parallel — Select a plane4. Offset — Select either of the following:

• Plane• Coordinate system

5. Angle — Select a plane6. Tangent — Select a cylinder7. Blend Section — Select a blend feature and a section number

Selecting Datum PlanesYou can select datum planes using the following methods:

• Select the datum frame.• Select the datum plane tag.• Select the datum plane in the model tree.• Search for the datum plane by name in the search tool.


PROCEDURE - Creating Datum Planes


Datum\Planes DATUM-PLANE.PRT

Task 1: Create datum planes in a part model.


2. Click Plane from the Datumgroup.

3. Select the right surface and dragthe drag handle to an offset of12.

4. Click OK in the Datum Planedialog box.


6. In the View tab, enable PlaneTag Display .

7. Select the Model tab.

8. With DTM1 still selected, clickPlane .

9. Drag the drag handle to an offsetof 8.

10. Click OK in the Datum Planedialog box and de-select thedatum plane.

11. Click Plane .12. Select the surface.13. In the Placement tab of the

Datum Plane dialog box, selectThrough from the drop-downlist.


14. In the Datum Plane dialog box,select the Display tab.• Select the Adjust Outlinecheck box.

• Edit the drop-down list toReference.

• Select the surface again.• Edit the drop-down list back toSize.

• Edit the Width and Height to14 and 10, respectively.

• Click OK and de-select thedatum plane.

15. Click Plane .16. Press CTRL and select the

cylinder and edge.

17. In the Datum Plane dialog box,select Tangent from the surfacereference drop-down list.• Click OK and de-select thedatum plane.

18. Click Plane .19. Press CTRL and select datum

axis A_2 and datum planeRIGHT.

20. In the Datum Plane dialog box,select Parallel from the datumplane reference drop-down list.• Click OK.

21. With DTM5 still selected, clickPlane .

22. Press CTRL and select datumaxis A_2.

23. In the Datum Plane dialog box,select Normal from the datumplane reference drop-down list.• Click OK and de-select thedatum plane.


24. Click Plane .25. Press CTRL and select datum

axis A_2 and the surface.26. Edit the offset value to 10 or -10

to attain the proper direction andclick OK.

27. Edit the definition of DTM4.28. In the Datum Plane dialog box,

select the Display tab and clickFlip.• Click OK.

29. De-select the datum plane.30. In the ribbon, select the View

tab.31. In the View tab, disable Plane

Tag Display .




Module10Creating Extrudes, Revolves, and Ribs

Module OverviewOnce you have created 2-D sketches, you can use those sketches to create3-D geometry.

In this module, you use 2-D sketches to create 3-D solid geometry featuresincluding extrude, revolve, and profile rib features. You also learn about thecommon dashboard options associated with these types of sketch-basedfeatures.

ObjectivesAfter completing this module, you will be able to:• Create solid extrude and revolve features.• Add taper to extrude features.• Create profile rib features.• Understand common dashboard options including extrude depth, featuredirection, thickening sketches, and revolve angle.

• Understand how to automatically add and remove material.


Creating Solid Extrude FeaturesYou can create extruded features from 2-D sketches.

• Extrude sections perpendicular tothe sketching plane.

• Add or remove material from themodel.

Figure 1 - Viewing 2-D Sketches

Figure 2 - Extrude FeatureAdding Material

Figure 3 - Extrude FeatureRemoving Material

Creating Solid Extrude FeaturesAn extrude feature is based on a two-dimensional sketch. It linearly extrudesa sketch perpendicular to the sketching plane to create or remove material.You can either select the sketch first and then start the Extrude tool, or youcan start the Extrude tool and then select the sketch.

In an assembly, you cannot create an extrude feature that addsmaterial. You can only remove material.


PROCEDURE - Creating Solid Extrude Features


Extrude\Solid EXTRUDE.PRT

Task 1: Create solid extrude features.


2. In the ribbon, click Extrudefrom the Shapes group.

3. Select Sketch 1.4. Drag the drag handle down

below datum plane TOP to adepth of 16.

5. Click Complete Feature fromthe dashboard.

6. Click Extrude .7. Select Sketch 2.8. Edit the height to 24.9. Click Complete Feature .

10. Click Extrude .11. Select Sketch 3.

12. Click Remove Material fromthe dashboard.

13. Edit the depth to Through All.





Adding Taper to Extrude FeaturesThe Add Taper option enables you to create an angle within anExtrude feature that appears similar to draft created using theDraft tool.

Figure 1 – Original Extrude Feature

• All extruded surfaces are tapered.• The sketch plane beginsfunctioning as a pivot plane.

• Positive or negative angle can beentered.

• A model dimension is created thatis available upon feature edit.

• Positive direction of angle isdetermined by sketch planereference.

• The enable_tapered_extrudeconfiguration option controlsavailability in the dashboard.

Figure 2 – Extrude Featurewith Taper Added

Adding Taper to Extrude FeaturesThe Add Taper option enables you to create an angle within an Extrudefeature that appears similar to draft created using the Draft tool. Youcan enable and specify the taper angle in the Options tab of the Extrudedashboard.Consider the following when selecting the Add Taper option:• All extruded surfaces are tapered.• The sketch plane begins functioning as a pivot plane.• Positive or negative angle can be entered.• A model dimension is created that is available upon feature edit.• Positive direction of angle is determined by sketch plane reference.– If the sketching plane is on a part surface, the section size reduces

as the feature is extruded.


– If the sketching plane is off the surface of the part, the section sizeincreases as the feature is extruded.

– Positive draft angle direction is determined upon feature creation.• The enable_tapered_extrude configuration option controls availability inthe dashboard. This option is enabled by default.


PROCEDURE - Adding Taper to Extrude Features


Extrude\Add_Taper TAPER.PRT

Task 1: Redefine an existing feature to add taper.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.2. Edit the definition of extrude

OVAL.3. Notice that there is no taper

currently defined for this feature.

4. In the dashboard, select theOptions tab.• Select the Add Taper checkbox.

• Edit the value to 10 degreesand press ENTER.



Task 2: Create a new extrude with taper.


2. Select sketch HEX.3. In the dashboard, click Remove

Material .• Click Change DepthDirection .

• Edit the depth to Through All.

• Select the Options tab.• Select the Add Taper checkbox.

• Edit the value to 5 degreesand press ENTER.




Common Dashboard Options: Extrude DepthYou can extrude a sketch to many different depth options.

• Extrude depthoptions:– Blind– Symmetric– To Next– Through All– Through Until– To Selected– Side 1/Side 2

• Set using dashboardor right-clicking draghandle

Figure 1 - Extrude Depth Options

Common Dashboard Options: Extrude DepthWhen you create an extrude feature from a 2-D sketch, the depth at whichthe feature extrudes can be set in a variety of ways depending upon thedesign intent you wish to capture. You can specify the desired depth optionusing the dashboard or by right-clicking on the drag handle in the graphicswindow. Extrude depth options include:• Blind (Variable) — This is the default depth option. You can edit this depthvalue by dragging the drag handle, editing the dimension on the model, orusing the dashboard.

• Symmetric — The section extrudes equally on both sides of the sketchplane. You can edit the total depth at which the feature extrudes, just asyou can with the Blind depth option. Therefore, the Symmetric depth isessentially the same as a Blind Symmetric depth.

• To Next — This option causes the extrude to stop at the next surfaceencountered. A depth dimension is not required, as the next surfacecontrols the extrude depth.

• Through All — This option causes the section to extrude through the entiremodel. A depth dimension is not required, as the model itself controlsthe extrude depth.

• Through Until — This option causes the extrude to stop at the selectedsurface. A depth dimension is not required, as the selected surfacecontrols the extrude depth. Note that the section must pass through theselected surface.

• To Selected — This option causes the extrude to stop at the selectedsurface. A depth dimension is not required, as the selected surface controlsthe extrude depth. Unlike the Through Until depth option, the section doesnot have to pass through the selected surface.


• Side 1/Side 2 — You can independently control the depth at which thesection extrudes on each side of the sketching plane. By default, thesection extrudes on Side 1; however, you can cause the section to extrudeon Side 2 as well. Any of the above options can be used for either side,except for Symmetric.

The To Next and Through All options only consider geometry present at thetime (in the feature order) when the extrude is created. Features createdafter the extrude feature is created do not cause the extrude feature's depthto change.

You can also switch depth options by right-clicking on the draghandle in the graphics window.


PROCEDURE - Common Dashboard Options: ExtrudeDepth


Extrude\Depth EXTRUDE-DEPTH.PRT

Task 1: Create extrude features using different depth options.



3. Select sketch BLIND, and editthe depth to 200.


5. Click Extrude .6. Select sketch SYMMETRIC.7. In the dashboard, edit the depth

to Symmetric and edit thedepth to 125.


9. Click Extrude .10. Select sketch TO_NEXT.

11. Edit the depth to To Next .12. Click Complete Feature .

13. Click Extrude .14. Select sketch THRU_ALL.15. Edit the depth to Through All

and click Remove Material.



17. Click Extrude .18. Select sketch THRU_UNTIL.19. Edit the depth to Through Until

and select the surface.20. Click Complete Feature .

21. Click Extrude .22. Select sketch TO_SURFACE.23. Edit the depth to To Selected

and select the surface.24. Click Complete Feature .25. Notice the contour at the extrude

end.

26. Enable Plane Display .

27. Click Extrude .28. Select sketch TO_PLANE.29. Edit the depth to To Selected

and select datum planeDTM1.


31. Click Extrude .32. Select sketch BOTH_SIDES and

edit the depth to 220.33. Select the Options tab and edit

the Side 2 depth to To Next .34. Click Complete Feature .



Common Dashboard Options: Feature DirectionYou can edit the depth direction and material direction of afeature.

Figure 1 - Same Feature, FlippedMaterial Direction

• Depth Direction– Side 1– Side 2

• Material Direction• Flip the directions using thearrows or the dashboard.

Figure 2 - Same Feature, FlippedDepth Direction

Figure 3 - Same Feature, Side 2Depth Direction Added

Common Dashboard Options: Feature DirectionWhen you create a feature, such as an extrude feature, there are two arrowsthat appear in the interface, as shown in Figure 1.In each image in Figure 1, the arrow on the right displays perpendicular tothe section and denotes the depth direction. The arrow on the left displaysparallel to the section and denotes the material direction.

Specifying the Depth DirectionThe depth direction arrow in the interface shows you which direction thefeature is created with respect to the sketching plane. You can flip thedirection of the feature creation either by using the dashboard or by clickingthe arrow in the interface. In Figure 2, the depth direction was flipped.By default, the feature is created in only one direction. This is known as Side1. However, you can add the second direction so the feature is created in


both directions from the sketch plane. This second side is Side 2. In Figure 3,the Side 2 depth direction was added to the feature.

Specifying the Material DirectionThe material direction arrow in the interface shows you which side of thesketch material is removed when creating a cut. This arrow only displayswhen removing material. Similar to the depth direction arrow, you can flip thematerial direction either by using the dashboard or by clicking the arrow in theinterface. In Figure 1, the material direction for the cut was flipped from theinside to the outside. Consequently, the material that was removed flippedfrom the inside to the outside.


PROCEDURE - Common Dashboard Options: FeatureDirection


Extrude\Direction FEATURE-DIRECTION.PRT

Task 1: Modify the depth and material directions for various extrudefeatures.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.2. Edit the definition of HEX.3. Click Change Depth Direction

from the dashboard.• Click Preview Featurefrom the dashboard.

4. Orient the model and notice thecut is now on the underside ofthe model.

5. Click Resume Feature fromthe dashboard.

6. In the dashboard, click ChangeMaterial Direction .• Click Preview Feature .The hex feature is nowremoving material on theoutside of the sketch.

The hex feature is still removing material from the model (the base).

7. Click Resume Feature .8. In the dashboard, click Change

Material Direction .• Click Complete Feature .

9. Press CTRL+D to orient to theStandard Orientation.


10. Edit the definition of OVAL.Notice the depth direction pointsupward.

11. In the dashboard, select theOptions tab.• Edit the Side 2 depth to Blind

and edit the value to 28.• Click Complete Feature .

12. Orient the model and view theunderside of the model.



Common Dashboard Options: Thicken SketchThe Thicken Sketch option is available in many types of features,including extrude, revolve, blend, and sweep features.• Create solids or cuts.• Edit the material thickness.• Flip the side that thickens.• Thicken open or closedsections.

Figure 1 - Creating a Thickened Cut

Figure 2 - Original Thicken SideFigure 3 - Thicken Side Flipped

Common Dashboard Options: Thicken SketchThe Thicken Sketch option is available in many types of features, includingextrude, revolve, blend, and sweep features. When creating one of these

features, you can use the Thicken Sketch option to assign a thickness tothe selected section outline.• You can create features that either add or cut away material.• You can edit the material thickness, as shown in Figures 2 and 3.• You can also change the side of the sketch where the thickness is added,or add thickness to both sides of the sketch by using Change ThicknessSide to toggle through the options.

• You can use this option on both open and closed sketches.For example, you can use the Thicken sketch option to sketch a circle andextrude it into a pipe shape with a specified wall thickness, or you can useit to sketch a rectangle and extrude it into box-shaped tubing, again with aspecified wall thickness.


PROCEDURE - Common Dashboard Options: ThickenSketch


Extrude\Thicken THICKEN-SKETCH.PRT

Task 1: Thicken the sketches of various extrude features in a model.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.2. Notice the hex cut in the bottom

of the model.3. Orient to the Standard

Orientation.

4. Edit the definition of OVAL.5. In the dashboard, click Thicken

Sketch .• Edit the thickness value to 4.

6. Click Change Thickness Side.


8. Edit the definition of OVAL.9. In the dashboard, edit the depth

value to 10.• Click Change DepthDirection .

• Click Remove Material .


10. Click Change Thickness Sideto thicken on both sides of

the sketch.




Creating Solid Revolve FeaturesYou can create revolved features from 2-D sketches.

• Revolve a section about the axisof revolution in a sketching plane.

• Add or remove material from themodel.

• Select different axes of revolution.– First geometry centerline– Axis or edge

Figure 1 – Viewing 2-D Sketches

Figure 2 – Same Revolved Sketchusing Different Axes of Revolution

Figure 3 – Removing Materialusing a Revolve Feature

Creating Solid Revolve FeaturesA revolve feature is based on a two-dimensional sketch. You can usea revolve feature to revolve a sketch about an axis of revolution (in thesketching plane) to create or remove material. You can either select thesketch first and start the Revolve tool, or you can start the Revolve tool andthen select the sketch.

When you select a sketch to be revolved, the feature uses, by default, thefirst geometry centerline sketched within the section as the axis of revolution,as shown in the left image in Figure 2. However, you can also select anyother straight curve or edge, datum axis, or coordinate system axis as theaxis of revolution. If the sketch you are revolving does not contain a geometrycenterline, you need to select one of these other references as the axis ofrevolution. In the right image in Figure 2, the axis of revolution has beenchanged to the horizontal datum axis. There are two rules for defining theaxis of revolution:

1. Geometry must be sketched only on one side of the axis of revolution.2. The axis of revolution must lie in the sketching plane of the section.


You can revolve either an open or closed sketch. In Figure 2, a closed sketchis used to create the feature that adds material, while an open section is usedto create the cut that removes material in Figure 3.

You can also thicken the sketch used to create a revolve feature.


PROCEDURE - Creating Solid Revolve Features


Revolve\Solid REVOLVE.PRT

Task 1: Create solid revolve features using different axes of revolution.


2. Edit the definition of Sketch 1.Notice the vertical and horizontalcenterlines.

3. Select the vertical centerline,right-click, and select Geometry.

4. Click OK .

5. Click Revolve from theShapes group.

6. Select Sketch 1 if necessary.7. Right-click and select Axis of

Revolution Collector.8. Highlight datum axis REV, and

then select it.9. Click Complete Feature .

10. Edit the definition of Revolve 1.11. In the dashboard, select the

Placement tab and clickInternal CL.


13. Disable Axis Display .



15. Select Sketch 2.

16. Click Remove Material .17. Edit the Revolve angle to 75 and

press ENTER.18. Click Complete Feature .

19. Edit the definition of Revolve 2.20. Edit the Revolve angle back to

360 and press ENTER.21. Click Complete Feature .



Common Dashboard Options: Revolve AngleYou can revolve a sketch to many different angle depths.

Revolve angle options:

• Variable• Symmetric• To Selected• Side 1/Side 2

Figure 1 - Variable RevolveAngle Depth

Figure 2 - Symmetric RevolveAngle Depth

Figure 3 - Side 1 Revolve AngleTo Selected, Side 2 Revolve

Angle Variable

Common Dashboard Options: Revolve AngleWhen you create a revolve feature from a 2-D sketch, the depth angle atwhich the feature revolves can be set in a variety of ways depending uponthe design intent you wish to capture. Revolve angle options include:

• Variable (Blind) — This the default revolve angle option. You can edit thisrevolve angle value by dragging the drag handle, editing the dimension onthe model, or using the dashboard. The dashboard also contains fourpredefined angles that you can select: 90°, 180°, 270°, and 360°..

• Symmetric — The section revolves equally on both sides of the sketchplane. You can edit the total angle at which the feature revolves just as youcan with the Variable depth angle option. Therefore, the Symmetric angleis essentially the same as the Variable Symmetric depth.

• To Selected — Selecting this option stops the revolve at the selectedsurface or datum plane. A dimension for angle value is not required, asthe selected surface controls the revolve angle. The location where youselect the datum plane or surface determines where the revolve stops inrelation to the axis of revolution. In Figure 3, the datum plane was selectedto the right of the axis of revolution. If the datum plane was selected to


the left of the axis of revolution, the feature would have revolved another180° before stopping.

• Side 1/Side 2 — You can independently control the angle at which thesection revolves on each side of the sketching plane. By default, the sectionrevolves on Side 1; however, you can set the section to revolve on Side 2.Any of the above options can be used for either side except for Symmetric.

You can also switch revolve angle options by right-clicking the draghandle in the graphics window.


PROCEDURE - Common Dashboard Options: RevolveAngle


Revolve\Angle REVOLVE-ANGLE.PRT

Task 1: Use the various revolve angle options for a revolve feature.



3. Select the visible sketch andselect datum axis REV from themodel tree.

4. Edit the revolve angle depthvalue to 90 and click ChangeAngle Side .

5. Click Change Angle Sideagain.

6. Edit the depth to Symmetric .


7. Edit the depth to To Selected.

8. Enable Plane Display andselect datum plane DTM2 to theright of the axis of revolution.

9. In the dashboard, select theOptions tab.• Edit the Side 2 depth toVariable and type 90 asthe value.

10. In the dashboard, edit the Side2 depth to To Selected andselect datum plane DTM2 to theleft of the axis of revolution.




Automatically Adding and Removing MaterialYou can automatically add and remove material by changing thedirection of an extrude and revolve feature.

• Functions with both internal andexternal sketches.

• You must place the sketch on asingle solid surface.– Determines add or remove

status.• Only functions upon initialdefinition of the feature.

Figure 1 – Alert Caption

Figure 2 – Adding and RemovingMaterial on an Extrude Feature

Figure 3 – Adding and RemovingMaterial on a Revolve Feature

Automatically Adding and Removing MaterialYou can automatically add and remove material by changing the direction ofan extrude and revolve feature either in or out of a model. When this action isperformed, the feature preview automatically updates. Additionally, a pop-upmessage appears, as shown in Figure 1. Also, the dashboard RemoveMaterial option is toggled accordingly.

To use this functionality, you can set the auto_add_remove configurationoption to yes. The default option is no.

Consider the following when using Auto Add and Remove functionality:

• This functionality is available for both internal and external sketches.• You must place the sketch on a single solid surface, which determinesthe add or remove status.

• This functionality is only available upon initial definition of the feature. Itis intentionally unavailable when you edit the feature or definition. Thisprotects you from unintentionally flipping feature material.


PROCEDURE - Automatically Adding and RemovingMaterial


Extrude\Auto_Add-Remove AUTO_ADD_REMOVE.PRT

Task 1: Experiment with automatically adding and removing material foran extrude feature.


2. In the ribbon, click Extrudefrom the Shapes group.

3. Select sketch OVAL.4. Notice the feature is adding

material by default.

5. Drag the depth handle down into the model.6. Notice that material is not removed.7. Click Cancel Feature and click Yes.

8. Click File > Options.9. In the Creo Parametric

Options dialog box, selectthe Configuration Editorcategory.• Click Add.• Type auto_add_remove inthe Option name field.

• Select yes from the Optionvalue drop-down list.

• Click OK > OK > No.

10. Click Extrude and selectsketch OVAL.

11. Drag the depth handle down intothe model.

12. Notice the caption, and that thefeature is now removing material.

13. Edit the depth to 10.


14. Notice that Remove Material has been selected in the dashboard.15. Click the magenta flip depth arrow. Notice that the feature is now

adding material.16. Click the magenta flip depth arrow. Notice that the feature is removing

material again.17. Click Complete Feature .

18. Click Extrude and selectsketch HEX.

19. Drag the depth handle down intothe model.

20. Notice that the feature doesnot switch to a cut because thesketching plane does not lie onthe surface.

21. In the dashboard, edit the depthto To Next .


Task 2: Automatically add and remove material for a revolve feature.

1. In the ribbon, click Revolvefrom the Shapes group.

2. Select sketch CIRCLE.3. Drag the handle to approximately

55 degrees.

4. Drag the handle in the oppositedirection to approximately 70degrees.

5. Notice that the feature is nowremoving material.

6. Notice that Remove Materialhas been selected in the

dashboard.


7. In the dashboard, click ChangeDepth Direction .

8. Right-click the depth handle andselect To Selected.

9. Select the surface shown.10. Click Complete Feature .11. Set the auto_add_remove

configuration option back to no.



Creating Profile Rib FeaturesA profile rib feature is similar to an extruded protrusion, exceptthat it requires an open section sketch.

• Profile rib features require an opensketch.

• You can edit the side that thickens.• You can flip to which side of thesketch you want to create the rib.

• Rib geometry adapts to theadjacent, solid geometry.

Figure 1 – Viewing Open Sketches

Figure 2 – Editing the Sidethat Thickens

Figure 3 – Flipping Which Sidethe Rib is Created

Creating Profile Rib FeaturesRibs are typically used to strengthen parts. A profile rib feature is similar to anextruded protrusion, except that it requires an open section sketch. The ribalso conforms to existing planar or cylindrical geometry when it is extruded.After you select an open section sketch and set a thickness, Creo Parametricautomatically creates the profile rib feature by merging it with your model.The system can add material above or below the sketch, and the thicknesscan be applied on either side, or be symmetric about the sketch. The Profile

Rib enables you to create rib features in less time than it would take foryou to create and sketch a protrusion.


PROCEDURE - Creating Profile Rib Features


Rib\Profile RIB.PRT

Task 1: Create profile rib features on a part model.


2. Select Profile Rib from theRib types drop-down menu in theEngineering group.

3. Select RIB_SKETCH-1.4. Drag the handle and edit the

width to 75.5. Click Complete Feature .

Notice the angled rib surface is not planar; it is contoured tomatch the curved surface which is adjacent to the sketch.

6. Click Profile Rib .7. Select RIB_SKETCH-2 .8. Orient to view orientation RIGHT.9. Drag the handle and edit the

width to 25. The rib is centeredabout the sketch.

10. Click theChange ThicknessOption . The rib moves to theleft of the sketch.


11. Click theChange ThicknessOption again. The rib movesto the right of the sketch.


13. Reorient the model.

14. Click Profile Rib .15. Select RIB_SKETCH-3 . The rib

is above the sketch.

16. Click the magenta arrow in thegraphics window. The rib is nowon the bottom of the sketch.





Module11Utilizing Internal Sketches and EmbeddedDatums

Module OverviewYou can select sketches and datum features to help you create 3-D geometryfeatures. These items do not need to preexist in the model tree because youcan create them as needed.

In this module, you learn how to create internal sketches when creatingsketch-based features as an additional option to selecting a preexistingsketch. You also learn how to create embedded datum features.

ObjectivesAfter completing this module, you will be able to:• Create internal sketches.• Create embedded datum features.


Creating Internal SketchesAn internal sketch is contained in the feature it defines.

• Internal sketch benefits:– Organization– Reduced Feature Count

• External sketch benefits:– Same sketch can be used for

multiple features– Can be unlinked Figure 1 - Internal Versus

External Sketches

Figure 2 - Internal Sketches

Figure 3 - External Sketches

Internal SketchesWhen creating sketched features in Creo Parametric, you can use eitherinternal or external sketches. PTC does not recommend one type of sketchover the other; you should use the type that works best for you. In this topic,we discuss how to use internal sketches and some of the benefits they canprovide.

Workflows for Creating an Internal SketchInternal sketches can be created during the creation of any sketched feature.Use any of the following three methods for creating an internal sketch:• Select the sketching plane and then start the feature tool for any sketchedfeature (for example, Extrude ), This is sometimes known as anobject-action workflow.

• Start the feature tool for any sketched feature (ex: Extrude ), and thenselect the sketching plane. This is sometimes known as an action-objectworkflow.

• Start the feature tool for any sketched feature (ex: Extrude ), and thenright-click and select Define Internal Sketch. You can also click Define from


the Placement tab. This method is almost a subset of the action-objectworkflow in that you start the feature tool first (action) and then select thesketch plane (object). The difference is that this is the first method whereyou can specify an orientation for the sketch. This is because the SketchSetup dialog box displays when using this method.

When you complete a feature with any of these methods, an internal sketchwith the name Section X is created and embedded within the feature.

Pros and Cons of Internal SketchesInternal sketches provide some benefits that external sketches do not,including:

• Organization – Because internal sketches are embedded in the featurethey define, you always know where to find them. External sketches areseparate features that can be renamed and reordered in the same manneras other features. In a model containing hundreds of features, it can takesome time to determine which sketch is used to define which feature. Thisis not a problem, but it should be a consideration when selecting the typeof sketch to use.

• Reduced Feature Count – Because internal sketches are not features, theydo not add to the total number of features in a model. Creating a separateexternal sketch for every sketched feature in your model can dramaticallyincrease the number of features in a model. In models containing hundredsor even thousands of features, external sketches can dramatically increasethe total feature count in a model. Again, this is something you want toconsider when selecting the type of sketch to use.

• Unfortunately, you cannot simply make an internal sketch external withoutsaving it out and recreating it.

Pros and Cons of External SketchesExternal sketches provide some benefits that internal sketches do not.

• You can always redefine an external sketch to internal.• You can select a different sketch for the same feature. This enables you toquickly pursue multiple design options.

• The same external sketch can be specified for multiple features.• You can unlink a specified external sketch.• External sketches result in a higher feature count because there is anadditional sketch feature for every sketched feature as displayed in themodel tree.


PROCEDURE - Creating Internal Sketches


Sketcher\Internal INTERNAL-SKETCH.PRT

Task 1: Create and edit internal sketches.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.2. Press ALT and select the top

surface.

3. Click Extrude from theShapes group in the ribbon.

4. Notice that you entered Sketcherwithout defining the SketchSetup.


.6. Select Center Rectangle

from the Rectangle typesdrop-downmenu in the Sketchinggroup.

7. Sketch the rectangle anddimension it.

8. Click OK .

9. Click Remove Material andflip the depth direction.

10. Edit the depth to 7 and clickComplete Feature .

11. Suppress Extrude 2.

12. Click Extrude .13. Select the top surface.

14. Click Center Rectangleand sketch and dimension therectangle.

15. Click OK .


16. Click Remove Material andflip the depth direction.

17. Edit the depth to 7 and clickComplete Feature .

18. Orient to the StandardOrientation and observethe 12_POINT sketch.

19. Click Extrude .20. Right-click and select Define

Internal Sketch21. Notice that the Sketch Setup

dialog box displays.22. Select the front surface and click

Sketch in the Sketch dialog box.

23. Click Palette and place the6-Sided Hexagon shape.

24. Delete the length dimension,and edit the resulting radiusdimension to 10.

25. Click OK .

26. Click Remove Material .

27. Click To Selected and queryselect the surface at the bottomof Extrude 3.



29. Expand Extrude 4 in the modeltree, and notice the internalsketch Section 1.

30. Edit the definition of Extrude 4.31. Select the sketch feature

12_POINT as the new sketch.32. Click OK in the Section Selection

dialog box to replace the existinginternal sketch.


34. Expand Extrude 4 again in themodel tree. Notice that Extrude4 now uses the sketch feature12_POINT and is external.

35. Select hidden sketch 12_POINT and press DELETE. Notice thatExtrude 4 is also deleted, as it uses the 12_POINT sketch. ClickCancel in the Delete dialog box.

36. Edit the definition of Extrude 4.37. In the dashboard, select the Placement tab and click Unlink.38. Click OK in the Unlink dialog box to break the association.39. Click Complete Feature .

40. Select hidden sketch 12_POINTand press DELETE. Click OK todelete the sketch feature.

41. In the model tree, expandExtrude 4 and notice thatit again contains an internalsketch.



Creating Embedded Datum FeaturesEmbedded datum features contain any combination of plane,axis, point, or coordinate systems embedded within anotherfeature.

Figure 1 - Embedded in an Extrude

• Benefits of Embedded DatumFeatures:– No need to restart feature

creation.– More organized models.– Automatically hidden datums.

Figure 2 - Datum Group Figure 3 - Embedded in a Datum

Benefits of Embedded Datum FeaturesThere are several uses for embedded datum features, such as sketch planes,orientation planes, dimensioning references, placement references for holes,and references for draft features. Datum features can even be embedded inother datum features.Suppose you have begun the creation of an extrude feature, and then realizethe sketch plane you need has not yet been created. You could cancel outof the Extrude Tool, create the datum plane, and then start the Extrude Toolagain. A better solution would be to simply create the sketch plane as anembedded datum, while the Extrude Tool is still open.Another benefit of embedded datum features is that they produce a cleaner,more organized model tree. For example, if the sketch plane of an extrudefeature you are creating requires you to create three datum planes and anaxis, those four datum features are embedded within the node of the extrudefeature. Unlike regular features, the embedded datum features do not clutterthe model tree.Each embedded datum feature functions as some type of reference to thefeature in which it is embedded, otherwise it would not be embedded. Thisenables you to easily determine the function of each datum and identify thefeature that references it.The display of embedded datum features is automatically set to hidden afterthey are created. This helps ensure that the display of your model remainsuncluttered.In the following figure, notice the three different displays of the same modeltree. The model on the left was created without using embedded datumfeatures. The model in the middle was created using embedded datum


features and the feature nodes are expanded. The model on the rightdisplays the same model shown in the middle, except in this case the featurenodes are collapsed.

Creating Embedded Datum FeaturesEmbedded datums are created by starting a datum tool during the creation ofanother feature. Starting the datum tool automatically pauses the creation ofthe current feature, enabling you to create the required datum feature.

The quickest way to create embedded datum features is to click Datumto expand the Datum group, located to the far right of the sketched feature’sdashboard, as shown in Figure 2. Of course, you can always select theModel tab while in feature creation and select the desired datum featuretype from the Datum group.

After you have created the required datum features, you can resume thecreation of the feature by clicking Resume Feature in the dashboard.

By then selecting the newly created datum features as sketch planes,orientation, dimensioning, placement, or depth references, they areembedded in the feature.

About Embedded Datum FeaturesWhen you delete a feature containing embedded datum features, CreoParametric provides the option to keep or delete the embedded datumfeatures.

Sketch and orientation datum planes can only be embedded in features usinginternal sketches.

If for some reason the datum features you create are not embedded asexpected, you can select them in the model tree and drag them into thefeature after creation. This embeds them and sets their display to hidden,just as if they were originally embedded. Datums can be un-embedded in thesame way, by dragging them from a feature back to the model tree.

Best PracticesEmbedded datum features should be used as the design intent dictates. Forexample, you cannot reuse an embedded datum feature in a downstreamfeature. Using embedded datum features promotes the creation of modelsthat are easier to edit and utilize, and thus easier to share with downstreamusers.


PROCEDURE - Creating Embedded Datum Features


Datum\Embedded EMBEDDED-DATUM.PRT

Task 1: Create an extrude feature referencing embedded datum features.

1. Enable only the following Datum Display types: .2. In the ribbon, select the View tab.

3. Enable Plane Tag Display and Axis Tag Display .4. Select the Model tab.

5. Click Extrude .6. In the Extrude dashboard, click

Datum and select Plane.

7. Select the surface, and drag theOffset to 10.

8. Select the Properties tab, editthe Name to OFFSET, and clickOK.

Creating each of these datum features after starting a featuretool defines them as embedded.

9. With OFFSET still selected, click

Datum and select Axis .10. Press CTRL and select the top

surface.11. Select the Properties tab, edit

the name to PIVOT, and clickOK.


12. With PIVOT still selected, clickDatum and select Plane

.13. Press CTRL and select the top

surface.14. Edit the Rotation to either 25 or

-25 to attain the proper direction.15. Select the Properties tab, edit

the name to ORIENT, and clickOK.

16. With ORIENT still selected, clickDatum and select Plane

.17. Press CTRL and select datum

axis PIVOT.18. Edit the ORIENT reference from

Offset to Normal.19. Select the Display tab and click

Flip as necessary to orient themagenta arrow, as shown.

20. Select the Properties tab, editthe name to SKETCH, and clickOK.

21. In the Extrude dashboard, clickResume Feature .


.

23. Disable Plane Display and

Axis Display .

24. Click Center and Point andsketch the circle.

25. Edit the diameter to 32.26. Click OK .


27. In the dashboard, click ChangeDepth Direction and edit thedepth to To Selected .

28. Click Datum and selectPlane .

29. Press CTRL and select the twoinner hole surfaces.• Select the Properties tab, editthe name to DEPTH, and clickOK.

30. Click Resume Featurefrom the Extrude dashboard.Because datum plane DEPTH isstill selected, it is automaticallyselected as the depth reference.


32. Edit the definition of Extrude 4.

33. Click Remove Material and click Complete Feature .34. Expand Extrude 4 in the model tree. Notice the embedded datums.35. Right-click Extrude 4 and select Edit. Notice that dimensions from

the feature and all embedded datums are displayed.

36. Disable Plane Tag Display and Axis Tag Display .




Module12Creating Sweeps and Blends

Module OverviewExtruded and revolved features comprise the majority of the features on themodels that you create. However, there are occasions when extruded andrevolved features cannot easily create the necessary geometry. In theseinstances, you may need to sketch more advanced geometry features.

In this module, you learn how to create two advanced geometry features: thesweep feature and the blend feature.

ObjectivesAfter completing this module, you will be able to:• Create sweeps with open and closed trajectories.• Analyze sweep feature attributes.• Create blends by selecting parallel sections.• Create blends by sketching sections.• Analyze blend options.


Creating Sweeps with Open TrajectoriesA sweep feature consists of a sketched section that sweeps, ortraverses, along a trajectory.

Figure 1 – Sweeping a ClosedSketch Along an Open Trajectory

• Components of a sweep feature:– Trajectory

♦ Select the trajectory.♦ Define the Start point.

– Section♦ Placed at the trajectory

start point, and denoted bycrosshairs.

♦ Closed or open.• Creation methods:– Add/remove solid material.– Surface.– Thin.

Figure 2 – Sweeping an OpenSketch Along an Open Trajectory

Creating Sweeps with Open TrajectoriesYou can create a sweep feature to create a constant cross-section featurethat follows a trajectory curve. A sweep feature can also have a variablesection, but this topic discusses the constant section only. A sweep can addor remove material. It can also be created as a thin feature or as a surface. Asweep feature consists of both a trajectory and a section.

If your company has legacy data that contains Simple sweepfeatures, the classic menu manager interface displays whenredefining them.

Selecting the TrajectoryThe trajectory is the path along which the section sweeps. The trajectorymust be selected, rather than sketched. The trajectory can be open, meaningthat it does not have to create a loop, as shown in the figures. It can havesharp or tangent corners, as shown in the Figure 1 protrusion and the Figure2 cut, respectively.


When selecting a trajectory, the following selection methods are available:

• Select a previously created external sketch.• Select individual curves or edges from existing geometry. To includeadditional adjacent edges as the trajectory, you can press SHIFT whileselecting them.

• Select an intent chain.

Within the Sweep dashboard, you can click Datum and select

Sketch at the right end; however, this does not make thesketch internal to the sweep.

Once the trajectory has been selected, you may decide that you do notwant the trajectory to traverse the entire length of your selected sketch orgeometry. You can drag the trajectory endpoint handles to lengthen orshorten the overall trajectory. If you press SHIFT while dragging you cansnap the endpoints to entities such as vertices, datum planes, or edgeendpoints. You can also directly specify a value.

You must also select the start point for the section. The start point is thelocation from which the section begins to sweep, and displays in the graphicswindow with a magenta arrow. You can click the arrow to toggle the startpoint to the opposite trajectory endpoint.

Defining the SectionOnce the trajectory and start point have been defined, you must sketch thesection that is swept along the trajectory. The sketch plane for the sectionis placed perpendicular to the trajectory at the start point. The crosshairsseen in the sketching plane represent the intersection of the trajectory andsketch plane.

The sketched section may be either open or closed. The swept protrusion inFigure 1 is a closed section, while the swept cut in Figure 2 is an open section.

Causes of a Sweep FailureA constant section sweep feature may fail if one of the following threesituations occurs:

• A trajectory crosses itself.• You align or dimension a section to fixed entities, but the orientation of thesection changes when it is swept along the 3-D trajectory.

• A trajectory arc or spline radius is too small, relative to the section, and thefeature intersects itself while traversing around the arc.


PROCEDURE - Creating Sweeps with Open Trajectories


Sweep\Open-Trajectory_Solid SWEEP_OPEN-TRAJ.PRT

Task 1: Create a sweep with a closed sketch.


2. Select Sweep from the Sweep types drop-down menu in theShapes group.

3. Select the trajectory from the graphics window.

4. Click Create Section from the dashboard.


6. Click Palette from theSketching group.

7. Select the Profiles tab and dragthe T-profile in the graphicswindow to place it.• Edit the Scaling factor to 0.5.• Right-click the X Locationhandle and drag it to themidpoint of the top horizontalline.

8. Locate the section on thetrajectory.

9. Click Accept Changes fromthe dashboard.


10. Click OK .11. Click Complete Feature .12. In the model tree, right-click

Sketch 1 and select Hide.

Task 2: Create a sketch for the next sweep trajectory.

1. Click Sketch and select UsePrevious.


3. In the graphics window,right-click and selectReferences.

4. Select datum planes OFFSETand RIGHT as references, aswell as the top surface and twovertices.

5. Click Close in the Referencesdialog box.


6. Select Center and Pointfrom the Circle types drop-downmenu and sketch two circles thatare tangent to the references.

7. Select Line Chain from theLine types drop-down menuand sketch two vertical lines.The first line should start at thetop reference and snap tangentto the top circle. The secondline should start at the bottomreference and snap tangent tothe bottom circle.

8. Select Line Tangent fromthe Line types drop-down menuand create the tangent line.

9. Click Delete Segment andtrim the circle entities.

10. Click OK .11. Orient to the Standard

Orientation.

Task 3: Create a sweep that removes material with an open section.

1. With the sketch still selected,select Sweep from theSweep types drop-down menu inthe Shapes group.

2. Click the magenta arrow to flipthe start point to the bottom.


3. In the dashboard, click RemoveMaterial .

• Click Create Section .

4. Select Center and Endsfrom the Arc types drop-downmenu and then sketch anddimension the arc.

5. Click OK .6. Click Complete Feature .



Creating Sweeps with Closed TrajectoriesA sweep feature consists of a sketched section that sweeps, ortraverses, along a trajectory.

Figure 1 – T Section Sketch SweptAlong a Closed Trajectory

• Components of a sweepfeature:– Trajectory

♦ Select the trajectory.♦ Define the start point.

– Section♦ Placed at the

trajectory start point,and denoted bycrosshairs.

♦ Closed or open.♦ If you sketch an open

section for the solidfeature type, thesystem automaticallytoggles to surface.

• Creation methods:– Add/remove solid

material.– Surface.– Thin. Figure 2 – L Section Swept Along a Closed

Trajectory and Trajectory Extruded

Creating Sweeps with Closed TrajectoriesYou can create a sweep feature to create a constant cross-section featurethat follows a trajectory curve. A sweep feature can also have a variablesection, but this topic discusses the constant section only. A sweep can addor remove material. It can also be created as a thin feature or as a surface. Asweep feature consists of both a trajectory and a section.

If your company has legacy data that contains Simple sweepfeatures, the classic menu manager interface displays whenredefining them.

Selecting the TrajectoryThe trajectory is the path along which the section sweeps. The trajectorymust be selected, rather than sketched. The trajectory can be closed,meaning that it creates a loop, as shown in the figures. It can have sharp ortangent corners.

When selecting a trajectory, the following selection methods are available:

• Select a previously created external sketch.


• Select individual curves or edges from existing geometry. To includeadditional adjacent edges as the trajectory, you can press SHIFT whileselecting them.

• Select an intent chain.

Within the Sweep dashboard, you can click Datum and select

Sketch at the right end; however, this does not make thesketch internal to the sweep.

You must also select the start point for the section. The start point is thelocation from which the section begins to sweep, and displays in the graphicswindow with a magenta arrow. You can drag the start point along the closedloop, or you can press SHIFT to snap the start point to one of the entityendpoints.

Defining the SectionOnce the trajectory and start point have been defined, you must sketchthe section that will be swept along the trajectory. The sketch plane forthe section is placed perpendicular to the trajectory at the start point. Thecrosshairs seen in the sketching plane represent the intersection of thetrajectory and sketch plane.

The sketched section may be either open or closed. If you try to sketch asolid open section, the system automatically toggles the feature creation tothat of a surface. To create the type of solid feature shown in Figure 2, youcan sweep the perimeter shape first and then extrude the trajectory sketchupward to fill in the middle.

Causes of a Sweep FailureA constant section sweep feature may fail if one of the following threesituations occurs:

• A trajectory crosses itself.• You align or dimension a section to fixed entities, but the orientation of thesection changes when it is swept along the 3-D trajectory.

• A trajectory arc or spline radius is too small relative to the section, and thefeature intersects itself while traversing around the arc.


PROCEDURE - Creating Sweeps with Closed Trajectories


Sweep\Closed-Trajectory_Solid SWEEP_CLOSED-TRAJ.PRT

Task 1: Create a sweep with a closed trajectory.


2. Select Sweep from theSweep types drop-down menu inthe Shapes group.

3. Select the trajectory in thegraphics window.

4. Drag the start point to snap tothe arc tangent endpoint

5. Right-click in the graphicswindow and select Sketch.


.7. Click Palette from the

Sketching group.8. Select the Profiles tab and drag

the T-profile into the graphicswindow to place it.• Edit the Scaling factor to 0.5and drag the Rotation handleto 180.

• Right-click the X Locationhandle and drag it to themidpoint of the bottomhorizontal line.

9. Locate the section on thetrajectory.

10. Click Accept Changes fromthe dashboard.



Task 2: Edit the section and “fill” the center of the sweep.

1. Edit the definition of Sweep 1.2. In the graphics window,

right-click and select Sketch.3. Select Line Chain from the

Line types drop-down menu andsketch the vertical line on thevertical reference.

4. Click Delete Segment andtrim the left side of the sketch.

5. Click OK .



8. Select Sketch 2.9. In the graphics window,

right-click the depth handleand select To Selected.• Select the green surfaceshown.


10. Select the upper surface andclick Complete Feature .



Analyzing Sweep Feature AttributesYou can edit the attributes for the ends of an open trajectorysweep feature.

• Select the Merge Ends option onthe ends of a sweep feature.

Figure 1 – Merge Ends Disabled

Figure 2 – Merge Ends Enabled

Analyzing Sweep Feature AttributesIf the trajectory of a sweep feature is open (meaning that the start and endpoints of the trajectory do not touch), you can enable or disable the MergeEnds attribute for the ends of the sweep feature. The Merge Ends attribute islocated in the Options tab in the Sweep dashboard.

• Merge Ends disabled – Do not attach the sweep ends to the adjacentgeometry. This is the default option, and is shown in Figure 1.

• Merge Ends enabled – Merge the ends of the sweep into the adjacentsolid. To do this, the sweep ends must touch the other solid geometry. Themerged sweep ends are shown in Figure 2.


PROCEDURE - Analyzing Sweep Feature Attributes


Sweep\Attributes SWEEP_ATTRIBUTES.PRT

Task 1: Edit the ends of a sweep feature from free to merged.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.2. Orient to the FRONT view.

Notice that there is a gapbetween the ends of the curvedtube and the top and bottom flatsurfaces.

3. Edit the definition of Sweep 1.4. In the dashboard, select the

Options tab.• Select the Merge ends checkbox.

5. Click Complete Feature .Notice that the gap between thecurved tube and the top andbottom flat surfaces no longerappears.



Creating Blends by Selecting Parallel SectionsYou can create a blend feature by selecting existing sketches orsections or chains or loops, of a model’s existing feature edges.

• A blend feature must contain twoor more sections.

• Selected sections are connectedusing a smooth curve.

• Sections are blended based onselection order.

• You can reorder or removesections.

Figure 1 – Blend Feature

Figure 2 – Blending ThreeSelected Sections

Figure 3 – Blend with Twisting Dueto Misaligned Start Points

Creating Blends by Selecting Parallel SectionsYou create blend features when you need to create models that containdifferent transitional cross-sections. For example, a blend feature enablesyou to create geometry that starts as a circular cross-section, but thenchanges to a square cross-section as you transition along the length of thefeature. Blend features can add or remove material.

Selecting the SectionsA blend feature must contain two or more sections. You can select existingsketches or sections, or chains or loops of a model’s existing feature edges.The sections you select may be non-parallel, although this functionality is notdiscussed in this topic. By default, the system connects the selected sectionstogether using a smooth curve.

Each section must contain the same number of entities (or vertices). Thereare two exceptions to this rule:

• The blend can start or end as a single point.


• You can add a number of blend vertex points, each of which counts as anentity. For example, a blend vertex placed on a triangular section enablesthe system to blend to a square. The system essentially connects thepoints of each section to create the blend feature.

Section Start PointsEach section has its own start point. The start points should correspondbetween sections to avoid a twisting effect in the resulting blend feature. Youcan individually drag the start point for each section to a different vertex inthat section. In Figure 3, the start point for Section 2 is in a different location,resulting in the twisting effect. In Figures 1 and 2, the start points are properlyaligned.

The start point arrow direction can be flipped, but this does notaffect blending.

Manipulating Selected SectionsConsider the following regarding manipulating selected blend sections:

• By default, sections are blended together in the order of selection.However, you can always move sections up or down in the blend order.

• You can remove sections.• The offset, or depth, between sections is based on the selected section’sdepth with respect to the other selected sections. You cannot specify adifferent depth.

• When defining a blend feature, only one section is considered the activesection at any time. To set a given section as the active section, you caneither select it from the Sections tab in the dashboard, or you can selectthe section leader note in the graphics window. The selected section thenchanges color, and all right-click options pertain to this active section. InFigures 2 and 3, Section 2 is the active section.


PROCEDURE - Creating Blends by Selecting ParallelSections


Blend\Select-Sections_Parallel_Solid BLEND_SELECT_1.PRT

Task 1: Select existing sections to create a 3-section blend.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.2. Notice the three Sketch features

in the graphics window.

3. In the ribbon, click the Shapesgroup drop-down menu andselect Blend .

4. In the dashboard, select theSections tab.• Select Selected sections.

5. Select Sketch 1 as the firstsection.

6. In the Sections tab, click Insert.7. Select Sketch 3 as the second

section.

8. In the Sections tab, click Insert.9. Select Sketch 2 as the third

section.10. Notice the blend is following the

order of selection.


11. With Section 3 still selected, clickMove Up in the Sections tab.

12. Notice that Section 3 is nowreordered as #2 in the blendfeature.

13. With Section 3 still selected, clickRemove in the Sections tab.• Right-click Section 2 andselect Remove.

14. Right-click in the graphicswindow and select Insert.

15. Select Sketch 2 as the secondsection.

16. Right-click in the graphicswindow and select Insert.

17. Select Section 3 as the thirdsection.

18. In the Sections tab, notice the #display for each blend section.

19. Each section has four entities.

20. In the graphics window, selectthe #2 Section 2 leader note toactivate the section.

21. Drag the start point to theupper-right vertex.

22. Click Preview Feature .


23. Click Resume Feature .24. Drag the Section 2 start point

back to the upper-left vertex.


26. In the model tree, select Sketch1, press CTRL, and selectSketch 2 and Sketch 3.




Creating Blends by Sketching SectionsYou can create a blend feature by sketching the sections througha series of Sketcher sessions while within the Blend tool.

• A blend feature must contain twoor more sections.

• Sketched sections are connectedusing a smooth curve.

• Section sketch plane is projected:– Offset dimension– Reference

• Sections are blended based onorder of insertion.

• You can remove sections. Figure 1 – Blends Adding andRemoving Material

Figure 2 – Sketching a Section Figure 3 – Projecting the Sections

Creating Blends by Sketching SectionsYou create blend features when you need to create models that containdifferent transitional cross-sections. For example, a blend feature enablesyou to create geometry that starts as a circular cross-section, but thenchanges to a square cross-section as you transition along the length of thefeature. Blend features can add or remove material.

Sketching the SectionsA blend feature consists of a series of parallel sketches. The blend featuremust contain two or more sections. You can sketch the sections through aseries of Sketcher sessions while within the Blend tool. If desired, you canreference previous geometry from section to section.Each section must contain the same number of entities (or vertices). Thereare two exceptions to this rule:• The blend can start or end as a single point.• You can add a number of blend vertex points, each of which counts as anentity. For example, a blend vertex placed on a triangular section enables


the system to blend to a square. The system essentially connects thepoints of each section to create the blend feature.

Specifying the Depth of Sketched SectionsBy default, the system connects the sketched sections together using asmooth curve. After Section 1, the depth by which each subsequent sectionis offset can be defined using two methods:

• Offset dimension – Enables you to specify the distance by which thesection’s sketch plane is offset. By default, the section is offset by aspecified distance from the previously created section. However, you canselect any other section in the blend feature from which to offset a newsection.

• Reference – Enables you to define the section’s sketch plane location byselecting a reference. For example, you can select a datum plane. Thisoption is similar to the To Selected depth option of an extrude feature.

Section Start PointsEach section has its own start point. The start points should correspondbetween sections to avoid a twisting effect in the resulting blend feature. Youcan manage start points within each sketched section. In Figure 2, the startpoint in the sketch is at the upper-left corner.

Manipulating Sketched SectionsConsider the following regarding manipulating sketched blend sections:

• By default, sections are blended together in the order they are inserted.You cannot switch the order.

• You can remove sections.• When defining a blend feature, only one section is considered the activesection at any time. To set a given section as the active section, you caneither select it from the Sections tab in the dashboard, or you can selectthe section leader note in the graphics window. The selected section thenchanges color, and all right-click options pertain to this active section.


PROCEDURE - Creating Blends by Sketching Sections


Blend\Sketch-Sections_Solid BLEND_SKETCH_1.PRT

Task 1: Sketch sections to create a 3-section blend.

1. Enable only the following Datum Display types: .2. In the ribbon, click the Shapes group drop-down menu and select

Blend .3. In the dashboard, select the Sections tab.

• Select Sketched sections, if necessary.• Click Define.

4. Select datum plane FRONT and click Sketch.



.7. Select Center Rectangle

from the Rectangle typesdrop-downmenu in the Sketchinggroup.

8. Select the reference origin as therectangle start point.

9. Extend the rectangle up and tothe right, and click again to placethe rectangle.

10. Click One-by-One , edit thehorizontal dimension to 18, andedit the vertical dimension to 16.

11. Click OK .

12. Select the Sections tab.13. Notice that you are now defining Section 2.14. Notice that the default offset dimension is from Section 1.15. Click Sketch.


16. Click Center Rectangle .17. Select the new section reference

origin as the rectangle start point.18. Extend the rectangle up and to

the right, and click again to placethe rectangle.


20. Click OK .21. Select the Sections tab.22. Click Insert.23. Notice that you are now creating

Section 3.24. Notice that the default offset

dimension is from Section 2.25. Select Section 1 from the Offset

from drop-down list and edit thevalue to 26.

26. Click Sketch.

27. Click Center Rectangle .28. Select the new section reference

origin as the rectangle start point.29. Extend the rectangle up and to

the left, and click again to placethe rectangle.


31. Click OK .

32. Notice the twist between thesecond and third section.

33. In the graphics window, selectthe #2 Section 2 leader note.

34. Drag the depth to approximately16.


35. In the graphics window, selectthe #3 Section 3 leader note.

36. Right-click and select Sketch.37. Select the upper-left vertex,

right-click, and select StartPoint.

38. Click OK .


Task 2: Redefine the blend to reference datum planes.

1. Enable Plane Display .2. Click the Operations group drop-down menu and select Resume >

Resume Last Set.3. Click in the background to de-select all features.4. Right-click Blend 2 and select Edit Definition.

5. In the dashboard, select theSections tab.• Select Section 2.• Select Reference.• Select datum plane DTM2.


6. In the Sections tab, selectSection 3.• Select Reference.• Select datum plane DTM3.

7. Disable Plane Display .8. Click Complete Feature .

Task 3: Redefine the blend to remove material from the previous blend.

1. Click the Operations groupdrop-down menu and selectResume > Resume Last Set.

2. In the model tree, select Blend2.

3. Notice this blend is inside of thenewly resumed blend feature.

4. Right-click Blend 2 and selectEdit Definition.

5. In the dashboard, click RemoveMaterial .




Analyzing Blend OptionsYou can edit the option for connecting blend sections to smoothor straight.

• Blend sections can beconnected:– Smooth– Straight

Figure 1 – Options for ConnectingBlend Sections

Figure 2 – Smooth BlendOption Result Figure 3 – Straight Blend Option Result

Analyzing Blend OptionsWhen the sections of a Blend feature are projected, you can connect thesections by two methods:

• Smooth – The blend sections are connected using smooth curves, asshown in Figure 2. This is the default option.

• Straight – The blend sections are connected using straight lines, as shownin Figure 3.


PROCEDURE - Analyzing Blend Options


Blend\Options_Solid BLEND_OPTIONS.PRT

Task 1: Experiment with various options available for a Blend feature.


Blend 1 and select EditDefinition.

3. In the dashboard, select theOptions tab.• Select Straight.



5. In the model tree, right-clickBlend 2 and select EditDefinition.

6. In the dashboard, select theOptions tab.• Select Straight.


8. Click the Operations groupdrop-down menu and selectResume > Resume Last Set.



Module13Creating Holes, Shells, and Draft

Module OverviewIn addition to creating features that begin with 2-D sketches and proceedingto solid features, you can also create features that are applied directly toa model.

In this module, you learn how to create various types of holes on a model,how to shell a model, and how to apply basic draft to features.

ObjectivesAfter completing this module, you will be able to:• Create coaxial, linear, radial, and diameter holes, as well as understandthe different depth options available.

• Understand the different hole profile options.• Create shell features.• Create draft features.• Create basic split drafts.• Analyze draft hinges and pull direction.


Common Dashboard Options: Hole DepthYou can drill a hole to several different depth options.• Hole depth options:– Blind– Symmetric– To Next– Through Until– To Selected– Through All– Side 1/Side 2

• Set usingdashboard orright-clicking draghandle

Figure 1 – Hole Depth Options

Common Dashboard Options: Hole DepthWhen you create a hole, the depth at which the hole drills into a model canbe set in a variety of ways depending upon the design intent you wish tocapture. You can specify the desired depth option using the Hole dashboardor by right-clicking the drag handle in the graphics window. Hole depthoptions include:• Blind (Variable) — This is the default depth option. You can edit this depthvalue by dragging the drag handle, editing the dimension on the model, orusing the dashboard.

• Symmetric — The hole bores equally on both sides of the placement plane.You can edit the total depth at which the hole bores, in the same way youcan with the Blind depth option. The Symmetric depth is actually a BlindSymmetric depth.

• To Next — This option ensures that the hole depth stops at the next surfaceencountered. A depth dimension is not required, as the next surfacecontrols the hole depth.

• Through Until — This option ensures that the hole stops at the selectedsurface. A depth dimension is not required, as the selected surface controlsthe hole depth. Note that the hole must pass through the selected surface.

• To Selected — This option ensures that the hole stops at the selectedsurface. A depth dimension is not required, as the selected surface controlsthe hole depth. Unlike the Through Until depth option, the hole does nothave to pass through the selected surface.

• Through All — This option causes the hole to drill through the entiremodel. A depth dimension is not required, as the model itself controlsthe hole depth.

• Side 1/Side 2 — You can independently control the hole depth on eachside of the placement plane. By default, the hole drills on Side 1; however,you can opt to drill the hole on Side 2 as well. Any of the previous holedepth options, except Symmetric, can be used for either side.


The To Next and Through All options only consider geometry which iscurrently present (in the feature order) when the hole is created. Featuresyou create after the hole is created do not impact the depth of the hole.

You can also switch depth options by right-clicking the drag handlein the graphics window.


PROCEDURE - Common Dashboard Options: HoleDepth


Hole\Depth HOLE_DEPTHS.PRT

Task 1: Redefine the depth options of the six holes.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.2. Edit the definition of BLIND_1.3. Edit the depth value to 0.5.4. Click Complete Feature .

5. Edit the definition of BLIND_2.6. Edit the depth value to 2.25.7. Click Complete Feature .

8. Edit the definition of TO_NEXT.

9. Edit the depth to To Next .10. Click Complete Feature .

11. Edit the definition ofTO_SELECTED.

12. Edit the depth to To Selectedand select the surface.



14. Edit the definition of THRU_ALL.15. Edit the depth to Through All

.16. Click Complete Feature .

17. Enable Plane Display .18. Edit the definition of

SYMMETRIC. Notice the holeplacement plane is a floatingdatum plane.

19. Edit the depth to Symmetric .

20. Edit the depth to Through All.

21. In the dashboard, select theShape tab and edit the Side 2depth to Through All .



24. Click the Operations groupdrop-down menu and selectResume > Resume All toresume the suppressed featureCUT and view the holes.



Creating Coaxial HolesA coaxial hole is placed at the intersection of an axis and asurface.

Figure 1 – Selecting PlacementReferences

• Placement references:– Datum axis– Surface or datum plane

• Offset references:– None

Figure 2 – Coaxial Holes

Hole Creation TheoryWhen creating hole features on a model, you locate holes by selectingplacement (primary) and offset (secondary) references. The first piece ofgeometry selected to place the hole is the placement reference. Next, youeither select additional placement references or offset references to furtherdimensionally constrain the hole feature. The type of geometry selected asthe placement reference determines the type of hole being created.

Creating Coaxial HolesTo create a coaxial hole, you only select placement references. An axis isselected as the first placement reference. This axis identifies the location ofthe hole. A second placement reference, either a surface or datum plane,is then selected to specify the surface where the hole starts drilling into themodel. In Figures 1 and 2, the datum axis and front surface comprise theplacement references.

You can also view your selected references in the Placement tabof the dashboard.

Once the hole references are satisfied, the hole preview displays with adefault diameter dimension and depth value. You can edit these values byusing the drag handles or dashboard, or by editing the dimensions on themodel.


PROCEDURE - Creating Coaxial Holes


Hole\Coaxial HOLES_COAXIAL.PRT

Task 1: Create two coaxial holes in the model: one Through All and theother of Blind depth.


2. From the Engineering group,click Hole .

3. Press CTRL and select datumaxis A_1 and the front surface.

4. Edit the diameter to 1.5. Edit the depth to Through All

.6. Click Complete Feature .

7. Click Hole .8. Press CTRL and select datum

axis A_2 and the front surface.9. From the Hole dashboard, select

the Placement tab. Notice thatyour selected references areadded to the collector.

10. Edit the diameter to 1.5.11. Edit the depth value to 0.25.




Creating Linear HolesA linear hole is created by selecting one placement referenceand two offset references.

Figure 1 – Selecting PlacementReference

• Placement references:– Datum plane or surface

• Offset references:– Datum plane or surface– Edge– Datum axis

Figure 2 – Selecting OffsetReferences

Figure 3 – Completed Hole


Creating Linear HolesTo create a linear hole, a planar surface is selected as the placementreference. This surface identifies where the hole starts 'drilling' into themodel. Two offset references are then selected to dimensionally constrainthe hole feature. In Figure 1 on this slide, the front surface of the model is theplacement reference. In Figure 2, the top surface and datum plane are theoffset references. You can select offset references directly from the model oryou can drag the green reference handles to the desired reference.You can view your selected references in the reference collectors in thePlacement tab of the dashboard. Within this tab, you can edit offset referencevalues as well as modify whether the hole is offset or aligned to an offsetreference. In Figure 2, the hole is aligned to the datum plane.


PROCEDURE - Creating Linear Holes


Hole\Linear HOLES_LINEAR.PRT

Task 1: Create two different linear holes on a model.

1. Enable only the following DatumDisplay type: .

2. From the Engineering group,click Hole .

3. Select the front surface.4. Right-click and select Offset

References Collector.

5. Press CTRL and select the topsurface and datum plane DTM1.

6. Edit the offset values to 3.5 fromthe top surface and 3.0 fromdatum plane DTM1.

7. Edit the hole diameter to 1.50and the depth value to 2.



9. Click Hole .10. Select the front surface.

11. Right-click and select OffsetReferences Collector.

12. Press CTRL and select the topsurface and datum plane DTM1.

13. In the dashboard, select thePlacement tab.• In the Offset Referencescollector, select Align from theDTM1 drop-down list.

• Edit the offset value to 3.5from the top surface.

14. Edit the hole diameter to 1.50and the depth value to 2.




Creating Radial and Diameter HolesRadial and diameter holes are created by selecting oneplacement reference and two offset references.

• On a cylindrical surface:– Create radial holes only.– One offset reference for offset.– One offset reference for angle.

• On a planar surface:– Create either radial or diameter

holes.– One datum axis.– One surface or datum plane for

angle.• Angle value based on quadrant ofpick point from axis.

Figure 3 – Diameter Hole

Figure 1 – Radial andDiameter Holes

Figure 2 – Cylindrical SurfaceRadial Hole

Figure 4 – Planar SurfaceRadial Hole


Creating Radial Holes on a Cylindrical Placement SurfaceYou can create a radial hole on a cylindrical surface by selecting thecylindrical surface as the placement reference. Furthermore, if the placementreference is a cylindrical surface, you can only create a radial hole. Thiscylindrical surface identifies where the hole starts “drilling” into the model.For a radial hole, the specific location chosen on this surface determinesthe direction from which the angle is measured. For example, in Figure2, if the surface was chosen below the datum plane, the measured anglewould be 45° clockwise from the datum plane instead of measuring 315°


counterclockwise. To flip the hole to the same angle on the opposite side ofthe datum plane, you can simply specify a negative value.

Two offset references are then selected from which to dimension the hole.You can select references directly from the model or you can drag the greenreference handles to the desired reference. The first offset reference is aplanar reference from which to offset the hole, and the second is a planarreference to determine the angle. In Figure 2, the offset references are thefront surface of the model and the datum plane.

Creating Radial or Diameter Holes on a Planar Placement SurfaceYou can select a planar surface as the placement reference to create both aradial or diameter hole. This placement reference identifies where the holestarts “drilling” into the model. For a radial hole, the specific location chosenon this surface determines the location from which the angle is measured.For example, in Figure 4, if the surface was chosen above the datumplane but to the right instead of the left, the measured angle would be 65°counterclockwise from the datum plane instead of measuring 115° clockwise.To flip the hole to the same angle on the opposite side of the datum plane,you can simply specify a negative value.

Two offset references are then selected from which to dimension the hole.The first offset reference is an axis from which to locate the hole radially,and the second is a planar reference to determine the angle. For the planarplacement radial hole in Figure 4, the secondary references are datum axisA_2 and the datum plane. For the diameter hole in Figure 3, the secondaryreferences are datum axis A_2 and the datum plane.

If a planar surface is selected as the placement reference, you can toggle thehole type between Linear, Radial, and Diameter. When you toggle the holetype, the offset references automatically toggle between radius, diameter,angle, or offsets.


PROCEDURE - Creating Radial and Diameter Holes


Hole\Radial_Diameter HOLES_RADIAL_DIAMETER.PRT

Task 1: Create radial and diameter holes on a model.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.2. From the Engineering group,

click Hole .3. Select the cylindrical surface.

4. Right-click and select Offset References Collector.5. Press CTRL and select datum plane TOP and the front surface.

6. In the dashboard, select thePlacement tab.• Edit the offset angle to 45 fromdatum plane TOP.

• Edit the offset axial value to0.40 from the front surface.

7. Edit the diameter to 0.40 and thehole depth to To Next .



11. Right-click and select Offset References Collector.12. Press CTRL and select datum axis A_2 and datum plane TOP.


13. In the dashboard, select thePlacement tab.• Edit the hole Type from Linearto Radial.

• Edit the radius to 0.5 fromdatum axis A_2.

• Edit the angle to either 65or -65 to attain the properdirection above datum planeTOP.

14. Edit the diameter to 0.40 and thehole depth to To Next .



18. Right-click and select Offset References Collector.19. Press CTRL and select datum axis A_2 and datum plane RIGHT.

20. In the dashboard, select thePlacement tab.• Edit the hole Type from Linearto Diameter.

• Edit the diameter to 1.5 fromdatum axis A_2.

• Edit the angle to either 60or -60 to attain the properdirection from datum planeRIGHT.

21. Edit the hole diameter to 0.50and the hole depth to ThroughAll .




Exploring Hole Profile OptionsYou can add a drill point to your hole and add countersinks orcounterbores.

• Hole profile options include:– Rectangle hole profile– Drill point profile– Add counterbore– Add countersink

♦ Exit countersink– Lightweight hole display

• Dimension drill point profile to:– Shoulder– Tip

Figure 1 – Hole Profile Options

Figure 2 – Drill Point DimensioningSchemes Figure 3 – The Shape Tab

Exploring Hole Profile OptionsWhen you create a hole in Creo Parametric, the default profile is a rectangularshape, as shown in the top hole in Figure 1. This is the Rectangle holeprofile. Other hole profiles and options available include, and are shown inFigure 1, respectively:

• Drill point profile – Adds the drill tip to the hole profile. You can edit thedrill tip angle.

• Add counterbore – Creates a counterbore on the hole. You can edit thecounterbore diameter and depth.

• Add countersink – Creates a countersink on the hole. You can edit thecountersink angle and diameter. You can also create an exit countersinkon a Through All hole.


• Lightweight hole display – Creates a hole that displays as a ring on theplacement surface. Toggling a hole feature to lightweight hole displayaffects the model's mass properties.

Dimensioning the Hole Depth for the Drill Point ProfileWhen you select the drill point profile, you can dimension the hole depthfollowing two different methods:

• Shoulder – You are able to specify the depth of the drilled hole to the end ofthe shoulder. This is shown in the left image in Figure 2.

• Tip – You are able to specify the depth of the drilled hole to the tip of thehole. This is shown in the right image in Figure 2.

The Dashboard Shape TabAt any time during the hole creation process, you can select the Shape tabfrom the dashboard to view the hole profile you are creating. This hole profileimage updates automatically as you modify hole profile options, enablingyou to preview the final result. Within the Shape tab, you can perform thefollowing operations:

• Edit hole diameter and depth.• Edit drill tip angle.• Edit counterbore diameter and depth.• Edit countersink diameter and angle.• Enable an exit countersink on a Through All hole.


PROCEDURE - Exploring Hole Profile Options


Hole\Profiles HOLE_PROFILES.PRT

Task 1: Redefine four holes to modify their profiles.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.2. Edit the definition of HOLE_1.3. In the dashboard, click Drill Hole

Profile .4. Click Complete Feature .

5. Edit the definition of HOLE_2.6. In the dashboard, click Drill Hole

Profile .• Select the Shape tab to viewthe profile.

• Click Tip Depth .7. Click Complete Feature .



• Click Counterbore .10. Click Complete Feature .




• Click Countersink .• Edit the hole depth to ThroughAll .

• Select the Exit Countersinkcheck box.


14. Click the Operations groupdrop-down menu and selectResume > Resume All toresume the EXTRUDE_CUTfeature and compare holes.

15. Edit the definition of HOLE_2.16. In the dashboard, click

Rectangle Hole Profile .

• Click Lightweight Hole .17. Click Complete Feature .18. De-select the feature.



Creating Shell FeaturesThe Shell feature hollows out the inside of a solid model, leavinga shell of a specified wall thickness.

• To create a basic shell feature:– Select surfaces for removal.– Specify thickness.

Figure 1 – Original Model

Figure 2 – Shelled Model withSurfaces Removed Figure 3 – Hollowed Out Model

Creating Shell FeaturesShell features remove surfaces to hollow out a design model, leaving wallswith specified thickness values. There are two parts to the creation of a basicshell feature:

• Select Surfaces for Removal — Select the surface(s) you want to removefrom the model. You may decide not to remove surfaces from the shell,which results in the creation of a closed shell. A closed shell is an entirelyhollowed out part.

• Thickness — Specify the thickness of the model walls that remain.You create shells in the design process to support your design intent.However, be aware that several features could reference a shell createdearly in the design process.

Shells can be created using the Lead or Follow workflow. You can usedrag handles or the dashboard to modify the thickness of the shell feature.Clicking Change Thickness Direction in the dashboard is equivalentto specifying a negative shell value.


PROCEDURE - Creating Shell Features


Shell\Shell SHELL.PRT

Task 1: Create a shell feature in a model.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.2. From the Engineering group,

click Shell .3. Click Complete Feature to

create a hollow shell.

4. Edit the definition of Shell 1.5. Select the top surface to remove

it.6. Edit the thickness to 20.7. Click Complete Feature .

8. Edit the definition of Shell 1.9. Press CTRL and select the left

and right surfaces to removethem.




Creating Draft FeaturesDraft features are typically used as finishing features in moldedand cast parts.

• Draft features consist of:– Draft surfaces– Draft hinges– Pull direction– Draft angles

Figure 1 – Draft One or Multiple Surfaces

Figure 2 – Same Model, Same Draft Angle, and Different Draft Hinges

Creating Draft Features TheoryYou can use draft features as finishing features in molded and cast parts, oranywhere sloped or angled surfaces need to be created. You can defineseveral types of draft features by selecting different combinations of curves,edges, surfaces, and planes for the draft surfaces, draft hinges, pull direction,and split plane (optional). Drafts can add or remove material from a model.A basic draft feature consists of the following four items:• Draft surfaces — These are the surfaces that are to be drafted. You canselect a single surface, multiple individual surfaces, or loop surfaces as thedraft surfaces. In Figure 1, the left image has one surface drafted, whilethe right image has four surfaces drafted.

• Draft hinge — Determines the location on the model that remains thesame size after the draft is created. The draft surfaces pivot abouttheir intersection with this plane. There does not have to be a physicalintersection. Rather, the intersection can be extrapolated. You can select adatum plane, solid model surface, curve chain, or surface quilt as the drafthinge. In Figure 2, the same model was drafted at the same angle, but withthe specified draft hinge progressively lower in the model, as highlighted.

• Pull direction — Direction that is used to measure the draft angle. The pulldirection is also called the reference plane. By default, the pull directionis the same as the draft hinge. The direction reference is used to define


the draft angle direction, and the draft angle is measured normal to thisreference. You can select a datum plane, planar model surface, linearreference such as an edge or two points, or a coordinate system axis. Themold opening, or pull direction, is usually normal to this plane.

• Draft angle — Values range from -30 degrees to +30 degrees. When youspecify the draft angle, you can reverse the direction from which materialis added or removed by typing a negative value, clicking Reverse Angle

in the dashboard, or right-clicking the angle drag handle and selectingFlip Angle.

You can also toggle the different collectors for draft surfaces, draft hinges,and pull direction by right-clicking in the graphics window.

Best PracticesIf possible, create draft features as some of the last features of your model.


PROCEDURE - Creating Draft Features


Draft\Draft DRAFT.PRT

Task 1: Draft three features using three different methods.


2. In the ribbon, select Draftfrom the Draft types drop-downmenu in the Engineering group.

3. Select the cylinder surface todraft.

4. In the dashboard, select theReferences tab.• Click in the Draft hingescollector and select the topcylinder surface.

• Edit the draft angle to 10.

• Click Reverse Angle .5. Click Complete Feature .

6. Click Draft .7. Press CTRL and select the four

vertical surfaces to draft.8. In the dashboard, click in the

Draft hinges collector and selectdatum plane DTM2.• Edit the draft angle to -10.



10. Click Draft .11. Press CTRL and select the four

vertical surfaces to draft.12. Right-click and select Draft

Hinges.13. Select the top surface of the

main protrusion.14. Edit the draft angle to -10.15. Click Complete Feature .

16. Orient to the FRONT view andcompare the differences inthe results of the rectangularprotrusions.



Creating Basic Split DraftsSplit draft enables you to apply different draft angles to differentportions of a surface.

• Split options include:– No split– Split by split object

♦ Select a plane– Split by draft hinge

• Side options:– Independently– Dependently– First/Second side only

• Draft tangent surfaces check box Figure 1 – Drafting SidesIndependently

Figure 2 – Drafting SidesDependently Figure 3 – Drafting First Side Only

Creating Draft Splits TheoryYou can create draft features with or without split. Splitting a draft enablesyou to apply different draft angles to different portions of a surface.

Splitting the DraftYou can split a draft feature in two different ways:• Split by Split Object — Split the draft using a specified datum plane orsurface.

• Split by Draft Hinge — Split the draft using the specified draft hinge.

Side OptionsOnce you split the draft, there are four different options available to controlhow the draft is handled on either side of the split:• Draft sides independently — Enables you to specify two independent draftangles for each side of the drafted surface. If you use this option, thesystem adds a second draft angle to the dashboard. In Figure 1, both sidesare drafted independently with different draft angles.


• Draft sides dependently — Enables you to specify a single draft angle, withthe second side drafted in the opposite direction at the same draft angle.In Figure 2, both sides are drafted dependently.

• Draft first side only — Drafts only the first side of the surface, with thesecond side remaining in the neutral, undrafted position. In Figure 3, onlythe first side is drafted.

• Draft second side only — Drafts only the second side of the surface, withthe first side remaining in the neutral, undrafted position.

Draft Tangent SurfacesBy default, the system automatically drafts any surfaces tangent to thoseselected for drafting. For example, you can select half of a cylinder, and thesystem drafts the entire 360 degrees around the cylinder. You can disablethis behavior by clearing the Draft tangent surfaces check box in the Optionstab of the dashboard.


PROCEDURE - Creating Basic Split Drafts


Draft\Split DRAFT_SPLIT.PRT

Task 1: Redefine three draft features and add split to them.


2. Edit the definition of Draft 1.3. In the dashboard, select the

Split tab.• Edit the Split option to Split bydraft hinge.

• Select Side option Draft firstside only.




• Select Side option Draft sidesindependently.

7. Edit Angle 2 to -10.8. Click Complete Feature .



• Select Side option Draft sidesdependently.




Analyzing Draft Hinges and Pull DirectionYou can select different references for the draft hinge and pulldirection.

Figure 1 – Pull Direction and DraftHinge Same, Different

• The draft hinge and pull directioncan be different.

• You can reverse, or “flip,” the angleabout the draft hinge.

• You can reverse, or “flip,” the pulldirection.

Figure 2 – References Tab

Figure 3 – Pull Direction Reversed

Analyzing Draft Hinges and Pull DirectionBy default, the pull direction is the same as the draft hinge. That is, the samereference is used for both the pull direction and the draft hinge, as shown inthe upper image in Figure 1. However, you can select different referencesfor the draft hinge and pull direction. In the lower image in Figure 1, the pulldirection has been switched to the datum plane. The resulting geometry istherefore different, even though the draft hinge is the same.

You can further manipulate the draft hinge and pull direction in either of thefollowing ways:

• You can reverse the angle about the draft hinge to add or remove material.• You can reverse the pull direction by flipping it 180 degrees. In Figure 3,the pull direction has been reversed, as shown by the magenta arrow.Because it is measured normal to the pull direction, the draft angleeffectively reverses.


PROCEDURE - Analyzing Draft Hinges and Pull Direction


Draft\Hinge-Direction DRAFT_PULL-HINGE_DIR.PRT

Task 1: Experiment with draft hinges and pull direction in a part model.


2. In the ribbon, select Draftfrom the Draft types drop-downmenu.

3. Select the top surface of thesmall rectangle.

4. Press SHIFT and select the topedge of the small rectangle.

5. Notice the loop surfaces are nowselected.

6. Right-click and select DraftHinges.

7. Select the large, angled surfaceon which the small rectangle lies.

8. Drag the draft angle inwards to10.

9. Click Named Views andselect FRONT.

10. In the dashboard, select theReferences tab.

11. Notice the Draft surface, Drafthinge, and Pull direction. TheDraft hinge and Pull direction arethe same surface.


12. Enable Plane Display .13. Right-click and select Pull

Direction.14. Select datum plane TOP.

15. Disable Plane Display .16. Notice the difference in draft.

17. In the dashboard, click ReversePull Direction .

18. Click Reverse Pull Directionagain.

19. In the dashboard, click ReverseAngle .

20. Click Reverse Angle again.

21. Press CTRL+D to orient to theStandard Orientation.




Module14Creating Rounds and Chamfers

Module OverviewOnce you have created the bulk of your part model, you can further refine itby adding finishing features such as rounds and chamfers.

In this module, you learn how to create rounds and chamfers.

ObjectivesAfter completing this module, you will be able to:• Create rounds by selecting edges, a surface and an edge, and two surfaces.• Create full rounds.• Create round sets.• Create chamfers by selecting edges and understand the different chamferdimensioning schemes.

• Create chamfer sets.


Creating Rounds TheoryRounds add or remove material by creating smooth transitionsbetween existing geometry.

• Rounds can add or removematerial.

• You can select edges or surfaces.

Figure 1 – Round Preview:Adding Material

Figure 2 – Round Preview:Removing Material Figure 3 – Completed Rounds

Creating Rounds TheoryRounds add or remove material by creating smooth transitions betweenexisting geometry. In Figure 3, one round adds material and the otherremoves material. When creating round features on a model, CreoParametric awaits the selection of edges and/or surfaces to be used asreferences. The round tool adapts according to the references that you selectto create the round feature.

After the references are selected, the round preview displays with a defaultradius dimension, which can be modified by using the radius drag handle,editing the dimension on the model, or using the dashboard. In Figures 1and 2, the round preview is shown.


Creating Rounds by Selecting EdgesThe rounds created by selecting edges are constructed tangentto the surfaces adjacent to the selected edges.

• You can select one ormore edge.

• Rounds propagatearound tangentedges.

Figure 1 – Rounds Created by SelectingTwo Edges

Figure 2 – Rounds Created by SelectingTwo Edges

Creating Rounds by Selecting EdgesYou can create rounds by selecting an edge or a combination of edges. Eachedge that you select is rounded. If you select an edge that has adjacenttangent edges, the round automatically propagates around those tangentedges by default. The rounds are constructed tangent to the surfacesadjacent to the selected edges.

In Figures 1 and 2, the edges selected for rounding are highlighted on the left.The resulting rounds are shown on the right. Note that because the edgesin Figure 2 are tangent to other edges, the round feature is automaticallycreated on the tangent edges.


PROCEDURE - Creating Rounds by Selecting Edges


Round\Edges ROUND_EDGE_1.PRT

Task 1: Create rounds on an L-Block.


2. Select Round from theRound types drop-down menu inthe Engineering group.

3. Press CTRL and select the twoedges.

4. Edit the radius value to 2.5. Click Complete Feature .

6. Notice that the left round addsmaterial, while the right roundremoves material.

Task 2: Create tangent rounds on an oval block.

1. Click Open , selectROUND_EDGE_2.PRT, andclick Open.



4. Edit the radius value to .25.5. Click Complete Feature .


6. Notice that the left round addsmaterial, while the right roundremoves material.

7. Also notice that although onlytwo edges were selected, alledges tangent to the selectededges were rounded.



Creating Rounds by Selecting a Surface andEdgeRounds created by selecting a surface and edge are constructedtangent to the surface and pass through the edge.

• You can select asurface and an edge.

• Rounds propagatearound tangentedges.

Figure 1 – Round Created by Selectinga Surface and Edge

Figure 2 – Round Created by Selectinga Surface and Edge

Creating Rounds by Selecting a Surface and EdgeYou can create rounds by selecting a surface first and then an edge. Theseround features are constructed tangent to the selected surface and passthrough the selected edge. If the selected edge has adjacent tangent edges,the round automatically propagates around those tangent edges by default.

In Figures 1 and 2, the surfaces and edges selected are highlighted on theleft, and the resulting rounds are shown on the right.


PROCEDURE - Creating Rounds by Selecting a Surfaceand Edge


Round\Surface-Edge SURF-EDGE_1.PRT

Task 1: Create rounds on a stepped block.



3. Press CTRL and select thesurface and edge.


Notice that the round addsmaterial.




Notice that the round removesmaterial.

Task 2: Create tangent rounds on an oval block.

1. Click Open , selectSURF-EDGE_2.PRT, andclick Open.

2. Select Round .3. Press CTRL and select the

surface and edge.4. Edit the radius value to 0.60.5. Click Complete Feature .


6. Notice that the round addsmaterial. Also notice thatalthough only one edge wasselected, the round follows alledges tangent to the selectededge.



Creating Rounds by Selecting Two SurfacesRounds created by selecting two surfaces can span gaps orengulf existing geometry.

Figure 1 – Round That Spans a Gap

• You can select twosurfaces.

• Rounds can spangaps.

• Rounds can engulfexisting geometry.

• You can manageround pieces.

Figure 2 – Round That Engulfs Ex-isting Geometry

Creating Rounds by Selecting Two SurfacesYou can create rounds by selecting two surfaces. The rounds are constructedtangent to the selected surfaces. If the selected references have adjacenttangent geometry, the round automatically propagates around that geometryby default.

For rounds created by selecting two surfaces, the system creates the roundbetween the selected surfaces; therefore, it has the ability to span gapsor engulf existing geometry. In addition, rounds created by selecting twosurfaces can also provide more robust round geometry in cases whererounds created by selecting edges may fail or create undesired geometry.

In Figures 1 and 2, the surfaces selected are highlighted on the left, and theresulting rounds are shown on the right.

Managing Round PiecesWhen a round traverses a gap, as shown in Figure 1 , it is comprised oftwo different pieces. You can manage the round pieces individually in thedashboard by specifying their display.


PROCEDURE - Creating Rounds by Selecting TwoSurfaces


Round\Surface-Surface SURF-SURF_1.PRT

Task 1: Create rounds on a block with a hole in it.





Notice that the round spans thegap.

6. Edit the definition of Round 1.7. In the dashboard, select the

Pieces tab.• Edit Piece 2 to be Excludedin the drop-down list.

8. Click Complete Feature .Notice that the round no longerspans the gap.

Task 2: Create rounds on another block.

1. Click Open , selectSURF-SURF_2.PRT, andclick Open.





6. Notice that the round engulfs theexisting material.



Creating Full RoundsFull rounds replace a surface with a round that is tangent tothe surface it replaces.

Figure 1 – Full Round Created bySelecting Two Edges

• You can select twoedges.

• You can select threesurfaces.

Figure 2 – Full Round Created by SelectingThree Surfaces

Creating Full RoundsFull rounds replace a surface with a round that is tangent to the surface itreplaces. You can create full rounds either by selecting a pair of edges ora pair of surfaces. If a pair of edges is selected, the system initially createsindividual rounds on each edge, and can be quickly converted to a full roundeither from the dashboard or by right-clicking. If a pair of surfaces is selected,a third surface must also be selected as the surface to remove with thecreation of the round.

In either case, the full round is constructed with a rounding surface forminga tangent connection between the selected references. If the selectedreferences have adjacent tangent geometry, the round automaticallypropagates around that geometry.

In Figure 1, the full round was created by selection of two edges. The edgesselected are highlighted on the left, and the resulting round is shown on theright. This round is removing material. In Figure 2, the full round was createdby selecting three surfaces. The surfaces selected are highlighted on the left,and the resulting round is shown on the right. This round is adding material.


PROCEDURE - Creating Full Rounds


Round\Full ROUND_FULL_1.PRT

Task 1: Create rounds on a block by selecting edges.




4. Right-click and select Fullround.

5. Click Complete Feature .Notice that the round removesmaterial.



8. In the dashboard, select the Setstab and click Full round.

9. Click Complete Feature .Notice that the round addsmaterial.

Task 2: Create rounds on a block by selecting surfaces.

1. Click Open , selectROUND_FULL_2.PRT, andclick Open.




4. Press CTRL and select thebottom cut surface.




8. Press CTRL and select the topouter surface.




Creating Round SetsRound sets enable you to create rounds of different radii ina single round feature.• Create multiple round sets in a single round feature.• Each round set can have a different radius value.• Each set may be created by selecting different entities.

Figure 1 – Three Round Sets in a Single Round Feature

Creating Round SetsRound features can contain multiple sets of references within a single roundfeature. When references for a round are selected, they can be selected aspart of the same set, or in additional sets. Each round set can have differentradius values. Each set may have also been created differently, such as a fullround versus a round created by selecting surfaces. You can add new setsto a round using the dashboard, by right-clicking in the graphics window, orsimply by selecting a new reference on the model. When you create a newround set, you can view the rounds from the other sets in the same feature intheir previewed state.In Figure 1, all three rounds are created within the same round feature. Eachround is from a different set. The round in the left image was created byselecting an edge. The round in the middle image was created by selectinga surface and edge. The round on the right is a full round. Notice that therounds have different radius values.Round sets are important for two reasons:1. Simplification — Round sets enable you to decrease the number of

features in the model tree.2. Transitions — Round sets enable you to manually specify the

appearance of the transitional surface where the round sets intersect.

Round Set Selection GuidelinesWhen an edge is selected for rounding, the following two guidelinesdetermine which set the round belongs to:• Selecting edges while pressing CTRL enables you to add rounds to thesame set.

• Selecting edges without pressing CTRL enables you to create a roundin a new set.


PROCEDURE - Creating Round Sets


Round\Sets ROUND-SETS.PRT

Task 1: Create three round sets in a single round feature.



3. Select the edge.4. Edit the radius value to 2.

5. Right-click and select Addset. Notice that the first roundremains previewed.


7. Edit the radius value to 6.5.

8. In the dashboard, select the Setstab.• Click *New set. Notice thatthe previous two rounds arestill previewed.

• Press CTRL and select thetwo edges.

9. Click Full round from thedashboard.

10. In the Sets tab, select Set 2.11. Edit the Radius value from 6.5 to

5.


12. Click Complete Feature .13. Notice the single round feature

created in the model tree.



Creating Chamfers by Selecting EdgesChamfers add or remove material by creating a beveled surfacebetween adjacent surfaces and edges.

• You can select one ormore edge.

• Chamfers can add orremove material.

• Chamfers propagatearound tangentedges.

Figure 1 – Chamfers Created by SelectingTwo Edges

Figure 2 – Chamfers Created by SelectingTwo Edges

Creating Chamfers by Selecting EdgesSimilar to round features, chamfers add or remove material by creatinga beveled surface between adjacent surfaces and edges selected asreferences. You can create chamfers by selecting an edge or a combinationof edges. Each edge that you select is chamfered. Similar to rounds, if theselected edge for chamfering has adjacent tangent edges, the chamferautomatically propagates around those tangent edges by default.

In Figures 1 and 2, the edges selected for chamfering are highlighted onthe left. The resulting chamfers are shown on the right. Note that becausethe edges in Figure 2 are tangent to other edges, the chamfer feature isautomatically created on the tangent edges.


PROCEDURE - Creating Chamfers by Selecting Edges


Chamfer\Edges CHAMFER-EDGE_1.PRT

Task 1: Create chamfers on an L-Block.


2. Select Edge Chamfer fromthe Chamfer types drop-downmenu in the Engineering group.


4. Edit the D value to 1.75.5. Click Complete Feature .

6. Notice that the left chamfer addsmaterial, while the right chamferremoves material.

Task 2: Create tangent chamfers on an oval block.

1. Click Open , selectCHAMFER-EDGE_2.PRT,and click Open.


3. Select the edge.4. Drag the D value to 3.5. Click Complete Feature .


6. Select Edge Chamfer fromthe Chamfer types drop-downmenu.

7. Select the edge.8. Edit the D value to 1.9. Click Complete Feature .

10. Notice that the inner chamferadds material, while the outerchamfer removes material.

11. Also notice that although onlytwo edges were selected, alledges tangent to the selectededges were chamfered.



Analyzing Basic Chamfer Dimensioning SchemesThere are several different ways to dimension a chamfer tocapture desired design intent.

• Dimensioningschemesinclude:– D x D– D1 x D2– Angle x D– 45 x D

Figure 1 – Four Different Chamfer DimensioningSchemes with the Same Geometry

Analyzing Basic Chamfer Dimensioning SchemesThere are several different dimensioning schemes available when creatingchamfers:

• D x D — Size of chamfer is defined by one dimension, as shown by theupper-right chamfer in Figure 1.

• D1 x D2 — Size of chamfer is defined by two dimensions, as shown bythe upper-left chamfer in Figure 1.

• Angle x D — Size of chamfer is defined by a linear and angular dimension,as shown by the lower-left chamfer in Figure 1.

• 45 x D — Size of chamfer is defined by a linear dimension at a 45 degreeangle, as shown by the lower-right chamfer in Figure 1. This type is onlyvalid for perpendicular surfaces.

You can edit the chamfer dimensioning scheme either by using the dashboardor by right-clicking in the graphics window and then selecting the new scheme.


PROCEDURE - Analyzing Basic Chamfer DimensioningSchemes


Chamfer\Schemes DIM-SCHEMES.PRT

Task 1: Create four chamfer dimensioning schemes on a block.



3. Select the edge.4. Drag the D value to 7.5. Click Complete Feature .

6. Select Edge Chamfer .7. Select the edge.8. In the dashboard, edit the

dimensioning scheme to D1 xD2.

9. Edit the D1 value to 7 and the D2value to 7.



dimensioning scheme to Anglex D.

14. Edit the Angle value to 45 andthe D value to 7.




dimensioning scheme to 45 x D.19. Edit the D value to 7.20. Click Complete Feature .

21. Orient to the FRONT vieworientation.

22. Press CTRL, select all fourChamfer features, right-click,and select Edit. Notice thatall four chamfers are the samegeometry, but contain differentdimensioning schemes.



Creating Chamfer SetsChamfer sets enable you to create chamfers of differentdimensioning schemes or D values in a single chamfer feature.

• Create multiple chamfer sets in a single chamfer feature.• Each chamfer set can have a different D value.• Each set may be created with a different dimensioning scheme.

Figure 1 – Three Chamfer Sets in a Single Chamfer Feature

Creating Chamfer SetsChamfer features can contain multiple sets of references within a singlechamfer feature. When references for a chamfer are selected, they can beselected as part of the same set, or in additional sets. Each chamfer set canhave different D values. Sets can also be created with different dimensioningschemes, for example, a D x D chamfer versus an Angle x D chamfer. Youcan add new sets to a chamfer using the dashboard, by right-clicking in thegraphics window, or simply by selecting a new reference on the model. Whenyou create a new chamfer set, you can view the chamfers from the other setsin the same feature in their previewed state.In Figure 1, all three chamfers are created within the same chamfer featurebut with different dimensioning schemes. Each chamfer is from a differentset. The D x D chamfer in the left image was created by selecting an edge. Inthe middle image, the Angle x D chamfer was created by selecting an edge.The D1 x D2 chamfer on the right was created by selecting a different edge.Notice that the chamfers are different D values.Chamfer sets are important for two reasons:1. Simplification – Chamfer sets enable you to decrease the number of

features in the model tree.2. Transitions – Chamfer sets enable you to manually specify the

appearance of the transitional surface where the chamfer sets intersect.

Chamfer Set Selection GuidelinesWhen an edge is selected for chamfering, the following two guidelinesdetermine which set a chamfer belongs to:• Selecting edges while pressing CTRL enables you to add chamfers tothe same set.

• Selecting edges without pressing CTRL enables you to create chamfersin a new set.


PROCEDURE - Creating Chamfer Sets


Chamfer\Sets CHAMFER-SETS.PRT

Task 1: Create three chamfer sets in a single chamfer feature.



3. Select the edge.4. Drag the D value to 2, editing it

if necessary.

5. Select the next edge. Noticethat the first chamfer remainspreviewed.

6. Edit the chamfer dimensioningscheme to Angle x D.

7. Edit the Angle value to 19 andthe D value to 6.5.

8. In the dashboard, select the Setstab.• Click *New set. Notice thatthe previous two chamfers arestill previewed.

• Select the edge.• Edit the chamfer dimensioningscheme to D1 x D2.

• Edit the D1 value to 3 and theD2 value to 1.75.





Module15Project I

Module OverviewUsing Creo Parametric and the skills learned thus far in this course, completethe following project design tasks.

ObjectivesAfter completing this module, you will be able to:• Create the PISTON_PIN.PRT, PISTON.PRT, CONNECTING_ROD.PRT,CRANKSHAFT.PRT, ENGINE_BLOCK.PRT, IMPELLER_HOUSING.PRT,IMPELLER.PRT, FRAME.PRT, and BOLT.PRT models.


The Air CirculatorIn this project, you create components of the Air Circulator.

• Create from scratch:– Part models

• Minimal Instructions• Completed Models forReference

Figure 1 – Air Circulator

Project ScenarioACME Incorporated develops and markets several consumer, industrial, anddefense goods. The Light Industrial Division of ACME creates a number ofproducts, including industrial fans, heating, air conditioning, and pumps. Youwork for the Light Industrial Division of ACME Inc., which has recently startedusing Creo Parametric for its product designs.

Upon returning from Creo Parametric training, you are assigned to create theAC-40 Air Circulator.

Minimal InstructionsBecause all tasks in this project are based on topics that you have learnedthus far in the course, instructions for each project step are minimal. Detailedpicks and clicks are not provided. This enables you to test your knowledge ofthe materials as you proceed through the project.

Completed Models for ReferenceBe sure to save all project models within the Intro-1_working sub-folderof the Projects lab files folder structure. The Projects folder also containsa sub-folder named Intro-1_completed. Here you can find a completedversion of each model in the project. These completed models can be usedas references, if required.


Piston Assembly ComponentsThese figures illustrate the components you create in thisproject for the piston assembly.

Figure 1 – PISTON_PIN.PRT Figure 2 – PISTON.PRT

Figure 3 – CONNECTING_ROD.PRT

Creating the Piston Pin, Piston, and Connecting Rod ComponentsThese figures illustrate the piston pin, piston, and connecting rod componentsyou create in the beginning of this project.


Crankshaft, Engine Block, Impeller, and ImpellerHousingThese figures illustrate the crankshaft, engine block, impeller,and impeller housing you create in this project.

Figure 1 – CRANKSHAFT.PRT Figure 2 – ENGINE_BLOCK.PRT

Figure 3 – IMPELLER.PRTFigure 4 – IMPELLER_

HOUSING.PRT

Creating the Crankshaft, Engine Block, Impeller, and ImpellerHousing ComponentsThese figures illustrate the crankshaft, engine block, impeller, and impellerhousing components you create in this project. These models are slightlymore complicated than the previously created piston assembly components.You complete the crankshaft model in this project, but the engine block,impeller, and impeller housing are completed in a subsequent project.


The Frame and BoltThese figures illustrate the frame and bolt components youcreate in this project.

Figure 1 – FRAME.PRT Figure 2 – BOLT.PRT

Creating the Frame and Bolt ComponentsThese figures illustrate the frame and bolt components you create in thisproject. The frame is completed in a subsequent project.



Module16Group, Copy, and Mirror Tools

Module OverviewCreo Parametric offers many tools to duplicate features and parts to increaseefficiency.

In this module, you learn how to create local groups of features. You alsolearn how to use the Copy tool to create a single instance of multiple featuresor groups. Finally, you learn how to use the Mirror tool to mirror features andparts to create symmetrical models.

ObjectivesAfter completing this module, you will be able to:• Create local groups.• Copy and paste features, as well as move and rotate those copied features.• Mirror selected features, all features, and parts.


Creating Local GroupsA local group enables you to perform an operation on multiplefeatures at once.

• Reasons for grouping include:– Copy/pattern multiple features

as one.– Select as one.– When editing, view dims from

all features in the group.– Organize/collapse the model

tree.Figure 1 – Model Tree Before

and After Local Group

Figure 2 – Viewing Dimensionsof All Grouped Features

Figure 3 – Selecting All GroupedEntities as One

Creating Local GroupsIn Creo Parametric, you can collect features and combine them into a localgroup. A local group enables you to perform an operation on multiple featuresat once. You can group features either by clicking the Operations groupdrop-down menu and selecting Group or by selecting features, right-clicking,and selecting Group. You can also ungroup features by right-clicking. Somefacts about local groups are:• The features that you group must be sequential in the model tree.• When you group features, they nest under the name of the group in themodel tree.

• You can delete or suppress features individually within a group.• You can drag features and drop them into or out of a group.

Reasons for Creating Local GroupsThere are numerous reasons for creating local groups:• You can copy or pattern multiple features as one by patterning or copyingthe local group.


• You can select all features within the local group as one.• When editing, you can view the dimensions of all features in the localgroup at one time.

• You can use local groups to organize or collapse the model tree.


PROCEDURE - Creating Local Groups


Feature_Operations\Local_Groups GROUP.PRT

Task 1: Group and ungroup features in a part model.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.2. Press CTRL and select Extrude

2 and Hole 1.3. Right-click and select Group.4. Expand Group LOCAL_GROUP

in the model tree. Notice bothfeatures in the group.

5. Right-click Group LOCAL_GROUP and select Ungroup.

6. Press CTRL and select Extrude2, Hole 1, Hole 2, and Round 1.

7. Right-click and select Group.8. Right-click and select Edit.

Notice that the dimensions fromall features in the group display.

9. Click in the background of thegraphics window to de-select allfeatures.

10. Select the round feature from themodel, as shown.

11. Right-click and select SelectGroup. Notice all features in thegroup are selected.


12. In the model tree, expand GroupLOCAL_GROUP and expandfeature Hole 2. Notice theembedded datum axis A_2.

13. Right-click Hole 2 and selectDelete.• In the Delete dialog box,ensure that the Keepembedded datum featurescheck box is selected.

• Click OK to delete the hole butkeep the datum axis.

14. Enable Axis Display . Noticethe axis remains.



Copying and Pasting FeaturesThe copy and paste functionality enables you to quicklyduplicate a feature.

• Copy– Select features or groups of

features.• Paste– Pastes feature with same

reference types, dimensionscheme, and options asoriginal.

– Select new references.– Independent of original feature.

Figure 1 – Copying andPasting a Hole

Figure 2 – Sketch Placed onthe Cursor

Figure 3 – Copying and Pastingan Extrude

Copying and Pasting FeaturesCopy and paste enables you to quickly duplicate a feature or group offeatures. Each copy and paste operation creates a single copy of theselected feature(s). When the new feature is placed with paste, the primaryreference is cleared and the system awaits selection of a new reference.However, depending on the feature type, the system maintains the referencetype, dimensioning scheme, and the same options as the original. The copiedfeature is independent of the original.

In Figure 1, a hole is copied and pasted. Once the placement surface isselected, you can place the new hole in a new location on the new placementsurface. Notice that the hole diameter and depth options are carried overto the copy.


In the lower figures, an extrude feature is copied and pasted. You mustspecify a new sketch and reference plane and enter Sketcher mode. Thesystem places the copied sketch on the cursor, as shown in Figure 2, andyou can drop it into location and edit dimensions appropriately. The copiedextrude feature maintains feature type, options, and depth.

You can also copy and paste rounds. When doing so, the round referencetypes, size, and options are maintained. You must select new correspondingreferences.


PROCEDURE - Copying and Pasting Features


Feature_Operations\Copy_Paste COPY_PASTE.PRT

Task 1: Copy and paste a hole feature in a part model.


2. Select Hole 1 and click Copy from the Operations group.

3. Select Paste from the Paste types drop-down menu in theOperations group.

4. Select the approximate holelocation on the front surface.

5. Right-click and select OffsetReferences Collector.

6. Press CTRL and select the topand right surfaces.

7. Edit the offset from the topsurface to 1.5 and edit the offsetfrom the right surface to 3.

8. Click Complete Feature fromthe Hole dashboard.


Task 2: Copy and paste an extrude feature in a part model.

1. Select Extrude 2 and click Copy .

2. Click Paste .

3. Right-click and select EditInternal Sketch.

4. Select the right surface as theSketch Plane.

5. In the Sketch dialog box, edit theOrientation to Bottom and clickSketch.

6. The sketch attaches to yourcursor. Select the approximateplacement.


8. Edit the dimensions.9. Click OK from the Sketch

dashboard.


11. Click Complete Feature fromthe Extrude dashboard.



Moving and Rotating Copied FeaturesYou can use the Paste Special option to apply move and rotateoptions to the resulting copied feature.

Figure 1 – Moving a Copied Feature

• Copy:– Select features or

groups of features.• Paste Special:– Make copies dependent

or independent.– Move/rotate.– Edit the dependence.

♦ Dim Indep♦ Sec Indep

Figure 2 – Rotating a Copied Feature

Figure 3 – Moving and Rotating aCopied Feature

Moving and Rotating Copied FeaturesWhen copying features in a part model, you can use the Paste Special optionto apply move and rotate options to the resulting copied feature.• Move the copied feature — Linearly translate the copied feature. Specifya direction reference such as a surface, datum plane, edge, or axis, andenter the translation distance value. The copied feature moves normal to aplane or surface, and along an edge or axis. In Figure 1, the oval copiedprotrusion moves normal to datum plane DTM1 a distance of 3.

• Rotate copied feature — Angularly rotate the copied feature. Specify adirection reference such as an edge or axis, and enter the angular rotationvalue. The copied feature rotates around the edge or axis. In Figure 2, theoval copied protrusion rotates around datum axis AXIS at an angle of 45°.

You can also apply multiple move and rotate operations to the same copiedfeature. For example, you may choose to move the feature in one direction


and rotate it about an axis, as shown in Figure 3. Or you may choose to movethe feature in one direction and then move it further in another direction.

Creating Dependent CopiesWhen you copy a feature, the default dependent copy option is to make thecopied feature's dimensions and section sketch dependent on those of theoriginal. That is, all the dimensions of the original feature become sharedbetween the original feature and copied feature. Therefore, when you edit thevalue of a shared dimension, both features update simultaneously.

Editing the Dependence of CopiesThere are two different ways you can edit the dependency of a dependentlycopied feature:

• Break the dependence of one of the copied feature dimensions by selectingthe dimension, right-clicking, and selecting Make Dim Indep. All otheraspects of the copied feature remain dependent on the original.

• Break the dependence of the copied feature section by selecting the copiedfeature, right-clicking, and selecting Make Sec Indep. The copied featuredepth is still dependent on the original.


PROCEDURE - Moving and Rotating Copied Features


Feature_Operations\Move_Rotate MOVE_ROTATE.PRT

Task 1: Move and rotate copied features.

1. Enable only the following Datum Display types: .2. Select Extrude 2.

3. Click Copy from the Operations group.

4. Select Paste Special from the Paste types drop-down menuin the Operations group.

5. In the Paste Special dialog box, select the Apply Move/Rotatetransformations to copies check box and click OK.

6. Select datum plane DTM1 andedit the offset value to 3.


8. With Moved Copy 1 still selected, click Copy and select Paste

Special from the Paste types drop-down menu in the Operationsgroup.

9. In the Paste Special dialog box, clear theMake copies dependent ondimensions of originals check box, select the Apply Move/Rotatetransformations to copies check box, and click OK.

10. In the dashboard, click Rotate.

11. Select datum axis AXIS and editthe offset angle to 45.



13. With Moved Copy 2 still selected, click Copy and select Paste

Special from the Paste types drop-down menu in the Operationsgroup.

14. In the Paste Special dialog box, clear theMake copies dependent ondimensions of originals check box, select the Apply Move/Rotatetransformations to copies check box, and click OK.

15. Select datum plane RIGHT andedit the offset to 1.

16. In the dashboard, select theTransformations tab and clickNew Move.

17. Edit the move type to Rotate,select datum axis AXIS, and editthe offset angle to 45.


Task 2: Edit the dimensions and dependency of the moved and rotatedfeatures.

1. Select Extrude 2, right-click, andselect Edit.

2. Edit the feature height from 1 to2 and click in the backgroundtwice to de-select all features.


3. Expand Moved Copy 1 andselect Extrude 2 (2).

4. Right-click and select Edit.5. Select the 1 width value,

right-click, and select Make DimIndep.

6. In the Confirmation dialogbox, click Yes to make anindependent dimension.

7. Click in the background twice tode-select all features.

8. Right-click Extrude 2 (2) andselect Edit.

9. Edit the feature width from 1 to1.5 and click in the backgroundtwice to de-select all features.



Mirroring Selected FeaturesYou can mirror selected features about a plane.

Figure 1 – Mirroring Features AboutDatum Plane RIGHT

• Mirror Features:– Mirror features

or groups offeatures.

– Select mirrorplane.

– Mirror featuresindependent of ordependent on theoriginal feature.

Figure 2 – Mirroring Features AboutDatum Plane FRONT

Mirroring Selected FeaturesYou can mirror selected features or a group of features about a plane. Themirrored features can be independent of the original features or dependentupon them. In the example shown, there are three oval protrusions in agroup, as shown in the left image of Figure 1. The group is selected andmirrored dependently about datum plane RIGHT, as shown in the right imageof Figure 1. Next, the original group and the mirrored group are selected,and both are mirrored about datum plane FRONT independently, as shownin the right image of Figure 2. Because this second mirror was performedindependently, the original geometry height can be modified and only thedependently mirrored geometry height updates.


PROCEDURE - Mirroring Selected Features


Feature_Operations\Mirror_Features

MIRROR_SEL_FEATURES.PRT

Task 1: Mirror selected features and edit the extrude height.


2. Press CTRL and select Extrude2, Moved Copy 1, and MovedCopy 2.


4. Select datum plane RIGHT.5. In the dashboard, select the

Options tab and notice themirror is dependent.


7. With the mirror feature stillselected, press CTRL and alsoselect Extrude 2, Moved Copy1, and Moved Copy 2.

8. Click Mirror .9. Select datum plane FRONT.10. In the dashboard, select the

Options tab and clear theDependent Copy check box.



12. In the model tree, right-clickExtrude 2 and select Edit.

13. Edit the height from 1 to 2.14. Click in the background twice to

de-select all features.



Mirroring All FeaturesMirroring all features enables you to create half of a model andthen mirror it to complete the entire part.

• Mirror the entire model:– Select the part node from the model tree.– Mirror is dependent on original side.– Mirrors all features that are before the mirror feature in the model tree.

Figure 1 – Mirror AllFeatures Before Figure 2 – Mirror All Features Result

Mirroring All FeaturesTo mirror all features, you simply select the part node from the model tree(the name of the model at the top of the tree) and then mirror all the featuresin the model at one time. This enables you to create one half of a model andthen mirror it to complete the entire part. A single mirror feature is created,which is dependent on the original side of the model.

The mirror feature mirrors all features that come before it in the model tree.Features that change on the original side of the model update on the mirrorside. Features inserted before the mirror feature are mirrored to the oppositeside. Features created after the mirror are not mirrored.

When you mirror all features, this includes all datum planes. Theresulting mirrored datum planes retain the same name as theiroriginals, except that the mirrored datum planes have an "_1"suffix added to their names and tags. For example, if you mirrorall features, which includes datum plane TOP, the correspondingmirrored datum plane name is TOP_1.


PROCEDURE - Mirroring All Features


Feature_Operations\Mirror_All MIRROR_ALL_FEATURES.PRT

Task 1: Mirror all part features about a datum plane.


2. In the model tree, select theMirror 1 feature.

3. Expand the Mirror 1 feature.Notice it contains a hole andextrude feature.

4. In the model tree, select thepart node MIRROR_ALL_FEATURES.PRT.


6. Select datum plane RIGHT.7. Click Complete Feature from

the dashboard.

8. In the model tree, right-click Hole1 and select Edit.

9. Edit the hole diameter from 16 to20.

10. In the model tree, select Extrude3.

11. Edit the width from 35 to 40.12. Click in the background twice to

de-select all features. Notice thatall four hole and extrude featureshave updated.


13. Click Named Views andselect 3D.

14. Select Round from theRound types drop-down menuand select the right vertical edge.

15. Edit the radius to 8 and clickComplete Feature from thedashboard.

16. Notice that the round feature isnot mirrored.



Creating Mirrored PartsYou can create a duplicate, mirrored copy of a part.

• Mirror types:– Mirror geometry only.– Mirror geometry with features.

• Dependency control:– Geometry dependent.

Figure 1 – Original Part Figure 2 – Mirrored Part

Creating Mirrored PartsYou can create a mirrored copy of a part directly within Creo Parametric.There are two different types of mirrored parts that can be created:

• Mirror geometry only — Mirrors geometrywithout the structure of the original part. Themodel tree contains one mirrored feature in theresulting mirrored part.

• Mirror geometry with features — Mirrorsgeometry with the original part feature structure.The geometry of the resulting mirrored part isnot dependent on the geometry of the originalmodel.

When creating a new mirrored part, you must specify the part name for thenew part. If you mirror a part using the Mirror geometry only type, you must


also specify whether the resulting mirrored part is dependent on the originalor not. This option is only available for the Mirror geometry only mirror type.You can also preview the mirrored part before it is actually created.

You can also mirror an entire assembly by clicking File > SaveAs > Save a Mirror Assembly.


PROCEDURE - Creating Mirrored Parts


Feature_Operations\Mirror_Parts MIRROR-PART-RH.PRT

Task 1: Mirror a part.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.2. Notice that the part is

asymmetric. You need tocreate a part which is equivalentto the left part.

3. Click File > Save As > MirrorPart .

4. In the Mirror part dialog box,accept the defaults for Mirrortype and Dependency control,and type MIRROR_PART_LH asthe New Name.

5. In the Mirror part dialog box,select the Preview checkbox.


6. Click OK in the Mirror part dialogbox. Notice that the systemdetermines the mirror plane, asyou were not prompted for it.

7. Spin the new model, as shown.8. Arrange the two Creo Parametric

windows on your desktop tocompare parts.



Module17Creating Patterns

Module OverviewPatterning features and components is yet another way to quickly duplicatefeatures to increase efficiency.

In this module, you learn how to pattern features linearly and angularly,and how to increment dimensions while patterning. You also learn how toReference pattern features and components. Finally, you learn how to deletepatterns and pattern members.

ObjectivesAfter completing this module, you will be able to:• Direction Pattern in the First and Second Directions.• Direction Pattern with multiple direction types.• Axis Pattern in the First and Second Directions.• Create Reference patterns of features and components.• Delete patterns and pattern members.


Direction Patterning in the First DirectionThe direction pattern enables you to pattern features in a givendirection.• Direction and increments basedon selected reference.

• Select a first direction reference.• Specify number of members andincrement.

• Specify additional, optionaldimensions to increment.

Figure 1 – Direction Patterning anExtrude in One Direction

Figure 2 – Editing the Direction Pattern and Pattern Leader

Patterning Features TheoryThe Pattern tool enables you to quickly duplicate a feature, group of features,or pattern of features. When you create a pattern, you create instances of theselected feature by varying some specified dimensions. The feature selectedfor patterning is called the pattern leader, while the patterned instances arecalled pattern members. Each pattern member is dependent on the originalfeature, or pattern leader. The pattern leader is always the first member inan expanded pattern feature in the model tree. In the graphics window, thepattern leader's instance “dot” border is always bolder than the other patternmembers, as shown in Figure 1. In Figure 2, the width of the pattern leaderhas been modified between the images third from the left and fourth from theleft. Consequently, all pattern members' widths have been updated as well.

Direction Patterning in the First Direction TheoryThe direction pattern enables you to pattern features in a given direction. Thefollowing items are required to create a direction pattern in one direction:• Specify a First Direction reference — The pattern extends in a directionbased on the reference selected. If you select a plane or surface, thepattern extends normal to the reference, and if you select a linear curve,


edge, or axis, the pattern extends along the reference. You can also togglethe direction in which the pattern extends by 180 degrees. In the figures,the first direction reference specified is the datum plane.

• Specify the number of pattern members in the first direction — Type thenumber of members in either the dashboard or the graphics window. Thenumber of pattern members includes the pattern leader. In Figure 2, themodel in the left-most image has four pattern members, while the model inthe image second from the left has six pattern members.

• Specify the increment in the first direction — The increment is the spacingbetween pattern members. You can edit the increment in the dashboard,the graphics window, or by dragging the drag handle.

Incrementing Additional DimensionsYou can also increment additional dimensions in the first direction at thesame time to create a "varying" pattern. The following items are required toincrement additional dimensions in the first direction:

• Select the dimension to be incremented from the pattern leader — Thepattern leader displays with all dimensions used to create the feature.

• Specify the increment value — In Figure 2, the extrude feature heightwas incremented by 0.5. Consequently, each pattern member's heightincreases 0.5 over the previous pattern member.


PROCEDURE - Direction Patterning in the First Direction


Pattern\Direction_First DIR_PATTERN_1ST.PRT

Task 1: Direction pattern an extrude feature.


2. Select Extrude 2 and selectPattern from the Patterntypes drop-down menu in theEditing group.

3. In the dashboard, edit the patterntype to Direction.

4. Select datum plane FRONT andclick Flip First Directionfrom the Pattern dashboard.

5. Edit the number of members to 4and edit the spacing to 2.

You can also drag theincrement handle to edit theincrement.

6. Click Complete Feature fromthe Pattern dashboard.

7. With the Pattern feature stillselected, right-click and selectEdit.

8. Edit the number of patternedextrudes from 4 to 6.

9. Click in the background twice tode-select all features.


10. Edit the definition of Pattern 1 ofExtrude 2.

11. In the dashboard, select theDimensions tab.• Click in the Direction 1Dimension collector.

• Select the 1 height dimensionand edit the increment to 0.5.

12. Click Complete Feature .13. De-select all features.

14. In the model tree, expand thepattern feature.

15. Select the pattern leader,right-click, and select Edit.

16. Edit the width from 2 to 3.17. Click in the background twice to




Direction Patterning in the Second DirectionThe direction pattern enables you to pattern features in a givendirection.

• Direction and increments basedon selected references.

• Select a first and second directionreference.

• Specify number of members andincrements in first and seconddirections.

• Specify additional, optionaldimensions to increment.

Figure 1 – Direction Patterning aGroup in Two Directions

Figure 2 – Direction Patterning aGroup in Two Directions Result

Figure 3 – Direction Pattern, TwoDirections, Two Additional

Dimensions

Patterning Features TheoryThe Pattern tool enables you to quickly duplicate a feature, group of features,or pattern of features. When you create a pattern, you create instances of theselected feature by varying some specified dimensions. The feature selectedfor patterning is called the pattern leader, while the patterned instances arecalled pattern members. Each pattern member is dependent on the originalfeature, or pattern leader.

Direction Patterning in the Second Direction TheoryThe direction pattern enables you to pattern features in two directions. Thefollowing items are required to create a direction pattern in two directions:

• Specify the First and Second Direction references — The pattern extendsin the directions based on the references selected. If you select a plane orsurface, the pattern extends normal to the reference, and if you select alinear curve, edge, or axis, the pattern extends along the reference. Youcan also flip the direction the pattern extends by 180 degrees. In thefigures, the first direction reference specified is datum plane RIGHT, andthe second direction reference specified is datum plane FRONT.


• Specify the number of pattern members in the First and Second Directions— Type the number of members in either the dashboard or the graphicswindow. The number of pattern members can be different for eachdirection. The number of pattern members includes the pattern leader. Inthe figures, the first direction has four pattern members, while the seconddirection has five pattern members.

• Specify the increment in the First and Second Directions — The incrementis the spacing between pattern members. You can edit the increment in thedashboard, the graphics window, or by dragging the drag handle. Again,the increment can be different between the first and second directions. Inthe figures, the first direction increment is 2.5, while the second directionincrement is 2.

Incrementing Additional DimensionsYou can also increment additional dimensions in the first or second direction,or both, at the same time to create a 'varying' pattern. The following items arerequired to increment additional dimensions in the first and second directions:

• Select the dimension to be incremented from the pattern leader — Thepattern leader displays with all dimensions used to create the feature. Thedimension selected can be different for each direction. Note also that youcan select multiple dimensions for each direction if desired.

• Specify the increment value — Again, the increment value for eachdirection can be different. In Figure 3, the extrude feature width wasincremented by -0.2 in the first direction, and the extrude feature height wasincremented by 0.5 in the second direction. Consequently, each patternmember's width decreases by 0.20 in the first direction and the heightincreases by 0.5 in the second direction over the previous pattern member.


PROCEDURE - Direction Patterning in the SecondDirection


Pattern\Direction_Second DIR_PATTERN_2ND.PRT

Task 1: Direction pattern an extrude feature.


2. Press CTRL, and select Extrude2 and Round 1.

3. Right-click and select Group.4. Rename the group to OVAL.

5. Select Group OVAL and selectPattern from the Patterntypes drop-down menu in theEditing group.

6. In the Pattern dashboard, editthe pattern type to Direction.

7. Select datum plane RIGHT asthe first direction reference.

8. In the dashboard, edit thenumber of members to 4 and editthe spacing to 2.50.

9. In the dashboard, click in theDirection 2 Reference collector.• Select datum plane FRONT asthe second direction reference.

• Click Flip Second Direction.

• Edit the second directionnumber of members to 5and edit the second directionspacing to 2.



11. Edit the definition of Pattern 1 ofOVAL.


• Select the 2 extrude widthdimension and edit theincrement to -0.20.

• Press CTRL and select theR0.1 radius dimension andedit the increment to 0.075.

13. In the Dimensions tab of thedashboard, click in the Direction2 Dimension collector.

14. Select the 1 extrude heightdimension and edit the incrementto 0.50.



16. In the model tree, expand thepattern feature.

17. Select the pattern leader,right-click, and select Edit.

18. Edit the width from 1 to 0.75.19. Click in the background twice to




Axis Patterning in the First DirectionThe axis pattern enables you to pattern features radially about aspecified axis.

• Direction based on selected axis.• Specify number of members andangular spacing.

• Set angular extent.• Specify member orientation.• Specify additional, optionaldimensions to increment.

Figure 1 – Axis Patterning anExtrude in One Direction

Figure 2 – Editing the Axis Pattern and Incrementing a Dimension


Axis Patterning in the First Direction TheoryThe axis pattern enables you to pattern features radially about a specifiedaxis. The following items are required to create an axis pattern in onedirection:

• Specify the axis reference — The pattern extends angularly about theselected reference axis. You can toggle the angular direction the patternextends from clockwise to counterclockwise. In the figures, the axisreference specified is datum axis AXIS.

• Specify the number of pattern members in the first direction — Type thenumber of members in either the dashboard or the graphics window. Thenumber of pattern members includes the pattern leader. In Figure 2, thereare six pattern members.


• Specify the angular spacing — Specified in degrees, you can edit theangular spacing in the dashboard, the graphics window, or by draggingthe drag handle.

There are two additional optional settings that you can use when creatingaxis patterns:

• Set Angular Extent — This option automatically spaces the patternmembers equally about the axis reference. You can also select valuesof 90, 180, 270, and 360 degrees from the drop-down list, or type in thedesired angular extent. The range is -360 to +360 degrees. The angularextent value supersedes the angular spacing. In the figures, the angularextent has been set to 360 degrees.

• Member orientation — Determines how the pattern members are to beoriented about the axis reference. With the Follow axis rotation checkbox selected by default, pattern members are oriented such that therelationship between the pattern leader and axis is maintained for eachpattern member. In Figure 2, the middle image is set to Follow axis rotation.With the check box for this option cleared, all pattern members have aconstant orientation that is the same as the pattern leader. In Figure 2, theleft-most image shows all members having a constant orientation.

Incrementing Additional DimensionsYou can also increment additional dimensions in the first direction at thesame time to create a "varying" pattern. The following items are required toincrement additional dimensions in the first direction:

• Select the dimension to be incremented from the pattern leader. Thepattern leader displays with all dimensions used to create the feature.

• Specify the increment value — In Figure 2, the extrude feature length wasincremented by 0.3 in the right-most image. Consequently, each patternmember's length increases by 0.3 over the previous pattern member.


PROCEDURE - Axis Patterning in the First Direction


Pattern\Axis_First AXIS_PATTERN_1ST.PRT

Task 1: Axis pattern an extrude feature.


2. Select Extrude 2 and selectPattern from the Patterntypes drop-down menu in theEditing group.

3. In the Pattern dashboard, editthe pattern type to Axis.

4. Select datum axis AXIS.5. Edit the number of members to 6

and edit the angle increment to45.

6. In the dashboard, click SetAngular Extent .

7. Edit the Angular Extent valuefrom 360 to 90.

8. Edit the Angular Extent valueback to 360.




11. In the dashboard, select theOptions tab.• Clear the Follow axis rotationcheck box.




• Select the 2 length dimensionand edit the increment to 0.3.


16. Edit the definition of Pattern 1.17. In the dashboard, click Flip

Pattern Direction .18. Click Complete Feature .



Axis Patterning in the Second DirectionThe axis pattern enables you to pattern features radially about aspecified axis.

• Direction based on selected axis.• Specify number of members andangular spacing in first and seconddirections.

• Set angular extent.• Specify member orientation.• Specify additional, optionaldimensions to increment.

Figure 1 – Axis Patterning aGroup in Two Directions

Figure 2 – Editing the Axis Pattern and Incrementing Dimensions


Axis Patterning in the Second Direction TheoryThe axis pattern enables you to pattern features radially and outward from aspecified axis. The following items are required to create an axis pattern inthose two directions:• Specify the axis reference — The pattern extends angularly about theselected axis reference in the first direction and radially outward from theaxis in the second direction. You can toggle the angular direction thepattern extends from clockwise to counterclockwise. In the figures, the axisreference specified is datum axisAXIS.

• Specify the number of pattern members in the first and second directions— Type the number of members in either the dashboard or the graphicswindow. The number of pattern members can be different for eachdirection. The number of pattern members includes the pattern leader. Inthe figures, the first direction has eight pattern members, while seconddirection has three pattern members.


• Specify the angular spacing in the first direction — Specified in degrees,you can edit the angular spacing in the dashboard, the graphics window, orby dragging the drag handle.

• Specify the radial spacing in the second direction — This increment is thespacing between pattern members outward from the axis reference. Again,you can edit the increment in the dashboard, in the graphics window, or bydragging the drag handle. In the figures, the spacing increment is 2.5.

There are two additional optional settings that you can use when creatingaxis patterns:

• Set Angular Extent — This option automatically spaces the patternmembers equally about the axis reference. You can also select values of90, 180, 270, and 360 degrees from the drop-down list, or you can type thedesired angular extent. The range is -360 to +360 degrees. The angularextent value supersedes the angular spacing. In the figures, the angularextent has been set to 360 degrees.

• Member orientation — Determines how the pattern members are to beoriented about the axis reference. With the Follow axis rotation checkbox selected by default, pattern members are oriented such that therelationship between the pattern leader and axis is maintained for eachpattern member. In Figure 2, the middle image is set to Follow axis rotation.With the check box for this option cleared, all pattern members have aconstant orientation that is the same as the pattern leader. In Figure 2, theleft-most image shows all members having a constant orientation.

Incrementing Additional DimensionsYou can also increment additional dimensions in the first or second direction,or both, at the same time to create a "varying" pattern. The following items arerequired to increment additional dimensions in the first and second directions:

• Select the dimension to be incremented from the pattern leader. Thepattern leader displays with all dimensions used to create the feature. Thedimension selected can be different for each direction. Also note that youcan select multiple dimensions for each direction, if desired.

• Specify the increment value — Again, the increment value for eachdirection can be different. In Figure 2’s right-most image, the left holediameter was incremented by 0.075 in the first direction, and the right holediameter was incremented by 0.25 in the second direction, along with theextrude height incremented by 1. Consequently, each pattern member'sleft hole diameter increases by 0.075 in the first direction and the right holediameter increases by 0.25 in the second direction with the extrude heightincreasing 1 over the previous pattern member.


PROCEDURE - Axis Patterning in the Second Direction


Pattern\Axis_Second AXIS_PATTERN_2ND.PRT

Step 1: Axis pattern an extrude feature.


2. Press CTRL, and select Extrude2, Hole 1, and Hole 2.

3. Right-click and select Group.4. Rename the group to OVAL.


6. In the Pattern dashboard, editthe pattern type to Axis.

7. Select datum axis AXIS as thepattern center.

8. Edit the number of members inthe first direction to 8.

9. In the Pattern dashboard, clickSet Angular Extent .

10. Edit the number of members inthe second direction to 3, andedit the spacing value to 2.5.



13. In the dashboard, select theOptions tab.• Clear the Follow axis rotationcheck box.




16. In the dashboard, select theOptions tab and select theFollow axis rotation check box.


• Zoom in on the pattern leader.• Select the left 0.25 holediameter dimension and editthe increment to 0.075.

18. In the Dimensions tab of thedashboard, click in the Direction2 Dimension collector.• Select the right 0.25 holediameter dimension and editthe increment to 0.25.

• Press CTRL, select the 1height dimension, and edit theincrement to 1.

19. Click Complete Feature .20. Orient to the Standard

Orientation.



Direction Patterning with Multiple Direction TypesThe Direction pattern also enables you to pattern with differentdirection types.

• First and Second Direction types:– Translate– Rotate– Coordinate System


Figure 2 – Translation andRotation Directions

Figure 3 – Completed Pattern

Direction Patterning with Multiple Direction TypesThe Direction pattern option enables you to pattern using different directiontypes for the first and second directions. By default, both the first andsecond directions are set to translate. However, you may specify eitherTranslate, Rotate, or Coordinate System for the first and second directionsindependently.

This capability enables you to capture translation and rotation within a singlepattern. Alternatively, you can create a pattern of a pattern to accomplishsimilar results.

In the figures, a translation is used as the first direction, and a rotation isused for the second direction.


PROCEDURE - Direction Patterning with MultipleDirection Types


Pattern\Direction_Multiple PATTERN_MULT_DIR.PRT

Task 1: Direction pattern a group, translating in the first direction, androtating in the second direction.



3. Select Direction as the patterntype.

4. Select Translate , ifnecessary, for the first direction.

5. Select datum plane DTM1 as thefirst direction reference.


7. In the dashboard, click in thesecond direction referencecollector.

8. Select datum axis A_1 as thesecond direction reference.

9. Select Rotate for the seconddirection.

10. Click Flip Second Direction .11. Edit the second direction number

of members to 3 and edit thesecond direction spacing to 30degrees.



Similar results could becreated by first creating adirection pattern, and thencreating an axis pattern ofthe first pattern.



Creating Reference Patterns of FeaturesA Reference pattern enables you to pattern a feature on anyother underlying patterned features.

• You can reference pattern:– Features– Groups– Patterns along an existing

pattern• Reference pattern types:– Feature– Group– Both

Figure 1 – Reference Patterninga Group

Figure 2 – Editing Reference Pattern Reference Types

Creating Reference Patterns of FeaturesA Reference pattern patterns a feature on any other underlying patternedfeatures. If you create a new feature on the pattern leader of another pattern,you can Reference pattern that new feature. In Figure 1, an extrude featurewas created and patterned. A cut and round feature was then created on thepattern leader’s extrude feature. Consequently, the cut and round feature canbe Reference patterned. If the quantity or spacing of the underlying patternis updated, the quantity or spacing of the Reference pattern is automaticallyupdated.Depending on how the features were created, there are three differentReference pattern types that can be created:• Feature – The Reference pattern references an existing feature pattern.In Figure 2’s left image, the round feature is being Reference patternedbased on the existing axis pattern.

• Group – The Reference pattern references either a group or existingpattern of a pattern. In Figure 2’s middle image, an axis pattern is thendirection patterned, resulting in a pattern of a pattern. The round feature isReference patterned based on the axis pattern that was patterned.


• Both – The Reference pattern references both an existing feature patternand a group pattern. In Figure 2’s right image, the round is Referencepatterned around both the feature pattern (axis pattern) and the grouppattern (the pattern of the axis pattern).

When creating a Reference pattern of a sketch-based feature (suchas an extrude), you must either Reference pattern the sketch first,group the sketch and sketch-based feature together, or use aninternal (unlinked) sketch. To simplify Reference pattern creation,an internal (unlinked) sketch is recommended. Reference patternsof other feature types, such as rounds or holes, are not an issue.


PROCEDURE - Creating Reference Patterns of Features


Pattern\Reference_Features REF-PATTERN.PRT

Task 1: Reference pattern a group.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.2. In the model tree, press CTRL

and select OVAL_CUT andROUND_2.

3. Right-click and select Group.

4. With the group still selected,select Pattern from thePattern types drop-down menuin the Editing group. Notice thedefault pattern type is Referencepattern.


Task 2: Direction pattern AXIS_PATTERN and Reference pattern a roundfeature.


2. In the model tree, selectAXIS_PATTERN and clickPattern .

3. From the Pattern dashboard, editthe pattern type to Direction.

4. Select datum plane FRONT andclick Flip First Direction .




7. Select ROUND_1.

8. Click Pattern . Notice thedefault pattern type is Referencepattern and that the defaultReference type is Feature. Alsonotice that the Reference patternonly occurs on the axis pattern.

9. From the Pattern dashboard,edit the Reference type toGroup. Notice that the roundonly patterns once per directionpattern group.

10. From the Pattern dashboard,edit the Reference type to Both.Notice that the round patternson each member of the axispattern, as well as each memberof the Direction pattern of theaxis pattern.




Creating Reference Patterns of ComponentsYou can use a Reference pattern to quickly assemble multipleinstances of a component.

• Assemble component to patternleader.

• Reference pattern the component.• Number of Referencepatterned components updatesautomatically.

Figure 1 – Reference Patterninga Bolt

Figure 2 – Reference Patterninga Bolt

Figure 3 – Updating the Numberof Bosses and Holes

Creating Reference Patterns of ComponentsReference patterns can also be used at the assembly level. For example, if abolt is assembled into a hole which is a pattern leader of a pattern of holes,the bolt can be Reference patterned, as shown in Figures 1 and 2. To do this,a component is placed into each member of the underlying pattern. If thenumber of patterned holes changes, the number of patterned bolts updatesaccordingly, as shown in Figure 3.


PROCEDURE - Creating Reference Patterns ofComponents


Pattern\Reference_Components REF_PAT_COMP.ASM

Task 1: Reference pattern the bolts in the assembly.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.2. In the model tree, select each

component to highlight it in thegraphics window.

3. Select the last BOLT_8.PRT inthe model tree.

4. Select Pattern from thePattern types drop-down menuin the Modifiers group.


6. Select the upper BOLT_8.PRTfrom the graphics window.

7. Click Pattern .8. Click Complete Feature .




10. In the Model Tree Items dialogbox, select the Features checkbox and click OK.

11. Expand BASE.PRT, right-clickPattern 4 of EAR, and selectEdit.

12. Edit the number of patternmembers from 6 LOCALGROUPS to 8 LOCALGROUPS.

13. In the model tree, expandCOVER.PRT.

14. Select Pattern 1 of Extrude 4,right-click, and select Edit.

15. Edit the number of patternmembers from 6 EXTRUDES to8 EXTRUDES.

16. Select Regenerate from theRegenerate types drop-downmenu in the Operations group.Notice that the number ofReference patterned bolts alsoincreases to 8.



Deleting Patterns or Pattern MembersYou can either delete an entire pattern or disable individualmembers of a pattern.

• Delete — Deletes the pattern andthe feature used to create thepattern.

• Delete pattern — Deletes thepattern but keeps the originalfeature.

• Click the black dots to disablethat particular pattern member.

Figure 1 – Using the Delete Function

Figure 2 – Using the DeletePattern Function

Figure 3 – Disabling IndividualPattern Members

Deleting Patterns or Pattern MembersYou have three options available for deleting patterns or members of apattern:

• Delete the pattern and the original feature — You can select the pattern,right-click, and select Delete to delete the pattern, in addition to the originalfeature used to create the pattern. Note also that any other patterns thatreference this feature are deleted as well. In Figure 1, the extrude featureand pattern are to be deleted. The system indicates that the Referencepattern which consists of the cut and round is also going to be deleted.

• Delete the pattern — You can select the pattern, right-click, and selectDelete Pattern to delete the pattern, leaving the original feature intact, asshown in Figure 2. Note that the Reference pattern which consists of thecut and round is also updated automatically.

• Disable individual members of a pattern or Reference pattern — Whenpreviewing a pattern or Reference pattern, each pattern instance is


represented by a black dot. If any of the pattern preview dots are selected,their display changes to white, which disables that particular member ofthe pattern. To restore the pattern member, click the white dot at any timewhile redefining the pattern. In Figure 3, the second and fourth patternmembers have been disabled. Notice that the Reference pattern hasupdated automatically.


PROCEDURE - Deleting Patterns or Pattern Members


Pattern\Delete DELETE_PATTERN.PRT

Task 1: Delete patterns and disable pattern members.


OVAL_PATTERN, select Delete,and click OK in the Delete dialogbox.

3. Notice that all features aredeleted in addition to all featuresof the REF_PATTERNReferencepattern.

4. Click Undo from the QuickAccess toolbar.

5. Edit the definition ofREF_PATTERN.

6. Click the black dots for members2 and 4 to disable thosemembers.


8. In the model tree, right-clickREF_PATTERN and selectDelete Pattern.

9. In the model tree, right-clickOVAL_PATTERN and selectDelete Pattern. The originalinstance is still intact.


Task 2: Delete and disable additional patterns and pattern members.


2. Edit the definition ofROUND_REF_PATTERN.

3. Click the top black dot for eachpatterned cluster to disable them.


5. In the model tree, right-clickROUND_REF_PATTERN andselect Delete Pattern.

6. Right-click ROUND_1, selectDelete, and click OK in theDelete dialog box.

7. In the model tree, expandPATTERN_OF_AXIS_PATTERN.

8. Edit the definition ofAXIS_PATTERN.

9. Click the top black dot to disablethat member.


11. Edit the definition of PATTERN_OF_AXIS_PATTERN.

12. Click the top, bottom, left, andright center black dots to disablethose cluster members.




Module18Measuring and Inspecting Models

Module OverviewYou can establish a system of units and a density value for the specificmaterial type used in your models. You can then create various types ofanalyses, such as measuring distances, angles, and surface areas. Youcan also calculate mass properties and perform interference checks onassemblies. These analyses can be useful for extracting data from a modelor determining whether the model meets the required design intent.

ObjectivesAfter completing this module, you will be able to:• View and edit model properties.• Investigate model units.• Analyze mass properties.• Use the measure tools and measure summary tool.• Create planar cross-sections.• Measure global interferences.


Viewing and Editing Model PropertiesThere is a consolidated dialog box for all model properties.

Figure 1 – Model Properties Dialog Box

Viewing and Editing Model PropertiesThe Model Properties dialog box provides common locations for viewing andediting model properties in several categories. Each line item in the dialogbox provides basic information at a glance.

Some properties can be expanded by clicking Expand to displayadditional information.

Clicking Info produces a separate information window that provides moredetailed information.To create or edit any of the properties, click the change link in the dialog box.The appropriate dialog box for that property then appears.

You can access several of the model properties listed in this dialogbox through other menus or dialogs.

The following is a list of the properties contained in the Model Propertiesdialog box, which is accessed by clicking File > Prepare > Model Properties.• Materials– Material


– Units– Accuracy– Mass Properties

• Relations, Parameters, and Instances– Relations– Parameters– Instance

• Features and Geometry– Tolerance– Names

• Tools– Flexible– Shrinkage– Simplified Representation– Pro/Program– Interchange

• Model Interfaces– Reference Control

• Detail Options


Investigating Model UnitsYou can specify a model's units.

• Analyses are reported in currentmodel units.

• Units are derived from templates.• You can change units, if desired.– Convert dimensions– Interpret dimensions

Figure 1 – Units Manager

Figure 2 – Converting ModelDimensions Figure 3 – Interpreting Model

Dimensions

Investigating Model UnitsA model's units are typically derived from a specific model template that waschosen when you first began creating a part model. Creo Parametric's defaultsystem of units is English, specifically in_lbm_sec.There are several unit systems available, including:• Centimeter Gram Second (CGS)• Foot Pound Second (FPS)• Inch Pound (mass) Second (IPS)• Inch Pound (force) Second (IPS)• Meter Kilogram Second (MKS)• Millimeter Kilogram Second (mmKs)• Millimeter Newton (force) Second (mmNs)If none of these default unit systems are desirable, you can customize yourown unit system using any combination of units. Any analyses performed ona model are reported in the current model units.You can edit the units used in a model in the Units Manager dialog box, whichis accessed by clicking change in the Units row of the Materials section ofthe Model Properties dialog box. When you switch from one set of units


to another, you must specify how to manage the dimensions. There aretwo different methods:

• Convert dimensions — Enables the model to retain its original size afterthe system of units is modified. The dimension values update accordingly,based on your decision. In Figure 2, the diameter of the socket is 25.4 mm.The system of units is converted from Metric to English, and therefore theEnglish diameter is now 1 in (the same size).

• Interpret dimensions — Enables the model to change size based onthe system of units specified. The dimension values remain the same.In Figure 3, the diameter of the socket is 1 in. The system of units isinterpreted from English to Metric, and therefore the Metric diameter isnow 1 mm (the same value).

The same systems of units are also available for assemblies.


PROCEDURE - Investigating Model Units


Properties\Units MODEL-UNITS.PRT

Task 1: Investigate the model units of a model.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.2. Double-click the outer cylindrical

model surface. Notice the mainouter diameter is 25.4.

3. Click File > Prepare > ModelProperties to open the ModelProperties dialog box.

4. Notice the current unit system forthe model.

5. In the Materials section, clickchange in the Units row.

6. Again, notice the current unitsystem in the Units Managerdialog box and view theDescription.

7. In the Units Manager dialog box,select the Inch lbm Secondsystem of units and click Set.• In the Changing ModelUnits dialog box, select theConvert dimensions option,if necessary.

• Click OK > Close > Close.


8. Click Refit , if necessary, andclick in the background.

9. Double-click the outer cylindricalmodel surface. Notice the mainouter diameter is now 1.

The model is the same size.The diameter changed from25.4 millimeters to 1 inch.

10. Click File > Prepare > ModelProperties.

11. In the Materials section, clickchange in the Units row.

12. In the Units Manager dialog box,select the millimeter KilogramSec system of units and clickSet.

13. In the Changing Model Unitsdialog box, select the Interpretdimensions option and click OK> Close > Close.

14. Click Refit and click in thebackground.

15. Double-click the outer cylindricalmodel surface. Notice the mainouter diameter is still 1.

The model is now muchsmaller. The diameterchanged from 1 inch to 1millimeter.



Analyzing Mass PropertiesYou can calculate a model's mass properties.

• Mass properties include:– Volume– Surface area– Density– Mass– COG

• Analyses require model density.• Density units are the same asmodel units.

• For assemblies, a density for eachcomponent is required.

Figure 1 – Viewing Mass Properties

Figure 2 – Performing a Mass Properties Analysis

Analyzing Mass PropertiesYou can view a model's mass properties within the Materials section of theModel Properties dialog box. You can also calculate the mass properties byselecting the Analysis tab from the ribbon and clicking Mass Properties

from the Model Report group. Before you can calculate accurate massproperties for a model, however, you must define its density. A massproperties calculation is dependent upon the density entered for a givenmodel. If the density is updated for a model and its mass properties arerecalculated, the results update.When the system performs a mass properties analysis, the following massproperty information is calculated:• Volume• Surface Area• Density• Mass• Center of Gravity — The center of gravity (COG) displays on the model asa coordinate system with axes 1, 2, and 3, as shown in Figure 2.


You can also perform mass properties analyses on assemblies. However,you must first configure the density of each part model.

Mass Properties Analysis OptionsThere are three options available when performing a mass propertiesanalysis:

• Quick — Enables you to compute mass properties without saving theanalysis or creating a mass properties feature in the model tree.

• Saved — Enables you to save the mass properties analysis for future use.You can specify a unique name for the analysis so you can easily identify itat a later time. You can retrieve the saved analyses by clicking the Analysistab and clicking Saved Analysis from the Manage group.

• Feature — Enables you to save the mass properties analysis as a featurein the model tree.


PROCEDURE - Analyzing Mass Properties


Properties\Mass-Properties MASS-PROPS.PRT

Task 1: Analyze the mass properties of a model.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.2. Click File > Prepare > Model

Properties.3. In the Model Properties dialog

box, click Expand in theMass Properties row of theMaterials section.

4. Notice that the density isspecified as 3.613e+4.

5. In the Materials section, clickchange in the Mass Propertiesrow.

6. In the Mass Properties dialogbox, edit the Density to .285, thedensity of steel, and click OK.

7. Notice the updated density valuein the Model Properties dialogbox.

8. In the Materials section, clickInfo in the Mass Propertiesrow.

9. Notice the values for volume,surface area, density, mass, andcenter of gravity in the MassProperties Report.

10. Close the Mass PropertiesReport dialog box.

11. Click Close in the ModelProperties dialog box.


Task 2: Analyze the mass properties in an assembly.

1. Click Open from theQuick Access toolbar, selectVALVE.ASM, and click Open.

2. In the ribbon, select the Analysistab and select Mass Properties

from the Mass Propertiestypes drop-down menu in theModel Report group.

3. Click Preview Analysis inthe Mass Properties dialog box.

4. Notice the values for volume,surface area, density, mass, andcenter of gravity.

5. Notice the center of gravity 1-2-3coordinate system location.

6. Click Accept in the MassProperties dialog box.



Using the Measure ToolsYou can make several types of measurements on models.

• Measurements include:– Length– Distance– Angle– Diameter– Area– Volume– Transform

Figure 1 – Measuring Length

Figure 2 – Measuring Distance Figure 3 – Measuring an Angle

Using the Measure ToolsYou can make several types of measurements on models. Use either of thefollowing workflows for measure tools:• Start the desired measurement tool and then select references.• Select references and then start the desired measurement tool. Thisworkflow enables you to use advanced chain or surface selection.

Regardless of workflow, the references remain selected, and you can togglebetween the various measure tools to view the different measurement results.Press CTRL to select multiple references for a measure tool. The toolprovides cumulative results based on the selected measurement type.Measurement results display in the graphics window within on-screen panels.You can drag these panels as well as collapse them. You can restore anycollapsed panel by clicking its on-screen icon.You can also view measurement results by expanding the Results area ofthe Measure dialog box. You can copy and paste the contents of this Resultstable to other programs such as spreadsheet applications.

Measurement Tool TypesThe following measure tool types are available:• Length – Measures the length of a selected edge or curve. PressingCTRL and selecting multiple curves or edges also calculates a cumulativelength measurement. Selecting a surface reference calculates either theperimeter total for all loops in the surface or the external perimeter for onlythe outer loop. Selecting multiple surface references calculates either the


cumulative perimeter total for all loops of all surfaces or the cumulativeexternal perimeter for only the outer loops of all surfaces.

• Distance – Measures the distance between two selected references. Youcan optionally provide a projection reference or measure the maximumdistance between references. You can also use a cylindrical surfacereference as an axis.

• Angle – Measures the angle between two selected references. You canspecify a measurement range of +/-180 degrees or 0-360 degrees. Youcan also specify the desired angle type you wish to measure, includingMain, Supplement, Conjugate, and Second Conjugate.

• Diameter – Measures both the diameter and radius of a selected surfaceor edge reference. You can also select a point reference on a non-ruledsurface to measure the radius at that selected point.

• Area – Measures the area of a selected surface reference. Optionally, youcan specify a projection reference. You can also select multiple surfacereferences and measure a cumulative area measurement. Selecting themodel measures the total model surface area.

• Volume – Measures the volume of a model. You can also measure thevolume on either side of a selected plane.

• Transform – Generates a transform matrix between two coordinate systemreferences, consisting of the X, Y, and Z distances between the coordinatesystem references.

Measurement OptionsWithin the Measure dialog box, you can edit various options by clickingMeasure Options . The following options are available:

• Units by Model – Units are the same as those of the model.• Length Units – Specify the desired length units from a drop-down list.• Angular Units – Specify the desired angular units from a drop-down list.• Decimal Places – Specify the number of decimal places displayed formeasurements.

• Show Feature Tab – Displays the Feature tab in the Measure dialog box,enabling you to specify regeneration order as well as create parametersfor a given measurement.

• Save Type – Enables you to specify the default option that is selectedwhen saving the measurement. Options include:– Analysis – Enables you to save the measurement for future use. You

can specify a unique name for the measurement analysis so you caneasily identify it at a later time. You can retrieve the saved analysis byclicking Saved Analysis from the Manage group in the Analysis tab.

– Feature – Enables you to save the measurement as a feature in themodel tree.

– Latest – Enables you to save the measurement the same way as thepreviously saved measurement.

• Panel display – You can toggle panels to either hide or display them inthe graphics window. You can also toggle panels by collapsing them orexpanding them.


PROCEDURE - Using the Measure Tools


Analysis\Measure MEASURE.PRT

Task 1: Measure the length of edges and surfaces.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.2. In the ribbon, select the Analysis

tab.

3. Select Length from theMeasure types drop-down menuin the Measure group.

4. Select the diagonal edge.

5. Press CTRL and select the twoadjacent edges.

6. Click the first panel to expandit, and drag the panels asnecessary.

7. Expand the Results section inthe Measure dialog box.

8. Notice the individual values forall three lengths, as well as thesum total of all references.

9. Right-click the model and selectClear.

10. Select the top, right surface.11. Notice the perimeter values.12. Press CTRL and select the top,

left surface.13. Notice the five values in the

Results section.14. In the graphics window, expand

the first panel and drag it asnecessary.

15. Close the Measure dialog box.


Task 2: Measure the distance between vertices, edges, and surfaces.

1. In the ribbon, select Distancefrom the Measure types

drop-down menu in the Measuregroup.

2. Select the front, right vertex.3. Press CTRL and select the rear,

right-most vertex.4. In the Measure dialog box, click

in the Projection collector andselect datum plane FRONT.

5. In the Projection collector,right-click and select Remove.

6. In the Measure dialog box,right-click the second vertexreference and select Remove.

7. Press CTRL and select the rearedge.

8. In the Measure dialog box,select the Measure maximumdistance check box.

9. Clear the Measure maximumdistance check box.

10. In the Measure dialog box, selectthe Use as Line check box.

11. Right-click the vertex referencein the dialog box and selectRemove.


12. Press CTRL and select the frontcylindrical surface.

13. In the Measure dialog box, clearthe Use as Axis check box.• Clear the Use as Line checkbox.

14. Notice the result is the closestdiagonal distance.

15. Orient to the TOP vieworientation.

16. In the Measure dialog box, selectthe Use as Axis check box.

17. In the Measure dialog box, selectthe Use as Line check box.

18. In the Measure dialog box,select the Measure maximumdistance check box.

19. Close the Measure dialog box.20. Press CTRL+D.

Task 3: Measure the angle between surfaces and edges.

1. In the ribbon, select Anglefrom the Measure types

drop-down menu in the Measuregroup.

2. Select the front, left surface.3. Press CTRL and select the right,

front surface.


4. In the Measure dialog box,select 0–360 from the Rangedrop-down list, if necessary.• Select Supplement from theAngle drop-down list andnotice the angle.

5. In the Measure dialog box,select Conjugate from the Angledrop-down list and notice theangle.

6. In the Measure dialog box, selectSecond Conjugate from theAngle drop-down list and noticethe angle.

7. Select Main from the Angledrop-down list.

8. In the Measure dialog box,select +/-180 from the Rangedrop-down list.• Select Supplement from theAngle drop-down list andnotice the angle.

9. In the Measure dialog box,select Conjugate from the Angledrop-down list and notice theangle.

10. In the Measure dialog box, selectSecond Conjugate from theAngle drop-down list and noticethe angle.

11. Select Main from the Angledrop-down list.

12. Leave the dialog box open.


Task 4: Measure the diameter and radius of surfaces and edges.

1. In the Measure dialog box, click Diameter .2. Notice that the references are automatically removed due to the

different measurement type.

3. Select the front, cylindricalsurface.

4. Notice the diameter and radiusvalues.

5. Press CTRL and query-selectthe rear hole edge.

6. Notice the diameter and radiusvalues.

7. Expand the panels and dragthem as necessary.


9. Leave the dialog box open.

Task 5: Measure the area of surfaces.

1. In the Measure dialog box, clickArea .


3. Select the top, right surface.4. Press CTRL and select the top,

left surface.5. Expand the first panel and drag

both as necessary.

6. Select the top, angled surface.7. In the Measure dialog box, click

in the Projection collector.8. Select datum plane TOP.9. Right-click the Projection

collector and select Remove.10. Leave the dialog box open.


Task 6: Measure the volume of a model.

1. In the Measure dialog box, clickVolume .

2. Select the model from the modeltree.

3. In the Measure dialog box, clickin the Plane collector and selectdatum plane RIGHT.

4. Click the arrow in the graphicswindow to flip the volumedirection.




Using the Measure Summary ToolThe Summary measure tool provides all applicable measurementresults based on the references selected.

• Multiple references yields the sumtotal of applicable measurements.– Distance between references is

also provided.– Individual reference results

panels are collapsed by default.• Toggle between the Measure tooland other individual measure tools.– Selected references are

retained.

Figure 1 – Summary Measurementusing Vertex References

Figure 2 – Summary Measurementusing Edge References

Figure 3 – Summary Measurementusing Surface References

Using the Measure Summary ToolThe Summary measure tool is similar to any of the other individualmeasure tools. However, the Summary measure tool provides resultsfor all measurements based on the references selected. Pressing CTRLand selecting multiple references yields the sum total of the applicablemeasurements as well as the distance between those references. Forexample, in Figure 3, the two surfaces are selected as references, and thesystem provides the sum total results for measurements relative to surfacesincluding angle, area, and perimeter, as well as the distance between thosetwo surfaces.When specifying multiple references, the system automatically collapses themeasurement results for the individual references. However, you can alwaysexpand these collapsed panels. Within the Measure dialog box you canselect the individual measure tools after measuring a summary, and thenswitch back to the Summary tool, still retaining the references.


PROCEDURE - Using the Measure Summary Tool


Analysis\Measure-Summary MEASURE.PRT

Task 1: Use the measure summary tool on a variety of geometry types.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.2. In the ribbon, select the Analysis

tab.

3. Select Summary from theMeasure types drop-down menuin the Measure group.

4. Select the rear vertex.

5. Press CTRL and select the frontvertex.

6. Expand the panels and arrangethem as necessary.

7. In the Measure dialog box,expand the Results section.

8. Right-click in the graphicswindow and select Clear.


10. Expand the panels and arrangethem as necessary.


11. Leaving the edge references selected, click Length in theMeasure dialog box.

• Click Distance .• Click Angle .

12. Notice that only the selected measure tool’s information is displayedeach time.

13. Click Summary .14. Right-click in the graphics window and select Clear.


16. In the Measure dialog box, clearthe Use as Plane check boxesfor both references.

17. Leaving the edge references selected, right-click and select Measure> Length.

18. Right-click and select Measure > Angle.19. Right-click and select Measure > Area.20. Notice that only the selected measure tool’s information is displayed

each time.21. Right-click and select Measure > Summary.22. Right-click in the graphics window and select Clear.

23. Select MEASURE.PRT from themodel tree.




Creating Planar Part Cross-SectionsYou can create planar cross-sections in a 3-D model.

• Available types:– Planar– X Direction– Y Direction– Z Direction

• Cross-section options• Edit cross-section hatching• Display management:– Show Section– Activate/Deactivate Figure 1 – Planar Cross-Section

Figure 2 – Z Direction Cross-Sectionwith Filled Surface

Figure 3 – X DirectionCross-Section with Modified

Hatching

Creating Planar Part Cross-SectionsYou can create new planar part cross-sections in a 3-D model. The followingplanar cross-section types are available:• Planar — Enables you to select a planar surface or datum plane to create across-section through.

• X Direction — Creates a planar cross-section with the normal pointingalong the model’s default coordinate system X-axis.

• Y Direction — Creates a planar cross-section with the normal pointingalong the model’s default coordinate system Y-axis.

• Z Direction — Creates a planar cross-section with the normal pointingalong the model’s default coordinate system Z-axis.

These cross-section types are created using the Section dashboard. You canaccess the Section dashboard from either the Section types drop-down menuin the Model Display group of the View ribbon tab, or from the Sections tabof the view manager.New cross-sections are given the default names of XSEC0001, XSEC0002,and so on. You can always rename a cross-section either during or aftercreation, similar to any feature. You can also redefine cross-sections or


manage their display using either the Sections node in the model tree or theSections tab in the view manager.

Cross-Section OptionsThe following are various cross-section creation options available in theSection dashboard:

• Distance from plane — Enables you to type a distance to offset thecross-section from the specified reference. You can also dynamically dragthe cross-section in the graphics window.

• Direction from plane — Enables you to flip the direction from the specifiedreference that the cross-section is offset.

• Cap section — Enables you to cap the surface of the cross-section.• Fill surface color — Enables you to fill the capped surface with a specifiedcolor. This option is only available if the cross-section is capped.

• Enable hatching — Enables you to toggle the cross-section’s hatch patternon or off.

• 3D Dragger — Similar to Assembly mode, you can enable the 3D Draggerand use it to translate or rotate the cross-section about the three axes.

• View 2-D section in separate window — Enables you to display the 2-Dcross-section in a separate window.

Editing Cross-Section HatchingIf the hatch pattern is enabled for a given cross-section, you can edit thehatching either from the Sections node in the model tree or from the viewmanager. When editing the hatch pattern, the Edit Hatching dialog boxdisplays with the following options:

• Pattern — Enables you to edit the hatch pattern used. You can selectfrom a default library of ANSI or ISO hatch patterns, or choose from auser-defined library hatch pattern.

• Angle — Enables you to specify the angle to orient the hatch pattern.• Scale — Enables you to size the pattern. You can type a value, or use thetwo options to either halve or double the existing hatch spacing.

• Color — Enables you to modify the color that the hatch pattern displays inthe graphics window.

Cross-Section Display ManagementYou can manage the display of a given cross-section from the Sections nodein the model tree, from the view manager, or by selecting the cross-section inthe graphics window. The following right-click options are available:

• Show Section — Enables you to enable or disable the cross-section withinthe graphics window. This option enables or disables both the sectionitself and the hatch pattern.

• Activate/Deactivate — Activates or deactivates cut on the geometry basedon the cross-section.


PROCEDURE - Creating Planar Part Cross-Sections


View\Cross-Section_Part-Planar SECTIONS.PRT

Task 1: Create default X, Y, and Z cross-sections.


tab.

3. Select X Direction from theSection types drop-down menu.

4. In the graphics window, dragthe section offset to the rightapproximately 15.

5. Drag the section offset back to 0.

6. In the dashboard, click HatchPattern .


8. In the model tree, locatecross-section XSEC0001.

9. Right-click and select EditHatching.• Edit the Angle to 45 and pressENTER.

• Click Halve Hatch Size .• Click Apply and close the EditHatching dialog box.

10. In the model tree, right-clickXSEC0001 and selectDeactivate.• Right-click and select ShowSection to toggle it off.

11. Click in the graphics windowbackground to de-select allgeometry.


12. Select Y Direction from theSection types drop-down menu.

13. In the graphics window, edit thesection offset to 10.

14. Notice the hidden hole profile isnow visible.

15. In the dashboard, click 2D View.

16. In the 2D Section Viewer dialogbox, click Rotate Right ifnecessary.

17. Click Complete Feature .18. Right-click and select

Deactivate.

19. Select Z Direction from theSection types drop-down menu.

20. In the dashboard, click CapSection to toggle it off.

21. Click Cap Section to toggleit on.

22. In the dashboard, click Fill

Surface and select thedarkest red color.

23. Click Complete Feature .24. Right-click and select

Deactivate.

Task 2: Create and pattern a cross-section based on a selected plane.

1. Select Planar from theSection types drop-down menu.

2. Select the surface on the right.3. Edit the offset to -12 and press

ENTER.4. In the dashboard, click Hatch

Pattern .5. Click Complete Feature .


6. With the section still selected, right-click and select Pattern.7. Select the same surface on the right.

8. In the dashboard, click Flip First Direction .• Edit the quantity to 5.• Edit the spacing to 12.


10. In the model tree, expand thePattern feature.• Select XSEC0004, pressCTRL, and select theremaining four patternedsections.

• Right-click and select ShowSection.

11. Orient to the 3D view orientation.

Task 3: Investigate cross-sections from the view manager.


2. In the view manager, select theSections tab.• Click New and view theavailable options.

• Right-click on XSEC0001 andnotice the available options.

• Click Close.



Measuring Global InterferenceYou can calculate interferences between components in anassembly.

Figure 1 – Viewing Exact GlobalInterference Computation

• Setup:– Parts only– Sub-assembly only

• Computation type:– Exact– Quick

• Interference pairs:– Highlighted in the model– Volume can be

calculated

Figure 2 – Viewing Quick GlobalInterference Computation

Measuring Global InterferenceYou can calculate interferences between components in an assembly. Thereare two different setup options available when computing global interference:

• Parts only — Interference is checked between all parts, regardless of whichsub-assembly, if any, to which they belong.

• Sub-assembly only — Interference is checked between all sub-assembliesin the top level assembly without determining whether individual partswithin the sub-assembly interfere.

When components interfere, the geometry of one part is embedded in anotherpart. The system displays the interference between these two componentsas a pair in the Global Interference dialog box. Selecting the interfering pairin the dialog box causes the components to highlight in the graphics window,as shown in the figures. There are two different computational methodsavailable for computing interferences:

• Exact — When selecting the interfering pair, in addition to highlightingthe interfering components, the system also highlights the interferingvolume shared between the two components. In addition, the volume ofinterference is calculated and displayed in the dialog box, as shown inFigure 1.

• Quick — When selecting the interfering pair, in addition to highlighting theinterfering components, the system highlights the approximate interfering


volume with a plus symbol (+) in the graphics window, as shown in Figure2. The volume of interference is not calculated.

Analysis OptionsThere are three options available when computing global interference onmodels:

• Quick — Enables you to compute global interference without saving theanalysis or creating a feature in the model tree.

• Saved — Enables you to save the analysis for future use. You can specifya unique name for the global interference analysis so you can easilyidentify it at a later time. You can retrieve the saved analyses by selectingthe Analysis tab from the ribbon and clicking Saved Analysis from theManage group.

• Feature — Enables you to save the global interference analysis as afeature in the model tree.


PROCEDURE - Measuring Global Interference


Analysis\Global-Interference INTERFERENCE.ASM

Task 1: Measure global interferences in an assembly.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.2. From the ribbon, select the

Analysis tab.3. In the Inspect Geometry group,

select Global Interferencefrom the Global Interferencetypes drop-down menu.

4. Click Preview Analysis inthe Global Interference dialogbox.• Notice the four interferingpairs. Select each pair to viewthe highlighting, and notice thevolume of interference.

• Click Accept .

5. Click Settings and selectTree Filters.


7. In the model tree, right-clickBODY.PRT and select Activate.• Expand BODY.PRT andexpand the second Pattern(Hole).

• Edit the diameter of Hole id299 from 3 to 4, and clickRegenerate .


8. In the model tree, right-clickINTERFERENCE.ASM andselect Activate.

9. Select the Analysis tab.

10. Click Global Interferencefrom the Inspect Geometrygroup.

11. Click Preview Analysis .• Notice that there is only oneinterference pair.

• Click Accept .

12. In the model tree, right-clickBODY.PRT and select Activate.• Edit the diameter of Hole id37 from 49 to 51, and clickRegenerate .

13. In the model tree, right-clickINTERFERENCE.ASM andselect Activate.

14. Select the Analysis tab.

15. Click Global Interferencefrom the Inspect Geometrygroup.

16. Click Preview Analysis .• Notice that there are now nointerfering parts, as shown inthe Message Log.

• Click Accept .




Module19Assembling with Constraints

Module OverviewMost commercial product designs consist of numerous components.Creo Parametric enables you to create an assembly, into which you canassemble multiple components. Constraints locate the components withinthe assembly, both manually and automatically.

ObjectivesAfter completing this module, you will be able to:• Understand assembly and constraint theory and create new assemblymodels.

• Understand assembly constraint status and analyze basic componentorientation.

• Assemble components using the Default constraint and Automatic option.• Create coincident constraints using geometry.• Create coincident constraints using datum features.• Create distance constraints.• Create parallel, normal, and angle constraints.• Use the accessory window to assemble components.


Understanding Assembly TheoryAn assembly is a collection of parts and other sub-assembliesthat you combine using constraints.

• Create assembly models from standardized templates.• Capture assembly design intent using constraints.• Create assembly constraints.

Figure 1 – An Assembly Model is Comprised of Parts

Understanding Assembly TheoryThere are multiple methods to assemble components using Creo Parametric.Assembling components with constraints is one of the primary methods usedto create Creo Parametric assemblies.

Like part models, all new assembly models share several characteristics incommon. By creating your assembly models from standardized templates,you save time by avoiding the need to repeatedly define company standardinformation. This standard template enables all engineers to have aconsistent starting point. After you create and name the new assembly,you can begin adding parts to it. Assemblies contain design intent in thesame way that part models contain design intent. Assembly design intent isbased upon which component is assembled first, and the constraints thatyou use during the assembly process. Design intent is important because itensures that your assembly updates in a predictable manner when editedand regenerated.

Sub-assemblies share all of the same characteristics as assemblies. Infact, a sub-assembly is nothing more than an assembly that is assembledinto another assembly.

Creo Parametric provides several types of constraints, such as Coincident,Distance, Parallel, Normal, and Angle. To easily utilize these constraints,select the Automatic option to enable Creo Parametric to automatically


determine the constraint type based upon the orientation and position of thecomponent and the references you select.

Every assembled component contains a Placement node in themodel tree that you can expand to view the constraints used in thatcomponent's placement. You must enable the Placement folderfilter to view this node.

Assembling with component interfaces is the second method available forassembling components. This method is especially useful when assemblingcommon components because it can significantly reduce the numberof selections that you make when constraining a component. By usingcomponent interfaces, you save the referenced interfaces on the commonpart. Then, when you place the common part, you only need to select theassembly references.


Creating New Assembly ModelsYour company can create customized templates that you canuse to create new assembly models.

• Create new assemblies in theNew dialog box.

• Use customized assemblytemplates.

• Assembly templates include:– Datums– Units– Parameters– Layers– View Orientations

Figure 2 – Examples ofParameters

Figure 1 – New Assembly Created usingTemplate

Figure 3 – Layers Created fromAssembly Template

Creating New AssembliesAssemblies are composed of parts and other sub-assemblies that youcombine. You can create new assembly models within Creo Parametric eitherby clicking File > New, or by clicking New . You can type the name of theassembly and select whether you want to use a default template. Unless youselect the Empty template, the new assembly displays in the graphics windowwith the default datum features associated with the selected template.

Using TemplatesNew assemblies should be created using a template. Assembly templatesare similar to part templates in that they enable you to create a new assemblywith predefined general information. Your company has most likely createdcustomized templates to use that contain your company's standards. Usinga template to create a new assembly is beneficial because it ensures that


regardless of who created it, the assembly contains the same consistentset of information, including:

• Datums — Most templates contain a set of default datum planes anddefault coordinate system, all named appropriately.

• Units — Most companies have a company standard for units in theirassemblies. Creating every assembly with the same set of units ensuresthat mistakes are not made.

• Parameters — Every assembly can contain the same standard metadatainformation.

• Layers — When every assembly contains the same layers, it is easier tomanage both the layers and items on them.

• View Orientations — Ensuring that every assembly contains the samestandard view orientations aids the modeling process.

Viewing and Creating ParametersParameters are metadata information that can be included in an assemblytemplate or created by a user in his or her own part or assembly. Parametersare important because they enable you to add additional information to partand assembly models. Parameters can have several uses:

• Parameters can drive dimension values through relations, or be drivenby relations.

• Parameters can be used as a column in a family table. For example, theparameter Cost might have a different value for each instance.

• Parameter values can be reported in Drawings, or viewed with datamanagement tools such as Pro/INTRALINK or Windchill solutions.

• User parameters can be added at the model level (part, assembly, orcomponent) or to a feature or pattern.

You can view an assembly’s parameters and create new ones by clickingParameters from the Model Intent group in the Model ribbon tab.

You can create parameters that accept the following types of values:

• Real Number — Any numerical value. For example 25.5, 1.666667,10.5E3, and PI.

• Integer — Any whole number. For example 1, 5, and 257.• String — Any consecutive sequence of alphanumeric characters (lettersor numbers).

• Yes/No — Accepts either the YES or NO value.


PROCEDURE - Creating New Assembly Models


File\New_Assembly CREATE NEW

Task 1: Create a new assembly by selecting a template.

1. Without an open model, noticeonly the Home tab displays inthe ribbon.

2. Click New from the QuickAccess toolbar.• Select Assembly as the Typeand Design as the Sub-type.

• Edit the Name tonew_assembly.



dialog box, select themmks_asm_design template.• Click OK.



Settings and select TreeFilters.• In the Model Tree Items dialogbox, select the Featurescheck box and click OK.

6. Explore the default datumfeatures created in the graphicswindow and model tree.


7. Notice that the ribbon haspopulated with tabs specific tothe type of open file.

8. In the model tree, click Show and select Layer Tree. Noticethe default layers.

9. Click File > Prepare > ModelProperties to open the ModelProperties dialog box.


12. Click Parameters from the Model Intent group.13. In the Parameters dialog box, click in the Description parameter

Value field.• Edit the value to NEW ASSEMBLY and press ENTER.• Click New Parameter and edit the Name to PURCHASED.• Edit the Type to Yes No and notice the default Value of NO.• Click New Parameter and edit the Name to ASSY_NUMBER.• Edit the parameter type to Integer.• Click in the Value field and edit the number to 596289.• Click OK.

14. Click Named Views . Noticethe default view orientations.

15. Click Named Views againto close it.


Task 2: Create a new assembly by selecting a different template.

1. Click New from the QuickAccess toolbar.• Select Assembly as the Typeand Design as the Sub-type.

• Edit the Name toselect_template.



dialog box, select theinlbs_asm_design templateand click OK.

3. Again, notice the datum features.

4. Click File > Prepare > ModelProperties.




Understanding Constraint TheoryConstraints determine how a part is located in an assembly.

• Most constraints are appliedbetween parts within anassembly.– Select component reference.– Select assembly reference.

• Constraints are added one at atime.

• The box of the active constraintis highlighted.

• Double-click a constraint's tag tomodify it.

Figure 1 – Selecting PlacementReferences

Figure 2 – Viewing the ActiveConstraint

Figure 3 – Modifying a Constraint

Understanding Constraint TheoryYou can assemble components using constraints. Constraints determinehow a part is located within an assembly. There are many different types ofconstraints that you can use to assemble components.

Most constraints are applied between parts within an assembly. They specifythe relative position of a pair of references. The system adds constraintsone at a time. Use placement constraints in combinations to specify bothplacement and orientation. It is important to select your constraints based onthe design intent of your assembly, so that when you edit a dimension on apart, the assembly reacts as predicted.

When you create a constraint, its references highlight on the models and theConstraint Type displays. For most constraints, it is necessary that you selecttwo references, a component reference on the component being placed, andan assembly reference from an item in the assembly. When the first referencehas been selected, a green, dashed line connects the first selected referenceto your cursor until you select the second reference, as shown in Figure 1.

When multiple constraints are created, a box surrounding the activeconstraint highlights. For example, in Figure 2, the Oriented constraint isthe active constraint. To activate a different constraint, simply select the


displayed name or select it from the Placement tab in the dashboard. Youcan then right-click to perform a desired action.

You can also double-click a constraint's tag in the graphics window to editthe constraint, as shown in Figure 3. Editing options include switching theconstraint type, changing the constraint orientation, and viewing as well asdeleting the constraint's placement references.

You can toggle Constraints To Connections in the dashboard to convertexisting connections to constraints within an assembly.


Understanding Assembly Constraint StatusIdeally, when you complete a component's placement, it shouldbe at a Fully Constrained status.

• Range of assembly constraint status:– No Constraints– Partially Constrained

♦ Packaged– Fully Constrained– Constraints Invalid

• The system can also AllowAssumptions to facilitate componentplacement.

Figure 1 – No Constraints

Figure 2 – Range of Assembly Constraint Status

Understanding Assembly Constraint StatusYou can assemble a component into an assembly by using placementconstraints. Constraints determine how a part is located within an assembly.As constraints are added, a component becomes further and furtherconstrained and progresses through a range of constraint statuses whichdisplay in the dashboard. The constraint status range includes:

• No Constraints — No constraints have been added to the component beingassembled, as shown in Figure 1. The preview color of components havingno constraints is purple.

• Partially Constrained — At least one constraint has been applied to thecomponent being assembled, but not enough constraints have been addedto render the component fully constrained. That is, the orientation of thecomponent can still be changed, so its position is open to interpretation.


The left-most image in Figure 2 shows the component Partially Constrained.The preview color of partially constrained components is purple.

• Fully Constrained — Enough constraints have been applied to thecomponent being assembled that it cannot move. Ideally, when youcomplete the component placement, the component should be fullyconstrained. The right-most image in Figure 2 is Fully Constrained. Thepreview color of fully constrained components changes to orange.

• Constraints Invalid — Two constraints conflict with how they are trying toplace the component in the assembly. If this condition arises, you must editor delete one or more constraints to eliminate the conflict.

Allowing AssumptionsThe Allow Assumptions option can become available when placing acomponent in an assembly. When this option is selected, the system makesadditional constraint assumptions to help fully constrain the component. If youclear this check box, the system returns the status to Partially Constrained.If you properly further constrain a component that is fully constrained withAllow Assumptions enabled, the Allow Assumptions option disappears andappears as Fully Constrained, as there is no longer a need for the systemto make assumptions. The middle image in Figure 2 is Fully Constrained aslong as the Allow Assumptions option is enabled. If the Allow Assumptionscheck box is cleared, the component is no longer Fully Constrained, as it canrotate. Either an additional constraint would need to be added or the AllowAssumptions check box would need to be selected.

Leaving Components PackagedIf you complete the component placement when the status reads PartiallyConstrained, the Message Log alerts you that the system leaves thecomponent packaged only. An open square symbol also displays in themodel tree next to the packaged component. You can drag components thatare packaged based on their partial constraints.


Assembling Components using the DefaultConstraintIt is standard practice to assemble the first component of anassembly using the Default constraint.

• Benefits of using the Defaultconstraint:– No references are specified.– No parent/child relationships

are created.• You can also assemblesub-assemblies using the Defaultconstraint.

Figure 1 – Assembling Componentusing Default Constraint

Figure 2 – Completed ComponentPlacement

Figure 3 – Assembling aSub-Assembly

Assembling Components using the Default ConstraintThe Default constraint enables you to align the internal system-createdcoordinate system of the component to the internal system-createdcoordinate system of the assembly. The system places the component atthe assembly origin. Because the internal system coordinate system is used,no references are specified, and no parent-child references are created. Itis a standard practice to assemble the initial assembly component using aDefault constraint, as shown in Figure 2.

You can also assemble sub-assemblies using the Default constraint. Similarto individual components, assembling a sub-assembly using the Defaultconstraint creates no parent-child references.


PROCEDURE - Assembling Components using theDefault Constraint


Assembly\Default DEFAULT_CONST.ASM

Task 1: Assemble BODY.PRT using the Default constraint.


2. Select Assemble fromthe Assemble types drop-downmenu in the Component group.

3. In the Open dialog box, selectcomponent BODY.PRT and clickOpen.

4. Notice the component is purple.Notice also in the dashboard thatthe constraint STATUS says NoConstraints.

5. In the dashboard, select Defaultfrom the Constraint Type

drop-down list.6. Notice that the constraint

STATUS now reads FullyConstrained.

7. Notice the component is noworange.

8. Click Complete Component .9. Notice that the color is now the

actual component color.





12. View the model tree and noticethe assembled component.

Task 2: Assemble sub-assembly SUB.ASM using the Default constraint.

1. Click Assemble .2. In the Open dialog box, select

component SUB.ASM and clickOpen.

3. Right-click and select DefaultConstraint.

4. Click Complete Component .

5. Expand SUB.ASM in the modeltree.



Orienting ComponentsYou can reorient a component with respect to the assemblyduring placement.

• 3D Dragger– Rotate and translate about

the three axes.– Move in 2-D plane.– Free move.– 3D Dragger portions gray out

as degrees of freedom arereduced through constraints.

• Press CTRL+ALT and click,right-click, or middle-click. Figure 1 – Default Position

Figure 2 – Orienting AroundRed and Blue Axes

Figure 3 – Component Positionedon Top of Model

Orienting ComponentsWhen assembling a component, you can reorient it with respect to theassembly. Reorienting the component closer to its assembly location aids inthe component’s assembly by enabling you to more easily select references.When you select the Automatic option, the system is able to more easilydetermine the correct placement constraints to use.

You can reorient the component according to the applied constraints. Asconstraints are applied, the degrees of freedom are reduced, further limitingthe movement of the component.

Using the 3D DraggerThe 3D Dragger is the primary method you can use to orient components.The 3D Dragger is a dynamically changing graphical interface that displaysover any component being assembled. You can use the 3D Dragger to orientnew components as follows:


• Rotate components about the three axes — Click and drag around theshaded arcs to rotate the component about that specific axis.

• Translate components along the three axes — Click and drag along theshaded arrows to translate the component along that specific axis.

• Move components in a 2-D plane — Click and drag in the translucentshaded quadrant to move the component within that 2-D plane.

• Free move the components — Click and drag on the small central sphereat the origin of the axes.

As you create constraints, portions of the 3D Dragger are grayed out, asthe degrees of freedom are reduced. For example, if a constraint is appliedthat prohibits component movement along a certain axis, that 3D Draggeraxis becomes grayed out since the component cannot move in that degreeof freedom.

Using Keyboard ShortcutsYou can also use the following keyboard shortcuts to orient new components:

Operation Keyboard and MouseSelection

Pan

+ +

Spin

+ +

Component Drag — Drags the componentbased on existing constraints, which is the

same as the Drag Components . Usethis functionality when you have createdconstraints and wish to their movementwith remaining degrees of freedom.

+ +

Dragging Components Along GeometryYou can also drag components along specified geometry by right-clicking the3D Dragger and selecting the Drag along geometry check box. You can thenselect geometry, and the 3D Dragger appears over the selected geometrywith the available degrees of freedom based on the geometry selection.These degrees of freedom change based on whether you select a cylinder,plane, or other geometry shapes. This functionality is similar to the Movetab in the dashboard.


PROCEDURE - Orienting Components


Assembly\Component_Orient COMP_ORIENT.ASM

Task 1: Use the 3D Dragger and component placement controls.



3. In the Open dialog box, selectcomponent SHAFT.PRT andclick Open.

4. Notice the 3D Dragger whichappears over the component.

5. Rotate the model 90 degrees bydragging the red arc.

6. Rotate the model 180 degreesby dragging the blue arc.

7. Drag the model forward alongthe green axis.


8. Position the component bydragging the location sphere.

9. Press CTRL+ALT and right-clickto pan the component.

10. Press CTRL+ALT andmiddle-click to spin thecomponent.

11. Return the component back tothe location shown.

Task 2: Drag components along existing geometry.

1. Right-click the 3D Dragger andselect the Drag along geometrycheck box to enable it.

2. Select an edge on the componentas shown.

3. Rotate and drag the componentalong the available 3D Draggeraxes.


4. Select an alternate referencesurface.

5. Rotate and drag the componentalong the available 3D Draggeraxes.

6. Right-click the 3D Dragger andclear the Drag along geometrycheck box.

7. Click Complete Componentfrom the dashboard.



Creating Coincident Constraints using GeometryUse the Coincident constraint to position two cylindricalsurfaces coaxial or two planar surfaces coincident.

• Cylindrical/Conical surfaces:– Surfaces are inserted, resulting

in coincident axes.– The surfaces do not need to be

the same diameter.• Planar surfaces:– Surfaces are made coincident

to each other.– You can toggle the constraint

orientation to mate or alignsurfaces.

Figure 1 – Selecting CylindricalSurfaces - Axes to be Coincident

Figure 2 – Selecting Planar Surfacesto be Coincident

Figure 3 – Selecting AlternatePlanar Surfaces to be Coincident

Creating Coincident Constraints using Cylindrical or ConicalSurfacesThe Coincident constraint enables you to insert one cylindrical or conicalsurface into another cylindrical or conical surface, making their respectiveaxes coaxial. For example, you can create a Coincident constraint to matcha shaft to a hole, as shown in Figure 1. This constraint is especially usefulwhen axes are unavailable or inconvenient for selection. Remember that theCoincident constraint only constrains the rounded surfaces coaxial, and doesnot “slide” one component into another. Because the two specified surfacesare constrained coaxial, they do not need to be the same diameter.

Creating Coincident Constraints using Planar SurfacesThe Coincident constraint also enables you to position two specified planarsurfaces to lie in the same plane (coplanar), and either face each other orface in the same direction, as shown in Figures 2 and 3, respectively. Youcan select the Change Constraint Orientation option in the dashboard


to rotate the surfaces so that their normals switch from facing each other tofacing in the same direction, and vice-versa.

When planar surfaces of components are assembled coincident to oneanother, it is the same as assigning an offset value of zero, except that anoffset value is not created for editing. The components can be positioned inany location as long as the two specified surface normals either face eachother or face the same direction.


PROCEDURE - Creating Coincident Constraints usingGeometry


Assembly\Coincident_Geometry COINCIDENT_1.ASM

Task 1: Assemble the SHAFT.PRT using Coincident constraints.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.2. Edit the definition of SHAFT.PRT.3. In the dashboard, select

Coincident as theConstraint Type.

4. Constrain the SHAFT.PRTsurface coincident to theBODY.PRT hole cylindricalsurface.

5. In the dashboard, select thePlacement tab.• Click New Constraint.• Select Coincident as theConstraint Type.

6. Constrain the SHAFT.PRT topsurface coincident to the topBODY.PRT surface.

7. In the Placement tab, click Flip.• Click Flip again.


8. In the Placement tab, right-clickthe second Coincident constraintand select Delete.• Drag the SHAFT.PRTupwards.

• Click New Constraint.• Select Coincident as theConstraint Type.

9. Constrain the SHAFT.PRTbottom surface coincident to theinner BODY.PRT surface.

10. Click Complete Componentin the dashboard.

Task 2: Assemble the COVER.PRT using Coincident constraints.


2. In the Open dialog box, selectcomponent COVER.PRT andclick Open.

3. Reorient the COVER.PRTapproximately as shown.

4. In the dashboard, selectCoincident as theConstraint Type.

5. Constrain the COVER.PRT innerdiameter coincident to the innerBODY.PRT diameter.

6. In the dashboard, select thePlacement tab.• Click New Constraint.• Select Coincident as theConstraint Type.

7. Constrain the COVER.PRT holecoincident to the BODY.PRThole.

In this situation, the systemmay convert the Coincidentconstraint to an Orientedconstraint.


8. In the Placement tab, click NewConstraint.• Select Coincident as theConstraint Type.

9. Constrain the COVER.PRTsurface coincident to theBODY.PRT surface.

10. Review the constraints and clickComplete Component .



Creating Coincident Constraints using DatumFeaturesUse the Coincident constraint to position two datum axes coaxialor two datum planes coincident.

Figure 1 – Selecting Datum Planesto be Coincident

• Datum Planes:– Aligns positive (brown)

sides in the samedirection by default.

• Datum Axes:– Aligns positive (tag)

sides in the samedirection by default.

• You can flip the direction.

Figure 2 – Selecting Datum Axesto be Coincident

Creating Coincident Constraints using Datum PlanesThe Coincident constraint enables you to position two specified datum planesto lie in the same plane (coplanar), and either face each other or face in thesame direction. Datum planes have positive and negative sides designatedby color. If you rotate a model with datum planes displayed, you see that thecolors are brown and gray. If the datum planes face each other, their positive(brown) sides face each other. If the datum planes face in the same direction,their positive sides face in the same direction. By default, the system alignsthe positive sides in the same direction. You can use the Change ConstraintOrientation option in the dashboard to rotate the datum planes so thattheir positive sides face each other.

When the datum planes of components are assembled coincident to oneanother, it is the same as assigning an offset value of zero, except that anoffset value is not created for editing. The components can be positioned inany location as long as the two specified datum plane normals either faceeach other or face the same direction.


Creating Coincident Constraints using Datum AxesThe Coincident constraint enables you to align datum axes coaxial. Likedatum planes, datum axes also have a positive direction, which is the sideon which the datum tag displays. By default, the system aligns the positivesides in the same direction. Again, you can use the Change ConstraintOrientation option in the dashboard to rotate the datum axes so theirpositive sides face each other.


PROCEDURE - Creating Coincident Constraints usingDatum Features


Assembly\Coincident_Datums COINCIDENT_2.ASM

Task 1: Select datum planes with a Coincident constraint.


2. Edit the definition of ARM.PRT.3. In the dashboard, select the

Placement tab.• Review the existing Coincidentconstraints.

• Click New Constraint.• Select Coincident as theConstraint Type.

4. Select the two datum planes.

5. Notice the orientation.6. In the dashboard, click Change

Constraint Orientation .

7. In the Placement tab, click Flipto toggle the orientation back.



Task 2: Select datum axes with a Coincident constraint.

1. Enable Axis Display anddisable Plane Display .

2. Select BODY.PRT, right-click,and select Hide.


4. In the Open dialog box, selectPLATE.PRT and click Open.

5. Reorient PLATE.PRTapproximately as shown.

6. In the dashboard, click 3D

Dragger to hide it.

• Select Coincident as theConstraint Type.

7. Select the two datum axes.

8. Right-click and select NewConstraint.

9. Select Coincident as theConstraint Type.

10. Select the two datum axes.


12. Select Coincident as theConstraint Type.

13. Select the two surfaces.


14. In the dashboard, click 3D

Dragger to show it.15. Click Complete Component .

16. Disable Axis Display .17. In the model tree, right-click

BODY.PRT and select Unhide.



Creating Distance ConstraintsUse the Distance constraint to specify an offset value betweendifferent types of geometry.

Figure 1 – Distance Betweena Vertex and Datum Plane

• Select geometry pairs (two points ortwo planes, for example).

• Select geometry combinations (a pointand plane, for example).

• Distance constraint is the same asthe Coincident constraint, except thatselected references can be offset fromone another.

Figure 2 – Distance Between TwoSurfaces Figure 3 – Distance Constraint

Flipped

Creating Distance ConstraintsThe Distance constraint enables you to specify an offset value betweenselected geometry types. For example, you could select two points, twoplanes, and so on, or you can select geometry combinations such as a pointand plane, or a point and an edge or axis. The Distance constraint is thesame as the Coincident constraint, except that the selected references canbe offset from one another a specified distance. The distance value becomesa dimension that can be edited.

When you use the Distance constraint, the system sets the current offsetdirection as the positive offset direction. To offset in the opposite direction,either drag the location handle to the other side of the selected assemblyreference or edit the offset to a negative value. The component moves tothe opposite side, and this offset direction is now set as the positive offsetdirection.


If components are assembled to one another with a Distance constraint offsetvalue of zero, it is the same as assembling them with a Coincident constraint,except that a distance value is available for editing. You can double-click theDistance constraint tag in the graphics window and edit the constraint type toa Coincident constraint, and vice versa.

You can also use the Change Constraint Orientation option in thedashboard to flip the component orientation for the Distance constraint.For example, the component orientation was flipped between Figure 2 andFigure 3.


PROCEDURE - Creating Distance Constraints


Assembly\Distance DISTANCE.ASM

Task 1: Utilize a Distance constraint between planar surfaces.


COVER.PRT and select Hide.


4. In the Open dialog box, selectSUB.ASM and click Open.

5. Reorient SUB.ASMapproximately as shown.

6. In the dashboard, selectCoincident as theConstraint Type.

7. Constrain the two cylindricalsurfaces coincident.


9. Select Distance as theConstraint Type.

10. Drag the sub-assembly upwardif necessary.

11. Select the two surfaces.


12. Reorient the model.13. Drag the sub-assembly and edit

its distance to 15.

14. In the dashboard, click ChangeConstraint Orientation .

15. Click Change ConstraintOrientation to toggle it back.


17. Drag the sub-assembly upward.18. Right-click and select Clear.19. In the dashboard, select the

Placement tab and noticethat the references have beenremoved.

20. Select the two new surfaces.

The second surface isa hidden surface on theunderside of the shaft.


21. Reorient the model.22. Drag the sub-assembly and edit

its distance to 15.

23. In the dashboard, click ChangeConstraint Orientation .

24. Click Change ConstraintOrientation to toggle it back.

25. Edit the distance value to 1.

Task 2: Use a Distance constraint between other geometry.


2. Enable Plane Display .3. In the Placement tab, clear the

Allow Assumptions check box.4. Rotate the component

approximately as shown.


5. In the Placement tab, click NewConstraint.

• Select Distance as theConstraint Type.

6. Select the vertex and the datumplane.

7. Edit the distance value to 35.8. Edit the distance value to -65.9. Click Complete Component .



Creating Parallel, Normal, and Angle ConstraintsUse the Parallel, Normal, and Angle Offset constraints to specifya particular component orientation.

• The Parallel constraint forcesreferences parallel to each other.– Similar to Coincident constraint

without coplanar requirement.• The Normal constraint forcesreferences normal to each other.

• The Angle Offset constraintenables you to specify a rotationangle between planar references.

Figure 1 – Viewing a ParallelConstraint

Figure 2 – Viewing a NormalConstraint

Figure 3 – Viewing an AngleOffset Constraint

Constraining Components using the Parallel ConstraintThe Parallel constraint enables you to force a selected datum plane orsurface into a particular orientation without regard to an offset value. TheParallel constraint forces selected surfaces or datum planes to becomeparallel with each other. The Parallel constraint is similar to the Coincidentconstraint, except that the selected references do not have to be coplanar.

You can use the Change Constraint Orientation option in the dashboardto toggle the specified references from facing each other to facing in the samedirection, and vice-versa. You can also double-click the Parallel constrainttag in the graphics window and edit the constraint type to a Distance, AngleOffset, Coincident, or Normal constraint.


Constraining Components using the Normal ConstraintSimilar to the Parallel constraint, the Normal constraint enables you to force aselected datum plane or surface into a particular orientation without regardto an offset value. The Normal constraint forces selected surfaces or datumplanes to become normal with each other.

You can use the Change Constraint Orientation option in the dashboardto rotate the specified references 180 degrees. You can also double-click theNormal constraint tag in the graphics window and edit the constraint type to aDistance, Angle Offset, Parallel, or Coincident constraint.

Constraining Components using the Angle Offset ConstraintThe Angle Offset constraint enables you to specify a rotation angle betweenplanar references. The component reorients to the Angle Offset value thatyou specify. Typically, the Angle Offset constraint is used after the componenthas already been partially constrained with a Coincident constraint

You can use the Change Constraint Orientation option in the dashboardto rotate the angle offset 180 degrees to the other side of the assemblyreference. You can also double-click the Angle Offset constraint tag inthe graphics window and edit the constraint type to a Distance, Parallel,Coincident, or Normal constraint.


PROCEDURE - Creating Parallel, Normal, and AngleConstraints


Assembly\Parallel_Normal_Angle ORIENT.ASM

Task 1: Utilize a Parallel and Normal constraint.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.2. Edit the definition of SUB.ASM.3. In the dashboard, select the

Placement tab.• Click New Constraint.• Notice the constraint status isFully Constrained.

• Clear the Allow Assumptionscheck box.

4. Drag the component as shown.

5. In the Placement tab, selectParallel as the ConstraintType.

6. Select the two surfaces shown.

7. Notice the componentorientation, and click Flip.

8. In the Placement tab, edit theConstraint Type to Normal .• Press CTRL+ALT andmiddle-click to spin thecomponent 180º, as shown.


Task 2: Utilize an Angle Offset constraint.

1. In the Placement tab, edit theConstraint Type to Angle Offset

.• Edit the angle to 45.• Click Flip.

2. Right-click in the graphicswindow and select Clear.

3. Press CTRL+ALT andmiddle-click to spin thecomponent approximately,as shown.

4. Enable Plane Display .5. Select the two planes.

6. Edit the angle to 25 and clickComplete Component .



Assembling using AutomaticUse the Automatic option to enable Creo Parametric to determinethe constraint type based on selections and component locationor orientation.

Figure 1 – Orientation DeterminingConstraint Type Created

• Assemble components usingAutomatic .– Typically the system

generates a Coincidentconstraint.

• Toggle or create otherconstraints as necessary.– Offset, Angle Offset,

Coincident, Centered,and so on.

Figure 2 – Creating an Angle OffsetConstraint Based on Orientation

Assembling using AutomaticWhen you assemble a component, the default Constraint Type is Automatic

. With the Automatic option, the system automatically determines theconstraint type that is created when you select a reference pair. The followingitems influence the constraint type that is created:

• The references selected – The references you select can automaticallyeliminate a particular constraint type that can be created.

• The component's location – In Figure 1, the component is located abovethe area it is to be assembled to when references are selected; therefore, aDistance constraint is created. If the component is located along the sideat approximately the same height as its desired final placement locationwhen references are selected, the system creates a Coincident constraint.

• The component's orientation – In Figure 2, the component is oriented insuch a way that the selected references face at an angle to each other and


are not coplanar; therefore, the system automatically creates an AngleOffset constraint.

In between the creation of constraints, you can further reorient the componentto refine its position. This can help the system more accurately determine thenext constraint type and offset, or it may help you easily select the next set ofreferences. Of course, the created constraints dictate how the componentmoves.

When you select a reference pair, the system automatically creates aconstraint. At this point, the system usually waits for you to select a secondreference pair to create a second constraint. The system automatically keepscreating new constraints until the component is Fully Constrained.

Right-Click Menu OptionsWhen assembling components, there are various right-click menu optionsavailable to increase your speed and efficiency, including the following:

• New Constraint – Useful when you need to create additional constraintsabove what the system minimally requires.

• Clear – Clears the references specified for the currently active constraint.

Best PracticesAssemble components using Automatic . The system typically generatesa Coincident constraint from the specified references. You can then toggle,or create as necessary, the Offset, Angle Offset, Coincident, Centered, andso on, Constraint Types. The Centered constraint lines up spheres, cones,tori, or cylinders with no Flip option.


PROCEDURE - Assembling using Automatic


Assembly\Automatic AUTOMATIC.ASM

Task 1: Use the Automatic option to assemble components.



3. In the Open dialog box, selectcomponent BODY.PRT and clickOpen.

4. Right-click and select DefaultConstraint.

5. Middle-click to complete thecomponent.


component SHAFT.PRT andclick Open.

8. Reorient the assembly.9. Reorient SHAFT.PRT

approximately as shown.

10. Notice that the Constraint Typeis set to Automatic .

11. Select the surfaces.12. Notice that the system creates a

Coincident constraint.


13. Drag the SHAFT.PRT up and outof the hole.

14. Select the two surfaces.15. In the dashboard, select the

Placement tab.• Edit the Constraint Type to

Distance if necessary.

16. Edit the distance value to 1.


18. Select the two surfaces.19. In the Placement tab, edit the

Constraint Type to Angle Offsetif necessary.

20. Edit the angle value to -35 or35 as necessary to achieve theposition shown.




component COVER.PRT andclick Open.

24. Reorient COVER.PRTapproximately as shown.

25. Again, notice that the ConstraintType is set to Automatic .


Coincident constraint.


29. Select the two surfaces.30. Notice that the system creates

an Oriented constraint.



32. Select the two surfaces.33. Select the Placement tab.

• Edit the Constraint Type toCoincident if necessary.



component ARM.PRT and clickOpen.

37. Reorient ARM.PRTapproximately.

38. Again, notice that the ConstraintType is set to Automatic .


Coincident constraint.41. Notice that the taper direction of

the cones is not aligned.

42. In the dashboard, select thePlacement tab.• Edit the Constraint Type to

Centered .


43. Enable Plane Display .44. Right-click and select New

Constraint.45. Select the two planes.46. Notice that the system creates

an Angle Offset constraint.

47. In the Placement tab, edit theConstraint Type to Coincident

.




Utilizing the Accessory WindowThe accessory window enables you to manipulate the incomingcomponent individually to facilitate reference selection.

• Accessory window uses:– Component placement– Data sharing– Sheetmetal forms

• Toggle the accessory window on or off.• The accessory window can be dockedor undocked.

Figure 1 – Viewing the AccessoryWindow Figure 2 – Docked Accessory

Window Model Tree

Utilizing the Accessory WindowWhen assembling components, you can use the accessory window. Theaccessory window displays only the incoming model, enabling you tomanipulate the component individually to facilitate reference selection. Youcan toggle the accessory window on or off by clicking the Show In SeparateWindow icon. The accessory window can be used in the followinginstances:

• Component placement — The accessory window can be particularlybeneficial if you are assembling a very small component into a very largeassembly.

• Data sharing• Sheetmetal formsThe accessory window contains its own In Graphics toolbar, enabling you tocontrol the contents of the accessory window separately from that of thegraphics window.


When the accessory window is toggled on, you can select whether or not todisplay the incoming model in the graphics window by clicking the ShowIn Assembly Window icon. Of course, you can select references onthe incoming model in either the accessory window or the graphics window,depending on where it is displayed.

The accessory window can be docked or undocked. If docked, it appearswithin the Creo Parametric graphics window, and always in front, preventingwindows from getting lost behind other open windows. You can drag thewindow to a different location within the graphics window or resize it inthe same way you can modify any other conventional window. When theaccessory window is docked, the model tree pane splits and displays theincoming model's model tree at the lower portion. The accessory windowmodel tree supports layer tree functionality.

If the accessory window is undocked, the incoming model's model treedisplays in that window. The undocked accessory window model tree alsosupports layer tree functionality. You can undock the accessory window bysetting a configuration option.

Accessory Window Config.pro OptionsThe following configuration options determine the accessory windowbehavior:

• accessory_window_display — Controls the display of the accessorywindow. Options include:– docked — Places the accessory window as a separate window within

the graphics window.– undocked — Places the accessory window as a separate window in

addition to the Creo Parametric window.• comp_assemble_start — Sets the initial assembly placement behaviorwhen assembling a new component. Options include, but are not limited to:– default — Displays the incoming model in the main graphics window

only.– constrain_in_window — Displays the incoming model in the accessory

window only.


PROCEDURE - Utilizing the Accessory Window


Assembly\Accessory_Window ACCESSORY.ASM

Task 1: Use the accessory window to assemble the BOLT.PRTcomponents.


2. Select Assemble fromthe Assemble types drop-downmenu.

3. In the Open dialog box,double-click BOLT.PRT.

4. Notice the component is locatedin the main graphics window.

5. In the dashboard, click Show InSeparate Window .

6. Notice that the BOLT.PRT is nowin both the graphics window andthe docked accessory window.

7. Notice that the BOLT.PRT modeltree displays at the bottom of theexisting model tree pane.

8. In the accessory window, zoomin on BOLT.PRT.

9. Reorient BOLT.PRT and selectthe flat surface.

10. Select the flat PLATE.PRTsurface to create the Normalconstraint.

11. In the dashboard, edit theConstraint Type to Coincident

.


12. Select the shaft on BOLT.PRT.13. Select the upper hole surface

on SHAFT.PRT to create theCoincident constraint.


15. Click Assemble .16. In the Open dialog box,

double-click BOLT.PRT.17. Notice that the BOLT.PRT

displays in both the graphicswindow and the dockedaccessory window.

18. In the dashboard, click ShowIn Assembly Window totoggle it off.

19. Notice that BOLT.PRT nowonly displays in the accessorywindow.

20. Select the flat surface onBOLT.PRT.

21. Select the flat PLATE.PRTsurface to create the Normalconstraint.

22. In the dashboard, edit theConstraint Type to Coincident

.


23. Select the shaft on BOLT.PRT.24. Select the lower hole surface

on SHAFT.PRT to create theCoincident constraint.

25. In the dashboard, click ShowIn Assembly Window totoggle it on.

26. In the dashboard, click Show InSeparate Window to toggleit off.




Module20Assembling with Connections

Module OverviewMany product designs include both static and dynamic components. CreoParametric enables you to assemble dynamic components using severalconnection types.

In this module, you learn how to assemble components using connectionsand how to simulate motion.

ObjectivesAfter completing this module, you will be able to:• Understand connection theory.• Drag connected components.• Assemble components using Slider, Pin, and Cylinder connections.• Analyze collision detection settings.


Understanding Connection TheoryA mechanical connection is a method of constrainingcomponents to form a joint. Joint connections determine how acomponent can move within an assembly.

• Create mechanism connections that enable motion between componentsin an assembly.

• Joint connection examples:– Slider– Pin– Cylinder

Figure 1 – Assembly with Connections

Understanding Connection TheoryA mechanical connection is a method of constraining components to forma joint. Joint connection examples include Sliders, Pins, and Cylinders.Creating a Joint connection is similar to creating Assembly constraintsbetween components. Joint connections enable you to create true-to-lifeconnections between components so you can simulate motion betweenmoving parts. For example, you can create a slider joint between an enginecylinder and the piston head to enable the piston head to translate withinthe cylinder.

Creating ConnectionsThe procedure to create a Joint constraint is similar to the procedure to createconstraints between fixed assembled components. Perform the followingsteps to create a Joint constraint:

• Assemble a component into the assembly.• Click the Connections list in the dashboard.• Select the connection type.• Select the appropriate references.

You can click Constraints To Connections in the dashboard to convertexisting constraints to connections.


Dragging Connected ComponentsYou can drag assembly components through their rangeof motion based on the current connections and appliedconstraints.• Drag components using PointDrag.

• You can create snapshotsto capture the positions ofcomponents.

Figure 1 – Dragging AssemblyComponents

Figure 2 – Viewing a SnapshotFigure 3 – Viewing a Second

Snapshot

Dragging Connected ComponentsOne method of testing your assembly connections involves dragging theassembly through its range of motion. To drag an assembly, click Drag

Components and then select a part model. You can select edges,points, axes, datum planes, or surfaces to initiate the dragging movement.The components move according to the applied connections. The selectedentity is always positioned as close as possible to the cursor location, whilethe remaining components stay connected to each other.To quit dragging, you can either middle-click to return the components to theiroriginal position, or click to leave the components at their current position.The default option when dragging components is Point Drag, as shown inFigure 1. You can also select Body Drag.

Creating SnapshotsAfter moving connected components to a desired position, you can createsnapshots of that particular location in the graphics window. Snapshotsenable you to return the assembly components to a particular position. Youcan create multiple snapshots and quickly move the assembly to specificpositions by activating each snapshot.


PROCEDURE - Dragging Connected Components


Assembly\Component_Drag DRAGGING_COMPS.ASM

Task 1: Drag connected components.


2. Click Drag Componentsfrom the Component group andselect the lower-right corner ofCRANK_4.PRT.

3. Move the cursor in a circularmotion to view the motioncreated by the connections.

4. Click to stop the motion.

Task 2: Create snapshots while dragging components.

1. In the Drag dialog box, expandthe Snapshots area.

2. Click the corner ofCRANK_4.PRT and movethe connected components untilROD_2_4.PRT is fully extendedto the left. Click again to stop themotion.

3. In the Drag dialog box, click Take

Snapshot .

4. Click the corner ofCRANK_4.PRT again and movethe connected components untilROD_2_4.PRT is fully extendedto the right. Click again to stopthe motion.

5. In the Drag dialog box, click Take

Snapshot .


6. In the Drag dialog box, double-click Snapshot1 to activate it. Noticethat ROD_2_4.PRT is fully extended to the left.

7. In the Drag dialog box, double-click Snapshot2 to activate it. Noticethat ROD_2_4.PRT is fully extended to the right.

8. Click Close in the Drag dialog box.



Assembling Components using the SliderConnectionSlider connections are used to enable translation along a singleaxis.

Figure 1 – Axis Alignment

• References (constraint rules):– Axis Alignment to enable

translation along a singleaxis.♦ Use axes or cylindrical

surfaces.– Rotation Reference to

constrain rotation aroundthe axis.♦ Use planes or planar

surfaces.• Examples include:– Elevator doors– Piston in a cylinder

Figure 2 – Rotation Reference

Assembling Components using the Slider ConnectionSlider connections are used to enable translation along a single axis. Forexample, an elevator door is representative of a Slider connection, as it slidesback and forth in one direction and is unable to rotate about any axis. Apiston in an engine is another example of a Slider connection. In the figures,the hedge trimmer blade is yet another example of a Slider connection.

Slider connections require two constraint rules that limit their degrees offreedom in a single direction. These two constraint rules are:

• Axis Alignment — The axes or cylindrical surfaces you select as referencesdetermine the axis of free translation.

• Rotation Reference — The datum planes or planar surfaces you select withthe axis alignment restrict all rotational movement.


PROCEDURE - Assembling Components using theSlider Connection


Assembly\Slider SLIDER_CONNECTION.ASM

Task 1: Assemble BLADE_2.PRT using a Slider connection.

1. Enable only the following Datum Display types: .2. Orient to the 3D orientation.

3. Select Assemble from the Assemble types drop-down menuin the Component group.

4. In the Open dialog box, select BLADE_2.PRT, and click Open.

5. In the dashboard, edit the Connection from User Defined to Slider.

6. Select datum axis A_2 on BLADE_2.PRT and datum axis A_3 onHOUSING.PRT as the Axis alignment of the Slider connection.

7. Select datum plane RIGHT on BLADE_2.PRT and datum planeRIGHT on HOUSING.PRT for the Rotation of the Slider connection.


8. In the dashboard, click ChangeConstraint Orientation toflip the component.


10. Disable Axis Display and Plane Display .

11. Click Drag Components from the Component group and selectBLADE_2.PRT.

12. Move the cursor to notice the range of motion created by the Sliderconnection. Click to place BLADE_2.PRT.

13. Click Close in the Drag dialog box.



Assembling Components using the PinConnectionPin connections are used to enable rotation along a single axiswhile constraining axial translation.


• References (constraint rules):– Axis Alignment to enable

rotation about a single axis.♦ Use axes or cylindrical

surfaces– Translation Reference to

constrain translation along theaxis.♦ Use planes or planar surfaces

• Examples include:– Door hinge– Crankshaft in an engine

Figure 2 – Translation Reference

Assembling Components using the Pin ConnectionPin connections are used to enable rotation about a single axis. For example,a hinge on a door and a crankshaft in a engine both use a Pin connection.

Pin connections require two constraints (rules) that limit their degrees offreedom about a single axis. These two constraint rules are:

• Axis Alignment — The axes or cylindrical surfaces you select as referencesdetermine the axis of free rotation.

• Translation Reference — The datum planes or planar surfaces you selectwith the axis alignment restrict translational movement in the axis direction.


PROCEDURE - Assembling Components using the PinConnection


Assembly\Pin PIN_CONNECTION.ASM

Task 1: Assemble ROD_2_2.PRT using a Pin connection.



3. In the Open dialog box, selectROD_2_2.PRT, and click Open.

4. Reorient the componentapproximately as shown.

5. In the dashboard, edit theConnection from User Definedto Pin .

6. Select the small hole surfaceon ROD_2_2.PRT andthe cylindrical surface onBLADE_2_2.PRT as the Axisalignment of the Pin connection.

7. Select the back side surface ofROD_2_2.PRT and the frontsurface of BLADE_2_2.PRTfor the Translation of the Pinconnection.



9. Click Drag Componentsfrom the Component group andselect ROD_2_2.PRT.

10. Move the cursor to notice therange of motion created by thePin connection. Also notice themotion of BLADE_2_2.PRT dueto the Slider connection. Click toplace ROD_2_2.PRT.

11. Click Close in the Drag dialogbox.



Assembling Components using the CylinderConnectionCylinder connections are used to enable rotation along a singleaxis with unconstrained axial translation.

• References (constraint rules):– Axis Alignment to enable rotation

about a single axis.♦ Use axes or cylindrical surfaces.

• Examples include:– Aligning a pen cap over a pen.– Connecting rod.

♦ Assuming one end is definedwith a Pin connection.

♦ Avoids overconstraining.


Assembling Components using the Cylinder ConnectionCylinder connections are used to enable both rotation and translation abouta specific axis. For example, aligning a pen cap over a pen is a Cylinderconnection. While holding the pen cap aligned with the pen, you can rotatethe pen cap and slide it along the axis of the pen.

Cylinder connections require only one constraint rule that limits their degreesof freedom about a specific axis. The constraint rule is:

• Axis Alignment — The axes or cylindrical surfaces you select as referencesdetermine the axis of free rotation and translation.

Cylinder connections are often used in situations in which you do not want tooverconstrain a component. In the hedge trimmer example, a Pin connectionbetween the connecting rod and the blade prevents the connecting rod fromsliding in and out of the journal. As a result, a Cylinder connection is suitableto constrain the other end of the connecting rod to the crankshaft.


PROCEDURE - Assembling Components using theCylinder Connection


Assembly\Cylinder CYLINDER_CONNECT.ASM

Task 1: Redefine ROD_2_3.PRT and add a Cylinder connection.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.2. Edit the definition of

ROD_2_3.PRT.3. In the dashboard, select the

Placement tab.• Click New Set.• Select the new Pin connection,and edit its type to Cylinder

.4. Select the large hole surface

on ROD_2_3.PRT and thecylindrical journal surface onCRANK_3.PRT as the Axisalignment of the Cylinderconnection.




Analyzing Collision Detection SettingsCollision Detection enables you to check for interferencesbetween parts while dragging them.

Figure 1 – Areas of InterferenceWhile Dragging

• Global Collision Detection• Partial Collision Detection• Areas of interference highlight• Sound Warning on Collision

Figure 2 – Interference Fixed

Analyzing Collision Detection SettingsCreo Parametric provides real-time collision detection, enabling you to checkfor interferences between parts as you drag a mechanism assembly throughits range of motion. Collision detection, by default, is turned off when youdrag components in a mechanism assembly. However, you can enable twodifferent types of collision detection:

• Global Collision Detection — Checks for any type of collision in the entireassembly.

• Partial Collision Detection — You specify the components between whichto check for interference.

There is also an option to sound a warning when a collision occurs betweencomponents. The component areas that interfere with each other highlight,as shown in Figure 1. You can then resolve the interferences by modifyingthe models. In Figure 2, the housing was modified such that the connectingrod no longer interferes.

To enable Stop When Colliding or Push Objects onCollision functionality, you must set the config.pro optionenable_advance_collision to yes.


PROCEDURE - Analyzing Collision Detection Settings


Properties\Collision_Detect COLLISION_DETECT.ASM

Task 1: Analyze an assembly for interference by dragging its components.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.2. Select HOUSING_5.PRT.3. Click the Model Display

drop-down menu and clickComponent Display Style >Transparent.

4. Orient to the 3D2 vieworientation.

5. Zoom in on HOUSING_5.PRT.

6. Click File > Prepare > Model Properties.7. In the Assembly section, click change in the Collision Detection row.8. In the Collision Detection Settings dialog box, select Global Collision

Detection and verify that the Sound Warning on Collision checkbox is selected.• Click OK.

9. Click Close in the Model Properties dialog box.

10. Click Drag Componentsand drag the componentsby selecting the hex-shapedgeometry.

11. Notice the highlightedinterfering geometry. TheHOUSING_5.PRT is too short.Click Close in the Drag dialogbox.

12. Select HOUSING_5.PRT,right-click, and select Activate.

13. In the graphics window, selectExtrude 1.

14. Right-click and select Edit.


15. Edit the 51 dimension to 56 andclick Regenerate .

16. In the model tree, right-clickCOLLISION_DETECT.ASM andselect Activate.

17. Click Drag Componentsand drag the componentsby selecting the hex-shapedgeometry again. The collision isno longer present because theinterference has been fixed.• Click Close.



Module21Exploding Assemblies

Module OverviewExplode states enable you to capture assembly parts in various states ofassembly and disassembly. You can easily reference these states whencreating drawings and assembly or disassembly procedures.

In this module, you learn how to create assembly explode states and createexplode lines between exploded components. You also learn how to animateexplode states.

ObjectivesAfter completing this module, you will be able to:• Create and manage explode states.• Create explode lines between exploded components.• Animate explode states.


Creating and Managing Explode StatesExplode states enable you to easily save assembly anddisassembly views.

• Position components into desiredlocation.– Select motion type– Select Movement Reference– Move component(s), with or

without children.• Toggle between exploded andunexploded states.

• Explode states can be used indrawings.

Figure 1 – Unexploded Assembly Figure 2 – Exploded Assembly

Creating and Managing Explode StatesYou can use explode states to quickly reposition components in 3-D spaceand save these assembly or disassembly views by selecting the viewmanager’s Explode tab. You can select explode states when placing adrawing view or use them to create assembly or disassembly procedures.You can toggle an explode state on or off, and you can also create multipleexplode states.

Specifying the Motion Type and Movement ReferenceBefore you can explode components from an assembly, you must specify theMotion type and Movement Reference.

• Motion type – Specify the type of motion for a selected component. Motiontypes include:

– Translate Component – Linearly moves the selected component.This is the default motion type.

– Rotate Component – Rotates the selected component about aspecified Movement Reference.

– Copy Position – Copies the exploded position from the selectedcomponent to other components. This option is available in the Optionstab of the dashboard.


– Toggle Explode Location — Toggles the placement location ofthe selected component between its original location and its currentlocation. You can select this option to reset a component's position.

• Movement Reference – Specifies the reference to define the direction ofmovement for the selected component. This reference is required whenrotating components, but is optional for translating components whenyou require a direction other than the three default directions. Availablereference types include all datum features, planar surfaces, edges, andvertices.

You can also click View Plane from the dashboard, which enables youto explode components parallel to the screen in the assembly's currentorientation.

Exploding ComponentsOnce the Motion type and Movement Reference have been defined, youcan select the components you wish to explode. There are three methodsavailable:

• Move one component – Move a single component in an assembly orsub-assembly by selecting it.

• Move many components – Press CTRL and select multiple componentsto move them all at once.

• Move with Children – In the Options tab of the dashboard, you can selectthe Move with Children check box. This option enables you to select acomponent to explode, and move its children with it.

When you select a component for translation, the 3D Dragger displays at thatlocation along with a coordinate system. You can cursor over any of the three3D Dragger axis arrows and drag to explode the component in that direction.When you select a component for rotation, a drag arrow displays. You canuse the drag arrow to rotate the component about the Movement Reference.

You can also specify the Motion increment of the component you areexploding. The default Motion increment value is Smooth, which enablesthe components to explode smoothly and enables you to drop them at anyrelative position. You can also increment values of 1, 5, or 10 by selecting thedesired value from the drop-down list, or you can type in your own incrementvalue. The units used for the increment value are the same units used in theassembly. For example, if the assembly units are measured in millimeters,when you select an increment value of 10, the component explodes in 10millimeter increments, snapping to each increment.

Additional Explode State FactsWhen using the explode functionality, consider the following:

• If you explode a sub-assembly in the context of a higher-level assembly,the system does not explode the components in the sub-assembly.

• When you unexplode an assembly, the system retains the information sothat the components can have the same explode position if you explodethe assembly again.

• All assemblies have a Default Explode state that the system createsautomatically from the defined component placement constraints.


• Multiple occurrences of the same sub-assembly can have different explodestates.


PROCEDURE - Creating and Managing Explode States


View\Explode_States EXPLODE.ASM

Task 1: Create explode state Exp0001.



3. In the View Manager dialog box,select the Explode tab.• Click New and press ENTERto accept the default name.

• Click Close.4. Notice the note in the graphics

window.

5. Click Edit Position from theModel Display group.

6. In the dashboard, verify thatTranslate Component isselected.

7. Select SHAFT.PRT.8. Cursor over the red X-axis arrow

and drag upwards to explode thecomponent.

9. Select ARM.PRT.10. Cursor over the green Y-axis

arrow and drag upwards toexplode the component.


11. In the dashboard, select theOptions tab and select theMove with Children check box.

12. Select COVER.PRT, cursor overthe red X-axis arrow, and dragupwards. Notice that the boltsexplode with it.

13. Select the pattern leaderBOLT.PRT, cursor over thered X-axis arrow, and dragupwards to explode all three boltmembers.

14. In the graphics window,right-click and select MotionReference.

15. Select the front, planar surfaceof BODY.PRT.

16. Select PLATE.PRT, cursor overthe red X-axis arrow, and drag tothe left.

17. In the Options tab, clear theMove with Children check box.

18. Select the References tab.• Right-click the MovementReference and selectRemove.

• Click in the Components toMove collector.

19. Select one BOLT.PRT, pressCTRL, and select the secondBOLT.PRT member.

20. Cursor over the red X-axis arrow,and drag the bolts to the left.



22. Click View Manager ,right-click Exp0001, and selectSave.

23. Click OK in the Save DisplayElements dialog box.

24. Click Close from the viewmanager.



Creating Explode LinesExplode lines are used to denote the alignment of explodedcomponents when the assembly is unexploded.• Create explode lines by specifyingreferences on two components.

• Edit explode lines:– Extend or shorten lines– Add/Remove Jogs

• Modify line style, font, or color.

Figure 1 – Unexploded AssemblyFigure 2 – Explode Lines in

Exploded Assembly

Creating Explode LinesYou can create cosmetic explode lines to display the alignment of explodedcomponents when the assembly is unexploded. Explode lines automaticallyupdate to reflect position changes made to the exploded components theyreference. Creating new explode lines or editing existing explode linesmodifies the explode state. You can save the modified explode state in theview manager Explode tab.You can create an explode line in an explode state by specifying a referenceon two different components. You can select surfaces, edges, or curves asreferences on the components. The explode line is then created between thetwo selected references and displays in the model tree as an Offset Line.

Explode lines are also known as Offset lines.

Editing Explode LinesYou can edit existing explode lines by selecting the explode line and clickingEdit Explode Line from the Explode Lines tab in the dashboard. You canalso right-click and select Edit Explode Line. You can perform the followingedit operations on an explode line:


• Edit the explode line length — You can extend or shorten the ends of anexplode line by dragging the handle at the desired end.

• Add Jogs — Select the explode line location where you want to create thejog, right-click, and select Add Jog. You can then drag the jog to its desiredlocation. You can delete the jog by right-clicking its handle and selectingRemove Jog.

Modifying Explode Line StyleYou can modify the style of existing explode lines by selecting the explodeline and either clicking Edit Line Styles from the Explode Lines tab in thedashboard, or by right-clicking in the graphics window and selecting ModifyLine Style. You can modify the line style to be Hidden, Geometry, Leader, CutPlane, Phantom, or centerline. You can also modify the Line Font and Color.You can always restore the default line style by selecting the explode line andclicking Default Line Style from the Explode Lines tab in the dashboard.

Removing Explode LinesYou can remove explode lines by selecting the explode line and clickingRemove Explode Line from the Explode Lines tab in the dashboard.You can also right-click and select Remove Explode Line. Press CTRL toselect multiple explode lines at once.


PROCEDURE - Creating Explode Lines


View\Explode_Lines EXPLODE_LINES.ASM

Task 1: Create offset lines between exploded components.


2. Click Exploded View fromthe Model Display group.

3. Notice the note in the graphicswindow.

4. Click Edit Position from theModel Display group.

5. Click Create Explode Linefrom the dashboard.

6. Edit the selection filter toSurface.

7. Zoom in and select thesurfaces on COVER_2.PRTand ARM_2.PRT.

8. Click Apply in the CosmeticOffset Line dialog box to createthe explode line.

9. Select the inner hole surface onCOVER_2.PRT and the outersurface on the correspondingBOLT_2.PRT, and click Apply tocreate the explode line.

10. Create explode lines for the othertwo BOLT_2.PRT components.


11. Select the inner hole surface onCOVER_2.PRT and the outersurface on the SHAFT_2.PRTtip, and click Apply to create theexplode line.

12. Select the inner hole surfaceon BODY_2.PRT and the outersurface on SHAFT_2.PRT, andclick Apply to create the explodeline.

13. Select the upper bolt holesurface on PLATE_2.PRT andthe corresponding outer surfaceon BOLT_2.PRT, and clickApply to create the explode line.

14. Create another explode line forthe second plate bolt.

15. Select the inner surface ofBODY_2.PRT.

16. Query-select the back surface ofPLATE_2.PRT in approximatelythe center and click Apply.

17. Click Close in the CosmeticOffset Line dialog box and clickComplete Feature from thedashboard.


19. In the View Manager dialog box,select the Explode tab.• Right-click Exp0001, selectSave, and click OK.

• Click Close.



Animating Explode StatesYou have the option of animating your explode states for bothexploding and unexploding operations.

• Toggle animation on or off.• Options include:– Maximum seconds an

animation takes betweenexplode states.

– Follow explode sequence.• You can set default behavior.

Figure 1 – Animation Not Followingthe Explode Sequence

Figure 2 – Animation Followingthe Explode Sequence

Animating Explode StatesYou have the option of animating your explode states for both exploding andunexploding operations. The system animates the movement of componentsfrom their start to end positions in the explode state. To enable animation,click File > Options and select the Show animation while exploding theassembly check box under the Assembly display settings section of the EntityDisplay category.

You can also control the following options:

• Maximum seconds an animation takes between explode states — Sets theduration of time the system takes to explode or unexplode the assembly.

• Follow explode sequence — If enabled, this option causes the componentsto explode or unexplode in the order they were moved when the explodestate was created, following the drag motions you used. If this check box iscleared, the system selects the shortest distance to move the components.All components are also moved at once, regardless of the order they weremoved when the explode state was created.


Explode lines appear at the end of the animation when exploding, and displayuntil the end of the animation while unexploding.

Animated Explode State Config OptionsThe following configuration options determine the default animated explodestate behavior:

• animate_explode_states — Controls whether explode states are animated.This option is set to yes by default.

• explode_animation_max_time — Sets the default duration of timenecessary to explode or unexplode the assembly.


PROCEDURE - Animating Explode States


View\Explode_Animate ANIMATE.ASM

Task 1: Animate an explode state in an assembly.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.2. Click File > Options.3. In the Creo Parametric Options

dialog box, select the EntityDisplay category.• In the Assembly displaysettings section, notice thatthe Show animation whileexploding the assemblycheck box is selected.

• Type 10 as the value forMaximum seconds ananimation takes betweenexplode states.

• Click OK > No.


5. Notice that all components beginexploding at once.

6. Notice that the explode linesappear at the end of thesequence.


7. Click Exploded View again.8. Notice that all components

unexplode at once.9. Notice that the explode lines

display until the end of thesequence.

10. Click File > Options.11. In the Creo Parametric Options

dialog box, select the EntityDisplay category.• In the Assembly displaysettings section, select theFollow explode sequencecheck box.

• Click OK.


13. Notice that the componentsexplode in order.


14. Click Exploded View again.15. Notice that all components

unexplode in order.



Module22Drawing Layout and Views

Module OverviewDrawings are used for documenting the production design of partsand assembly models. They typically contain two-dimensional andthree-dimensional model views, as well as dimensions, notes, and Billsof Materials. Drawings are frequently used in the manufacture of productdesigns. This module focuses on the creation of drawings and the layoutof drawing views.

There are two methods for creating drawings. In the first method, youmanually place views onto a drawing. In the second method, you use adrawing template to automatically populate the drawing with predefinedinformation. Typically, a combination of these methods is used, whichinvolves manually placing views on drawings that were started using adrawing template.

ObjectivesAfter completing this module, you will be able to:• Analyze drawing concepts and theory, as well as basic 2-D orientation skills.• Create new drawings manually and apply formats.• Use the drawing tree.• Create new drawings using drawing templates.• Manage drawing sheets.• Add drawing models to a drawing.• Create, orient, and modify drawing views including general, projection,cross-section, detailed, and auxiliary.

• Create assembly and exploded views.


Analyzing Drawing Concepts and TheoryA drawing is often the final deliverable at a company andcontains parametric 2-D or 3-D views of a 3-D model.

• A drawing usually contains atleast:– Model views– Dimensions– Title block

• A drawing is bi-directional.

Figure 1 – Example of a Model

Figure 2 – Example of a Drawing

Analyzing Drawing Concepts and TheoryOnce a part or assembly has been modeled, you typically need to create a2-D drawing to document it. Often, a 2-D drawing is the final deliverable ata company. The 2-D drawing usually contains parametric 2-D or 3-D viewsof the 3-D part or assembly, dimensions, and a title block. The drawing mayalso contain notes, tables, and further design information. However, notevery company requires you to create drawings of models.

A drawing is bi-directional. If a change is made to a model, the drawing thatdisplays the model automatically updates to reflect the change. Similarly, if achange is made to a model in the drawing, the model automatically updatesas well.


Analyzing Basic 2-D OrientationManipulate the 2-D orientation of your drawings in the CreoParametric graphics window.

• Keyboard/MouseOrientation:– Pan– Zoom– Wheel Zoom

• Additional Orientationoptions:

– Refit– Change sheets

Figure 1 – Viewing a Drawing Sheet

Figure 2 – Zooming in ona Drawing View Figure 3 – Zooming in on the Title Block

Orientation using Keyboard and Mouse CombinationsTo view specific areas of a drawing, you can pan and zoom the drawing usinga combination of keyboard and mouse functions, as shown in the followingtable.


Pan

Zoom

+

Cursor over the area of interest before zooming in. The zoom function usesthe cursor position as its area of focus. You can also zoom by using the scroll


wheel. To control the level of zoom, press a designated key while using thescroll wheel, as shown in the following table:

Zoom Level Keyboard and Mouse Selection

Zoom

Fine Zoom

+

Coarse Zoom

+

Additional Orientation OptionsIn addition to using keyboard and mouse combinations, the followingadditional drawing 2-D orientation options are available:

• Refit — Refits the entire drawing sheet in the graphics window.• Change sheets — You can change drawing sheets in a multi-sheet drawing.The sheet numbers display under the graphics window as individual tabs.To change sheets, you can select the tab which corresponds with thedesired sheet. Often your company's title block displays the drawing sheetnumber in a multi-sheet drawing, as shown in Figure 3.


Creating New Drawings and Applying FormatsYour company can create customized formats to use in newdrawings.

Figure 1 – Empty Drawing

• Create new drawings inthe New dialog box.– Specify the Default

Model.– Specify orientation.– Specify size.– Specify format

(optional).• A Format:– Contains 2-D items.– Is created in Format

mode.– Is applied to a drawing.

• Add or change formatsusing Sheet Setup .

Figure 2 – Drawing with Format

Creating New DrawingsYou can create new drawings within Creo Parametric either by clicking File> New, or by clicking New from the Quick Access toolbar, selecting theDrawing option, and then editing the drawing Name. You must also specifywhether to use a default template. This topic focuses on drawing creationwhen a default template is not used.

You must specify the Default Model to be used in the drawing. The DefaultModel is the model that is used in your drawing when you start placing views.You can add additional models to the drawing at a later time. If you havemodels open in Creo Parametric when a new drawing is created, the modelthat is in the active window at the time of drawing creation is automatically setas the Default Model.

You must also specify the drawing Orientation, whether Portrait, Landscape,or Variable. If you select Portrait or Landscape, you can choose betweennumerous standard, predefined drawing sizes. If you select Variable, youmust specify the desired drawing size width and height, in units of eitherinches or millimeters. A C-size drawing is shown in Figure 1.


Using Drawing FormatsWhen creating a new drawing, you must also decide whether to use a formatin the new drawing. A drawing format contains 2-D items that typicallyinclude boundary lines, referencing marks, tables, and text. A format has anextension of *.frm, and is created in Format mode. A format is then appliedto a drawing. Your company has most likely created customized formats touse, as they typically contain your company's logo, title block, and tolerancingstandards. In Figure 2 shows a A2-size drawing with an applied format.

If you specify a format during drawing creation, you do not need tospecify an orientation or size; these parameters are determinedduring format creation and are incorporated into the drawing.

Adding and Changing FormatsYou can decide whether to add a format at the time of drawing creation orat a later time. To add a format to a drawing after the drawing has beencreated, you can either click Sheet Setup from the Document group in theLayout tab, or you can double-click the drawing size that is displayed alongthe bottom of the graphics window. You can then select your desired format,or replace an existing format with a different format.


PROCEDURE - Creating New Drawings and ApplyingFormats


Drawing\Formats_Applying CREATE NEW

Task 1: Create a new drawing and apply different formats to it.

1. Click New from the Quick Access toolbar.• In the New dialog box, select Drawing as the Type.• Edit the Name to new_drawing.• Clear the Use default template check box and click OK.

2. In the New Drawing dialog box,click Browse to specify theDefault Model.• Select ANGLE_GUIDE.PRTand click Open.

• Select Empty for the template,if necessary

• Edit the Standard Size to A inthe drop-down list.

• Click OK.3. Disable all Datum Display types.

4. Notice the text below the sheet that displays the drawing scale, type,name, and drawing size.

5. Click Sheet Setup from the Document group in the Layout tab.6. In the Sheet Setup dialog box, edit the Format from A Size to C Size

in the drop-down list.• Click OK.


7. Double-click the SIZE : C tagat the bottom of the graphicswindow.

8. In the Sheet Setup dialog box,click the C Size format to activatethe field. Click Browse from thedrop-down list.• In the Open dialog box, clickWorking Directory.

• Select C_FORMAT_GENERIC.FRM and clickOpen.

• Click OK.

9. In the input window, type yourfirst initial, followed by yoursurname, and press ENTER.

10. Notice that the text at the bottomhas updated again. Also noticethe new format which contains aborder and title block.

11. Zoom in on the title block.




Creating and Orienting General ViewsWhen creating a series of views, a general view is usually thefirst view you create.

• You can edit the following attributeswhen creating or editing generalviews:– View name– View type– View orientation

♦ Model view name

Figure 1 – General View Type

Figure 2 – Another General View Type

Creating and Orienting General ViewsWhen you create a drawing, the first view added to a drawing is a generalview. A general view is usually the first of a series of views to be created.When you create or edit a general view in a drawing, the Drawing View dialogbox appears displaying the View Type category.

You can edit the following attributes of a general view in the View Typecategory:

• View name — The view name displays in the drawing tree and when youcursor over the view in the graphics window. It also displays in the layertree when selecting the active layer object.

• View type — If there is more than one general view on the drawing, youcan edit the view type from general to a different view type. This option isonly available when editing an existing general drawing view.

• View orientation — Determines the orientation of the view in the drawing.You can set the view orientation using model view names that are createdin the model itself. These are the same model views that are found in themodel's saved view list and view manager. A general view can be placedin any orientation.


PROCEDURE - Creating and Orienting General Views


Drawing_Views\General GENERAL_VIEWS.DRW

Task 1: Create a 2-D general view.


2. Click General from the ModelViews group in the Layout tab.

3. Click OK in the Select CombinedState dialog box.

4. Click in the middle of the drawingto place the view.

5. In the Drawing View dialogbox, edit the View name toSHAFT_SIDE.

6. Notice the default view of themodel. Also notice the modelviews available in the DrawingView dialog box. The availableviews were generated from themodel.

7. In the Drawing View dialog box, select Model view name FRONT,and click Apply.

• Click Repaint .• Select Model view name LEFT and click Apply.• Select Model view name RIGHT and click OK.

8. De-select the SHAFT_SIDE view.


Task 2: Create a 3-D general view.

1. Right-click in the drawing andselect Insert General View.


3. Click in the upper-right of thedrawing to place the view.

4. In the Drawing View dialogbox, edit the View name toSHAFT_DEFAULT.

5. Notice the model views availablein the Drawing View dialog box.

6. In the Drawing View dialog box,select Model view name 3D, andclick Apply.

7. In the Drawing View dialog box,select Model view name DefaultOrientation, and click OK.



Utilizing the Drawing TreeThe drawing tree enables you to visualize and manipulatedrawing elements.

• Drawing Tree– Changes with Ribbon tab– Select items– Right-click options

Figure 1 – Drawing Tree: Layout Tab

Figure 2 – Drawing Tree:Table Tab Figure 3 – Drawing Tree: Annotate Tab

Utilizing the Drawing TreeDrawing elements are shown in a hierarchical tree similar to the model tree.The drawing tree changes its display to match the current drawing task,based on the tab selected in the drawing ribbon. The drawing tree enablesyou to visualize the items in the drawing and right-click them for access toadditional various options.

Consider the following while working with the drawing tree:

• The drawing tree appears above the model tree. Each can beindependently resized or collapsed.

• Both the drawing tree and the model tree can be toggled to display thelayer tree.


PROCEDURE - Utilizing the Drawing Tree


Drawing\Tree DRAWING_TREE.DRW

Task 1: Navigate through the drawing and explore the drawing tree.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.2. Select the Layout tab from the

ribbon, if necessary.• Notice that the active sheet isshown in the drawing tree.

• Also notice that the views areshown in the drawing tree.

The views in this drawing were renamed to be easily recognizablein the drawing tree.

3. Right-click FRONT and view theavailable options.

4. Select Auxiliary to locate thisview.

5. Select the Table tab from theribbon.• Notice the drawing treeupdates.

6. Select Table 3 to locate it.• Right-click Table 3 and viewthe available options.


7. Select the Annotate tab from theribbon.• Notice the drawing treeupdates.

8. Expand the FRONT node andthe Annotations node in thedrawing tree.• Notice the various shown anderased dimensions.

9. Select the HOLE_DIA dimensionto locate it.• Right-click and view theavailable options for thisshown dimension.

10. Select the d21 dimension tolocate it.• Right-click and view theavailable options for thiserased dimension.

11. Expand the RIGHT node andthe Datums node in the drawingtree.• Notice the various shown anderased axes.

12. Select the CYL axis to locate it.• Right-click and view theavailable options for this axis.



Managing Drawing SheetsYou manipulate Sheets using sheet tabs and dialog boxes.

• Move or Copy Sheet dialog box:– Move sheets with the option

to copy• Sheet Setup dialog box:– Specify Format– Change Size/Orientation

• Sheet tabs:– Located below drawing

status text– Select to activate sheet– Create/Delete– Reorder– Rename

Figure 1 – Move or Copy SheetDialog Box

Figure 2 – Sheet Setup Dialog Box

Figure 3 – Sheet Tabs

Managing Drawing SheetsDrawings contain at least one sheet. When additional sheets are created,you use the sheet tabs and sheet dialog boxes to manage multiple sheets.You can access the most common sheet functions from the sheet tabs area,located below the drawing status text. Using the sheet tabs, you can:• Preview a sheet by placing the cursor over the tab.• Select a sheet tab to activate the desired sheet.• Create and Delete sheets.• Reorder the sheets by dragging a sheet tab.• Rename a sheet.• Right-click a sheet for additional options.Within the Layout tab of the drawing ribbon, you can click Move or CopySheets from the Document group. The Move or Copy Sheet dialog boxenables you to:• Move the current sheet to the selected location.• Insert a copy of the current sheet to the selected location.


Within the Layout tab of the drawing ribbon, you can click Sheet Setupfrom the Document group. The Sheet Setup dialog box enables you to:

• Specify the drawing Format.• Change sheet Size.• Change sheet Orientation.


PROCEDURE - Managing Drawing Sheets


Drawing\Sheets DRAWING_SHEETS.DRW

Task 1: Use different tools to manipulate sheets in a drawing.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.2. Select the Sheet 1 sheet tab to

activate it, if necessary.3. Notice the drawing tree updates

for this sheet.

4. Cursor over the Sheet 2 tab toview the thumbnail preview.

5. Select the Sheet 2 sheet tab toactivate it.

6. Notice the drawing tree updatesfor this sheet.

7. Click New Sheet from theDocument group.• Press ENTER to leave thename blank.

• Double-click the Sheet 3 sheettab, type NEW, and pressENTER.

• Drag the NEW sheet tab toreorder it as sheet 2 of 3.

8. Double-click the Sheet 1 sheet tab, type CYL, and press ENTER.9. Right-click the Sheet 2 sheet tab and view the available options.

• Select Rename, type ANG and press ENTER.


10. Select the NEW sheet tab to activate it.11. From the Document group in the ribbon, click Move or Copy Sheets

.• Select ANG, if necessary.• Select the Create a copy check box.• Click OK and press ENTER to create Sheet 4.

12. Select the Sheet 4 sheet tab to activate it.• Right-click and select Delete.• Click Yes.

13. Select the NEW sheet tab toactivate it.

14. From the Document group in theribbon, click Sheet Setup .• Select the current format toactivate the drop-down list.

• Select Browse from thedrop-down list.

• Select a.frm, then click Openand OK.

• Click Remove All and Yes.



Adding Drawing ModelsA drawing can contain views and other information from multipledrawing models.

Figure 1 – Switching theActive Model

• Add or delete drawing modelsfrom the drawing.

• Set/Switch the active model.• The system adds informationto the drawing from the activemodel only.

Figure 2 – Menu Manager

Figure 3 – Different Models onDifferent Drawing Sheets

Adding Drawing ModelsWhen you create a drawing, you typically specify the drawing model to usein the drawing. Views placed in the drawing depict this specified drawingmodel. However, you can add additional drawing models to the drawing. Thisenables drawing views and information from multiple models to be capturedin a single drawing.The system adds information to the drawing from the active model. Theactive model is displayed at the bottom of the graphics window and in themodel tree. You can switch between drawing models and set the active oneby clicking the Set Active Model/Rep icon from the model tree, byclicking Drawing Models from the Model Views group of the Layout tab inthe drawing ribbon, or by right-clicking in the drawing and selecting DrawingModels. You can also right-click a selected view of a drawing model that isnot the active model and select Set/Add Drawing Model or double-click theactive component name at the bottom of the graphics window.


However, you must click the Drawing Models icon and use thesubsequent menu manager to add new models. Figure 2 displays the menumanager. You must also delete drawing models from the drawing through theview manager. You can only delete a drawing model if there are no viewsusing it, however, and each drawing must contain at least one drawing model.


PROCEDURE - Adding Drawing Models


Drawing\Models DRAWING_MODELS.DRW

Task 1: Add the CYLINDER_BRACKET.PRT to the drawing.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.2. At the bottom of the graphics

window, notice that SHAFT is theactive model.

3. Notice that the model treedisplays SHAFT.PRT.

4. Click Drawing Models fromthe Model Views group of theLayout tab.

5. In the menu manager, click AddModel.

6. Select CYLINDER_BRACKET.PRT and click Open.At the bottom of thegraphics window, notice thatCYLINDER_BRACKET is nowthe active model.

7. Notice that the model treedisplays CYLINDER_BRACKET.PRT.

8. Click New Sheet .9. In the input window, type your

first initial, followed by yoursurname, and press ENTER.Sheet number 2 is added to thedrawing. Notice the model namein the title block.

10. Click General from the ModelViews group in the Layout tab.


12. Click in the drawing to place thegeneral view.

13. In the Drawing View dialog box,select FRONT as the Model viewname and click OK.


Task 2: Add the ANGLE_GUIDE.PRT to the drawing.

1. Click Drawing Models .2. In the menu manager, click Add Model.3. Select ANGLE_GUIDE.PRT and click Open. At the bottom of the

graphics window notice that ANGLE_GUIDE is now the active modeland that ANGLE_GUIDE.PRT displays in the model tree.

4. Click New Sheet .5. In the input window, type your

first initial, followed by yoursurname, and press ENTER.Sheet number 3 is added to thedrawing. Notice the model namein the title block.

6. Click General .7. Click OK in the Select Combined

State dialog box.8. Click in the drawing to place the

general view, and click OK.

Task 3: Set a different active drawing model.

1. In the model tree, click SetActive Model/Rep andselect SHAFT.PRT > MasterRep.

2. The SHAFT.PRT is now theactive model.

3. Click General and click OKin the Select Combined Statedialog box.

4. Click in the drawing to place thegeneral view, and click OK.

5. De-select the drawing view.6. Right-click in the drawing and select Drawing Models.7. In the menu manager, click Set Model > CYLINDER_BRACKET >

Done/Return.



Creating Projection ViewsA Projection view is an orthographic projection of another view'sgeometry along a horizontal or vertical direction from the parentview.

• Projected view characteristics:– Is child of view from which it is

projected– Orientation is 90° from parent view– Third angle or First angle

Figure 1 – Example Third AngleProjected Top View

Figure 2 – Example Third AngleProjected Left View

Figure 3 – Example GeneralView

Creating Projection ViewsA Projection view is an orthographic projection of another view's geometryalong a horizontal or vertical direction from the parent view. The orientationof the projection view is always 90° from the parent view, and its scale isdependent on the parent view. If the orientation of the parent view is updated,the orientation of the child projection views also updates.

You can either insert projection views by clicking Projection from theModel Views group in the Layout tab, or by selecting a drawing view,right-clicking, and selecting Insert Projection View. In either case, you mustspecify the parent view from which the projection view projects. When youcreate a projection view, it is assigned a default name based upon thedirection of projection.


The default projection type for projection views is Third Angle. If desired, theprojection type can be changed to First Angle.

You can also project 3-D general views.


PROCEDURE - Creating Projection Views


Drawing_Views\Projection PROJECTION_VIEWS.DRW

Task 1: Create two projection views on sheet 1.


2. Click Projection from theModel Views group of the Layouttab.

3. Select the front view, move thecursor up, and click to placethe new projection view. Noticethe orange rectangle that snapsto your cursor until you click toplace the view.

4. Select the front view, right-click,and select Insert ProjectionView.

5. Move the cursor to the right andclick to place the new projectionview.

Task 2: Create three projection views on sheet 3.


2. Select the shaft_side drawingview, right-click, and selectInsert Projection View.

3. Move the cursor up and click toplace the new projection view.


4. Select the shaft_side drawingview, right-click, and selectInsert Projection View.

5. Move the cursor to the left andclick to place the second newprojection view.

6. Select the shaft_side view,right-click, and select InsertProjection View.

7. Move the cursor to the rightand click to place the third newprojection view.



Creating Cross-Section ViewsYou can add cross-sections to drawing views and edit theirXhatching.

• Cross-section views:– Use cross-sections from the

3-D model.– Have Xhatching that you can

edit.– Enable you to add arrows to a

perpendicular view.♦ Flip material direction

Figure 1 – Cross-Section ViewsUsing 3-D Model Cross Sections

Figure 2 – Editing XhatchingFigure 3 – Added Arrows to

Perpendicular View

Creating Cross-Section ViewsYou can add cross-sections to drawing views in the Sections category of theDrawing View dialog box. When you specify that you want to add a sectionto a drawing view, a list of available cross-sections displays in a drop-downlist. This list of available cross-sections originates from the 3-D model itself.You can only select valid cross-sections for a given drawing view. A validcross-section is one that is parallel to the screen when placed in the view.A cross-section displays in a drawing view with a set of Xhatching. You canedit the following attributes of the Xhatching lines:• Spacing — For spacing, you can select either Half or Double from themenu manger. Each time you select half or double, the spacing betweenXhatching lines halves or doubles, respectively. You can also type aspacing value for the Xhatching lines. In the upper image of Figure 2, thespacing has been changed to a value of 0.15. In the lower image, thespacing has been changed to a value of 0.6.

• Angle — For angle, you can select a Xhatching line angle in 30 or 45degree increments between 0 and 150 degrees. You can also type an


angle value. In the lower image of Figure 2, the Xhatching line angle hasbeen modified from 45 degrees to 135 degrees.

In addition to creating a section view, you can optionally add section arrowsto any view that is perpendicular to the section view. In Figure 3, the arrowswere added to the drawing view. The direction in which the arrows pointindicates the direction of material to maintain in the section view. You cantoggle this material direction if desired.


PROCEDURE - Creating Cross-Section Views


Drawing_Views\Section SECTION_VIEWS.DRW

Task 1: Add cross-section A to a view in a drawing.


SHAFT.PRT and select Open.

3. Click View Manager fromthe In Graphics toolbar andselect the Sections tab.

4. Right-click section A and selectShow Section. Notice thecross-section.

5. Click Close from the ViewManager.

6. Click Close to return to thedrawing.

7. Select the lower, center,shaft_side view. Right-click andselect Properties.

8. In the Drawing View dialog box,select the Sections categoryand select the 2D cross-sectionoption.• Click Add Section andselect A from the drop-downlist.

• Click OK.9. Click in the background to

de-select the view.

10. In the section view, select theXhatching, right-click, and selectProperties.

11. In the menu manager, clickSpacing > Half > Done.


12. De-select the X-hatching.

13. Select the cross-section view,right-click, and select AddArrows.

14. Select the top projection view toplace the arrows.

15. Select the arrows, right-click, andselect Flip Material RemovalSide.

16. Right-click and select Flip Material Removal Side to toggle thematerial removal direction back to the original direction.



Creating Detailed ViewsA Detailed view is a small portion of a model shown enlarged inanother view.

Figure 1 – Sketching the Spline

• Detailed view components:– Location on drawing– Sketched spline– View name– Scale– Xhatching (if applicable)

Figure 2 – Placed Detailed View

Figure 3 – Resulting Spline Boundary

Creating Detailed ViewsA detailed view is a small portion of a model shown enlarged in another view.A reference note and border is included on the parent view as part of thedetailed view setup. The orientation of the detailed view is the same as itsparent, but the detail view is typically assigned a much larger scale thanthe parent view.You must define the following when creating a detailed view:• Location — Select a location on the drawing where the resulting detailedview is to be placed. Similar to other views, you can always move thedrawing view at a later time.

• Spline — Select a center point in an existing drawing view that you wantto enlarge in the detailed view. You must then sketch a spline around thearea of the view that you want enlarged in the resulting detailed view. Youdo not have to be concerned about sketching a perfect shape becausethe spline is automatically converted into a boundary shape. The defaultboundary shape is a Circle, although you can modify the boundary to anEllipse, Horizontal/Vertical ellipse, an ASME 94 Circle, or keep it as aSpline. In Figure 3, the boundary shape is a Circle.

You may also define the following optional items when creating a detailedview:• View name — Provide a different detailed View name. The View name ofthe detailed view displays in the detail note, as shown in Figure 3. TheView name also displays under the detailed view, as shown in Figure 2.


• Scale — You can specify the scale of the resulting detailed view.• Xhatching (if applicable) — If you create a detailed view for a drawingview that contains a cross-section, you can optionally edit the Xhatching tospecify a view other than the parent cross-section view by selecting DetIndep from the menu manager when editing the Xhatching properties. Thedefault detailed view Xhatching is governed by the parent.


PROCEDURE - Creating Detailed Views


Drawing_Views\Detailed DETAILED_VIEWS.DRW

Task 1: Create a detailed view in a drawing.


2. Click Detailed from theModel Views group in the Layouttab.

3. In the section view, select thecenter point for the detailed view.

4. Click points to create a splinecurve around the SHAFT.PRTend. Do NOT close the splinecurve when sketching it. Instead,leave a gap.

5. Middle-click to complete thespline curve.

6. Select a point in the top left of thedrawing to place the detail view.

7. Click in the background tode-select the view.


8. Select the detailed view note.9. Double-click the 3.000 scale

on the view, type 4, and pressENTER.

10. Click in an empty area of thegraphics window to de-select thescale value.



Creating Auxiliary ViewsAn auxiliary view is projected perpendicular to a selected planarreference or projected along the direction of an axis.

• You can select the followingreferences:– Planar reference

♦ Datum plane– Linear reference

♦ Datum axis♦ Edge

• Edit the View name.• Add optional arrows.– Single– Double

Figure 1 – An Auxiliary View

Creating Auxiliary ViewsAn Auxiliary view is a special type of projection view. Instead of beingprojected orthogonal, the auxiliary view is projected perpendicular to aselected planar reference (a datum plane), or projected along the directionof an axis. The resulting auxiliary view can be moved only along its angleof projection. In Figure 1, the datum plane is selected as the projectionreference.

You may also edit the View name to a more meaningful name, as well asadd projection arrows, as shown in the figure. The View name displayswhen projection arrows are created. You can also move projection arrowsindividually with respect to the auxiliary view. Projection arrows can bedisplayed as either single or double arrows.


Creating New Drawings using Drawing TemplatesDrawing templates work in conjunction with the model's savedviews to automatically populate default drawing views.

Figure 1 – Example of a DrawingTemplate

• Drawing Templates arecustomizable:– Create templates that

complete a majority of theinitial drawing.

– Additional items can beadded to drawing templates.♦ Other views♦ View options♦ Drawing formats♦ Drawing options

Figure 2 – Drawing Createdusing a Template

Creating New Drawings using Drawing TemplatesSimilar to part and assembly templates, a drawing template provides you witha starting point to create your drawings. You can use drawing templateswhen you want to create a standardized drawing. Drawing templates canautomatically create views, set the desired view display and view options,display formats, and show model dimensions based on the template. Youcan configure Creo Parametric to use a default drawing template whencreating a new drawing, or you can select a different one. A drawing templateis shown in Figure 1, while a drawing created using the drawing templateis shown in Figure 2.

The views created within a drawing that uses a template are determinedfrom the model's view orientations. It is important to consider drawing vieworientations when creating your models.

Drawing templates contain three types of information for creating newdrawings:


1. Basic information — Includes information that comprises a drawing butis not dependent on the drawing model, such as sheet size, notes,symbols, and formats. This information is copied from the templateinto the new drawing.

2. Representative view symbols — Contains the options used to configuredrawing views and the actions that are performed on that view. Theinstructions in the template are used to build a new drawing thatreferences a model to place various views in specific orientations andview states.

3. Parametric note — Notes that update to new drawing model parametersand dimension values. When a drawing is created from a template, theparametric notes update with the proper information from the modelsused in the drawing.

Drawing Template UsesYou can use drawing templates to define the layout of views, set view display,define tables, place symbols and notes, show dimensions, and create snaplines. A drawing template can also be customized with your company formatsand standards. This enables you to automatically create drawings in afraction of the time it would take to sketch them.

For example, you can create a template for a machined part versus a castpart. The machined part template could define the views that are typicallyplaced for machined part drawings, set the view display of each view (forexample, show hidden lines), place company standard machining notes, andautomatically create snap lines for placing dimensions.


PROCEDURE - Creating New Drawings using DrawingTemplates


Drawing\Templates CYLINDER_BRACKET.PRT

Task 1: Create a new drawing using the DRAWING_TEMPLATE.DRWtemplate.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.2. Rotate CYLINDER_BRACKET.

PRT to familiarize yourself withits shape.

3. Click Close .

4. Click New from the ribbon.• In the New dialog box, select Drawing as the Type.• Edit the Name to new_drawing.• Clear the Use default template check box and click OK.

5. In the New Drawing dialog box,notice that the Default Modelis CYLINDER_BRACKET.PRTbecause it is still in session.You can browse and specify adifferent Default Model.• Select Use template.• Click Browse, selectDRAWING_TEMPLATE.DRW,and click Open.

• Click OK.6. In the input window, type your

first initial, followed by yoursurname, and press ENTER.

7. Zoom in on the title block.8. Pan to the different drawing

views, zooming in and out asdesired.

9. Click Refit .


10. Notice the three template viewnames in the drawing tree.



Modifying Drawing ViewsYou can perform many operations on a drawing view to changeits display.

Figure 1 – Deleting Child Views

• Operations include:– Move the view.

♦ Lock view movement– Delete views.

♦ Child views– Modify properties.

♦ Scale♦ View display

– Edit the sheet scale.

Figure 2 – Editing the SheetScale

Figure 3 – Modifying View Properties

Modifying Drawing ViewsWhen a view is placed on a drawing, there are a variety of operations thatyou can perform to change the display of the view. In most cases, you canmodify a view that has already been placed on a drawing. The following aredifferent types of operations that you can perform on views in a drawing.

Moving ViewsBy default, views cannot be moved when they are placed on a drawing. Theyare locked to the drawing. You can unlock drawing views for movementin the drawing by selecting a view, right-clicking, and toggling the LockView Movement option, or by clicking Lock View Movement from theDocument group. The toggle for locking view movement is a system settingrather than an individual drawing view setting. If one view is unlocked, allviews are unlocked.

Once views are unlocked, a drawing view can be moved according to anyparent/child relationships that exist between views. Since a general view hasno parent views, it can be moved anywhere on the drawing. When a general


view is moved, any child views move accordingly. A child view, on the otherhand, can only move according to the angle of projection from the parent view.

Deleting ViewsYou can delete views from a drawing. All items associated with the deleteddrawing view, including child views, are also deleted. For example, if youdelete a general view that has three child projection views, the child projectionviews must also be deleted. The system highlights child views that are to bedeleted, as shown in Figure 1.

Modifying Drawing View PropertiesThe following are two types of drawing view properties that can be modified:

• Scale – Is modified in the Scale category of the Drawing View dialog box.In most cases, the scale of a placed view is specified as the default scalefor the sheet, or the sheet scale. You can also define a custom scale fora drawing view that makes it larger or smaller than the defined sheetscale. If a custom scale is defined, it is listed under the drawing view, asshown in Figure 3. Note that for some drawing views, such as a projectionview, you cannot specify a custom scale because the drawing view scaleis dependent upon its parent view.

• View Display – Is modified in the View Display category of the DrawingView dialog box. Three view display options that can be modified include:– Display style – Controls the display of the entire view. Options include

Follow Environment, Wireframe, Hidden, No Hidden, Shading, andShading With Edges. The Follow Environment display style may varyfrom company to company depending upon how the default display styleis defined. In Figure 3, the display style was edited from No Hiddento Shading.

– Tangent edges display style – You can define how tangent edges displaywithin the drawing. Options include Default, None, Solid, Dimmed,Centerline, and Phantom.

– Colors come from – For display styles other than shading, you candefine the location from which the colors for the drawing view geometrylines are generated. By default, colors are defined based on thedrawing. You can specify that the colors are generated from how theyare defined in the model.

Editing the Sheet ScaleYou can also edit the sheet scale at the bottom of the graphics window. Thesheet scale value edits the scale of the active model only. When you edit thesheet scale of the active model, any drawing views of that active model onthat sheet update their scale based on the new value. In Figure 2, the sheetscale was increased from 1 to 1.75.


PROCEDURE - Modifying Drawing Views


Drawing_Views\Modifying MODIFYING_VIEWS.DRW

Task 1: Modify the views on sheet 1 of the drawing.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.2. Select the front general view,

right-click, and clear Lock ViewMovement.

3. With the front view still selected,click and drag down and tothe left. Notice that the twoprojection view children movealong with the general viewparent.

4. With the general front view stillselected, press CTRL and selectthe two projection views.

5. Right-click and selectProperties.

6. In the Drawing View dialog box,edit the Display style to Hiddenand click OK.


1. Select the Sheet 2 sheet tab to activate it.2. Click Set Active Model/Rep and select ANGLE_GUIDE.PRT

> Master Rep.3. In the bottom left of the graphics window, double-click the scale, edit it

to 1.25, and press ENTER.4. Click in the background to de-select the scale.

5. Press CTRL and select the two2-D views.


7. In the Drawing View dialog box,edit the Tangent edges displaystyle to Phantom and click OK.




2. Select the top view and move itfurther up in the drawing.

3. Select the lower, centershaft_side view, right-click,and select Delete. The threechild projection views highlight inpurple boxes.

4. Click Yes in the Confirmationdialog box.

5. Click Undo .

6. Select the 3-D generalshaft_default view, right-click,and select Properties.

7. In the Drawing View dialog box,select the Scale category, selectthe Custom scale option, editthe value to 2, and click Apply.

8. In the Drawing View dialogbox, select the View Displaycategory, edit the Display style toShading, and click OK.



Creating Assembly and Exploded ViewsYou can create a drawing that displays assembly views. You canfurther modify an assembly view to display it in an explodedstate.

• Set an assembly as the activemodel to create assembly views.– All components included.

• Display an assembly view in anexploded state.– Views reference 3-D model

explode states.– Explode states can be edited

from the drawing.– Explode lines can be shown.

Figure 1 – Assembly View Figure 2 – Exploded Assembly View

Creating Assembly ViewsSimilar to creating part drawings, you can also create assembly drawingsthat display assembly views. When creating a new drawing, simply set anassembly as the default model or add it as a drawing model to an existingdrawing. With an assembly set as the active model, you can add views of theentire assembly without having to add each of its individual components.

If your company requires that assembly drawings display individualcomponents on different sheets, you must add each component asa drawing model.

When placing any view, you are prompted to select a combined state. Acombined state is a combination of various state representations createdin the 3-D model using the All tab of the view manager. For example, youcan create a combined state in the 3-D model that consists of a specificorientation, a specific explode state, and a specific style state. Whenthe combined state is selected, the view displays with all three staterepresentations enabled. For this topic, you should not specify a combinedstate.


Creating Assembly Exploded ViewsExploded views are used to illustrate assembly and disassembly (taking aproduct apart). With exploded views, you can create customized drawingsbased on 3-D models; these views can display information needed bymanufacturing personnel to produce your product, or they can be used asa general reference.

To display an assembly view in an exploded state, select the Explodecomponents in view check box in the View States category of the DrawingView dialog box. You must then select the desired saved explode state or thedefault exploded state previously created in the 3-D assembly model. Youcan add an exploded view of an assembly without having to explode it inAssembly mode. If an exploded view is edited on the drawing, the explodestate in the 3-D model is not affected. However, if the explode state is editedin the 3-D model, the associated exploded drawing view updates.

Exploded views also typically contain explode lines, created in the 3-D model.In addition, BOM Balloons and a table indexing the parts can also be added tothe drawing, enabling all users to easily reference the component information.


PROCEDURE - Creating Assembly and Exploded Views


Drawing_Views\Exploded CREATE NEW

Task 1: Create a new drawing from a template and add an assembly view.

1. Click New , select Drawing, and edit the name to explode_view.2. Clear the Use default template check box and click OK.3. In the New Drawing dialog box, click Browse, select VALVE.ASM,

and click Open.• Select Use template, click Browse, select DRAWING_TEMPLATE.DRW, and click Open.

• Click OK.

4. In the input window, type yourfirst initial, followed by yoursurname, and press ENTER.

5. Disable all Datum Display types.6. If necessary, double-click the

sheet scale value, edit it to 1,and press ENTER.

7. Right-click and select InsertGeneral View.

8. Select No Combined State andclick OK.

9. Click near the upper-right cornerto place the view.

10. In the Drawing View dialog box,select Default Orientation asthe Model view name, and clickOK.

Task 2: Insert a drawing sheet and add an exploded assembly view.

1. Click New Sheet .2. In the input window, type your first initial, followed by your surname,

and press ENTER.


3. Right-click and select InsertGeneral View.

4. Select No Combined State andclick OK.

5. Click near the middle of thedrawing to place the view.

6. In the Drawing View dialog box,select 3D as the Model viewname, and click Apply.

7. Click Repaint .8. In the Drawing View dialog box,

select the View States category.• Select the Explodecomponents in view checkbox, and select Assemblyexplode state EXP0001 fromthe drop-down list.

• Click OK.




Module23Creating Drawing Annotations

Module OverviewDrawing views alone are not typically sufficient for conveying all theinformation needed to manufacture a given model. In this module, you learnhow to display all of the details that manufacturing needs to create productionparts. This information includes dimensions, axes, notes, and BOM Balloons.

ObjectivesAfter completing this module, you will be able to:• Analyze annotation concepts and types.• Create tables from file.• Create BOM balloons.• Show, erase, and delete annotations.• Clean up and manipulate dimensions.• Create driven dimensions.• Insert notes.• Analyze drawing associativity.• Publish drawings.


Analyzing Annotation Concepts and TypesYou can add additional detail to drawing views to conveyinformation needed to manufacture the part or components ofthe assembly.

• Add the followingannotations to drawings:– Dimensions

♦ Driving♦ Driven (Created)

– Axes– Notes– Tables– Bills of Material

Figure 1 – Viewing a BOM on a Drawing

Figure 2 – Viewing Annotation Items on a Drawing

Analyzing Annotation Concepts and TypesYou can add additional detail to drawing views in the form of annotationsto convey information needed to manufacture the part or components ofthe assembly. There are numerous annotations you can add to a drawing,including, but not limited to:

• Dimensions — Displays measurements, distances, and depths betweenspecific geometric entities on a drawing view. You can add both drivingdimensions from the model, or create your own dimensions.

• Axes — Displays the centers of holes or bolt circles.• Notes — Add additional information to a drawing that may not be found indimensions.

• Tables — Displays additional drawing information in tabular format.Examples include names of optional components in an assembly, specific


dimension values for part numbers in a common drawing, and cam liftvalues per degree.

• BOM — Shows components in an assembly and their quantities.


Creating Tables from FileYou can insert tables from a file or using quick tables.

• Table From File– Ribbon Options

• Quick Tables Gallery:– Contains a gallery of previously

created tables with thumbnails– User Tables– System Tables

• Place the table.– Select Point dialog box

Figure 1 – Table Ribbon Options

Figure 2 – Browsing for aTable From File Figure 3 – Quick Tables Gallery

Creating Tables from FileYou can insert tables from a file. Table files that were previously saved canbe reused throughout your organization. You can save your own createdtables as files, if desired.

To insert a table from a file, click Table From File from the Table groupor select it from the Table drop-down menu, also located in the Tablegroup. You then browse to the desired location that contains saved tables,such as your working directory.

Creating Tables from the Quick Tables GalleryYou can also select a previously created table from the Tables Gallery. Toaccess the Tables Gallery, click Table from the Table group and then selectQuick Tables . A gallery of previously created tables with thumbnailsdisplays. You can also click More User Tables to access tables shared inyour organization in the pro_table_dir path. Click More System Tables toaccess system tables stored in the <loadpoint>/text/tables directory.


Once you have selected your desired quick table, the Select Point dialogbox displays, enabling you to specify the reference type to which the tablesnaps. Options include:

• Free Point — Enables you to select a free point on the drawing.

• Absolute Coordinates — Enables you to specify absolute coordinatesto locate the table.

• Relative Coordinates — Enables you to specify relative coordinates tolocate the table.

• Object or Entity — Enables you to select a point on a drawing objector entity.

• Vertex —Enables you to select the vertex on a drawing object or entity.


PROCEDURE - Creating Tables from File


Drawing_Details\Tables_From-File TABLES_3.DRW

Task 1: Save a table to file.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.2. In the ribbon, select the Table

tab.3. Query the revision history table

and select it.

4. Select Save As Table from the Save Table types drop-down menu.5. In the Save Drawing Table dialog box, type rev_hist.tbl as the File

name.• Click Save.

Task 2: Insert a Table from File.

1. Click Table From File fromthe Table group.

2. In the Open dialog box, noticethat REV_HIST.TBL is available.• Select BOM_TABLE.TBL.• Click Open.

3. Move the cursor to locate thetable near the upper-right cornerof the sheet.

4. Click to place the table.5. Click in the background to

de-select the table.


6. Zoom in to view the table.

This table was createdwith a Repeat Region andReport Parameters whichenables it to update to theassembly.


Task 3: Insert a Quick Table.

1. Click Table from the Tablegroup and select Quick Tables

.2. Scroll and select the tooltable.3. Move the cursor to locate the

table near the right side of thesheet.

4. Click to place the table.5. Click in the background to

de-select the table.

6. Zoom in on the table to view it.



Creating BOM BalloonsYou can use balloons in conjunction with Bill of Materialstables to detail the location and number of parts included in theassembly for manufacture.

• Numerous balloon creationoptions.

• Manipulate placed balloons:– Merge Balloons– Split Balloons– Detach Balloons– Redistribute Quantity

• Edit BOM balloon settings.

Figure 1 – Balloon Ribbon Options

Figure 2 – Viewing CreatedBalloons

Figure 3 – Editing BOM BalloonProperties

Creating BOM BalloonsBill of Materials (BOM) tables can be used to detail the location and numberof parts included in the assembly for manufacturers. BOM tables are createdwith repeat regions. A repeat region is a group of user-designated table cellsthat automatically populate, and expand or contract to accommodate theamount of data currently in the model.You can also detail parts and assemblies with BOM balloons, which arecircular callouts in an assembly drawing that display components listed in theBOM table. BOM balloons are tied to the bill of materials table. If you select atable row, the corresponding balloon highlights, and vice versa.

You can create balloons by clicking Create Balloons and then selectingone of the following balloon types:• All• By View — You must select the view on which the balloons display.• By Component — You must select the desired assembly component onwhich the balloons display.


• By Component and View — You must select an assembly component ina particular view on which the balloons display.

• By Record — You must select a specific row in a BOM table.

Manipulating BalloonsYou can manipulate placed BOM balloons in the drawing. The followingoptions are available:

• Merge balloons — You can nest balloons by clicking Merge Balloons .• Detach balloons — You can separate balloons by clicking Detach Balloons

.

• Split balloons — You can split balloons by clicking Split Balloons . Thisoption enables you to create a copy of a balloon that represents multiplequantities and assign a portion of that quantity to the new copy.

• Redistribute Quantity — You can redistribute balloon quantities by clickingRedistribute Quantity . This option enables you to move a quantityfrom one balloon to another.

Editing BOM Balloons SettingsYou can edit the settings for BOM balloons within the Table Properties dialogbox. When a drawing has placed BOM balloons, the BOM Balloons tabactivates. You can edit the following properties of BOM balloons:

• Select which region to apply settings, if multiple repeat regions are selected.• Control the type of balloon. Options include:– Simple Circle.– Quantity Split Circle.– Custom – This option requires a custom balloon symbol (*.sym).

• Set the BOM balloon parameter to use from the repeat region. The defaultparameter is rpt.index.

• Set the Reference Balloon Text – By default, REF is used.


PROCEDURE - Creating BOM Balloons


Drawing_Details\Tables_BOM-Balloons TABLES_4.DRW

Task 1: Create balloons for the assembly.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.2. In the ribbon, select the Table

tab.3. From the Balloons group, click

Create Balloons and selectCreate Balloons – All.

4. Select a row from the table.5. Notice that the corresponding

balloon highlights.

6. Select a balloon from the view.7. Notice that the corresponding

table row highlights.


Task 2: Edit the BOM balloon settings.

1. Query the BOM table and selectit.


3. In the Table Properties, noticethat the BOM Balloons tab isnow available.

4. Select the BOM Balloons tab.• Select Quantity Split Circlefrom the Type drop-down list.

• Click OK.

Task 3: Manipulate the balloons.

1. Notice that the entire balloonquantity of 5 is on the lower bolt.

2. Click Split Balloons from theBalloons group.

3. Select the balloon.4. Type 3 as the quantity of balloons

to remove and press ENTER.5. Select the edge of the bolt.6. Select a location for the balloon.


Task 4: Update the assembly and observe the BOM table update.

1. Select the VALVE.ASM from the model tree.2. Right-click and select Open.3. Select the bolt pattern, right-click, and select Delete Pattern.

4. Click Close .

5. Notice the message window andread its contents.• Click Close.

6. Notice the view and the balloonquantity have updated.

7. Notice that the BOM table hasalso updated.



Showing, Erasing, and Deleting AnnotationsDimensions and other detail items created in a 3-D model canbe shown in drawings.

• Show various types, based ontab

• Context sensitive, based onselection

• Erase/Unerase• Delete

Figure 1 – Showing Axesand Dimensions

Figure 2 – Show Model AnnotationsDialog Box

Showing AnnotationsWhen you create a 3-D model, you simultaneously create various itemsuseful for annotating the model in a drawing, such as dimensions and axes.

When creating a 2-D drawing, you can select which information from the3-D model to show in the drawing:

• Dimensions– Driving Dimension Annotation Elements– All Driving Dimensions or Strong Driving Dimensions– Driven Dimensions, Reference Dimensions, or Ordinate Dimensions

• Geometric Tolerances• Notes• Surface Finishes• Symbols• Datums– Set Datum Planes, Set Datum Axes, or Set Datum Targets– Axes

The Show Model Annotations dialog box is context-sensitive. You can controlwhich annotations display on the drawing and where they display basedon how items are selected:

• Select a model from the model tree — Indicates all the selected item typesfor the model on the drawing. The items may appear in multiple views.


• Select features from the model tree — Indicates the selected item types forthe selected features on the drawing. The items may appear in multipleviews.

• Select a drawing view — Indicates all the selected item types within aparticular drawing view.

• Select features from a particular drawing view — Indicates the selecteditem types for the selected features on the drawing, within the view inwhich the feature was selected. If an item is not appropriate to that view, itdoes not display.

• Select a component in a particular drawing view (Assembly Drawings only)— Indicates the selected item types for the selected component on thedrawing, within the view in which the component was selected. If an item isnot appropriate to that view, it does not display.

All of the possible items that can be shown based on the selected tab andselected items display in the drawing in a preview color. You can then selector de-select items to show by using the dialog box or by selecting them fromthe drawing.

When dimensions are shown, the system automatically arrangesand spaces them apart. You can then adjust them further manuallyor by using the Cleanup Dimensions dialog box.

Erasing and Deleting AnnotationsIf at any point during drawing creation you decide that you no longer wish todisplay certain shown items, you can erase or delete them. The differencesbetween these two options are as follows:

• Erase — Temporarily removes the items from the display. The items areshown grayed out in the drawing tree.– Erased items can be returned to the display by right-clicking and

selecting Unerase.• Delete — Removes the items from the drawing.– Any item originating in the model is retained in the model, and can be

shown again.– Any item created in the drawing, such as dimensions or notes, are

deleted and must be recreated.To erase/delete items, select them in the drawing, and then right-click andselect Erase or Delete. You can select items to erase or delete using thefollowing methods:

• Select an individual item.• Press CTRL and select multiple items.• Apply a selection filter to quickly select desired items.• Select items from the drawing tree.


PROCEDURE - Showing, Erasing, and DeletingAnnotations


Drawing_Details\Show_Erase_Delete SHOW_ERASE.DRW

Task 1: Show dimensions using different methods.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.2. Select the Annotate tab from the

ribbon.3. Click Show Model Annotations

from the Annotations group.• Select the Dimensions Tab

.4. Select HOLE 2 from the model

tree.• Notice the dimensions appearin different views.

5. Select HOLE 2 from the top view.• Notice the dimensions nowonly appear in this view.

6. Click Select All and thenclick Apply in the dialog box.

7. Select the front view.

To select a view, click withinthe view boundary, but noton the model geometry.


8. Click Select All .• Click OK in the dialog box.• Notice the dimensions fromboth views are now shown.

• Click the background tode-select all selected items.

9. Select the Sheet 2 tab to viewsheet 2.

10. Select ANGLE_GUIDE.PRTfrom the model tree.

11. Click Show Model Annotationsfrom the Annotations group.

• Click Select All .• Clear the d22 and d35 optionsin the dialog box.

• Click OK in the dialog box.• Click the background tode-select all selected items.

Task 2: Erase, unerase, and delete dimensions.

1. Press CTRL and select the 65and 32.5 dimensions in the frontview.• Right-click and select Erase.• Click the background tode-select all selected items.

2. Specify Dimension as theselection filter.• Drag to select all dimensionsin the top view.

• Right-click and select Erase.• Click the background tode-select all selected items.


3. Expand the Front viewAnnotations node in the drawingtree.• Select d5, right-click, andselect Unerase.

• Select d25, right-click, andselect Delete.

• Select d2, right-click, andselect Delete.

4. Select ANGLE_GUIDE.PRTfrom the model tree.

5. Click Show Model Annotations.

• Notice the deleted dimensionsmay be shown again.

• Select d25 to show it again.• Click OK in the dialog box.• Click the background tode-select all selected items.

Task 3: Show datum axes using different methods.

1. Click the Sheet 3 tab to viewsheet 3.

2. Click Show Model Annotations.

• Select the Datums Tab .3. Select the Front view.

• Select axes A_4, A_5, andA_6 in the dialog box.

• Click Apply in the dialog box.

4. Select the top view and click

Select All .• Click OK.



Cleaning Up DimensionsCreo Parametric can automatically arrange the display ofselected dimensions based on controls that you set.

Figure 1 – Dimensions BeforeCleanup

• Functions include:– Offset dimensions in evenly

spaced increments.– Create breaks in witness lines.– Flip dimension arrows that do

not fit between witness lines.– Center dimensions between

witness lines.– Create snap lines.

Figure 2 – The Clean DimensionsDialog Box

Figure 3 – Dimensions AfterCleanup

Cleaning Up DimensionsYou can use Creo Parametric's clean dimensions functionality to automaticallyperform the following tasks:• Clean dimensions by view, or by selecting individual dimensions. Youcannot clean angle or diameter dimensions.

• Offset dimensions from edges or view boundaries.• Space dimensions in even increments.• Create breaks in witness lines where they intersect other witness linesor draft entities.

• Automatically flip arrows on dimensions when they do not fit betweenwitness lines.

• Center dimensions between witness lines.Figure 1 displays dimensions before the cleanup process has beenperformed, while Figure 2 displays the cleanup settings applied. Figure 3displays the dimensions after the cleanup process has been performed.


Creating Snap LinesWhen cleaning dimensions, you have the option of creating snap lines withthe offset dimensions. Objects snap to these lines, which are created at thespecified offset value. Figure 3 displays snap lines that were created duringthe dimension cleanup process. Even after the cleanup process has beenperformed, you can manipulate dimensions and snap them to the displayedsnap lines. There are two important points to understand about snap lines:

• Snap lines do not display in a printed drawing.• You can delete snap lines after use.


PROCEDURE - Cleaning Up Dimensions


Drawing_Details\Dimensions_Cleanup DIM_CLEAN-UP.DRW

Task 1: Clean up dimensions on sheet 1.


drawing ribbon.3. Select the front view,

right-click, and select CleanupDimensions.

4. Accept all default options.5. Click Apply > Close.6. Notice the snap lines that were

created, and that the dimensionshave snapped to these lines.

Task 2: Clean up dimensions on sheet 2.


2. Select the top view, press CTRL,and select the front view.

3. Click Cleanup Dimensionsfrom the Annotations group inthe Annotate tab.

4. In the Clean Dimensions dialogbox, edit the Offset to 0.625.• Edit the Increment to 0.5.• Clear the Create Snap Linescheck box.

• Click Apply > Close.5. Notice that angle and diameter

dimensions are not affected bythe dimension cleanup process.



Manipulating DimensionsWhen dimensions are placed on a drawing, you typically needto modify them, for reasons such as clarity or to adhere to yourcompany's drawing standards.

• You can manipulatedimensions in the followingways:– Move (handles)– Align Dimensions– Flip Arrows– Flip Text– Move Item to View– Edit Attachment Figure 1 – Moving Dimensions

Figure 2 - Moving WitnessLine Endpoint

Figure 3 – Flipping Arrows

Manipulating DimensionsYou can manually manipulate a dimension or dimensions to display them inthe desired location. The following operations can be manually performedon dimensions:

• Move dimensions – Select a dimension and move it to a different locationon the drawing view. When you cursor over various parts of the dimension,the cursor updates to display the type of movements you can make, asshown in Figure 1. The following move options are available:– Move Dimension and Text – Cursor over the dimension text and drag to

move both the dimension and dimension text. You can snap dimensiontext to be centered about its arrows.

– Move Dimension – Cursor over the dimension leader lines and drag tomove the dimension.

– Move Text – Press SHIFT and cursor over the dimension text to moveonly the dimension text. Again, the system snaps dimension text to becentered about its arrows.

– Move Witness Line – Cursor over the witness line endpoints, and ahandle dynamically displays, as shown in Figure 2. Drag the handleto move the witness line.


• Align Dimensions – When dragging dimensions, they automatically snapto align with other dimensions in the view. You can also select multipledimensions including linear, radial, and angular, and align them to oneanother. The selected dimensions align to the first dimension selected.Once the dimensions are selected, you can either right-click and selectAlign Dimensions, or you can click Align Dimensions from theAnnotations group in the Annotate tab.

• Flip Arrows – You can flip arrows by right-clicking and selecting Flip Arrows,or you can right-click while dragging a dimension to toggle through thedifferent arrow flipping options. There are four flip options available forradius dimensions, three flip options for diameter dimensions, and twoflip options for linear dimensions. In Figure 3, you can view each of theavailable arrow flipping options for radius dimensions.

• Flip Text – For radial dimensions, you can flip the side of the arrow aboutwhich the text displays by selecting the dimension, right-clicking, andselecting Flip Text.

• Move Item to View – Move dimensions from one drawing view to another.You can select the item to move, then either right-click and select Move Itemto View, or click Move to View from the Edit group in the Annotate tab.

• Edit Attachment – Specify a new attachment position for certaindimensions, such as a radius dimension. The available new attachmentpositions highlight in all drawing views and enable you to select a newsurface or edge. To edit the attachment, select the dimension, thenright-click and select Edit Attachment, or click Attachment from theEdit group in the Annotate tab.


PROCEDURE - Manipulating Dimensions


Drawing_Details\Dimensions_ManipulateMANIPULATE_DIMS.DRW

Task 1: Manipulate dimensions in a drawing.


drawing ribbon.3. In the top view, select the 51

dimension.• Cursor over the dimension textand drag to move both thedimension and text.

• Press SHIFT, cursor over thedimension text, and drag thedimension downward until itsnaps to the center.

• Cursor over the dimensionleader lines and drag to movethe entire dimension left orright.

• Cursor over the lower-leftwitness line endpoint and dragthe handle to the right to movethe witness line until it nolonger touches the model.

4. With the 51 dimension stillselected, right-click and selectFlip Arrows, as shown.

5. Right-click and select FlipArrows to flip them back.


6. With the 51 dimension stillselected, press CTRL and selectthe 33 dimension.

7. Right-click and select AlignDimensions.

8. Cursor over the witness lines andmove the dimensions until theyare properly centered betweenthe other two dimensions.

9. In the top view, select the 12.65diameter dimension.

10. Cursor over the dimension textand drag to move both thedimension and text.

11. Press SHIFT, cursor over thedimension text, and drag thedimension to the left of its leader.

12. Right-click and select FlipArrows.

13. Right-click and select Flip Text.

14. In the front view, select the 12.65diameter dimension.

15. Click Move to View from theEdit group.

16. Select the top view.

17. In the front view, select the R22dimension.

18. Right-click and select FlipArrows.

19. Right-click and select FlipArrows two more times.

20. Move the dimension and textupward until it snaps to the snapline.



Creating Driven DimensionsYou can create additional dimensions within a drawing, asneeded, if a dimension is not available to be shown or ascompany standards dictate.

• Driven dimension types include:– Linear– Angular– Radial/Diameter– Point-Point

• Add additional text:– Prefix– Suffix

Figure 2 – Viewing CreatedDimension Types

Figure 1 – Created Dimensionsversus Shown Dimensions

Creating Driven DimensionsA driven dimension is created by the user. This type of dimension reports avalue based upon the references selected when the dimension is created.The dimension value is driven by the geometry selected, and therefore it isnot possible to modify the value of a driven dimension. A driven dimensiondoes not pass back to the model; it appears only within the drawing. Acreated dimension displays in the drawing tree differently than that of ashown dimension. In Figure 1, the dimensions in the front view are createddimensions, while the dimensions in the top view are shown dimensions.

You can create a Standard driven dimension by selecting Dimension - NewReferences from the Dimension types drop-down menu in the Annotatetab, or by right-clicking and selecting Dimension - New References. Thesystem creates a dimension based upon one or two selected references,similar to how you create dimensions in Sketcher. The dimension's witnesslines automatically clip to their selected references.


Driven Dimension TypesStandard driven dimension types include linear, angular, radial, diameter, orpoint-point dimensions.

When creating a driven dimension, you can select an edge, edge and point,two points, or a vertex. You can further filter which entities the dimensionattaches to using the following attach type menu commands in the menumanager:

• On Entity – Attaches the dimension to the entity at the pick point, accordingto the rules of creating regular dimensions.

• On Surface – Attaches the dimension to the location selected on a surface.• Midpoint – Attaches the dimension to the midpoint of the selected entity.• Center – Attaches the dimension to the center of a circular edge. Circularedges include circular geometry, such as holes, rounds, curves, andsurfaces, and circular draft entities.

• Intersect – Attaches the dimension to the closest intersection point of twoselected entities.

• Make Line – References the current X and Y-axes in the orientation ofthe model view.

Depending upon the selected references, you may have to further specify thetype of dimension to be created. For example, you may be asked to specifywhether the dimension you create is to be Horizontal, Vertical, Slanted,Parallel, or Normal to the selected references. If your selected referencesare arcs or circles, you must specify whether the dimension is to be createdbetween the arc Centers, Tangent, or Concentric.

Adding Prefix and Suffix TextYou can add additional text to a dimension. Text can be added as a prefix ora suffix to the dimension value. For example, if a radius dimension is typicalof all radii on the part, you can add the suffix TYP to the dimension.


PROCEDURE - Creating Driven Dimensions


Drawing_Details\Dimensions_Driven DRIVEN_DIMS.DRW

Task 1: Create a driven dimension in a drawing.


drawing ribbon.3. Navigate to the top view in sheet

1.4. Notice the 14 dimension that

locates the holes from the centerof the model. Manufacturingrequires a dimension from themodel edge.

5. Select the unwanted 14dimension, right-click, andselect Properties.

6. In the Dimension Propertiesdialog box, select the Displaytab.• In the Suffix field, type REF.• Click OK.

You could also erase ordelete the dimension ratherthan specifying it as areference dimension.

7. Select Dimension - NewReferences from theDimension types drop-downmenu in the Annotations group.

8. Select the right edge of the blockand select the hole edge.


9. Middle-click to place the 19dimension.

10. Click Center from the menumanager.

11. Click Return from the menumanager.

12. In the drawing tree, expand theAnnotations node of the topdrawing view.• Select dimension ad55, ifnecessary.

• Notice that both the dimensionformat and symbol aredifferent.



Inserting NotesYou can insert notes on a drawing with or without leaders thatcan contain dimensions.

Figure 1 – Note with No Leader

• Note types include:– No Leader– With Leader– ISO Leader– On Item– Offset

• Specify Leader Attach Type:– On Entity– On Surface– Free Point– Midpoint– Intersect

Figure 2 – Note with a Leader

Inserting NotesYou can insert notes on a drawing to convey additional information. Forexample, you can insert a note stating that all sharp edges must be broken,as shown in Figure 1.The following types of notes can be inserted:• No Leader — Creates a free note.• With Leader — Creates a note with a leader.• ISO Leader — Creates a note with an ISO leader.• On Item — Creates a note directly attached to an edge, surface, or datumpoint.

• Offset — Creates a note relative to a detail entity. If the detail entity ismoved, the note moves with it.

Notes can be created horizontally, vertically, or at an angle, and you canspecify the justification as Left, Center, or Right.When you specify that the note has a leader, the following leader attachtypes are available:• On Entity — Attaches the leader to selected geometry in a drawing view.• On Surface — Attaches the leader to a selected location on the surface ofa drawing view.

• Free Point — Attaches the leader to a location on the screen that you select.• Midpoint — Attaches the leader to the midpoint of a specified entity.


• Intersect — Attaches the leader to the intersection of two entities.You can also specify the appearance of the attach point of the leader.Options include arrow head, dot, filled dot, no arrow, slash, integral, box, filledbox, double arrow, target, half arrow, and triangle. In Figure 2, the note wascreated with an arrow head leader.

Placing NotesWhen you proceed to place a note in the drawing, the Select Point dialog boxdisplays. This dialog box enables you to specify the reference type to whichyou snap the note. Options include:

• Free Point — Enables you to select a free point on the drawing.

• Absolute Coordinates — Enables you to specify absolute coordinatesto locate the note.

• Relative Coordinates — Enables you to specify relative coordinates tolocate the note.

• Object or Entity — Enables you to select a point on a drawing objector entity.

• Vertex —Enables you to select the vertex on a drawing object or entity.


PROCEDURE - Inserting Notes


Drawing_Details\Notes_Inserting NOTES.DRW

Task 1: Insert notes in a drawing.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.2. In the ribbon, select the

Annotate tab.3. Click Note from the

Annotations group.4. In the menu manager, clickWith

Leader > Make Note > OnSurface > Arrow Head.

5. Select the cylindrical cut on the3-D view.

6. Click Done from the menumanager.

7. Click on the drawing to specifythe location for the note.

8. In the input window, typeCYLINDER SURFACE.

9. Press ENTER twice to completethe note.



11. In the menu manager, click NoLeader > Make Note.

12. Click below the 3-D view tospecify the note location.

13. In the input window, type BREAKALL SHARP EDGES.

14. Press ENTER twice to completethe note.

15. Click Done/Return from themenu manager.



Analyzing Drawing AssociativityDue to Creo Parametric's bi-directional associativity, a changemade to a model automatically updates in a drawing and viceversa.

• Examples of drawing associativityinclude:– BOM tables update based

on added/removed assemblycomponents.

– Drawing views and showndimensions update based onmodel modifications.

– A modified shown drawingdimension automaticallyupdates in the model.

Figure 1 – BOM and DrawingView Associativity

Figure 2 – Model and Drawing Associativity

Analyzing Drawing AssociativityDue to Creo Parametric's bi-directional associativity, a change made to amodel automatically updates in a drawing and vice versa. Examples ofdrawing associativity include the following:

• If components are added or removed from an assembly, the BOM table inthe assembly drawing automatically updates to reflect the new quantities.

• If a dimension is modified in a model, the matching shown drawingdimension is automatically updated along with the drawing view geometry.

• If a shown drawing dimension is modified, the dimension in the model, aswell as its geometry, updates automatically.

Depending on your Creo Parametric settings, it may be necessary to clickUpdate Sheets from the Update group of the Review tab to refresh thedisplay of all views in the active drawing sheet to view a change made at the


model level. You can press CTRL and select multiple tabs across the bottomof the graphics window. If you then click Update Sheets , all of the viewsin each of the selected drawing sheets refresh.


PROCEDURE - Analyzing Drawing Associativity


Drawing\Associativity ASSOCIATIVITY.DRW

Task 1: Update the pattern member quantity in VALVE.ASM to view thedrawing associativity.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.2. Notice in the BOM table that the BOLT.PRT quantity is 6.3. In the model tree, expand Pattern 1 of BOLT.PRT and notice that

there are 4 pattern members.4. In the model tree, right-click VALVE.ASM and select Open.

5. Click Settings and select Tree Filters.6. In the Model Tree Items dialog box, select the Features check box

and click OK.

7. In the model tree, expandCOVER.PRT.• Right-click Pattern (Hole) andselect Edit.

• Zoom in and edit the numberof pattern members from 4 to3.

• Click Regenerate .

8. Click Windows and selectASSOCIATIVITY.DRW to returnto the drawing.

9. Select the Review tab from thedrawing ribbon.

10. Press CTRL and select Sheet 1,Sheet 2, and Sheet 3 from thesheet tabs area.

11. Click Update Sheets fromthe Update group.

12. Notice that the BOM quantity ofBOLT.PRT has updated and thatthe view has changed as well.


Task 2: Edit the dimension length to view the associativity in the drawinggeometry and model.


2. In the front view, select the 76dimension.

3. Double-click the 76 dimensionand edit it to 102.• Click OK.

4. Click Regenerate Active Modelfrom the Update group.

5. Notice that the drawing viewgeometry has updated.

6. In the model tree, right-clickARM.PRT and select Open.

7. Right-click Protrusion id 21 andselect Edit.

8. Edit the length from 102 to 84.9. Click in the background twice to

de-select all geometry.

10. Click Windows and selectASSOCIATIVITY.DRW to returnto the drawing.

11. Notice that the dimension anddrawing view geometry haveupdated to the new length value.



Publishing DrawingsYou can create a hard copy deliverable of your drawing.

• Send the drawing to aprinter or plotter.

• Export the drawing to adifferent electronic format.

• You can print preview thedrawing.

Figure 1 – Previewing the Drawing

Figure 2 – Export Setup Tab in the Ribbon

Printing and Previewing DrawingsTo create a hard copy deliverable of your drawing, you can click File > Print> Print or File > Print > Quick Print. The Print option launches the PrinterConfiguration dialog box, enabling you to send the drawing to a printer orplotter. The Quick Print option opens the Microsoft Print Manager, enablingyou to send the drawing to a networked Windows printer.You can also click File > Print > Print Settings / Preview to preview andmodify settings before printing.

When you enter Print Preview mode, the Navigator paneautomatically closes, and when you close Print Preview, theNavigator pane automatically restores.

Print Preview creates an accurate preview of the selected output type. Ittakes into account pen table mapping, line styles, line priorities, printermargins, and other settings. To preview the output, you can click Previewfrom the Print Preview tab in the ribbon.You can also modify the default settings for the specified publish option byclicking Settings in the Print Preview tab of the ribbon. Once you are


satisfied with the display of the drawing in Print Preview, you can click Print

directly from the Print Preview tab.

Exporting DrawingsYou can also export the drawing to one of many different formats by clickingFile > Save As > Export. The following electronic file formats are available:

• DXF • PDF • Medusa

• IGES • STEP • DWG

• Stheno • CGM • TIFF

Of course, any of these exported file formats can also be sent to a printer togenerate a hard copy. You can also modify the export settings by clickingSettings from the Configure group in the Export Setup tab of the ribbon.

You can also click File > Save As > Quick Export (*.XXX) toquickly export a copy of the drawing in the same format used in theprevious export. The XXX denotes the file format to be created.


PROCEDURE - Publishing Drawings


Drawing\Publish PUBLISH.DRW

Task 1: Experiment with publishing drawings.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.2. Click File > Print > Print

Settings / Preview.3. Notice that the Navigator pane

automatically collapsed.

4. Click Preview from the Finishgroup.

5. Click Close Preview fromthe Finish group.

6. Click Close Print Preview .

7. Click File > Save As > Export.8. Select the TIFF export option.

9. Click Export .10. In the Save a Copy dialog box, accept the defaults and click OK.11. Click Yes in the Confirmation dialog box.

12. Select the PDF export option.

13. Click Settings .14. In the PDF Export Settings dialog box, select Current for the Sheets

to be exported.• Clear the Open file in Acrobat Reader check box.• Click OK.

15. Click Export from the Finish group.16. In the Save a Copy dialog box, accept the defaults and click OK.

17. Click Close Export Setup .

18. Click File > Save As > Quick Export (*.PDF).19. Click OK in the dialog box.




Module24Using Layers

Module OverviewLayers organize model items, such as features, datum planes, assemblyparts, and even other layers, enabling you to perform operations on the itemscollectively. Layers enable you to simplify geometry selection by temporarilyhiding or displaying specific model features or assembly components inthe graphics window. You can also use layers to perform actions, such assimultaneously suppressing all the items in a layer.

ObjectivesAfter completing this module, you will be able to:• Understand layers.• Create and manage layers.• Create layer states.• Utilize layers in part models and assembly models.


Understanding LayersA layer is a container object that enables you to organizefeatures, components, and even other layers.

• Managed in layer tree• Uses include:– Collectively perform operations

♦ Hide/Unhide♦ Select

– Model management• Layer types include:– Default– Automatic– User-created

Figure 2 – Viewing the Layer Tree

Figure 1 – Hiding Items using Layers

Understanding LayersA layer is a container object that enables you to organize features, assemblyparts, and even other layers. You can create as many layers as you needand associate items with more than one layer.

Layer UsesA layer enables you to collectively perform operations on items in a layer.Layers are most often used from a model management standpoint to controlthe amount of information displayed in the graphics window. This helps youto more easily perform tasks.

The two most common operations performed on items on a layer include:

• Hiding and Unhiding Layers — You can hide and unhide layers in parts andassemblies. This hides or unhides the items on the layer. In Figure 1,


the datum axes layer has been hidden, preventing you from viewing anydatum axes on the model.Hiding items on a layer seems similar to suppressing those same items.However, there are significant differences:– When you suppress an item, it is removed from the regeneration cycle of

the model, whereas hiding an item simply removes it from the graphicswindow.

– A hidden item is included in Creo Parametric calculations, such as massproperties analyses. A suppressed item is not included in calculations.

• Selecting Items on the Layer — Layers enable you to easily selectmultiple items, rather than selecting them individually. Mass selection is abeneficial, timesaving approach to follow in certain circumstances, such asneeding to select 82 out of 100 part axes.Once the items in a layer are selected, you can perform operations on them.Typical operations include deleting those items or suppressing/resumingthem. However, you could also edit their display or add them to a simplifiedrepresentation.

The Layer TreeYou use the layer tree to add items to layers and perform operations on layers.You can access the layer tree by selecting the View tab and clicking Layers

from the Visibility group. This toggles on the layer tree. Clicking the icon

again toggles off the layer tree. You can also click Show from the topof the model tree and select Layer Tree. Figure 2 displays the layer tree.

Layer TypesThere are three types of layers that you can create in a model:

• Default — Layers can be included in part and assembly templates. If yourcompany uses part and assembly templates containing default layers,Creo Parametric automatically associates different features of a model tospecific default layers. When using default layers, all parts have the sameinitial set of default layers. This enables you to use cascading layer controlat the assembly level since each model’s layers are identically named.

• Automatic — When you hide items in the model tree, those hidden itemsare automatically added to the Hidden Items Layer.

• User-Created — You can create your own layers in a model and add itemsto them manually.


Creating and Managing LayersYou can create layers manually by naming the layer andselecting geometry items or components to add from the modeltree or the graphics window.

• Layer Properties:– Name– Contents– Rules

• Different icons for layers with orwithout rules

• Set the Active Layer• Status– Save– Reset– Warning Figure 1 – Layer Properties

Dialog Box

Figure 2 – Layer with No Rule Figure 3 – Layer Created with Rule

Creating and Managing LayersYou can create layers manually by naming the layer and selecting geometryitems or components to add from the model tree or the graphics window. Thistype of layer is useful for specific tasks. As a best practice, it is recommendedthat you name the layer to enable other designers to recognize the task.

When you create a layer, the Layer Properties dialog box displays, as shownin Figure 1. The dialog box displays the following information:

• Name — This is the name of the layer.• Contents — The Contents tab displays which items are included orexcluded from the layer. Items that are included on the layer are displayedwith a green plus (+) symbol in the Status column, while items that areexcluded from the layer are displayed with a red minus (–) symbol in theStatus column. When selected, items are included on the layer if theInclude button is turned on, while items are excluded from the layer if theExclude button is turned on.

• Rules — The Rules tab displays any applicable rules that have beendefined for the layer. Rules enable you to create layers based upondefined criteria. To create a layer based on a rule, simply create a layer,name it, and define the rule. You can either define the rule within the LayerProperties dialog box, or you can save a rule from the Search Tool. In


addition to its usefulness in specific tasks, this type of layer is excellentwhen creating templates.Layers that are created with rules display with a different icon than thoselayers that were created without rules. In Figure 2, the layer does notcontain rules, while the layer in Figure 3 was created with a rule.

The Layer Properties dialog box also displays when you view the layerproperties of any existing layer by selecting the layer, right-clicking, andselecting Layer Properties.

You may also decide to set a layer as the active layer. When a layer is set asthe active layer, all subsequently created features are automatically placedon the active layer. Note that a layer containing rules cannot be set as theactive layer.

Understanding Layer StatusWhenever you hide or unhide a layer, you are modifying the layer status forthat model. This new layer status is not automatically saved, even when themodel is saved. Thus, it is necessary to save the layer status if you wish toretain it for the next time the model is opened. You can save the layer statusby selecting the View tab and selecting Save Status from the Statustypes drop-down menu in the Visibility group. You can also right-click in thelayer tree and select Save Status.

If you save a model and forget to save the layer status, themessage log alerts you with a warning message, as shown here:

.

You can also reset the layer status to the last saved status by selecting theView tab and selecting Reset Status from the Status types drop-downmenu in the Visibility group, or by right-clicking in the layer tree and selectingReset Status.


Utilizing Layers in Part ModelsWhen you hide a layer, only the non-solid geometry from thefeature items added to the layer are hidden in the graphicswindow.

• Add almost any featureto a layer.

• Only non-solid geometryis hidden.– Datum features– Surfaces

Figure 1 – Hiding a Layer with Default Datums

Figure 2 – Hiding a Layer with Holes

Utilizing Layers in Part ModelsYou can add almost any feature item in a part to a layer. However, when youhide the layer, only the non-solid geometry from the feature items added tothe layer, such as datum features and surfaces, are hidden. For example, ifyou add a hole feature to a layer and hide the layer, as shown in Figure 2,the hole geometry still displays in the graphics window, but the hole axesassociated with the hole feature are hidden.


PROCEDURE - Utilizing Layers in Part Models


View\Layers_Part LAYER.PRT

Task 1: Use layers within a part model.



5. In the model tree, expandExtrude 4.• Press CTRL, select the fiveinternal datum features,right-click, and select Hide.


Show and select LayerTree.

7. Expand the Hidden Items layer.Notice that the five internaldatum features you hid are nowon this layer.

8. Select the 01__PRT_DEF_DTM_PLN layer, right-click, andselect Hide.

9. Click Repaint .

10. Right-click in the layer tree andselect New Layer.• Type OTHER_DATUMS asthe Name.

• Select DTM1 and A_1 as itemsto add and click OK.

• Right-click the new layer andselect Hide.

• Click Repaint .


11. Right-click in the layer tree andselect New Layer.• Type TOP_HOLES as theName.

• Select the four holes on top ofthe model and click OK.


• Click Repaint .

12. In the layer tree, right-click theTOP_HOLES layer and selectSelect Items.

13. Right-click in the graphicswindow and select Suppress.

14. Click OK in the Suppress dialogbox.

15. Click the Operations groupdrop-down menu and selectResume > Resume All.

16. Click Save and click OK.17. Notice the warning in the

Message Log.

18. Select the View tab from the ribbon.

19. From the Visibility group, select Save Status from the Statustypes drop-down menu.

20. Click Save and click OK.21. Notice that the warning did not display in the Message Log this time.




Creating Layer StatesLayer states can be used to toggle between different layerdisplays.

Layer States Example:

• Create a Layer State in the viewmanager

• Hide/Unhide Layers• Save updated Layer State

Figure 1 – View Manager

Figure 2 – Layer_State001 Figure 3 – Layer_State003

Creating Layer StatesYou create Layer States in the view manager to record the hide/unhide statusfor all layers in a model. You can create an initial layer state upon opening amodel, and then create different states to quickly toggle between the layerdisplays.

Remember, the action of hiding a feature or component actually places theitem on the Hidden Items layer. Therefore, you can use layer states withhidden items without accessing the layer tree.

Layer states apply to any item that may be placed on a layer, such as:

• Features• Components• Drawing Views and Detail Items


PROCEDURE - Creating Layer States


View\Layer-States LAYER_STATES.ASM

Task 1: Create layer states in an assembly.



3. Select the Layers tab.4. Click New and press ENTER to

create Layer_State001.

5. Click New from the ViewManager, and press ENTER tocreate Layer_State002.

6. Press CTRL and selectPISTON.PRT andPISTON_PIN.PRT from themodel tree.

7. Right-click and select Hide.8. In the view manager, right-click

Layer_State002 and selectSave.

9. Click OK.

10. Double-click Layer_State001 to enable it.

Task 2: Create layer states in a part.

1. Select CONNECTING_ROD.PRT from the model tree.

2. Right-click and select Open.

3. Enable Plane Display .

4. Click View Manager from the In Graphics toolbar.5. Select the Layers tab.6. Click New and press ENTER to create Layer_State001.


7. Click New from the viewmanager and press ENTER tocreate Layer_State002.

8. Select DTM3 from the modeltree.

9. Right-click and select Hide.10. Right-click Layer_State002 and

select Save.11. Click OK.

12. Click New from the viewmanager and press ENTER tocreate Layer_State003.


14. Click Layers from theVisibility group.

15. Select the 01__PRT_DEF_DTM_PLN layer.

16. Right-click and select Hide.17. Right-click Layer_State003 and

select Save.18. Click OK.

19. Click Repaint from the InGraphics toolbar.

20. Double-click Layer_State002 to enable it.21. Double-click Layer_State001 to enable it.



Utilizing Layers in Assembly ModelsUnlike parts, you can add components to layers in an assemblyand hide the geometry of those components.

• Add almost any feature to alayer.– Only non-solid geometry is

hidden.• Add assembly components.– Solid geometry is hidden.

• Cascading layer controlavailable for layers of samename.

• Placing external items options.

Figure 1 – Cascading Layer Control

Figure 2 – Hiding a Layer with Assembly Components

Utilizing Layers in Assembly ModelsSimilar to parts, you can hide non-solid geometry of assembly featuresincluding assembly datum features and surfaces. For example, if you createan assembly level hole, add it to a layer, and then hide the layer, the holegeometry still displays, while the hole axis is hidden.

Unlike parts, you can add components to layers in an assembly. If you addcomponents to a layer and then hide the layer, the component geometryhides. In Figure 2, the nut and bolt components were added to theHARDWARE layer and hidden. Notice that the components are removedfrom the display in the graphics window.

Cascading Layer Control in AssembliesLayers in assemblies provide cascading control. You can control a part levellayer from an assembly if the part and assembly both contain a layer of thesame name. When this circumstance occurs, you can edit the layer propertiesand layer display of each component individually, as shown in Figure 1.

The layer tree also displays a different layer icon for the commonlayer.


PROCEDURE - Utilizing Layers in Assembly Models


View\Layers_Utilize-Assembly LAYER.ASM

Task 1: Use layers in assemblies.



5. Click Show from themodel tree and select LayerTree.

6. Expand the Hidden Items layer.Notice that there are threecomponents in this layer thatcontain hidden items.

7. Expand each of these componentlayers.

8. Expand the 01___PRT_DEF_DTM_PLN layer.• Press CTRL and select the inBOLT.PRT and in NUT.PRTlayers, right-click, and selectHide.

9. Click Repaint .

10. In the layer tree, select the01__ASM_DEF_DTM_PLNlayer, right-click, and selectHide.

11. Click Repaint .


12. Right-click in the layer tree andselect New Layer.• Type HARDWARE as theName.

• Select the NUT.PRT andBOLT.PRT components andclick OK.


• Click Repaint .

13. Right-click the HARDWARElayer and select Unhide.

14. Click Repaint .

15. In the layer tree, right-click theHARDWARE layer and selectSelect Items.

16. Click the Model Display groupdrop-down menu and selectComponent Display Style >Transparent.

17. Click Save from the QuickAccess toolbar and click OK.

18. Notice the warning in theMessage Log.

19. Select the View tab from the ribbon.

20. Select Save Status from the Status types drop-down menu inthe Visibility group.

21. Click Save from the Quick Access toolbar and click OK.22. Notice that the warning does not display in the Message Log this time.




Module25Investigating Parent/Child Relationships

Module OverviewIn a model, the order in which features are created and the referencesthat they are provided create hierarchical relationships. These are calledparent/child relationships and they determine feature interaction.

In this module, you learn about parent/child relationships and how to viewinformation about your models.

ObjectivesAfter completing this module, you will be able to:• Understand parent/child relationships.• View part and assembly parent/child information.• View model, feature, and component information.


Understanding Parent/Child RelationshipsThe parent/child relationship is one of the most powerful aspectsof Creo Parametric and parametric modeling in general.

• Defining parent/child relationships.• Effects of parent/childrelationships when editing.

• How parent/child relationships arecreated.

Figure 1 – Viewing KEY_HANDLE.PRT

Figure 2 – Parent/Child RelationshipFlowchart

Defining Parent/Child RelationshipsYou can use various types of Creo Parametric features as building blocksin the progressive creation of solid parts. Certain features, by necessity,precede other more dependent features in the design process. Thosedependent features rely on the previously defined features for dimensionaland geometric references. This is known as a parent/child relationship.

The parent/child relationship is one of the most powerful aspects of CreoParametric and parametric modeling in general. This relationship servesan important role in propagating changes across the model to maintain thedesign intent. After a parent feature in a part is modified, all children aredynamically updated to reflect the changes in the parent feature. If yousuppress or delete a parent feature, Creo Parametric prompts you for anaction pertaining to the related children. You can also minimize the cases ofunnecessary or unintended parent/child relationships.

It is therefore essential to reference the desired geometry when creatingfeature dimensions so Creo Parametric can correctly propagate designchanges throughout the model. When working with parent/child relationships,it can be helpful to remember that parent features can exist without childfeatures. However, child features cannot exist without their parents.

Effects of Parent/Child Relationships When EditingConsider the impact of parent/child relationships on each of the followingediting functions:


• Edit – Children of the feature or component update as edits areregenerated.

• Edit Definition – Enables you to modify the parent of the feature orcomponent.

• Suppress/Resume – Enables you to remove a feature or component, andits children, from the graphics window and regeneration cycle.

• Delete – Deletes all children of the selected feature or component bydefault. You can also suspend the children, and then redefine each in turn.

• Hide/Unhide – Does not affect parent/child relationships.

How Parent/Child Relationships are CreatedConsider the impact of parent/child relationships on each of the followingsketching functions:• Sketch Plane and Orientation Reference Plane – Are parents to the sketchfeature.

• Sketcher References – Additional sketcher references, including selectedreferences, dimension references, and constraint references, are parentsto the sketch feature. Constraints and dimensions can create relationshipsbetween the constrained entity and its reference. Hence, the constrainedentity becomes a child of the referenced feature.

Consider the impact of parent/child relationships on each of the followingfeature and tools functions:• Selected References – The edges or surfaces selected for rounds andchamfers become parents to the rounds and chamfers. A depth referenceselected for a sketch-based feature becomes a parent to the sketch-basedfeature. Similarly, an axis of revolution specified for a Revolve featurebecomes a parent to the revolve feature.

• Selected Sketch – An external sketch selected for a sketch-based feature,such as an Extrude feature, becomes a parent to the Extrude feature. Asketch-based feature that contains an internal sketch inherits all sketchreferences as its own, including sketch plane, reference plane, references,constraints, and dimensions. A sketch-based feature that containsembedded datum features inherits all datum references as its own.

Consider the impact of parent/child relationships on each of the followingassembly functions:• Templates – Similar to part templates, assembly templates do not createparent/child relationships between the template and the assembly file.

• Constraint References – Existing models that are referenced whenassembling components with constraints or connections become parents tothe components being assembled. Assembly models can also be childrenif they are assembled to other assembly models.

Consider the impact of parent/child relationships on each of the followingdrawing functions:• Templates – Are similar to part and assembly templates because theydo not create a parent/child relationship between the template and thedrawing file.

• Views – Are children to either the saved views in the part or to the referenceorientations selected. Also, drawing views are children to other views. For


example, a projection view is a child to the general view from which it wasprojected. Finally, a drawing view is a child to the source model.

• Details – Are generally children to their respective models. Examples ofdrawing details include dimensions, parametric notes, and BOM tables.


Viewing Part Parent/Child InformationYou can use the Reference Viewer to view parent/childrelationships between features in a part model.

• Current Object• Parents• Children• Highlight entities inmodel:– Features– References

Figure 1 – Full PathBetween Features Figure 2 – Reference Viewer Graph

Viewing Part Parent/Child InformationYou can view parent/child relationships of features in a part model by usingthe Reference viewer. You can launch the Reference Viewer by selectingthe desired feature and then either clicking Reference Viewer fromthe Investigate group in the Tools tab or right-clicking and selecting Info> Reference Viewer.

The Reference Viewer displays a graph of parent/child relationships for agiven feature. This graph is broken down into three columns. From left toright, these columns are:

• Parents – Displays the Parents for the currently selected feature.• Current Object – Displays the currently selected feature for which you wishto view parent/child relationships.

• Children – Displays the Children of the currently selected feature.The graph of parent/child relationships in the Reference Viewer is interactivewith the model in the graphics window:

• You can cursor over the feature node to highlight it on the model.• You can expand the feature nodes to view the list of references that createsthe parent/child relationships. You can also select the reference to seeit highlight in the model. You can also see which feature the referenceis a parent to, as it highlights the Reference Type arrow to the properchild feature node in the graph. In Figure 2, datum axis A_7 creates aparent/child relationship between the Hole_2 and Hole_3 features.


Obtaining Full Path Information Between FeaturesYou can display the full parent/child relationship path between two features intree representation by selecting the Reference Type arrow, then right-clickingand selecting Display Full Path. For example, the graph in Figure 1 displaysthe full chain of parent/child relationships between the Hole 2 and Hole 3features. It shows that datum axis A_7 is a child to Hole 2, which is a childback to the part. It also shows that datum axis A_7 is a parent to Hole 3.

Switching the Current ObjectYou can switch which feature is the current object either by double-clicking thedesired feature node in the graph, right-clicking it and selecting Set as current,or by clicking Actions > Set as current from the Reference Viewer dialog boxmenu. You can also revert back to the previously selected Current Object byclicking Use Previous at the top of the graph or clicking the down arrow nextto it to view the history of Current Objects and selecting an earlier one.


PROCEDURE - Viewing Part Parent/Child Information


Info\Part_Parent-Child PART_PC.PRT

Task 1: View Parent and Child information for features using the ReferenceViewer.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.2. Select Hole 2 from the model.3. In the ribbon, select the Tools

tab.

4. Click Reference Viewer fromthe Investigate group.

5. Notice that the reference graphdisplays the current object, Hole2, in the middle, that object'sParents on the left, and thatobject's Children on the right.

6. Cursor over each node in theReference Viewer to highlight therespective feature on the model.

7. Click the down arrows on eachParent node to view its entities.

8. Select each of these entities tohighlight them on the model.

9. Click the down arrows on theCurrent Object to view its entities.

10. In the Reference Viewer, selectthe arrow leading to the Hole3 node, right-click, and selectDisplay Full Path.

11. Notice that Hole 3 refers todatum axis A_7 in Hole 2.

12. Click Close in the Full PathDisplay dialog box.


13. In the Reference Viewer,right-click the Hole 3 node andselect Set as current.• Notice that the graph has nowupdated.

• Notice the Parents specifiedfor the Hole 3 feature.

• Notice the Children specifiedfor the Hole 3 feature.

14. Click Close in the ReferenceViewer dialog box.

15. Edit the definition of Hole 3.16. Notice that the 14 dimension

is dimensioned to datum axisA_7 in Hole 2. This dimensionestablished the parent/childrelationship.

17. Click Complete Feature fromthe Hole dashboard.



Viewing Assembly Parent/Child InformationYou can use the Reference Viewer to view parent/childrelationships between components in an assembly.

• Current Object• Parents• Children• Highlight entities inmodel:– Components– Features– References

• Set Current:– Model– Component

Placement– Both

Figure 2 – Full PathBetween Components

Figure 1 – Reference Viewer: Modelas Current Object

Figure 3 – Reference Viewer: ComponentPlacement as Current Object

Viewing Assembly Parent/Child InformationYou can view parent/child relationships of components or their features in anassembly using the Reference Viewer. You can launch the Reference Viewerby selecting the desired component and then either clicking ReferenceViewer from the Investigate group in the Tools tab or right-clicking andselecting Info > Reference Viewer.

Reference Viewer SectionsThe Reference Viewer displays a graph of parent/child relationships for agiven component or that component's features. This graph is broken downinto three columns. From left to right, the columns are as follows:

• Parents — Displays the Parents of the currently selected component.• Current Object — Displays the currently selected component for which youwish to view parent/child relationships.

• Children — Displays the Children of the currently selected component.The features or components displayed in the Reference Viewer dependupon the Reference Types specified. By default, the Regular, Placement,


Relation, and System reference types display. The Reference Type to displayComponents in a path does not display by default.

Reference Viewer FunctionalityThe Reference Viewer can be utilized in one of three ways, depending uponthe type of information you wish to view:

• Model as Current Object — Displays parent/child relationships forreferences in the context of the solid model. In Figure 1, the parent/childrelationships display in the context of the model. As such, the assembly isa child to the part since the assembly fails if it cannot find the part.

• Component Placement as Current Object — Displays parent/childrelationships for assembly level or placement references. Theserelationships are described in the context of the assembly, as shownin Figure 3. Note that not only are the components shown as parentsand children, but the components' features that create the parent/childrelationships are shown as well.

• Both as Current Object — Displays parent/child relationships for referencesin the context of both the solid model and the assembly level.

The graph of parent/child relationships in the Reference Viewer is interactivewith the assembly in the graphics window:

• You can cursor over the component or feature node to highlight it on themodel.

• You can expand the component or feature nodes to view the list ofreferences that creates the parent/child relationships shown. You can alsoselect these references to highlight them in the model.

Obtaining Full Path Information Between ComponentsYou can display the full parent/child relationship path between twocomponents in tree representation by selecting the Reference Type arrowbetween two components, then right-clicking and selecting Display FullPath, as shown in Figure 2. For example, the graph in Figure 2 displaysthe full chain of parent/child relationships between the BOLT.PRT andPLATE.PRT components. It shows that Surface id 55 is a child to Extrude 1in PLATE.PRT, which is a child of assembly ASSY_PC.ASM. It also showsthat the BOLT.PRT is assembled to Surface id 55 in PLATE.PRT.

Switching the Current ObjectYou can switch which feature or component is the current object eitherby double-clicking the desired feature node or component in the graph,right-clicking it and selecting Set as current, or by clicking Actions > Set ascurrent from the Reference Viewer dialog box menu. You can also revertback to the previously selected Current Object by clicking Use Previous atthe top of the graph or by clicking the down arrow next to it to view the historyof Current Objects and selecting an earlier one.


PROCEDURE - Viewing Assembly Parent/ChildInformation


Info\Assembly_Parent-Child ASSY_PC.ASM

Task 1: View Parent and Child information for components using theReference Viewer.


PLATE.PRT and select Info >Reference Viewer.

3. In the Reference Viewer dialogbox, select the Components inpath check box as an additionalReference Type.

4. If necessary, widen both theReference Viewer dialog boxand the Parents column.

5. Click Model As Current Objectin the Reference Viewer

dialog box.6. Click the down arrows on the

Children assembly node to viewthe components.

7. Notice the two BOLT.PRTcomponents.

8. Cursor over each of theBOLT.PRT models to highlightthem in the model.

9. Click Component PlacementCurrent in the ReferenceViewer dialog box.

10. Notice that the graph updatesto now show PLATE.PRT as acomponent in the assembly, aswell as its Parents and Children.

11. Cursor over each node tohighlight the respective featuresand components on the model.


12. Click the down arrows on eachParent node to expand it andview its referenced entities.

13. Select each of these entities tohighlight them on the model.

14. In the Reference Viewer, selectthe arrow leading to the Comp id47 (BOLT.PRT) node, right-click,and select Display Full Path.• If necessary, edit the DisplayedFull Path to Surface id 55.

• Notice that BOLT.PRT isassembled to a surface inExtrude 1.

• Click Close.

15. In the Reference Viewer,right-click the Comp id 47(BOLT.PRT) node and selectSet as current.• Notice that the graph has nowupdated.

• Notice the Parents specified forthe Comp id 47 (BOLT.PRT)component.

• Cursor over Hole 2 inPLATE.PRT to highlight it.

• The BOLT.PRT is assembledinto this hole. Hence, thecomponent is a child to thehole.

• Click Close.



Viewing Model, Feature, and ComponentInformation• You can view the followinginformation:– Feature– Model– Component– Bill of Materials

Figure 1 – Viewing ModelInformation

Figure 2 – Viewing BOM InformationFigure 3 – Viewing Feature

Information

Viewing Model, Feature, and Component InformationYou can access the icons to view model, feature, and component informationeither in the Investigate group of the Tools tab or by right-clicking theappropriate item in the model tree or graphics window.When information is displayed about the item you have selected, the systemhelps you identify that item by displaying the following:• Name — Either the model, component, or feature name of the item youhave selected.

• Feature Number/Component Number — Displays the feature number orcomponent number in the model tree as it is found in the model tree.

• ID — The internal identification number that the system has assigned tothe item you select.

Understanding the Browser Information Window's ContentsThe information for the item you have selected is displayed in the Webbrowser window. The information is categorized, depending upon its type, forexample, Parents, Children, Feature List, and Dimensions.Because information is displayed in the Web browser window, there are manyclickable items that can be selected to yield even more information. Thefollowing items can be clicked on in the Web browser information window:


• Blue Links — Call out the name of something, such as a Feature Name orModel name. Clicking these blue links highlights the item in the model. Anitem that's name is a series of three dashes simply means that no name isgiven for that particular item.

• Dimensions — Dimensions are listed by their internal identification number.Clicking the dimension link highlights the dimension in the model.

• Highlight Feature — Highlights the feature in the model.

• Feature Info — Enables you to jump to information for that feature orcomponent.

Viewing Model and Feature Information in PartsWhen you view the model information for a part, the Web browser windowdisplays the following information:• Part Name — Displays the name of the model.• Unit Information — Displays the units in which the model was created,including Length, Mass, Force, Time, and Temperature.

• Feature List — Provides a list of features, similar to the model tree.When you view the feature information for a given feature in a model, theWeb browser window displays the following information:• Part Name, Feature Number, and Feature ID.• Parents, if any.• Children, if any.• Feature Elements — Displays the elements that comprise the feature.• Layers — Displays any layers that the feature is on, and the layer status.• Feature Dimensions — Displays all dimensions found in the feature.

Viewing Model, Component, and BOM Information in AssembliesWhen you view the model information for a component in an assembly, youmust select whether you want the information for the top-level assemblyor a component in the assembly. The Web browser window displays thefollowing information:• Part Name — Displays the name of the model.• Component Information — Displays a list of the assembled componentsand only displays when model information is displayed for the top-levelassembly.

• Feature List — Provides a list of features, similar to the model tree.When you view the component information for a component in an assembly,the Component Constraints dialog box displays the assembly constraintsused to assemble the component. You can highlight each constraint pair onthe model by selecting it in the dialog box. The Web browser window thendisplays the following:• Component Name, Parent Assembly, Component Number in Parentassembly, Feature Number, and Feature ID.

• Parents List — Any components in the assembly which are parents.• Children List — Any components in the assembly which are children.


When you view the Bill of Materials information for an assembly, the Webbrowser window displays the components found in the assembly, and theirquantities. You must specify whether the BOM is to be created for thetop-level assembly or a sub-assembly.


PROCEDURE - Viewing Model, Feature, and ComponentInformation


Info\Viewing ASSY_INFO.ASM

Task 1: View assembly information using Creo Parametric's tools.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.2. In the ribbon, select the Tools

tab.

3. Click Model from theInvestigate group

4. Click Apply > Close in the ModelInfo dialog box.

5. View the information thatdisplays in the Web browser.

6. Click Web Browser to closethe Web browser.

7. Click Component from theInvestigate group.

8. Select PLATE.PRT from themodel tree.

9. Notice the componentconstraints used to assemblethis component. Select theconstraints in the dialog box andnotice that the pair highlights inthe model.

10. Click Apply > Close in theComponent Constraints dialogbox to display the componentinformation for PLATE.PRT.


11. Click Bill of Materials fromthe Investigate group.

12. Verify that Top Level is selectedin the BOM dialog box and clickOK.

13. Notice that there are twoBOLT.PRT components in theassembly.

Task 2: View part information using Creo Parametric's tools.

1. In the model tree, right-clickPART_INFO.PRT and selectOpen.

2. In the ribbon, select the Toolstab.

3. Click Model from theInvestigate group.

4. Notice the model information forthe model.

5. Click Feature from theInvestigate group.

6. Select Hole 2 from the modeltree.

7. Click Model Tree to collapsethe model tree and leave theWeb browser open.

8. Arrange the model and Webbrowser window so you can seeboth.

9. Scroll up in the Featureinformation window to theParents section.

10. Click the link for Extrude 3.

11. Click Repaint from the InGraphics toolbar.


12. In the Children section of theFeature information, click theHole 3 link.

13. Click Repaint .

14. Click Feature Info next toChamfer 1.

15. Notice that the Featureinformation for the chamfernow displays. Also notice thatHole 3 is a parent to the chamfer.

16. Click Hole 3 to highlight it.

17. Click Model Tree to expandthe model tree window.



Module26Capturing and Managing Design Intent

Module OverviewNow that you understand parent/child relationships, you can learn to properlycapture and manage design intent in models. In this module, you learnthe tools available for modifying and capturing your design intent within allaspects of the modeling process. You also gain additional knowledge aboutselecting references that capture your design intent.

ObjectivesAfter completing this module, you will be able to:• Handle the children of deleted and suppressed items.• Reorder and insert features.• Redefine features and Sketches.• Capture design intent in Sketches, features, parts, and assemblies.


Handling Children of Deleted and SuppressedItemsIn Creo Parametric, you have three options for handling thechildren of suppressed or deleted items.

• Child handling options include:– Suppress/Delete– Suspend– Freeze

Figure 1 – Children Handling Dialog BoxFigure 2 – Suspending

Child Rounds

Figure 3 – Handling a Frozen Child Component

Handling Children of Deleted and Suppressed ItemsIf you attempt to suppress or delete an item that has children, the systemhighlights these child items in red. In Figure 1, the piston component isbeing suppressed, and the system highlights the piston pin and piston ringin red because they are children of the piston. In Figure 2, the two roundshighlighted in red are children of the round that is being suppressed.

The system also displays a Delete or Suppress dialog box. When you clickOptions in this dialog box, the system displays the Children Handling dialogbox, as shown in Figure 1. The Children Handling dialog box displays each ofthe child items highlighted in red. You have three different options availablefor handling these children, and each child can be handled independently:

• Suppress/Delete — When suppressing a parent, you can also suppress achild item, and when deleting a parent, you can also delete a child item. Ifthis is the desired option for all child items, you can click OK in the originalSuppress or Delete dialog box without having to consider the optionsavailable in the Children Handling dialog box.

• Suspend — Suppresses or deletes the parent, thus suspending the childitem's regeneration temporarily. Once the parent is suppressed or deleted,the suspended child item regenerates. This results in one of the following:


– The child item regenerates successfully. However, if the child item is afeature, it may have different geometry; if the child item is a component,it may be in a different position. In Figure 2, the two round children weresuspended. After the parent round was suppressed, these two childrounds successfully regenerated, although their geometry is different.

– The child item does not regenerate successfully. If this occurs, CreoParametric indicates the failure. You can then acknowledge and acceptthe failure or undo the changes. If you acknowledge the failure, you cancontinue to work normally, but you should ultimately fix the failure. Youcan fix the failure by modifying, suppressing, or deleting the child item,or by modifying another feature or part.

• Freeze — The Freeze option is available only for assembly components.Once the parent component is suppressed or deleted, the child componentis frozen, or locked, in 3-D space. Frozen components display in themodel tree with a special icon preceding their name. In the left image ofFigure 3, the PISTON_PIN.PRT component is frozen. In addition, anychild components of the frozen component display in the model tree with aslightly different icon that includes a small square.Frozen components must be redefined, and the missing assemblyplacement references must be replaced with valid references fromcomponents that still remain in the assembly. Once this is accomplished,the component is no longer frozen in the assembly. These unlockedcomponents are commonly referred to as thawed components, as shownin Figure 3.

Another method to temporarily thaw frozen components is todelete the placement constraint which has missing referencesand add a Fix constraint. The Fix constraint locks, or fixes,a component in its current orientation but retains it as fullyconstrained.


PROCEDURE - Handling Children of Deleted andSuppressed Items


Edit\Delete-Suppress_Child CHILD_HANDLING.ASM

Task 1: Suppress PISTON.PRT and redefine PISTON_PIN.PRT after it isfrozen.


2. Click Settings and select Tree Filters.3. In the Model Tree Items dialog box, select the Suppressed Objects

check box and click OK.

4. Select PISTON.PRT, right-click,and select Delete.

5. Notice that becausePISTON_PIN.PRT andPISTON_RING.PRT are childrenof PISTON.PRT, they are also tobe deleted.


7. Click Undo .

8. Select the PISTON.PRT, right-click, and select Suppress.9. Again, notice that because PISTON_PIN.PRT and PISTON_RING.

PRT are children of PISTON.PRT, they are also to be suppressed.

10. In the Suppress dialog box, clickOptions.• Edit the Status ofPISTON_PIN.PRT to Freeze,leaving PISTON_RING.PRT tobe suppressed.

• Click OK.

11. Notice the suppressedcomponents and the freezesymbol on PISTON_PIN.PRT.


12. Edit the definition ofPISTON_PIN.PRT.

13. If necessary, select theCoincident constraint toactivate it.• Select the inner hole surfaceon CONNECTING_ROD.PRTinto which you need to insertthe pin. The pin was formerlyinserted into the piston.

14. Click Complete Componentfrom the Component Placementdashboard.

15. Notice that the PISTON_PIN.PRT the component is no longerfrozen in the assembly.

Task 2: Suppress SIDE_ROUND and suspend the resulting child rounds.

1. Select CONNECTING_ROD.PRT, right-click, and selectOpen.

2. Right-click SIDE_ROUND andselect Delete.

3. Notice the two child roundfeatures.


5. Click Undo .

6. Select SIDE_ROUND, right-click,and select Suppress.

7. Again, notice that the childrounds also are to besuppressed.

8. In the Suppress dialog box, clickOptions.• Edit the Status of both Roundids to Suspend.

• Click OK.


9. Notice the geometry changesmade to the model becauseSIDE_ROUND is no longerpresent.



Reordering FeaturesYou can reorder features in the model tree by dragging themto a new location.

1. Original model• Through All hole

2. Protrusion added• Hole no longermeets design intent

3. Hole reordered• Hole again meetsdesign intent

Figure 2 – Protrusion Added

Figure 1 – Original ModelFigure 3 – Hole Reordered

Reordering FeaturesWhen regenerating a model, Creo Parametric regenerates features one ata time, following the order in which they display in the model tree. As youcreate new features, they are added to the bottom of the list in the model tree.

The order of features is the sequence in which features display in the modeltree. You can drag a feature within the model tree to place it such that itimmediately succeeds its parent, even though you may have added severalfeatures to it after the parent was created. Since you must regenerate aparent before you regenerate its children, you cannot reorder a parent tosucceed its children; nor can you reorder a child to precede its parents.

Feature order can affect the geometry of a model. When a feature is created,it can only add or remove material from the model as the model exists at thatpoint in time. For example, in Figure 1, the hole feature's depth is ThroughAll, which drills the hole through the unseen side of the block. If you add anadditional protrusion to the block, you need to reorder the hole to succeedthis new protrusion if you want to retain its Through All design intent. In thatcase, the Through All depth would include the new protrusion and drill thehole through the entire block.


PROCEDURE - Reordering Features


Edit\Reorder REORDER.PRT

Task 1: Reorder features in a part model.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.2. Locate Hole 1 in the model tree.3. Notice its position in the feature

order.

4. Edit the definition of Hole 1.• Select the Shape tab from theHole dashboard.

• Notice the hole depth isThrough All.

• Click Complete Feature .

5. Click Extrude from theShapes group and select Sketch2.• Edit the depth to 6.• Click Complete Featurefrom the Extrude dashboard.


6. Select Hole 1.7. Notice that the hole does not

appear to have a depth ofThrough All, but recall that it didat the time of creation.

A feature can only add orremove material from themodel as the model existsat the point in time in whichthe feature is created.

8. In the model tree, click and dragHole 1 to reorder it to succeedExtrude 2.

9. Select Hole 1.10. As previously observed, the hole

still removes material ThroughAll from the model; however,since the extrude feature nowprecedes the hole feature,the Through All depth has thedesired effect.

11. Click Shell from theEngineering group.

12. Select the front face to remove it.13. Edit the thickness to 0.50.14. Click Complete Feature from

the Shell dashboard.15. Notice the “boss” around the

hole feature.

16. In the model tree, click and dragShell 1 to reorder it to precedeHole 1.

17. Reorient the model and noticethat the shell feature now hollowsout the entire model.



Inserting FeaturesYou can insert new features or components in the model treewhere desired.

1. Original model• One protrusion• Shell has squareedge

2. Insert mode activated• Protrusion mirroredand rounds createdbefore shell

3. Insert mode cancelled• Hole on left goesthrough mirroredprotrusion

• Shell hollows outmirrored protrusionand rounds


Figure 2 – Insert Mode Activated

Figure 3 – Insert Mode Cancelled

Inserting FeaturesThe model tree insertion indicator, shown in the model tree as InsertIndicator , indicates where features are inserted upon creation. By default,its position always succeeds all items listed in the model tree. You may drag ithigher or lower in the model tree to insert features between other features inthe tree. When you move the insert indicator, you enter Insert Mode and themodel is rolled backward or forward in its regeneration in response to its newposition, and all features update in the graphics window. If a feature precedesthe indicator, then it is displayed in the graphics window and processed duringregeneration. If a feature succeeds the indicator, it is temporarily suppressed.Thus, it is not regenerated or displayed in the graphics window.

In addition to dragging the Insert Indicator up into the model tree, you canspecify an insert location in the tree. To do this, select a feature, right-click,and select Insert Here. The insert indicator is then placed directly belowthe selected item.


You can exit Insert Mode and return the insert indicator to its defaultlocation at the bottom of the model tree by cursoring over it, right-clicking,and selecting Cancel. You are then prompted to resume the features yousuppressed when you activated Insert mode. When you select to resumethem, Creo Parametric places them after the inserted features.

For example, the model in the figures is a cast metal cover. However, adesign change is needed to make another protrusion with a rounded notch inthe middle. Hence, we need to mirror the existing protrusion and round theedges of the resulting notch. Additionally, these rounded edges should alsobe located on the inside of the part to enable easier extraction from the cast.

As shown in the part's model tree, you can delete and recreate the shelland hole features after creating the necessary protrusion and rounds.Alternatively, you can use Insert mode to add the protrusion and roundfeatures before the Shell feature. Notice that this includes the round featurein the shell, which accomplishes the task of having round edges on theinside of the part.

Insert Mode operates the sameway when you are in an assembly.You may select a component,right-click, and select Insert Hereto insert components betweenother components in the modeltree. If you display features in themodel tree, you can also drag theInsert Indicator. Again, when youmove the Insert Indicator, you enterInsert Mode and the assembly isrolled backward or forward in itsregeneration in response to its newposition, and all components updatein the graphics window.


PROCEDURE - Inserting Features


Edit\Insert INSERT.PRT

Task 1: Insert new features in a part model.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.2. Select each of the five solid

features in the model tree tohighlight them in the graphicswindow.

3. In the model tree, click the InsertIndicator and drag it so thatit precedes Shell 1.

4. Notice the features that aresuppressed and therefore notcurrently regenerated.

5. Select Extrude 2 and clickMirror from the Editinggroup.• Select datum plane RIGHT.• Click Complete Featurefrom the Mirror dashboard.

6. Click Named Views andselect 3D-2.

7. Select Round from theRound types drop-down menuin the Engineering group, pressCTRL, and select both edges ofthe notch bottom.• Right-click and select Fullround.

• Click Complete Featurefrom the Round dashboard.


8. Select Round from theRound types drop-down menuin the Engineering group, pressCTRL, and select a vertical edgeon the front and back of thenotch.• Edit the radius to 1.• Click Complete Featurefrom the Round dashboard.

9. In the model tree, select theInsert Indicator , right-click,and select Cancel.

10. Click Yes in the Confirmationdialog box.

11. Click Named Views andselect 3D-1.

12. Notice the hole on the leftthat goes through the mirroredprotrusion.

13. Also notice that the shell nowhollows out both the mirroredprotrusion and the newly insertedrounds.



Redefining Features and SketchesThe Edit Definition option provides you with complete control ofa feature.• Edit Definition– Datum Features– Feature Tools– Sketch Features– Pre-Wildfire Features

• Complete control of afeature– Feature Type– Size– Shape– Location– Options– References

Figure 1 – Various Edit Definition Options

Figure 2 – Feature Dashboard

Redefining Features and SketchesIn Creo Parametric, altering the parents of a feature or sketch can drasticallyaffect the outcome of the resulting geometry. To modify a parent/childrelationship, the easiest method is to use the Edit Definition option. Thisoption enables you to select your references using dialog boxes, thedashboard, or menu options depending on the feature you are redefining. Youcan redefine a feature or sketch by selecting it, and then either right-clickingand selecting Edit Definition, or by clicking the Operations group drop-downmenu and selecting Edit Definition .

If you edit the definition of legacy model features, you mayencounter a different interface than that of the dashboard. Forexample, if you redefine a legacy sweep or blend feature, you willsee a dialog box of options rather than the dashboard, as shown inthe lower-right image in Figure 1.

For example, if you redefine a datum feature, you can select new referencesin a dialog box. If you redefine a Sketch feature, you can use the Sketchdialog box to edit its placement. You can also use the References dialog box


to modify references internal to the sketch. For most solid features, youcan use the dashboard to edit references; for example, selecting a differentsketch for an extrude, or selecting different edges for a round.

Controlling Features with Edit DefinitionThe Edit Definition functionality provides you with complete control over afeature within its tool. Consider the control that Edit Definition provides in thefollowing areas:

• Feature Type – Switch the feature type for many features. For example,you can edit a feature to modify it from a solid feature to a surface feature.

• Size – Increase or decrease the size of many features. For example, youcan edit the radius value of a round feature.

• Shape – Edit the resulting geometry shape of a model. For example, youcan edit a feature's Sketch, depth or angle value, or switch the externalsketch used.

• Location – Edit the location of a feature. For example, you can edit thesketching plane specified for a Sketch feature which modifies the locationof the resulting sketch feature and therefore any features using that Sketch.

• Options – Edit numerous options of a feature. For example, you can editthe depth of a hole from Blind to Through All, or you can add an additionalside for material to be removed.

• References (Parents) – Edit the parent references to a feature. Forexample, you can switch which external sketch is used in the creation ofa feature, or you can specify different references to different features inthe Sketch References dialog box.

The Edit Definition WorkflowWhen you redefine, or edit the definition of, a feature or sketch, the followingoccurs:

• The model regenerates back to the feature being redefined. The modeltree reflects that this has happened by removing all features that succeedthe feature being redefined. In addition, the feature being redefineddisplays with a yellow icon preceding its name in the model tree, as shownhere:

• Most features being redefined display in their orange dynamic previewcolor. In this state, the feature's drag handles display, enabling you to edittheir respective values. In addition, the on-screen flip arrows display.

• The feature's UI is presented. Depending upon the feature being redefined,this could be either a dialog box or the dashboard. The UI or dialog boxesenable you to make changes to the feature.

• Once modifications have been made, most features can be previewedsolid, if desired. This option regenerates the feature to determine whetherthe changes you have made are valid.

• Once you have completed the feature, it regenerates. After this occurs,the child features also regenerate to reflect the modifications made to theirparent.


PROCEDURE - Redefining Features and Sketches


Edit\Redefine REDEFINE.PRT

Task 1: Redefine features and sketches in a part model.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.2. Edit the definition of RING_CUT.3. Select the Placement tab from

the Revolve dashboard, andnotice that the Sketch is Internal.• Click Edit.

4. Edit the 1.5 dimension to -1.5.5. Click OK from the Sketch

dashboard.


7. Click Remove Material totoggle it off.

8. Drag the handle from 360 to 75.9. Click Complete Feature from

the Revolve dashboard.10. Click Undo .

11. Click Named Views andselect FRONT.

12. Edit the definition of SKIRT_CUT.13. Select the Placement tab from

the Extrude dashboard, andnotice that the Sketch is externalto the extrude feature.• Select an alternate externalsketch, Sketch 2, from themodel tree.

14. Click Complete Feature fromthe Extrude dashboard.

15. Notice the new skirt shape.16. Click Undo .



18. Click Sketch Setup from theSetup group.

19. In the graphics window,right-click and select Placement.

20. Orient to the StandardOrientation and notice thesketch in the model.

21. Select datum plane RIGHTfrom the model tree as the newsketching plane.

22. Click Sketch in the Sketch dialogbox.

23. Click OK from the Sketchdashboard.

24. Notice that the SKIRT_CUT hasbeen rotated 90 degrees.



Capturing Design Intent in SketchesYou must carefully consider how to define a sketch since severalother features use sketches in their creation.

• Considerations include:– Sketch/Reference plane

selection– Reference selection– Dimension scheme– Constraints– Sketched geometry type

• Open sketch results may differfrom closed sketch results

Figure 1 – Captured Design Intent

Figure 2 – Closed Sketch DesignIntent Examples

Figure 3 – Open Sketch DesignIntent Examples

Capturing Design Intent in SketchesDesign intent is captured in Sketcher by selecting references and bysketching, constraining, and dimensioning entities. It is important to capturedesign intent in sketches since several other features originate from sketches.Consequently, you must carefully consider how to define a sketch and thencapture it. You can always modify the sketch's design intent, but it is easiestto do when you have planned for future changes.

Considerations When Capturing Design Intent in SketchesWhen you create a new sketch in Creo Parametric, consider the optionsavailable for capturing design intent in each of the following areas, andin some of the examples listed. Your decisions in these areas at the timeof sketch creation impact the overall model downstream when you wish tomodify it.

• Sketch/Reference Plane — Should these selected references be defaultdatum planes or a construction plane created with an adjustable offset orangle? Perhaps the sketch plane should be on a surface created fromanother feature?

• References — Remember that when you select additional sketchingreferences or dimension to existing geometry, you are selecting the


parents for your sketch. If the references you select update, so does thesketch. Consider whether you want your sketcher references to be defaultdatums or another feature. In Figure 1, the sketch feature references theangled surface of existing geometry, so if that angled surface updates,the sketch also updates. Additionally, the sketch references the existinghole. Therefore, if the hole location updates, the sketch's location updatesas well.

• Dimensioning scheme — When dimensioning circles and arcs, should thedimension be a radius or diameter? Should the sketch be dimensioned withan X-Y scheme or a radius-angle scheme? Deciding whether the sketchmust pivot can help you determine which scheme to use. Consider whichdimensions you might want to modify at a later time if the design changes.

• Constraints — You must decide which constraints to use, and to whichreference you wish to constrain because you are again creating parentswhen selecting constraint references. How should the sketch entitiesreact to each other? Should they be parallel, perpendicular, or tangent?Should the sketch be symmetrical? If so, you need a centerline. Do youwant arc and circle centers to remain aligned? In Figure 1, the sketch'sconstruction line between each arc center is constrained to be parallel tothe angled surface. Therefore, if the angle of the existing surface changes,so too must the angle of the sketch. Similarly, if the existing hole diameteris modified, this sketch's upper arc diameter also changes because it isconstrained to be of equal radius.

• Sketched geometry type — When sketching arcs, for example, you shoulduse the arc type which helps you obtain your desired design intent.Remember to use construction geometry or sketched datum points to youradvantage.

Open Sketches Versus Closed SketchesThere are two different techniques for creating sketch features:

• Closed-section sketch — The sketched geometry forms a closed loop.• Open-section sketch — The sketch geometry does not form a closed loop.Closed-section sketches are the more robust of the two options and shouldtherefore be used whenever possible. However, your desired design intentshould ultimately dictate which type of sketch section is created. The yellowextrude features shown in Figure 2 are created from closed-section sketches,whereas the yellow extrude features created in Figure 3 are created fromopen-section sketches. The geometry created using an open-section sketchcauses the resulting geometry to follow the 3-D contour of a surface. Theendpoints of the open-section sketch must be constrained to the surfaceedge. The geometry created using the closed-section sketches ignores the3-D contour of the surface and simply extends the geometry upward.

There are two specific rules regarding open-section versus closed-sectionsketches in regards to feature requirements:

• Rib features require an open-section sketch.• You must create the first extrude or revolve feature using a closed-sectionsketch.


Capturing Design Intent in FeaturesCapture design intent in your model's features by decidingwhich feature options to use.

Figure 1 – Internal Versus External Sketches

• Option considerationsinclude:– Depth– Solid/Thicken– Round/Chamfer

type– Hole type– Sketch or select

sweep trajectory• Internal versusexternal sketches

• Embedded datumfeatures

Figure 2 – Embedded Datum Features

Capturing Design Intent in FeaturesDesign intent is captured in features by specifying the correct feature and itsoptions. As a result, you must carefully consider which feature options tospecify to properly capture your design intent. You can always modify thefeature's design intent, but it is easiest to do when you have planned forfuture modifications.

Considerations When Capturing Design Intent in FeaturesWhen you create a new feature in Creo Parametric, consider the optionsavailable for capturing design intent in each of the following areas. Yourdecisions in these areas at the time of feature creation impact the overallmodel downstream when you wish to modify it.

• Depth — When creating an extrude feature, determine whether the depthshould be symmetric or defined with 2-sided blind depth values. Determinewhether the depth is to be defined to a reference. If so, remember thatthe reference you select becomes a parent to the feature. Or consider ifthe depth should be Through All?

• Solid or Thicken — Determine whether the feature you create should be asolid feature in which you create a cut through, or a thickened feature witha defined thickness. If so, which side?


• Round/Chamfer type — Determine which type of chamfer best capturesyour design intent. Is it better to use a 45 x D or a D x D? Again, consideringhow the design may change in the future helps you decide. Should theround be created by selecting the edge or by selecting the two surfaces inyour model? If you believe that the design may change so that the edgedisappears, use the two surfaces.

• Hole type — Determine which dimensioning scheme works best in yourdesign. Which would be best – to the tip or to the shoulder of the hole?

• Internal versus external sketches — In Figure 1, notice that feature Extrude2 was created using an external sketch, but feature Extrude 3 was createdusing an internal sketch. Which sketch you ultimately use for featurecreation depends upon these factors:– You must use an internal sketch to create Geometry Points in the sketch.– Internal sketches reduce clutter in the model tree. As shown in Figure 1,

there are two additional model tree entries for Sketches 1 and 2 due tothe fact that these were external sketches. Had Extrude 1 and Extrude2 been created with internal sketches, neither of these entities wouldexist in the model tree.

– External sketches are helpful when you want to test multiple designalternatives for a feature. You can select alternate external sketchesto test these design alternatives.

• Embedded datum features — Embedded datum features are useful whenyou want to edit features as if they are one feature. This also simplifies thetree and reduces the display clutter. In Figure 2, Extrude 4 was createdusing five embedded datum features. However, embedded datum featuresare not recommended if you want to reuse the datums for other features.


Capturing Design Intent in PartsCapture design intent in parts with proper planning, featureselection, and feature order.

• Planning model design– 80/20 rule

• Feature type• Feature order• Parent/child effects

Figure 1 – Following the 80/20 Rule

Figure 2 – Feature OrderExample 1 Figure 3 – Feature Order Example 2

Capturing Design Intent in PartsDesign intent is captured in parts by properly planning your model design andspecifying which features to use and in which order. Often the same geometryresult can be achieved by creating many different types or combinations offeatures. As a result, you must carefully consider which features to use toproperly capture your design intent. You can always modify the part's designintent, but it is easiest to do when you have planned for future modifications.

Planning Your Model DesignBefore you begin your new part model, you should plan its design. As ageneral guideline, you should follow the 80/20 rule, which states that 80percent of the overall shape of the model should typically be created in theinitial 20 percent of the model's features. Figure 1 illustrates the 80/20 rule.The left image displays only the first four extrude features of the muffler,while the right image displays the completed model. Although only the firstfour features are displayed, roughly 80 percent of the overall model shape ispresent.


Here are some guidelines to follow when planning your part model design:

• Begin with the feature that determines the overall size and shape of themodel. This is your base feature. The left image of Figure 1 displaysthe first four extrude features of a muffler model. The first feature is anextruded rectangle, which is the base feature of this model.

• Create major geometry features that add or remove material from yourmodel. In the left image of Figure 1, the extruded cut along the front face ofthe muffler is an example of this type of major geometry feature.

• Create minor geometry features that add or remove material. Theseinclude smaller features such as protrusions, cuts, bosses, ribs, or holes.In Figure 1, the smaller extruded cuts are an example of this type of featurein the left image, and the holes in the right image are another example.

• Finally, add finishing features such as rounds and chamfers. In the rightimage of Figure 1, the rounds and shell are both finishing features.

Deciding Upon Feature Type and OrderOften the same geometry result can be achieved by creating many differenttypes or combinations of features. It is your responsibility to decide how tobest create the geometry so that when the design is later modified, it updatesin a predictable manner. For example, an extrude is common, but considerwhat occurs if any of the following situations arise:

• You need the profile to change along the extrude length later in the design– In this case, a blend feature may be the best option. You could initiallycreate the blend straight back, and edit the individual blend sections ata later time.

• The path of extrusion may change – In this case, a sweep may be the bestoption. You could initially create a straight sweep trajectory, and modifyit at a later time.

• You need the feature to rotate – In this case, a revolve may be the bestoption.

The feature order also has an impact later on if the design is modified. In thebottom figures, the resulting geometry is identical, but was created differently.In Figure 2, the first feature extrudes the entire length, with subsequentfeatures adding or removing material. In Figure 3, three extrudes werestacked in a series, with the overall length being created as the sum of thethree features. If the length must be modified later, it is easier to modifythe length of the design in Figure 2.

Considering Parent/Child EffectsIt is important to always consider parent/child relationships when creatingfeatures in parts. Build new features using references from other featuresonly as necessary. To create features without establishing parent/childrelationships to other features, you can create default datum planes instead.These are common references that are not deleted. Using default datumsalso minimizes unwanted parent/child relationships.


Capturing Design Intent in AssembliesCapture design intent in assemblies by determining whichassembly type to use, which component to assemble first, andwhich constraints to use during the assembly process.

• Considerations include:– Assembly type

♦ Static♦ Dynamic♦ Mixture

– Assembly/Sub-assembly structure

– Choice of base model– Assembly references– Fit/Interference issues

Figure 1 – Assembly Structure Examples

Figure 2 – Vice Assembly

Capturing Design Intent in AssembliesDesign intent is captured in assemblies by specifying which assembly type touse, the assembly/sub-assembly structure, choice of base model, assemblyreferences used, and any fit or interference issues. As a result, you mustcarefully consider how to create your assembly to properly capture yourdesign intent. You can always modify the assembly's design intent, but it iseasiest to do when you have planned for future modifications.

Considerations When Capturing Design Intent in AssembliesWhen you create a new assembly in Creo Parametric, consider the optionsavailable for capturing design intent in each of the following areas. Yourdecisions in these areas at the time of feature creation impact the overallassembly model later on when you wish to modify it.


• Assembly type — There are three different types of assemblies that youcan create in Creo Parametric. Create the assembly type that best fitsyour needs:– Static — Assemblies are created using constraints. If you decide to

create this type of assembly, determine whether some componentsrequire angular or linear offsets. If so, remember to create the properconstraint types.

– Dynamic — Assemblies are created using connections. Determinewhether your assembly needs to contain components that can bedynamically moved. If so, a dynamic assembly with pin, slider, andcylinder connections may be your best option.

– Mixture — Assemblies are created with both static and dynamiccomponents.

• Assembly/Sub-assembly Structure — There are usually multiple waysto assemble components and still achieve the same assembly result. InFigure 1, notice that in one assembly example, component D is assembledinto the sub-assembly SUB, while in the other example, it is assembleddirectly to the top-level. The end result may appear the same, but couldcause the assemblies to behave differently should another component'splacement be modified.

• Choice of base model — The base model is the first component assembledinto the assembly. It is important to consider which component you setas the base model because if all other models reference this componentit becomes difficult to remove the base model.

• Assembly references used — Remember that the assembly references youselect for placing components create parent/child relationships betweenthese components. Be sure to select references that are more robust ifpossible, such as selecting surfaces over edges.

• Fit or interference issues — Determine what occurs when you assembleall your components into the assembly and you find you have interferenceor fit issues. Remember that you can always activate components to editthem within the context of the assembly. Once the top-level assemblyis activated and regenerated, the other components update. Be carefulwhen creating features in components in an assembly because you mayinadvertently select a reference from a different component. If this occurs,it creates a parent/child relationship both between the two components andbetween the component and the assembly.



Module27Resolving Failures and Seeking Help

Module OverviewWhen using features as the foundation of design models, you create severalreferences and parent/child relationships between them. Regenerationfailures occur when Creo Parametric cannot successfully resolve aparent/child relationship, geometric situation, or a missing reference in a partor assembly model. Because the failure can occur for different reasons, youneed to be able to diagnose the problem to correct it.

In this module, you learn the various reasons for model failure and learn toutilize the tools and diagnostics available to resolve them.

ObjectivesAfter completing this module, you will be able to:• Understand and identify failures.• Analyze geometry, open-section, and missing part references failures.• Analyze missing component failures, missing component reference failures,and invalid assembly constraint failures.

• Understand resolve mode tools.• Recover models.• Access and use Creo Parametric's help system.


Understanding and Identifying FailuresWhen a model fails regeneration, the system indicates the failingfeatures or components.

• Failures occur due to:– Invalid/Impossible

geometry– Missing/Broken

references– Missing models

• Failure Indications:– Regeneration Manager:

– Regeneration Caption– Red Highlighting

♦ Model tree♦ Model geometry

Figure 1 – Regeneration Caption

Figure 2 – Feature Highlighting Figure 3 – Regeneration Manager

Understanding and Identifying FailuresWhen Creo Parametric regenerates a model, it recreates the model featureby feature, in the order in which each feature was created, and according tothe hierarchy of the parent/child relationships between features. Occasionallyduring the model regeneration, a problem occurs that causes the model to failregeneration. Regeneration can fail for any of the following reasons:• Invalid or impossible geometry.• Missing or broken references between parent/child relationships.• Missing models for an assembly.The fact that a model fails regeneration is beneficial, as you would not wantto hand off or continue working with a problematic model.

Failure IndicationsWhen a failure occurs, the system alerts you using several methods.


• The Regeneration Manager icon in the status bar appears red:• The Regeneration Caption appears. Before you can continue working,you must acknowledge the failure by clicking OK to accept the failure orCancel to undo the changes. Note that there are situations in both part andassembly modes where the Cancel option is not available.

• The system highlights the failed features or components in the model tree.The failed items are shown in bold red text and any children of the faileditem are shown in standard red text. In Figure 2, the Chamfer feature is thefailing item, and the Round is a child of the failed Chamfer.– If possible, the system also highlights failed geometry on the model in

red, with child geometry highlighted in blue.

Using the Regeneration ManagerThe Regeneration Manager can be used any time changes are made to amodel to selectively regenerate certain features or components.

However, the Regeneration Manager is particularly useful during a failure toidentify failed features or components. Once activated in a failure situation,the Regeneration Manager lists the failed items and any children of thefailed items.

You can then select any of the listed items and right-click to obtain featureinformation or reference information for that item. This information can beuseful in determining the cause of the failure, so you can intelligently resolvethe failure.

You can activate the Regeneration Manager in several ways:

• By selecting Regeneration Manager from the Regenerate typesdrop-down menu in the Operations group.

• By clicking the icon from the status bar. The icon includes three smallcircles which are filled in green, yellow, or red depending on the model’scurrent status:– When the Regeneration Manager icon appears with the left circle

filled in green, the model has been successfully regenerated. In thiscase, the Regeneration Manager dialog box does not open.

– When the Regeneration Manager icon appears with the middlecircle filled in yellow, the model has been modified and some features orcomponents need to be regenerated.

– When the Regeneration Manager icon appears with the rightcircle filled in red, the model has failed regeneration.

Locating Failed Features or ComponentsFailed features or components are not always immediately identifiable. Youcan use these additional methods to locate failed features or components:

• Add the Status column in the model tree. Failed features or componentsdisplay with a status of Failed or Child of Failed.

• Search in the model by clicking Find .– You can search for features or components that have Failed or Child of

Failed statuses.


– Once the failed items are located and selected, you can click Filter Treefrom the Options drop-down menu to display only the failed items inthe model tree.

Working on Failed ModelsOnce the failure is acknowledged by clicking OK in the Regeneration Caption,you can continue working normally, or Save or Erase the model to resolveat a later time. However, it is recommended that you promptly resolve thefailure by following these three basic steps:

• Investigate the failure by obtaining feature information or referenceinformation.

• Resolve the failure using tools such as Edit or Edit Definition on the failedfeature(s), parent features, or any feature in the model.– You can also select Suppress to remove failing feature(s) from the

current regeneration, or Delete to remove them from the model.• Regenerate the model to obtain a successful regeneration.


Analyzing Geometry FailuresGeometry failures are caused either by geometry that has beenmade invalid, or geometry that is impossible to create.

Figure 1 – Round Radius Too Large

• Invalid geometry examples:– Round radii too small or

too large– Blend start points

mismatch– Sweep Radii Rule– Extrude Through Until

Figure 2 – Sweep RadiusSection Radius Comparison Figure 3 – Blend Start Points Mismatch

Analyzing Geometry FailuresWhen a feature fails due to invalid or impossible geometry, the failing featureand its children highlight in the model tree. A message indicating that thefeature geometry could not be constructed displays in the feature information.Some examples of invalid or impossible geometry include:

• Round radii too small or too large – If a round radius becomes too largefor the geometry that is being rounded, then it fails. In Figure 1, the roundin the left image previews properly because it is small enough to fit onthe geometry. In the right image, the round becomes too large for thesize of the geometry and cannot be created. Hence, the round preview isno longer available.

• Sweep radii – If a circular section of radius T is swept along a curvedtrajectory of radius R, the radius R must be greater than or equal to radiusT or else the resulting geometry overlaps, resulting in invalid geometry. InFigure 2, the circular section is swept along the curved trajectory, resultingin the cane-shaped geometry. In the middle image, the red cross-sectionlines in the FRONT view show that the geometry does not overlap. Hence,it is valid and R≥T. In the right image, however, the cross-section radius Thas increased, as shown by the red cross-section lines. As a result, thecross-section lines overlap, and thus the geometry overlaps. As a result,the rule of R≥T is not valid, and the geometry cannot be created.


• Blend start points mismatch – If the start points between blend sectionsare mismatched by an angle that is too large, the resulting geometry twistsupon itself, which cannot occur. In Figure 3, the blend section start pointsare mismatched by 90 degrees and the resulting geometry twists. If thestart points are mismatched by 180 degrees, the feature fails.

• Extrude Through Until – If a feature is extruded to a depth of Through Until,the feature must actually pass through the selected reference. If it doesnot, the feature fails because the geometry cannot be created.


PROCEDURE - Analyzing Geometry Failures


Resolve_Failures\Part_Invalid-Geometry GEOM-FAILURE.PRT

Task 1: Resolve geometry failures using the Undo option.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.2. Orient to the named view 3D.3. In the model tree, right-click

Chamfer 1 and select Edit.4. Edit the chamfer D value to 2.

5. Click twice in the background tode-select all geometry.

6. Notice the failed chamfer andits children are indicated on themodel and in the model tree.

7. Click Cancel in the caption toundo the changes.

Task 2: Resolve geometry failures by fixing the failing feature.

1. Orient to the named viewFRONT.

2. In the model tree, right-clickTRAJ_2 and select Edit.

The smallest trajectory radius (R) is 2. The sweep diameter iscurrently 3, therefore T=1.5, and R≥T.

3. Edit the R2 dimension to 1, and click twice in the background tode-select all geometry.

Editing the trajectory radius to 1 violates the R≥T rule.


4. Click OK in the caption to acceptthe changes.

5. Click Regeneration Managerfrom the status bar.

6. Notice the failed sweep featureand its children, then clickCancel.

7. Select Sweep 1 from the modeltree, then right-click and selectEdit Definition.

8. Right-click and select Sketch.9. Orient to the Standard

Orientation.10. Edit the diameter from 3 to 2.11. Click OK .

12. Click Complete Feature .13. Orient to the named view

FRONT.14. Notice the model has

regenerated successfully.

Task 3: Resolve geometry failures by fixing a non-failing feature.

1. Press CTRL+D.2. In the model tree, right-click

Sweep 1 and select Edit.3. Edit the diameter from 2 to 3 and

click twice in the background tode-select all geometry.

4. Click OK to accept the result.

5. Select TRAJ_2 from the modeltree, right-click, and select Edit.

6. Edit the radius to 2 and clicktwice in the background.

7. Notice the model hasregenerated successfully.



Analyzing Open Section FailuresOpen section failures occur when the open section extendsbeyond the solid geometry that bounds it.

• Open section features must bebounded by other solids.

• Failure message indicates whena part cannot be intersected witha feature.

Figure 1 – Open Section VersusClosed Section

Figure 2 – Open SectionSketch Feature

Figure 3 – Open SectionSketch Failure

Analyzing Open Section FailuresMost sketches for solid features should be closed sketches. However, whenthe design intent for a sketch requires an open section, the resulting featuremust be bounded by other solid geometry. In Figure 2, the highlighted featurewas extruded from an open-section sketch.

However, if the depth is extended further than the bounding solid geometry,the feature fails because it is no longer bounded entirely by solid geometry,as shown in Figure 3.

When a feature fails due to an open section, the failing feature and its childrenhighlight in the model tree. A message indicating that the part could not beintersected with the feature displays in the feature information.


PROCEDURE - Analyzing Open Section Failures


Resolve_Failures\Part_Open-Section OPEN-SEC_FAIL.PRT

Task 1: Resolve an open-section failure in a part model.


LEFT_TOOTH and select Edit.3. Edit the height from 9 to 11.

4. Click twice in the background tode-select all geometry.

5. Notice the failed feature and itschildren are highlighted.

6. Click OK in the caption to acceptthe result.

7. From the status bar, clickRegeneration Manager .

8. Select the failing LEFT_TOOTHfeature, right-click, and selectFeature Info.

9. Notice the system could notintersect the part with thefeature, and the feature isunattached.

10. In the Web browser, scroll downto Section Data and notice thatthe feature was created with anopen section.


11. Scroll back up to the Childrensection for RIGHT_TOOTH andclick Feature Info .

12. Scroll down to Section Data andnotice that this feature does notindicate an open section.

13. Click Web Browser tominimize the Web browser.

14. Click Cancel from theRegeneration Manager.

15. Right-click LEFT_TOOTH fromthe model tree and select EditDefinition.

16. Notice that the open section isnot visible in the feature preview.The system cannot create theopen section protrusion beyondthe existing solid material.

17. Right-click in the graphicswindow and select Edit InternalSketch.


19. Select Concentric from theArc types drop-down menu,select the existing arc, andsketch an arc to close thesection.

20. Click OK .


22. Click Complete Feature .23. Notice the model regenerates

successfully.

Alternatively, you couldhave resolved this failure byincreasing the height of themain cylinder to prevent theopen section from falling offthe cylinder’s edge.



Analyzing Missing Part Reference FailuresMissing part reference failures occur when a parent feature ischanged, and the child feature can no longer find the parent'sreference.

• Missing part reference failureexamples include:– Missing axes– Missing references for

rounds/chamfers– Editing a sketch

♦ Replace sketched entities♦ Replace Sketcher

dimensions

Figure 1 – Sketch FeatureReferencing Hole Axis

Figure 2 – Round Edges Figure 3 – Editing a Sketch

Analyzing Missing Part Reference FailuresWhen you modify a parent feature, any children of that feature automaticallyupdate. This functionality is highly beneficial and demonstrates CreoParametric’s aptitude for efficiency. However, if a modification to a parentfeature results in the inability of a child feature to locate its parent's reference,a failure occurs.

When a feature fails due to a missing reference, the failing feature and itschildren highlight in the model tree. A message indicating that the featurereferences are missing displays in the feature information.

The following are common causes of missing part reference failures:

• Missing axes — In Figure 1, the slot sketch is dimensioned off of thehole axis. If the hole is deleted, its axis is deleted, and therefore thedimensioning reference for the slot is deleted. Thus, the slot feature nowfails due to missing part references.


• Missing references for rounds or chamfers — Occurs if you delete orredefine a feature and remove the edge that a round or chamfer uses. InFigure 2, the edges where the boss intersects the remainder of the part arerounded. If the boss is deleted, the edges are therefore deleted, and therounds fail. Missing references can also occur if you insert a feature beforethe round or chamfer that causes the edge to be removed. For example, ifyou cut material off of an extrude feature, consequently cutting the edge offthat a round references, the round fails.

• Editing a sketch — Can result in changed or removed edges and surfacesin a model. If those changed or removed edges and surfaces are parentsto other features, failures can occur. In Figure 3, the sketched entity isbeing deleted because you want to modify the sketch. However, CreoParametric informs you that this entity is referenced by other entities. If youdecide to continue and delete this entity, the child features fail due to theremoval of this reference.

Using the Replace FunctionOne way to help mitigate missing reference failures when editing sketchesis to use the Replace function. The Replace function transfers referencesfrom an old entity to the new entity you have created. You can click theOperations group drop-down menu and select Replace while in Sketcher toaccess the Replace function. You then select the original entity that containsthe references, and select the new entity to which you want to transfer thereferences.

You can also replace dimensions within Sketcher. When you select adimension to replace, you must create the new dimension. The newdimension maintains the original dimension's sketcher dimension number(sd#), enabling any relations using the sketcher dimension to remain valid.


PROCEDURE - Analyzing Missing Part ReferenceFailures


Resolve_Failures\Part_Missing-ReferenceMISSING-REF_FAIL.PRT

Task 1: Resolve a failure caused by missing part references.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.2. Edit the definition of

BASE_PROTRUSION.3. In the graphics window,

right-click and select EditInternal Sketch.


5. Select the right-side angled line,right-click, and select Delete.

6. Review the warning messageand click Yes.

7. Select 3-Point / Tangent Endfrom the Arc types drop-down

menu and sketch an arc in itsplace.

8. Click OK .9. Click Complete Feature .10. Notice that SIDE_ROUND and

its children fail.11. Click OK in the caption to accept

the result.

12. In the model tree, right-clickSIDE_ROUND and select Info >Feature.

13. Notice that SIDE_ROUNDis failing because featurereferences are missing.



15. Edit the definition ofSIDE_ROUND.

16. In the dashboard, select the Setstab, select Set 2, and click in theDriving surface collector.

17. Spin the model and select thesurface shown to satisfy themissing reference.

18. Click Complete Feature .19. Notice the model regenerates

successfully.

Task 2: Transfer references using the Replace function to avoid a missingreferences failure.

1. Edit the definition ofBASE_PROTRUSION.

2. In the graphics window,right-click and select EditInternal Sketch.


4. Select the right arc and clickMirror .• Select the vertical centerline.

5. Select the left-side angled line.• Click the Operations groupdrop-down menu and selectReplace.

• Select the newly mirrored arc.• Click Yes in the Replace Entitydialog box.


Using the Replacefunctionality, you havetransferred references tothe arc entity, thus avoidinga failure.



Analyzing Missing Component FailuresMissing component failures occur when Creo Parametric cannotlocate all of the necessary components to properly open anassembly.

• Reasons include:– Component renamed on

operating system.– Component renamed in

Creo Parametric withoutassembly in session.

– Component located in adifferent folder on operatingsystem.

Figure 1 – Folder View of Components

Figure 2 – Assembly and Model Tree

Analyzing Missing Component FailuresIf an assembly fails regeneration due to a missing component, the failingcomponent and its children highlight in the model tree. A message indicatingthat the component model is missing displays in the feature information forthat component. Reasons for missing components in assemblies include:

• The component was renamed in the operating system — Creo Parametricis not aware if the component was renamed on the operating system.Consequently, the assembly containing this renamed component failsbecause the assembly searches for the component using its original name.

• The component was renamed in Creo Parametric without the assemblyin session — Again, if the assembly containing the component is not insession at the time that one of its components is renamed, the assemblycontinues to search for the original name. Thus, the assembly fails.

• The component was moved to a different folder — If a component ismoved from its original location, Creo Parametric continues to search forthe component in its original location. Because the component has beenmoved, the assembly fails. In Figure 1, component HANDLE.PRT hasbeen moved out of the Assy_Missing-Comp folder and placed into theHandle_Folder. Because the assembly requires this component (as shownin the model tree in Figure 2), it fails when opened.


PROCEDURE - Analyzing Missing Component Failures


Resolve_Failures\Assembly_Missing-ComponentMISSING-COMP_FAIL.ASM

Task 1: Resolve a missing component failure in an assembly.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.2. Notice a failure occurs when

opening the assembly.3. Also notice the Message Log

indicates that the system cannotretrieve model HANDLE.

4. Click Close and click File > Manage Session > Erase NotDisplayed.• Click OK.

5. Click Working Directoryfrom the Navigator.• Double-click Handle_Folder.Notice that this sub-foldercontains HANDLE.PRT, whichis the cause of the failure.

6. Click Working Directory again.7. Double-click MISSING-COMP_FAIL.ASM to open it.8. The assembly fails for the same reason.

9. From the status bar, clickRegeneration Manager .• Notice that the HANDLEcomponent within theJAW_SUB assembly hasfailed.


10. In the Regeneration Manager,right-click HANDLE.PRT andselect Feature Info.• Notice the handle is failingbecause the model is missing.

• Click Web Browser toclose the Web browser.

11. Click Cancel from theRegeneration Manager.

12. Click Find from the statusbar.• Select Component as theLook for option.

• Select the Status tab, andselect Failed as the Value.

• Click Find Now and then clickClose.

13. Notice that HANDLE.PRT islocated in the model tree, andthen select JAW_SUB.ASM tohighlight it.

14. Right-click HANDLE.PRTand select Retrieve MissingComponent.• Double-click Handle_Folder,if necessary.

• Select HANDLE.PRT, andclick Open.

15. Press CTRL+G to regeneratethe model. Notice it regeneratessuccessfully.

16. Click Save and click OK.

17. Click Close and click File > Manage Session > Erase NotDisplayed.• Click OK.


18. Click Working Directory .19. Double-click Handle_Folder.20. Right-click HANDLE.PRT and

select Cut.21. Click Working Directory

from the Navigator, and click inthe Web browser to clear theselection of any files.

22. Right-click in the Web browserand select Paste.

23. Double-click MISSING-COMP_FAIL.ASM to verify that the failurehas been resolved.



Analyzing Missing Component ReferenceFailuresMissing Component Reference failures occur when you modifya component feature that removes the reference used for itsplacement or its children's placement in an assembly.

• Failure displays as:– Failed to regenerate

component placement.– Feature references are

missing.

Figure 1 – Parent/Child Relationship Graph

Figure 2 – Model Tree and Assembly

Analyzing Missing Component Reference FailuresIf a component's placement cannot be resolved in an assembly, CreoParametric reports the failure in the message window, indicating that somefeatures failed to regenerate. Remember, this message is displayed withinAssembly mode, so the feature it is referring to is actually a failing componentin this context. Feature information on the failing component revealsmessages indicating that the regeneration of the component placement failedor that there are feature references missing. This type of failure occurswhen features in a component that have parents or children in an assemblyare modified . If the feature modification removes the reference used in theassembly, this causes either the component or the component's childrento fail placement.In Figure 1, the Reference Viewer displays the parent/child relationshipsfor the JAW_SLIDE.PRT component in the assembly. ComponentLEADSCREW.PRT is a child to the jaw slide component. In referring tothe Reference Graph, LEADSCREW.PRT is assembled to surface id 238of JAW_SLIDE.PRT. As such, if the feature containing surface id 238 inJAW_SLIDE.PRT were modified, it could cause the leadscrew to fail.


PROCEDURE - Analyzing Missing Component ReferenceFailures


Resolve_Failures\Assembly_Missing-ReferenceJAW_SLIDE.PRT

Task 1: Resolve a missing component reference failure.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.2. Select Hole 2. A leadscrew in

the assembly mates to the flatbase surface of this hole.

3. Edit the definition of Hole 2.4. In the dashboard, click Drill Hole

Profile .• Select the Shape tab.• Notice that the flat basesurface of the hole has beenreplaced by a drill point.


6. Click Close .

7. Click Working Directoryfrom the Navigator.• Double-click MISSING-REFS.ASM to open it.

8. Notice that the assembly fails toregenerate, but still displays allcomponents.


9. From the status bar, clickRegeneration Manager .

10. Notice that LEADSCREW.PRTwithin JAW_SUB.ASM is failing.

11. Right-click LEADSCREW.PRTand select Feature Info.

12. Notice that LEADSCREW.PRT isfailing due to missing placementreferences.

13. Click Web Browser to closethe Web browser, and clickCancel from the RegenerationManager.

14. Expand JAW_SUB.ASM in themodel tree.

15. Notice that the failedLEADSCREW.PRT and itsfailing child component arehighlighted.

Remember, you can clickFind to start the Searchtool to search for failingcomponents and features.

16. Right-click JAW_SLIDE.PRT andselect Activate.

17. Select Hole 2.18. Right-click and select Edit

Definition.19. In the dashboard, click

Rectangle Hole Profile toremove the drill point.


20. Click Complete Feature .21. In the model tree, right-click

MISSING-REFS.ASM and selectActivate.

22. Click Regenerate .23. Notice that the model

regenerates successfully.



Analyzing Invalid Assembly Constraint FailuresInvalid assembly constraint failures occur when constraintsfrom one set conflict with constraints from another set for agiven component.

• Reasons include:– Parent components modified or

deleted.– Features in parent components

modified or deleted.• Resolve the failure:– Change constraints.– Modify features to satisfy

constraints.– Suppress or freeze component. Figure 1 – Invalid Assembly

Constraints

Figure 2 – Coincident ConstraintsDisabled

Figure 3 – Features Modifiedto Satisfy Constraints

Analyzing Invalid Assembly Constraint FailuresAssembly constraints are based on component references. A component'sreferences can change, and therefore become invalid. This occurs if parentassembly components are modified or deleted, or if the features in parentcomponents are modified or deleted. In Figure 1, the ends of a rod areinserted into holes on each block using Coincident constraints. The holesin the transparent block were then moved outward, without modifying theholes on the other block. Consequently, the holes do not align, and itbecomes impossible for the rod ends to be inserted into both holes giventhe misalignment. The result is that the rod constraints become invalid. Amessage indicating the failure to regenerate component placement displaysin the feature information for the failed component.

Fixing Invalid Assembly Constraint FailuresWhen assembly constraints become invalid, you can perform one of thefollowing:


• Change constraints — You can constrain the component differently sothat all constraints are satisfied, or you can disable constraints. Disablingconstraints maintains the original references, but sets the constraintinactive for regeneration purposes. In Figure 2, the Coincident constraintsfor the rods were disabled. Notice that the components are still misalignedwith respect to the holes. The disabled constraints can always bere-enabled at a later time. You can also disable constraints to test differentassembly scenarios.

• Modify features to satisfy constraints — You can modify either the featuresin the failing component or in the other components. In Figure 3, the holesin the other two components were moved outward so all constraints areagain satisfied.

• Suppress or freeze the failing component — You can then either modify thepart or delete it from the assembly at a later time.


PROCEDURE - Analyzing Invalid Assembly ConstraintFailures


Resolve_Failures\Assembly_Invalid-ConstraintINVALID-CONST.ASM

Task 1: Resolve invalid assembly constraint failures.

Our goal is to modify the rod spacing by modifying the holespacing from 10 to 8 for the three block-shaped components.


JAW_FIXED.PRT and selectActivate.• Select the hole on the right.• Right-click and select Edit.

3. Edit the offset value from 10 to 8.

4. Click Windows and selectINVALID-CONST.ASM.

5. Click Regenerate .6. Failures occur. Click OK.7. Notice that the two ROD.PRT

components and their childassembly fails.

8. Right-click the first ROD.PRT inthe model tree and select Info >Feature.

9. Notice that ROD.PRT failed toregenerate due to componentplacement.



11. Right-click the first ROD.PRTand select Edit Definition.

12. In the dashboard, notice that theconstraint STATUS is ConstraintsInvalid.• Select the Placement tab.• Placement has failed dueto conflicting Coincidentconstraints.

• Select the third Coincidentconstraint and clear theConstraint Enabled checkbox for testing purposes.

13. Click Complete Component .14. The first ROD.PRT now


15. Right-click the second ROD.PRTand select Edit Definition.

16. Notice the dashboard constraintstatus.• Select the Placement tab.• Select the third Coincidentconstraint and clear theConstraint Enabled checkbox.

17. Click Complete Component .18. The second ROD.PRT now



19. The JAW_SUB.ASM failsbecause its hole spacing stillneeds to be modified.

20. Expand JAW_SUB.ASM.21. Right-click JAW_SLIDE.PRT and

select Activate.22. Select the lower right hole,

right-click, and select Edit.23. Edit the offset value from 10 to 8.


25. Click Regenerate .26. Collapse JAW_SUB.ASM.27. Notice the model now


28. Zoom in and notice the rodmisalignment. Recall that theCoincident constraints weredisabled at this end.

29. In the model tree, right-clickHEAD_BLOCK.PRT and selectActivate.

30. Double-click the bottom righthole and edit its offset from 10 to8.


32. Click Regenerate .33. The hole spacing has been

resolved for all three blockcomponents.

The Coincident constraintsfor this end could now bere-enabled to essentiallydetect misalignment in thefuture.



Understanding Resolve Mode ToolsIf desired, you can activate Resolve mode to manage failures.

Activate Resolve mode using:

• Regeneration Managerpreferences– Failure Handling

♦ No Resolve mode (default)♦ Resolve mode

• Config.pro option– regen_failure_handling

♦ no_resolve_mode (default)♦ resolve_mode

Figure 1 – Resolve Menu

Figure 2 – Failure Diagnostics Window

Understanding Resolve ModeIf desired, you can activate Creo Parametric's traditional Resolve mode upona regeneration failure. Resolve mode is a menu-manager driven system thatprovides tools and diagnostics to resolve the current failure. You can activateResolve mode by editing preferences in the Regeneration Manager, or byselecting the regen_failure_handling config.pro option.

The Resolve Mode EnvironmentWhen you activate Resolve mode, the following occurs:• The Message Log displays a message about the failure.• The failing feature and all subsequent features remain unregenerated andtherefore do not display.

• The Resolve menu appears, which uses the traditional menu managerinterface. The Resolve menu is shown in Figure 1. When using Resolvemode, you must specify your intended action first, such as Modify (Edit) orRedefine (Edit Definition), and then select an object, such as a feature orcomponent.

• The Failure Diagnostics window appears, providing you with informationabout the failing feature. The Failure Diagnostics window is shown inFigure 2.

• The option to Save is disabled until the failure is resolved.


Failure Diagnostics WindowThe Failure Diagnostics window prominently displays in front of the graphicswindow upon entering Resolve mode, and is one of the tools availablefor resolving or preventing the regeneration problem that has occurred. Itdisplays the following options:

• Overview – Displays help information on the various Resolve mode tools.• Feature Info – Displays the Feature Information for the failing featurein the Web browser.

• Resolve Hints – If a resolve hint exists, the system displays this link. Clickthe link for a suggestion on how to fix the problem.

Resolve MenuThe Resolve menu is another tool available for resolving or preventing theregeneration problem that has occurred, and contains these main options:

• Undo Changes – Undo all the changes that caused the failure.• Current Model/Backup Model – For both investigating and fixing theproblem, you can opt to work on the current (failed) model or the backupmodel. The backup model shows all features in their pre-regenerated state,and can be used to modify or restore dimensions of the features that arenot displayed in the current (failed) model. You can toggle back and forthbetween the current and backup model.

• Investigate – Enables you to investigate the cause of the model failure.You can list the changes made to items, show every object referenced bythe failed feature, report geometrical misalignments found during the lastregeneration, and roll the model back to a specified feature.

• Quick Fix – Enables you to fix the failing feature by performing standardoperations including Redefine, Reroute, Suppress, Clip Suppress, andDelete. Reroute enables you to reroute the failing feature's references toprevent failures in subsequent features. Clip Suppress suppresses not onlythe failing feature, but all subsequent features as well. Depending upon theoperation selected, the Undo Changes option may become unavailable.

• Fix Model – Enables you to fix other features in the model to resolve thefailing feature. Using fix model enables you to create, delete, suppress, orredefine other features. It also enables you to modify the dimensions ofthe other non-failing features in the model, as well as restore all modifieddimensions to their previous values. Again, depending upon the operationselected, the Undo Changes option becomes unavailable.

You must click Regenerate in the menu manager after a changeis made to the model. While in Resolve mode, the regenerateicon is disabled since the resolve menu contains Regeneratein the menu manager.

• Yes / No– When you have fixed the regeneration failure using Resolvemode, you can click Yes to exit Resolve mode and return to normaloperation. You can also click No to remain in Resolve mode if desired.


Recovering ModelsYou can recover models in the event of a system crash.

Dialog appears automatically upon restart:

• Retrieve– Opens previous model

• Continue– Starts a new Creo Parametric session

Figure 1 – Retrieval Dialog Box

Recovering ModelsIn the event of a system crash, Creo Parametric captures a snapshot of themodels in session, as well as any applied configuration settings.

Upon restarting Creo Parametric, you are prompted to either Retrieve theprevious model or Continue onto a new Creo Parametric session.

Selecting the Retrieve option is very useful for avoiding lost work on yourmodels.


Using Creo Parametric HelpYou can obtain help from various locations, either from CreoParametric or from links on PTC's Online Resources.

• You can obtain help from any ofthe following locations in CreoParametric:

– Creo Parametric Help

– Command Search– Online Resources– File > Help

Figure 1 – Using the Help Center

Figure 2 – Using the CommandSearch Figure 3 – Online Resource Center

The Help CenterThe Help Center provides access to Creo Parametric's help system. Withinthe Help Center you can find information on specific modeling topics, aswell as tutorials, books, and quick links. You can access the Help Center byclicking Creo Parametric Help from the top of the interface.

The Help Center is subdivided into various Functional Areas to help narrowyour search regarding a given question. Once the Functional Area has beenselected, you can further navigate within specific Books.

The Functional Areas and Books, respectively, pertaining to the Introductionto Creo Parametric course are:

Functional Area Book

Fundamentals Fundamentals

Part Modeling Part Modeling, Sketcher


Functional Area Book

Detailed Drawings Detailed Drawings

Assembly Design Creo Parametric Assembly

Once the desired Functional Area and Book have been selected, you furthernarrow your search for information by browsing in sub-books.

You may also use the Search tab to type specific keywords and return a list oftopics that satisfy those keywords. You can also use the Index tab to eitherbrowse for index terms or type in a keyword to find.

Command SearchActivate the command search by clicking Command Search next to theCreo Parametric Help icon. This activates the Command Search field,which enables you to type commands. As you begin typing a command, a listappears and dynamically filters results as you type.

When you cursor over any of the list’s results, the system locates andhighlights the command in the ribbon. If you select any of the list’s results,the command starts.

Online ResourcesClick File > Help > Online Resources to launch the Creo Parametric Helpdialog box and display links to various information found online on PTC'sWeb site, as shown in Figure 3. Links to online resources include:

• New Users – Provides some useful videos and tutorials for new usersto Creo.

• Existing Users – Provides additional videos and tutorials for more advancedusers.

• Support & Training – Provides links for contacting technical support andfinding information about additional training available.

Additional ResourcesThe following additional options are available from the File > Help menu:

• Search Online Knowledge Base – Enables you to search PTC’s onlineknowledge base.

• Log Support Case – Enables you to log a support case to PTC TechnicalSupport for any issues.

• What's New? – Provides information about what is new in the latest releaseof Creo Parametric.

Obtaining System InformationClicking File > Help > System Information launches an Information Windowdialog box. This dialog box provides the following information:

• License Information – Provides important licensing information that youmay find useful if you need to log a call with PTC Technical Support.


• Configured Option Modules – Displays which Creo Parametric optionallicense extensions are being used.

• Machine Information – Provides information about the machine on whichCreo Parametric is running.

• Installation Directories and Command Information – Provides informationabout Creo Parametric software installation directories.

• Configuration Information – Provides information about which config.profiles are read.

You can also view information regarding the specific version of CreoParametric you are running by clicking File > Help > About Creo Parametric.In the dialog box that displays, you can view the Creo Parametric date codeand your company’s Service Contract Number (SCN). If you need to log a callwith PTC Technical Support, you need the SCN.


PROCEDURE - Using Creo Parametric Help


Interface\Help CREATE NEW

Task 1: Use the Help Center.

1. Click New , select Part, type help as the Name, and click OK.

2. Enable only the following Datum Display types: .

3. Click Creo Parametric Help .

4. In the Creo Parametric Helpdialog box, click next to CreoParametric to expand it.

• Click next toPart Modelingto expand it.

• Select Part Modeling toexpand it.

• Select Engineering Featuresto expand it.

• Select Rib to expand it.• Select Profile Rib to expandit.

• Click About the Profile RibFeature.

5. Scroll through the information onthe Profile Rib feature.

6. In the Help Center Search field,type line tangent and clickSearch.

7. Notice that the system switchesto the Search tab automaticallyand displays a list of resultsbased on the search criteriaentered.

8. In the list of results, clickTo Create a Line SegmentTangent to Two Entities andread the associated information.

9. Close the Creo Parametric Helpdialog box.


Task 2: Use the Command Search functionality.

1. Click Command Search toenable it.

2. In the Command Search field,type she and notice that thecommands dynamically filterdown.

3. Cursor over Shell, and noticeits location in the Engineeringgroup.

4. Click the X in the CommandSearch field to collapse it.

Task 3: Use the Help Online Resources.

1. Click File > Help > OnlineResources.

2. If prompted, type your PTCusername and password.

3. Notice the New Users, ExistingUsers and Support & Trainingtabs on the left.

4. Click the Support & Trainingtab.• Click Creo support center.• Scroll down the page, andclick Contact via Phone alongthe left side.

• Scroll to the end of thedocument, and locate thesupport number for yourlocation in the PDF file.

5. Close the Creo Parametric Helpdialog box.

Task 4: Use System Information Help.

1. Click File > Help > System Information. Notice the informationavailable under the License Information, Configured OptionModules, and Machine Information.• Click Close.



Module28Project II

Module OverviewUsing Creo Parametric and the remainder of the skills learned in this course,complete the following project design tasks.

ObjectivesAfter completing this module, you will be able to:• Create the FLANGE.PRT model.• Complete the ENGINE_BLOCK.PRT, IMPELLER_HOUSING.PRT, andFRAME.PRT models.

• Create the PISTON_ASSY.ASM, BLOWER.ASM, ENGINE.ASM., andENGINE_BLOWER.ASM assemblies.

• Create the ENGINE-BLOWER_MODELS.DRW drawing.• Analyze and resolve interferences.


The Air CirculatorIn this project, you create, assemble, and document componentsof the Air Circulator.

• Create from scratch:– Part– Assembly– Drawing

• Minimal instructions• Completed models forreference

Figure 1 – Air Circulator

Project ScenarioACME Incorporated develops and markets several consumer, industrial, anddefense goods. The Light Industrial Division of ACME creates a numberof products, including industrial fans, heating, air conditioning, and pumps.You are employed by the Light Industrial Division of ACME Inc., which hasrecently started to use Creo Parametric for its product designs.

Upon returning from Creo Parametric training, you are assigned to create theAC-40 Air Circulator.

Minimal InstructionsBecause all tasks in this project are based on topics that you have learnedin the course, instructions for each project step are minimal. Detailed picksand clicks are not provided. This enables you to test your knowledge of thematerials as you proceed though the project.

Completed Models for ReferenceBe sure to save all project models within the Intro-2_working sub-folderof the Projects lab files folder structure. The Projects folder also containsa sub-folder named Intro-2_completed. Here you can find a completedversion of each model in the project. These completed models can be usedas reference, if required.


Piston AssemblyThese figures illustrate the final piston assembly you create fromthe previously-created components in this project.

Figure 1 – PISTON_PIN.PRT Figure 2 – PISTON.PRT

Figure 3 – CONNECTING_ROD.PRT Figure 4 – PISTON_ASSY.ASM

Creating the Piston AssemblyThese figures illustrate the final piston assembly you create in this project.This assembly is created using the components that were created in theprevious project.


Engine Block and DrawingThese figures illustrate the final engine block and drawing youcomplete in this project.

Figure 1 – CRANKSHAFT.PRTFigure 2 – ENGINE_

BLOCK.PRT

Figure 3 – ENGINE-BLOWER_MODELS.DRW

Completing the Engine Block and Engine-Blower Models DrawingThese figures illustrate the final engine block and drawing you completein this project. The engine block was started in the previous project. Thedrawing should be a two-sheet drawing referencing both the crankshaft andcompleted ENGINE_BLOCK models.


Blower AssemblyThese figures illustrate the components and final blowerassembly you complete in this project.

Figure 1 – FLANGE.PRT Figure 2 – IMPELLER.PRT

Figure 3 – IMPELLER_HOUSING.PRT Figure 4 – BLOWER.ASM

Completing the Flange, Impeller, Impeller Housing, and BlowerAssemblyThese figures illustrate the flange, impeller, impeller housing, and blowerassembly you complete in this project. The impeller and impeller housingwere started in the previous project.


Engine Blower AssemblyThese figures illustrate the final frame component, engineassembly, and final engine blower assembly you create in thisproject.

Figure 1 – FRAME.PRT Figure 2 – ENGINE.ASM

Figure 3 – ENGINE_BLOWER.ASM

Creating the Frame, Engine Assembly, and Engine BlowerAssemblyThese figures illustrate the final frame, engine assembly, and engine blowerassembly you create in this project. The frame was started in the previousproject.


Completing the DesignThese figures illustrate the bolts assembled in this project. Theassembly is then be evaluated for interferences and modifiedas required.

Figure 1 – BOLT.PRTFigure 2 – Assembling the

BOLT.PRT

Figure 3 – Assembling the BOLT.PRT Figure 4 – Viewing Interference

Inserting the BoltIn the previous project, you created bolts of various lengths. In this project,they are inserted throughout the assembly. Copy and paste functionality isused to quickly assemble every bolt.

Interference and Collision DetectionBefore the design is completed, check for interferences between thecomponents. Design modifications are made to remove the interferencesand finalize the design.


Copyright

Introduction to Creo Parametric 2.0Copyright © 2012 Parametric Technology Corporation and/or Its Subsidiary Companies.All Rights Reserved.User and training guides and related documentation from Parametric Technology Corporation and its subsidiary companies (collectively"PTC") are subject to the copyright laws of the United States and other countries and are provided under a license agreement that restrictscopying, disclosure, and use of such documentation. PTC hereby grants to the licensed software user the right to make copies in printed formof this documentation if provided on software media, but only for internal/personal use and in accordance with the license agreement underwhich the applicable software is licensed. Any copy made shall include the PTC copyright notice and any other proprietary notice provided byPTC. Training materials may not be copied without the express written consent of PTC. This documentation may not be disclosed, transferred,modified, or reduced to any form, including electronic media, or transmitted or made publicly available by any means without the prior writtenconsent of PTC and no authorization is granted to make copies for such purposes.Information described herein is furnished for general information only, is subject to change without notice, and should not be construed as awarranty or commitment by PTC. PTC assumes no responsibility or liability for any errors or inaccuracies that may appear in this document.The software described in this document is provided under written license agreement, contains valuable trade secrets and proprietaryinformation, and is protected by the copyright laws of the United States and other countries. It may not be copied or distributed in any formor medium, disclosed to third parties, or used in any manner not provided for in the software licenses agreement except with written priorapproval from PTC.UNAUTHORIZED USE OF SOFTWARE OR ITS DOCUMENTATION CAN RESULT IN CIVIL DAMAGES AND CRIMINAL PROSECUTION.PTC regards software piracy as the crime it is, and we view offenders accordingly. We do not tolerate the piracy of PTC software products,and we pursue (both civilly and criminally) those who do so using all legal means available, including public and private surveillance resources.As part of these efforts, PTC uses data monitoring and scouring technologies to obtain and transmit data on users of illegal copies of oursoftware. This data collection is not performed on users of legally licensed software from PTC and its authorized distributors. If you are usingan illegal copy of our software and do not consent to the collection and transmission of such data (including to the United States), ceaseusing the illegal version, and contact PTC to obtain a legally licensed copy.Important Copyright, Trademark, Patent, and Licensing Information: See the About Box, or copyright notice, of your PTC software.UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT RESTRICTED RIGHTS LEGENDThis document and the software described herein are Commercial Computer Documentation and Software, pursuant to FAR 12.212(a)-(b)(OCT’95) or DFARS 227.7202-1(a) and 227.7202-3(a) (JUN’95), and are provided to the US Government under a limited commercial licenseonly. For procurements predating the above clauses, use, duplication, or disclosure by the Government is subject to the restrictions set forthin subparagraph (c)(1)(ii) of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software Clause at DFARS 252.227-7013 (OCT’88) or CommercialComputer Software-Restricted Rights at FAR 52.227-19(c)(1)-(2) (JUN’87), as applicable. 01012012Parametric Technology Corporation, 140 Kendrick Street, Needham, MA 02494 USA

PRINTING HISTORYDocument No. Date DescriptionT3902-390-02 05/14/2012 Initial Printing of:

Introduction to Creo Parametric 2.0Order Number DT-T3902-390-02Printed in the U.S.A